JP2019000551A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of preliminarily preventing actual damage by so-called Dotsuki fraud applying strong external force to the game machine and fraudulently making a ball enter in a specific receiving inlet.SOLUTION: A game machine 1 is formed by including a ball rolling member 4845 for rolling a game ball within a game area 5a visible from a player. The ball rolling member 4845 includes: at least a bottom wall part 4849 and a peripheral wall part 4850; a ball flow passage that is annularly or circularly curved so as to apply centrifugal force heading for the peripheral wall part 4850 side, to a game ball rolling on the bottom wall part 4849; and a ball guide part 4852 that is provided at the ball flow passage, and comes into contact with a part lower than a center of the game ball rolling on the bottom wall part 4849 so as to guide the ball to a position slightly spaced from the peripheral wall part 4850. The ball rolling member 4845 is so configured that the gap is formed between the peripheral wall part 4850 and the game ball by the ball guide part 4852, so that, even when the ball rolling member 4845 is vibrated in the longitudinal direction by external force, the movement of the peripheral wall part 4850 is not directly transmitted to the game ball.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 162

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine in which a player in front of the machine plays a game while looking at the gaming area.

  A pachinko machine, which is an example of a gaming machine, is provided with a gaming area surrounded by rails and covered with a window on the front, and a player types a gaming ball above the gaming area. When a player enters a specific entrance in the process of flowing down, a predetermined number of game balls are provided (released) to the player as prizes for that entry, while a game that has not entered a specific entrance The balls are collected to the game hall side through the out ball opening.

  By the way, some players apply a strong external force to the pachinko machine (specifically, hitting it, pulling the ball tray strongly, etc.) to vibrate the whole and force the game ball trajectory by the vibration. There is a person who tries to get a prize by changing the ball into a specific entrance (hereinafter referred to simply as “dokkigoto”).

For example, there is a ball-swivel sorter that is generally called “Kroon” as an accessory of a pachinko machine that is easily damaged by the above-described pounding.
The distribution device includes a spherical flow path including a bottom wall portion that gently descends and inclines toward the center of a circle like a shallow ridge, and a peripheral wall portion that surrounds the outer periphery of the bottom wall portion, and the spherical flow A ball rolling member which turns on the bottom wall part while applying a centrifugal force directed toward the peripheral wall part side by throwing a game ball inside the peripheral wall part and in a substantially tangential direction to the road, and the bottom wall A plurality of (for example, two to four) game ball reception openings provided at point-symmetric positions with respect to the center of the section, and one of the reception openings, which is a privilege for the entry. The game ball that is inserted into the ball flow path of the ball rolling member and swirls along the peripheral wall portion due to the centrifugal force gradually loses momentum and becomes the center of the bottom wall portion. It gradually descends to the side, and finally it decides which of the entrances including the specific entrance will enter the ball. It is an element.

  Dotsukigoto for such a ball-swivel sorter applies an external force by hitting the front of the pachinko machine, for example, when the game ball turning on the bottom wall approaches the specific entrance and applying external force. The pachinko machine is vibrated, and the trajectory of the game ball is changed from the turning direction to the radial direction by the vibration to enter the target specific entrance.

  Therefore, the conventional measures against such a throbbing are, for example, as described in Patent Document 1, a vibration sensor is installed in the pachinko machine, and it is determined whether or not it is a throbbing by the vibration detected by the vibration sensor. However, the amusement hall side took necessary measures based on the judgment result.

JP 2008-229209 A

The conventional anti-vibration measures using vibration sensors only estimate that the anti-vibration was detected by detecting abnormal vibrations in the pachinko machine. Even if a specific entry is entered immediately after abnormal vibrations, It was difficult to prove the causal relationship between the vibration and the abnormal vibration, and it was not possible to prevent the actual damage caused by Dotsukigoto.
The present invention has been made in view of the above, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can prevent actual damage caused by the crawl.

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention
A gaming machine comprising a ball rolling member that rolls a game ball in a game area that is visible to the player,
The ball rolling member is
A spherical flow path having an annular shape or an arc shape so that a centrifugal force directed to the peripheral wall portion side is applied to a game ball rolling on the bottom wall portion and having at least a bottom wall portion and a peripheral wall portion;
A ball guiding portion that is provided in the ball flow path and contacts the lower side of the center of the game ball that rolls on the bottom wall and can guide the game ball to a position slightly away from the peripheral wall; Provide gaming machines.
The ball rolling member of such a gaming machine is guided to a position slightly away from the peripheral wall portion by the ball guiding portion when the game ball rolls on the bottom wall portion by inertia while receiving the action of centrifugal force. There is a slight gap even in the state closest to the peripheral wall. Therefore, even if a player who makes a throbbing strike attempts to change the trajectory in the radial direction by applying a shock to the gaming machine to vibrate the ball rolling member in the front-rear direction and striking the game ball on the peripheral wall portion, as described above. Since there is a gap between the peripheral wall portion and the game ball, the movement of the peripheral wall portion is not immediately transmitted to the game ball. In addition, since the ball guiding portion in contact with the game ball hits below the center of the game ball, even if the ball guiding portion vibrates, it will sink under the game ball, so there is almost no force to push the game ball in the vibration direction. Does not work. In addition, in order to make the ball guiding portion enter under the game ball surely by vibration, the shape of the ball guiding portion is a wedge-shaped cross section inclined downward toward the contact point with the bottom wall portion of the game ball. Is good.

  ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, the game machine provided with the ball rolling member which can prevent the actual damage by Dotsukigoto beforehand can be provided.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a right view of a pachinko machine. It is a left view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front right. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from back. It is a front view of the pachinko machine when the press operation part of the production operation unit is in the raised position. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front right when the press operation part of a production | presentation operation unit is a raise position. It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine including the partial enlarged view seen from the front in the state where the door frame was opened from the main body frame and the main body frame was opened from the outer frame. It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine which shows other forms and includes the partially enlarged view seen from the front in the state where the door frame is opened from the main body frame and the main body frame is opened from the outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the pachinko machine into the door frame, the game board, the main body frame, and the outer frame, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the pachinko machine into the door frame, the game board, the main body frame, and the outer frame, and was seen from the back. It is a front view of the outer frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of an outer frame. It is a right view of an outer frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the outer frame for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled each of the outer-frame left assembly and outer-frame right assembly of an outer frame, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the outer frame lower assembly of the outer frame, and was seen from the front. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the hinge assembly on the outer frame of the outer frame 2, and was seen from front upper, (b) is the disassembled perspective view which looked at (a) from the lower front. It is a front view of the door frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is a left view of a door frame. It is a right view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame for every main member and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit of the door frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame base unit for every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame base unit for every main member, and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the ball feeding unit from the back. (A) is a disassembled perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear after removing the rear case and the fraud prevention member. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the foul cover unit from the back. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the foul cover unit from the front after removing the cover member, (b) is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the foul cover unit from the back after removing the cover member. It is XX sectional drawing of FIG. 36B (a). It is the YY sectional view taken on the line of FIG. 37A including a partial enlarged view. It is a disassembled perspective view of the foul cover unit containing the partially expanded exploded view which shows the other form of the operation line invalidation member. It is a cross-sectional top view including the partially expanded view of the foul cover unit which shows the other form of the operation line invalidation member. It is a cross-sectional top view including the partially expanded view of the foul cover unit which shows the other form of the operation line invalidation member. (A) is the vertical front view of the foul cover unit which shows the other form of the operation line invalidation member, (b) is the cross-sectional top view. It is a vertical front view of the foul cover unit which shows other fraud prevention means. (A), (b) is the principal part enlarged view of FIG. 37G which shows the normal flow of a game ball (foul ball), (c) is the principal part enlarged view of FIG. . It is a top view of a foul cover unit. It is a top view of a foul cover unit which shows other forms of an operation line invalidating member. It is a vertical front view of the foul cover unit which shows other fraud prevention means. (A) is an enlarged view of a Z portion in FIG. 37K, and (b) is an enlarged view of a Z portion in FIG. 37K showing a state in which a foul ball passes. (A), (b) is the enlarged view of the Z section of Drawing 37K which shows the state where an operation line is invalidated. (A), (b) shows the state which electrically operated the operation line invalidation member, and is an enlarged view equivalent to Z section of Drawing 37K which shows the state where an operation line is invalidated. It is a perspective view of the principal part which shows the other form of the operation line invalidation member. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the handle unit in a door frame and was seen from the front, (b) was the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the handle unit and was seen from the back. It is the perspective view which looked at the tray unit of the door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate unit from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the plate unit for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the plate unit for every main member and was seen from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the dish base unit in a dish unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate base unit in a plate unit from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the plate base unit for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the plate base unit for every main member and was seen from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the dish decoration unit in a dish unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the dish decoration unit from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the plate decoration unit for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the plate decoration unit for every main member and was seen from back. It is the top view which looked at the production | presentation operation unit in a plate unit from the advancing / retreating direction of the production | production operation part button unit. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the production operation unit for every main member, and was seen from the front. FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation unit as seen from the rear after being disassembled for each main member. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation ring of the production operation unit from the upper front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation ring from the lower front. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the effect operation ring and was seen from the upper front, (b) was the exploded perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the effect operation ring and was seen from the lower front. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the rotational drive unit of the production operation unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the rotational drive unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the rotational drive unit and was seen from the front right. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the rotational drive unit and was seen from the left front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the production operation button unit of the production operation unit, and was seen from the front. FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation button unit as seen from the front and bottom. (A) is sectional drawing of the production operation button unit when a press operation part is a lowered position, (b) It is sectional drawing of the production operation button unit when a push operation part is a raise position. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between an effect operation ring and a rotation drive unit in the left view of an effect operation unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between an effect operation ring and an effect operation ring decoration board in the top view which looked at the effect operation unit from the pressing direction of the press operation part. (A) is a front view of the dish unit shown in a normal state, (b) is a front view of the dish unit when the pressing operation part is in the raised position, and (c) is a central pressing operation part of the pressing operation part. It is a front view of a tray unit when pressing is performed. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame left side unit of the door frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame left side unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame left side unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame left side unit and was seen from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame right side unit of the door frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame right side unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame right side unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame right side unit and was seen from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame top unit in a door frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame top unit from the back, (c) is the state which removed the top lower cover It is a bottom view of the door frame top unit shown by. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame top unit and was seen from front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame top unit and was seen from the lower front. It is a front view of the door frame shown with each decoration board. It is a front view of the main body frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the main body frame in a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the main body frame from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the main body frame for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the main body frame for every main member and was seen from back. (A) is an expansion perspective view which shows the front lower left corner in a main body frame, (b) is an expansion perspective view which shows the front lower left corner of a main body frame when a door frame is opened with respect to a main body frame. It is explanatory drawing which shows operation | movement of the connection cable guide member of a main body frame at the time of opening and closing of a door frame with respect to a main body frame. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the ball launcher in a main body frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the ball launcher from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the payout base unit of a main body frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the payout base unit from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the payout unit in a main body frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the payout unit from back. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the payout unit for every main structure, and was seen from the front, (b) was the exploded perspective view which disassembled the payout unit for every main structure, and was seen from the back. FIG. 6 is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the dispensing blade. (A) is a rear sectional view of the dispensing device cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the dispensing blade when the ball-moving movable piece is in an open state, and (b) is a sectional view taken along the line AA in (a). . It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the foul cover unit of a door frame, and a lower full sphere path | route unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball in a main body frame. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the board | substrate unit of the main body frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the board | substrate unit from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the substrate unit from back lower. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the board | substrate unit for every main structure and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the board | substrate unit for every main structure and was seen from the back. It is expanded side surface sectional drawing which shows the lower part of the pachinko machine cut | disconnected in the left-right direction center. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the locking unit of the main body frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the locking unit from back. It is a front view of the game board in a pachinko machine. FIG. 99B is an enlarged front view of the main part of the gaming board in FIG. 99A. It is a principal part enlarged front view of the game board which shows another form. It is a principal part enlarged front view of the game board which shows another form. (A), (b) is the principal part enlarged front view of the game board which shows another form. It is a principal part enlarged front view of the game board which shows another form. It is a principal part enlarged front view of the game board which shows another form. FIG. 99 is a partially enlarged front view of the game board of FIG. 99G. FIG. 99 is an enlarged front view of a main part of the game board showing a modification of FIG. 99B. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the game board for every main structure and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the game board for every main structure, and was seen from back. It is a block diagram which shows roughly the control structure of a pachinko machine. It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view of a door frame. It is a right view of a door frame. It is a perspective view of a game board. It is a front view of a game board. It is the center longitudinal cross-sectional view of the game board containing a partial enlarged view. FIG. 109 is an enlarged view of a Z1 portion indicated by an arrow in FIG. 108 including a partially enlarged view. FIG. 108 is an enlarged view of a Z2 portion indicated by an arrow. It is the XX sectional view taken on the line of FIG. It is an enlarged view of the Z3 part of FIG. It is the end surface front view of the game board which cut | disconnected the middle of the thickness direction of the light-guide plate. It is the front view which decomposed | disassembled and arranged the front panel of the game panel and center member which abbreviate | omitted the back decoration member. It is a disassembled perspective view of a game board. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the base panel and front enclosure member of a game panel. It is a perspective view which shows the base panel and back decoration member of a game panel. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the base panel and back decoration member of a game panel. It is an exploded perspective view of a production unit. It is an exploded perspective view showing a production support frame and a drum unit of the production unit. It is an exploded perspective view showing a drum unit of the effect unit. FIG. 45 is an exploded perspective view showing the rear cover of the effect unit. It is a center longitudinal cross-sectional view of the principal part explaining the movement state of a drum. It is an enlarged view of the Z4 part of FIG. It is a partial enlarged front view of the door frame which shows a handle unit. It is the SS sectional view taken on the line of FIG. It is an exploded sectional view showing a handle unit. It is a principal part expanded sectional view of the door frame which shows the other form of a handle unit. It is a front view of the pachinko machine provided with two handle units. It is a perspective view of a door frame provided with two handle units. It is a right view of a door frame. It is an enlarged view of the Z5 part of FIG. FIG. 130 is a partially enlarged front view of the door frame showing the right handle unit as viewed in FIG. 129. It is the TT sectional view taken on the line of FIG. FIG. 135 is a cross-sectional view of the handle unit showing a state where it is linearly moved from FIG. 134. It is an exploded sectional view showing a handle unit. 129 is a cross-sectional view corresponding to the line T-T in FIG. 133, showing the handle unit on the left side as viewed in FIG. 129. FIG. 138 is a cross-sectional view of the handle unit showing a state in which the handle unit is linearly moved from FIG. 137. FIG. 138 is a sectional view taken along the line U-U in FIG. 138. It is a principal part expanded sectional view of the door frame which shows the other form of a handle unit. It is the principal part expansion perspective view which looked at the upper part of the pachinko machine from the front right. It is the principal part expansion perspective view which looked at the upper part of the pachinko machine from back. It is a principal part enlarged front view of the upper part of a pachinko machine. It is a principal part expansion right view of the upper part of a pachinko machine. It is a principal part expansion right view of the upper part of the pachinko machine which shows the modification of a front top top plate. It is a principal part expansion right view of the pachinko machine upper part which shows the other form of a front top top plate. It is a front view of the game board in a pachinko machine. FIG. 147 is a partially enlarged front view showing a lower half portion of the game board in FIG. 147; It is a perspective view of a game board. It is a disassembled perspective view of a game board. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from back. FIG. 157 is a perspective view of the game board as viewed from the rear on the opposite side of FIG. 152. It is a center longitudinal cross-sectional view containing a partial enlarged view. It is the combination plane sectional view which changed the cutting position centering on the lower layer game zone of a game board. It is a perspective view of a 3rd display apparatus. It is a front view of a 3rd display apparatus. It is a front view of the 3rd display which shows the changed state. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front side of the 3rd display device. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the rear surface side of the 3rd display apparatus. It is a perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows the lower layer game zone of a game board. FIG. 61 is an exploded perspective view showing a lower game zone of the game board viewed from a direction different from FIG. 160. (A) is a longitudinal cross-sectional view which shows the distribution apparatus of a 3rd distribution part, (b) is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the distribution apparatus which shows the state of the game ball which received the vibration by external force. It is a principal part expanded sectional view of the ball rolling member which shows the other form of a ball guide part. It is a perspective view of the right-handed game zone including a partially enlarged view. It is a block diagram which shows roughly the control structure of a pachinko machine.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
Hereinafter, an example of the gaming machine will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 146 for the pachinko machine 1, and the pachinko machine 1 of the embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 147 to 165. For convenience of explanation, the side facing the player of the pachinko machine is referred to as “front” or “front”, and the opposite side is referred to as “rear” or “back”.

  First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the right front, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the left front, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the rear. FIG. 8 is a front view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation unit of the effect operation unit is in the raised position, and FIG. 9 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation unit of the effect operation unit is in the raised position as viewed from the right front. is there. 10A and 10B are perspective views of the pachinko machine viewed from the front with the door frame opened from the main body frame and the main body frame opened from the outer frame. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine as seen from the front after disassembling the door frame, game board, main body frame, and outer frame. FIG. 12 shows the pachinko machine as a door frame, game board, main body frame, and outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled and was seen from the back.

  The pachinko machine 1 supports a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of the game hall, a door frame 3 that closes the front of the outer frame 2 so as to be opened and closed, and a door frame 3 that can be opened and closed. A main body frame 4 that is attached to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, and a main body frame 4 that is detachably attached to the main body frame 4 and that is visible from the player side through the door frame 3. And a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which (see FIG. 90) is driven.

  The outer frame 2 is formed in a rectangular frame whose shape in front view extends vertically. The outer frame 2 connects the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 that are spaced apart from each other and extend vertically, and the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20. The outer frame upper member 30, the outer frame lower assembly 40 that connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20, and the upper left end of the outer frame upper member 30. An outer frame upper hinge assembly 50, and a lower right side surface of the outer frame left assembly 10 and an outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the upper left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40.

  The outer frame 2 is attached to the island facility of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and the main frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body of the main body frame 4 by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60. The lower frame hinge assembly 520 is rotatably supported on the same axis, and the main body frame 4 is attached so as to be openable and closable forward with the left side as viewed from the front.

  Further, the door frame 3 is configured such that when the main body frame 4 is closed, the outer frame lower assembly 40 cooperates with the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 to form a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. The sound output to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 is inverted in phase and radiated forward, so that the player can hear a deeper bass sound.

  The door frame 3 closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game ball B is to be visibly viewed from the front side, stores the game balls B to be shot into the game area 5a, and stores the stored games. A handle 182 is provided as an operation medium operated by the player to drive the ball B into the game area 5a. The door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1.

  Further, the door frame 3 includes an effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player separately from the handle 182, and when the player participation type effect is executed, the player operates the effect operation unit 301. Thus, the player can participate in the production, and in addition to the game by the game ball B, the player can also be entertained by operating the production operation unit 301.

  The main body frame 4 has a frame-shaped main body frame base unit 500 whose rear portion can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. The main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 for attaching the door frame 3 so that the door frame 3 can be opened and closed, the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 reinforcing the main body frame base unit 500, and the game A ball launcher 540 for driving the game ball B into the game area 5a of the board 5, a payout base unit 550 for receiving the game ball B supplied from the island facility of the game hall, and a game received by the payout base unit 550 A payout unit 560 for paying out the ball B to the player side, a board unit 620 having a power supply board 630 and a payout control board 633, and a game board attached to the main body frame base 501 A back cover 640 that covers the rear side of, and includes an outer frame 2 and the main frame 4, and the door frame 3 and the locking unit 650 for locking between the body frame 4, a.

  The main body frame 4 holds a game board 5 having a game area 5a in which a game is played by hitting the game ball B, and also pays out the game ball B to the player side or uses the game ball B used in the game. Is discharged to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (island equipment side of the game hall). The main body frame 4 is formed in a box shape with the front opened, and a game board 5 is detachably accommodated therein from the front. In addition, the main body frame 4 is attached to the frame-like outer frame 2 attached to the island facility of the game hall at the top and bottom of the front left side front end so as to be openable and closable, and the door frame 3 is closed so that the opened front side is closed. Can be opened and closed.

  The game board 5 includes a game area 5a into which a game ball B is driven by a player's operation, a front component member 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially rectangular shape in front view, and a front component member 1000 A plate-like gaming panel 1100 that is attached to the rear side and divides the rear end of the gaming area 5a, a board holder 1200 that is attached to the lower rear side of the gaming panel 1100, and a board holder 1200 that is attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200. A main control unit 1300 having a cage main control board 1310, a function display unit 1400 for displaying a game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a periphery disposed on the rear side of the game panel 1100 A control unit 1500, an effect display device 1600 that is arranged in the center of the game area 5a in a front view and can display a predetermined effect image; A table unit 2000 attached to the front surface of skill panel 1100, and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the gaming panel 1100, the. The back unit 3000 includes a back effect unit 3100 that can perform a movable effect and a light emission effect according to the gaming state.

  In the game area 5 a of the game board 5, a plurality of obstacle nails 2007 that are implanted in front of the game panel 1100 with a predetermined gauge arrangement and change the movement of the game ball B, and a game by receiving the game ball B Receiving a predetermined privilege (for example, paying out a predetermined number of game balls B) to the player, such as a general winning port 2001, a first starting port 2002, a second starting port 2004, and a big winning port 2005, and a game A gate portion 2003 that gives a player a predetermined privilege (for example, allowing a player to win a second start opening 2004 for a predetermined time) by passing the ball B, and a game ball B that can enter the ball A disadvantageous first receiving port 2006 (details will be described later) is provided that does not provide any profit. The front winning unit 2001, the first starting port 2002, the gate unit 2003, the second starting port 2004, the big winning port 2005 and the first receiving port 2006 are provided in the front unit 2000.

  In the game area 5a of the game board 5, the player operates the player operation handle unit 180 and inputs a game ball for adjusting the hitting force, thereby driving the game ball B with an arbitrary strength. be able to. As a result, the game ball B is received or passed through the general winning port 2001, the first starting port 2002, the gate portion 2003, the second starting port 2004, the big winning port 2005, etc. in the gaming area 5a. The player can enter the operation of driving the handle 182 so as not to enter the entrance 2006.

  In addition, the game board 5 displays a predetermined effect image on the effect display device 1600 according to the game state that is changed by driving the game ball B into the game area 5a, The player can be entertained by performing a lighting effect.

  When the player rotates the handle 182 while a game ball is stored in the upper plate 201 described later, the pachinko machine 1 has a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182 (the amount of operation of the handle 182) by the ball launcher 540. A game ball is launched, and the game ball is guided into the game area 5a of the game board 5 through the launch ball passage formed by the launch passage portion 1012 formed by the launch rail 544, the outer rail 1001, and the inner rail 1002. The Then, when the game ball that has been thrown into the game area 5a is received in the general winning opening 2001 or the like, a predetermined number of gaming balls are opened by the payout device 580 described later according to the received winning opening. To the upper plate 201.

  Note that, in the case of the strength of the game ball 5a that cannot reach the game area 5a, that is, the game ball that has been launched with a weak launch force does not reach the game area 5a due to the game ball driving strength or the like, FIG. As shown in FIG. 37A, it falls on a foul ball drop opening 1013 established between the end portion (terminating portion) of the firing rail 544 and the end portion (starting end portion) of the outer rail 1001, and this is returned as described later. The ball is received by the foul ball receiving portion 150c of the foul cover unit 150 constituting the passage portion 1014, and is discharged to the lower plate 202 from the lower plate ball supply port 211c which is a ball opening through the foul cover unit 150.

[2. Overall structure of outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 18. 13 is a front view of the outer frame in the pachinko machine, FIG. 14 is a rear view of the outer frame, and FIG. 15 is a right side view of the outer frame. FIG. 16 is a perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 17 is a perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the rear. FIG. 18 is an exploded perspective view in which the outer frame is disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) where the pachinko machine 1 such as a game hall is installed. The outer frame 2 is formed in a rectangular frame whose shape in front view extends vertically.

  As shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 includes an outer frame left assembly 10 and an outer frame right assembly 20 that are separated from each other and extend vertically, and an outer frame left assembly 10 and an outer frame right assembly 20. The outer frame upper member 30 that connects the upper ends, the outer frame lower assembly 40 that connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20, and the upper surface of the outer frame upper member 30 An outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 attached to the left end, a lower right side surface of the outer frame left assembly 10, and an outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the upper left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40. ing.

  In the outer frame 2, when the main body frame 4 is closed, the outer frame lower assembly 40 forms a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 in cooperation with the speaker unit 620 a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4. In addition, the sound output to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 can be radiated forward by phase inversion.

  In the outer frame 2, the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 can detachably support the main body frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4. The outer frame 2 supports the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 so as to be coaxially rotatable by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60. The main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable forward with the left side of the front view as the center.

[2-1. Outer frame left assembly and outer frame right assembly]
The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame left assembly and the outer frame right assembly of the outer frame as seen from the front after disassembly. The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 extend vertically and are spaced apart from each other on the left and right. The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 support the body frame upper hinge member 510 and the body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the body frame 4 so as to be rotatable coaxially with respect to the outer frame 2. It is for attaching the main body frame 4 so that opening and closing is possible.

  First, the outer frame left assembly 10 includes an outer frame left member 11 that extends vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction, and an upper left connecting member 12 that is attached to the upper right side of the outer frame left member 11. And a lower left connecting member 13 attached to the lower end of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11.

  The outer frame left member 11 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed of an extruded material of aluminum alloy. The outer frame left member 11 has a concave portion 11a that is flattened to the right in the rear portion of the left and right sides of the front and rear direction, and a right portion from a portion on the right side opposite to the concave portion 11a. A bulging portion 11b that bulges in the direction and a hollow portion 11c that penetrates the bulging portion 11b vertically. The outer frame left member 11 is enhanced in strength and rigidity by the concave portion 11a and the bulging portion 11b, and weight is reduced by the hollow portion 11c.

  The outer frame left member 11 is formed with a plurality of grooves extending vertically on both left and right side surfaces. The plurality of grooves on the left side surface are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the right side surface are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame left member 11 is formed symmetrically with an outer frame right member 21 of an outer frame right assembly 20 described later.

  The upper left connecting member 12 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper left connecting member 12 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 12a, a flat upper plate fixing portion 12b extending from the middle in the front-rear direction on the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 12a, and a horizontal fixing portion. A pair of flat horizontal lower fixing portions 12c extending downward from both front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b on the left side of 12a. The upper left connecting member 12 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  The upper left connecting member 12 has the rear lower horizontal fixing portion 12c inserted into the hollow portion 11c of the outer frame left member 11, the horizontal fixing portion 12a brought into contact with the upper end of the outer frame left member 11, and the front side Further, by screwing a screw into the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11 in a state where the rear lower fixing portion 12c is in contact with the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11. It is attached to the outer frame left member 11. In addition, the upper left connecting member 12 causes the horizontal fixing portion 12a to abut the lower surface of the outer frame upper member 30 on the left end side, and the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b is inserted into the left notch 30a of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, the screw is screwed into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 12a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b, so that the outer frame upper member 30 is attached.

  The lower left connecting member 13 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower left connecting member 13 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 13a, and a flat plate-like upper and horizontal portion extending upward from the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 13a and extending rearward from the horizontal fixing portion 13a. The fixing portion 13b, a flat plate-like lower horizontal fixing portion 13c extending downward from the rear side portion of the horizontal fixing portion on the lower side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b, and the right side from the rear side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b And a flat plate-like contact portion 13d extending short. The lower left connecting member 13 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  The lower left connecting member 13 abuts the rear surface of the abutting portion 13d on the front surface of the bulging portion 11b of the outer frame left member 11, and abuts the left side surface of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b on the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11. The screw is screwed into the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11 in a state where the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 13a is aligned with the lower end of the outer frame left member 11, It is attached to the frame left member 11. The lower left connecting member 13 causes the horizontal fixing portion 13a to abut on the upper surface on the left end side of the outer frame lower member 41 and allows the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c to be inserted into the notch portion 41a on the left side surface of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, the screw is screwed into the outer frame lower member through the horizontal fixing portion 13a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c, thereby being attached to the outer frame lower member 41.

  Next, the outer frame right assembly 20 includes an outer frame right member 21 that extends vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction, and an upper right connecting member that is attached to the upper left end of the outer frame right member 21. 22, a lower right connecting member 23 attached to the lower left side lower end of the outer frame right member 21, an upper hook member 24 attached to the upper left side of the outer frame right member 21, and the outer frame right member 21. And a lower hook member 25 attached to the lower part of the left side surface.

  The outer frame right member 21 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed of an aluminum alloy extrusion mold. The outer frame right member 21 has a concave portion 21a that is recessed leftward in a flat shape in a rear portion of the right and left sides of the front and rear direction, and a left portion from a portion on the left side opposite to the concave portion 21a. A bulging portion 21b that bulges in the direction, and a hollow portion 21c that vertically penetrates the bulging portion 21b. The outer frame right member 21 is increased in strength and rigidity by the concave portion 21a and the bulging portion 21b, and the weight is reduced by the hollow portion 21c.

  The outer frame right member 21 has a plurality of grooves extending vertically on both left and right side surfaces. The plurality of grooves on the right side surface are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the left side surface are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame right member 21 is formed symmetrically with the outer frame left member 11 of the outer frame left assembly 10.

  The upper right connecting member 22 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper right connecting member 22 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 22a, a flat upper plate fixing portion 22b extending from the middle in the front-rear direction on the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 22a, and a horizontal fixing portion. A pair of flat horizontal lower fixing portions 22c extending downward from both front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b on the right side of 22a. The upper right connecting member 22 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  The upper right connecting member 22 has the rear lower horizontal fixing portion 22c inserted into the hollow portion 21c of the outer frame right member 21, the horizontal fixing portion 22a abutted against the upper end of the outer frame right member 21, and the front side Further, by screwing a screw into the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c from the outside of the right side surface of the outer frame right member 21 in a state where the rear lower fixing portion 22c is in contact with the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21. The outer frame right member 21 is attached. Further, the upper right connecting member 22 makes the horizontal fixing portion 22a abut on the lower surface on the right end side of the outer frame upper member 30, and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b is inserted into the notch portion 30a on the right side surface of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, the screw is screwed into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 22a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b, thereby being attached to the outer frame upper member 30.

  The lower right connecting member 23 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower right connecting member 23 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 23a, and a flat plate-like upper portion extending upward from the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 23a and extending backward from the horizontal fixing portion 23a. The horizontal fixing portion 23b, a flat plate-like lower horizontal fixing portion 23c extending downward from a portion behind the horizontal fixing portion on the lower side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b, and a left side from the rear side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b A flat plate-like abutting portion 23d extending short in the direction. The lower right connecting member 23 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  The lower right connecting member 23 abuts the rear surface of the abutting portion 23d on the front surface of the bulging portion 21b of the outer frame right member 21, and the right side surface of the upper lateral fixing portion 23b on the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21. The screw is screwed into the upper lateral fixing portion 23b from the outside of the right side surface of the outer frame right member 21 with the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 23a being in contact with the lower end of the outer frame right member 21, It is attached to the outer frame right member 21. Further, the lower right connecting member 23 causes the horizontal fixing portion 23a to abut on the upper surface on the right end side of the outer frame lower member 41, and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c is inserted into the cutout portion 41a on the right side surface of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, the screw is screwed into the outer frame lower member through the horizontal fixing portion 23a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c, thereby being attached to the outer frame lower member 41.

  The upper hook member 24 and the lower hook member 25 are for hooking an outer frame hook 653 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 described later. The upper hook member 24 extends vertically with a constant width in the front-rear direction, and is attached to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21 and extends leftward from the front side of the attachment portion 24a. And a flat plate-like hooking piece 24b on which the outer upper frame flange 653 is hooked.

  The lower hook member 25 extends vertically with a certain width in the front-rear direction, and is attached to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21 and extends leftward from the front side of the attachment portion 25a. A flat plate-like latching piece 25b to which the lower outer frame hook 653 is hooked, and an insertion through which the lower outer frame hook 653 can be inserted through the hooking piece 25b in the front-rear direction And a mouth 25c.

[2-2. Outer frame member]
The outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The outer frame upper member 30 is for connecting the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 that are separated from each other in the left-right direction. The outer frame upper member 30 has a width in the front-rear direction that is substantially the same as the front-rear direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21, has a constant vertical thickness, and extends in the left-right direction. Is formed by. The outer frame upper member 30 is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is the same as the length in the left-right direction of the outer frame lower member 41 of the outer frame lower assembly 40 described later.

  The outer frame upper member 30 includes notches 30a that are recessed toward the center in the left-right direction in a state of penetrating vertically in the center in the front-rear direction on both left and right side surfaces. The upper horizontal fixing portion 12b of the upper left connecting member 12 and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b of the upper right connecting member 22 are respectively attached to the cutout portions 30a at both left and right ends.

  Further, the outer frame upper member 30 includes an attachment step portion 30b whose upper surface and front surface are recessed from the general surface at the left end. The outer frame hinge assembly 50 described later is attached to the attachment step 30b.

[2-3. Outer frame assembly]
The outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame lower assembly of the outer frame as seen from the front. The outer frame lower assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 that are separated from each other to the left and right, and closes the lower side of the door frame 3 in the pachinko machine 1. It is for decoration.

  The outer frame lower assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated from each other to the left and right, and an outer frame lower member 41 extending left and right. A box-shaped curtain plate front member 42 that is disposed in front of the member 41, extends left and right along the outer frame lower member 41, and is open to the rear, and is attached to the rear side of the curtain plate front member 42. A box-shaped curtain plate rear member 43 that is attached to the upper surface of the outer frame lower member 41 and that extends to the left and right, and a ball engagement prevention formed at the left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. And a mechanism 44.

  The outer frame lower member 41 has a width in the front-rear direction that is substantially the same as the front-rear direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21, has a constant vertical thickness, and extends in the left-right direction. Is formed by. The outer frame lower member 41 is formed to have the same length in the left-right direction as the length of the outer frame upper member 30 in the left-right direction.

  The outer frame lower member 41 includes notches 41a that are recessed toward the center in the left-right direction in a state of penetrating vertically in the center in the front-rear direction on both left and right side surfaces. The left and right cutouts 41a are attached with the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c of the lower left connecting member 13 and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c of the lower right connecting member 23 inserted respectively. Thereby, the lower ends of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21 can be connected to each other.

  Further, the outer frame lower member 41 is recessed from the upper surface and includes a recess 41b into which the lower part of the curtain plate rear member 43 is inserted. The concave portion 41b extends to the left and right, and extends from the position closer to the rear of the center in the front-rear direction to the front end side. By this recess 41b, the volume of the curtain plate internal space 40a formed by the curtain plate front member 42 and the curtain plate rear member 43 is made as large as possible.

  The curtain plate front member 42 has a lateral length that is the same as the length of the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a horizontally-long rectangular parallelepiped box shape whose depth in the front-rear direction is short with respect to the height. The entire rear side is open. The curtain plate front member 42 closes the opened rear side by the curtain plate rear member 43, thereby cooperating with the curtain plate rear member 43 to be a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. A space 40a is formed. The curtain plate front member 42 is provided with a long hole-like opening 42a that penetrates in the front-rear direction and extends to the left and right in the front surface near the right end.

  The curtain plate rear member 43 has a length in the left-right direction that is slightly shorter than the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a box shape with the front open. The curtain plate rear member 43 has a curtain plate front member 42 attached to the front surface to form a curtain plate internal space 40a that becomes a part of the enclosure 624 of the body frame speaker 622 in cooperation with the curtain plate front member 42. The curtain plate rear member 43 has a cylindrical connecting cylinder portion 43a that extends in the left and right direction and protrudes upward at the center portion in the horizontal direction on the upper surface and communicates with the curtain plate internal space 40a. The connecting cylinder portion 43a is inclined so that the upper end is positioned upward as it goes rearward from the front end side that coincides with the general upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. In the present embodiment, the upper end of the connection cylinder portion 43a is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees.

  The connecting cylinder portion 43a is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is about 1/3 of the entire curtain plate rear member 43, and the depth in the front-rear direction is larger than the depth of the entire curtain plate rear member 43. Is also slightly shorter. A plurality of ribs 43b connecting the front end side and the rear end side are provided in the connection cylinder portion 43a. When the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 of the substrate unit 620 of the main body frame 4 is connected to the upper end of the connection cylinder portion 43a. The enclosure 624 is formed in communication with the internal space of 620a.

  The ball biting prevention mechanism 44 is configured such that the game ball B stays at a portion of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 at the left end on the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, so that the game ball B is between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. This is to prevent pinching.

  The ball biting prevention mechanism 44 is formed at the left end on the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, and a mounting portion 44a formed flat so that an outer frame lower hinge member 60 described later is confronted, and a mounting portion A first discharge port 44b that opens upward at the left end of 44a, a second discharge port 44c that opens upward to the right of the first discharge port 44b in the mounting portion 44a, A standing wall portion 44d extending upward from the rear side and the right side of the mounting portion 44a, and an upper end protrusion that protrudes forward from the upper end of the standing wall portion 44d and is inclined so that the upper surface is positioned upward as it goes rearward. Part 44e.

  The 1st discharge port 44b is formed in the position which corresponds with the discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 mentioned later. The 1st discharge port 44b and the 2nd discharge port 44c are formed in the magnitude | size which the game ball B can pass. The first discharge port 44 b and the second discharge port 44 c do not communicate with the curtain plate internal space 40 a and are opened on the rear surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. Therefore, the game ball B that has entered the first discharge port 44 b and the second discharge port 44 c can be discharged to the rear of the curtain plate rear member 43.

  This ball biting prevention mechanism 44 is a case where an illegal tool such as a piano wire is inserted through a gap between the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and a main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 described later. Intrusion of an unauthorized tool can be prevented by the standing wall portion 44d rising from the rear end of the placement portion 44a. Even if the tip of an unauthorized tool contacts the standing wall 44d and bends upward, it contacts the upper end protruding part 44e provided at the upper end of the standing wall 44d and further intrudes. Can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an illegal act from being performed through the portion of the outer frame lower hinge member 60.

  By the way, when the standing wall portion 44d is provided at the rear end of the placement portion 44a, when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball B dropped on the placement portion 44a for some reason is Since the rearward movement of the outer frame 2 is prevented by 44d, the game ball B is likely to stay on the placement portion 44a. If the game ball B stays on the mounting portion 44 a, the game ball B is sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. Therefore, there arises a problem that the main body frame 4 cannot be closed.

  On the other hand, in the ball biting prevention mechanism 44 of the present embodiment, the game ball B dropped on the outer frame lower hinge member 60 or the placement portion 44a is transferred to the discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and the first discharge. The game ball B can be discharged to the rear of the curtain plate rear member 43 (rear of the outer frame 2) through the outlet 44b or the second discharge port 44c, and between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 It is possible to prevent the sphere B from being caught.

  The outer frame lower assembly 40 closes the pair of guide members 45 disposed on the upper surfaces of the curtain plate front member 42 and the curtain plate rear member 43 so as to be separated from each other on the left and right sides, and the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42 from the rear side. A flat grill member 46, and a port member 47 having two cylinders attached to the front of the curtain plate front member 42 so as to close the opening 42a across the grill member 46 and extending in the front-rear direction. And a frame-shaped seal member 48 disposed at the upper end of the connecting tube portion 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43.

  The pair of guide members 45 are configured such that the lower end of the door frame 3 comes into contact with the outer frame 2 when the main body frame 4 is closed. The guide member 45 is made of a low friction material having a low frictional resistance, and makes the lower end of the main body frame 4 easy to slide to facilitate opening and closing.

  The grill member 46 is formed of a punching metal having innumerable small holes. The port member 47 communicates the curtain plate inner space 40 a (enclosure 624) and the front of the outer frame 2 through the grill member 46 by two cylinders. The port member 47 has two cylinders that are formed with a predetermined inner diameter and a predetermined length. The port member 47 resonates and amplifies a bass sound emitted backward (inside the enclosure 624) from the main body frame speaker 622 based on the principle of Helmholtz resonance. Thus, a rich bass can be radiated to the front (player side) of the outer frame 2. That is, in this embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is a bass reflex type, and a player can hear a heavy bass.

  When the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the seal member 48 is sandwiched and compressed between the upper end of the connection cylinder portion 43 a and the lower end of the connection portion 621 c of the speaker cover 621 in the main body frame 4. This prevents the sound in the speaker enclosure from leaking from between the connection tube 43a and the connection 621c.

[2-4. Hinge assembly on outer frame]
The outer frame hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 21A is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame hinge assembly of the outer frame 2 disassembled and viewed from the front top, and FIG. 21B is an exploded perspective view of FIG. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the upper end of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30, and is used to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be rotatable. It is. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51 attached to the upper end of the recess 11a of the outer frame left member 11 and the mounting step 30b of the outer frame upper member 30, and attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51. And a mounting screw 53 that attaches the locking member 52 to the hinge member 51 on the outer frame.

  The outer frame upper hinge member 51 is a flat plate extending horizontally, and is attached to the upper surface of the mounting step 30b of the outer frame upper member 30 and extends forward from the front side of the upper fixed portion 51a. A flat front extending portion 51b, a bearing groove 51c extending vertically from the middle of the right side of the front extending portion 51b to the front and penetrating vertically, and an upper fixing portion A flat plate-like lateral fixing portion 51d extending downward from the left side of 51a, and extending downward from an edge from the left side of the front extending portion 51b to the portion where the bearing groove 51c is opened around the front side. And a flat end edge wall portion 51e that is continuous with the cage lateral fixing portion 51d. The outer frame hinge member 51 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding. The outer frame hinge member 51 can rotatably support a body frame hinge pin 512, which will be described later, of the body frame hinge member 510 in the bearing groove 51c.

  The lock member 52 includes a band-shaped lock body 52a extending in the front-rear direction, an operation piece 52b protruding rightward from the rear end of the lock body 52a, and extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 52a. An elastically deformable rod-like elastic portion 52c extending obliquely left front and an attachment hole 52d penetrating vertically near the rear end of the lock body 52a are provided. The lock member 52 is made of synthetic resin. The lock member 52 is pivotally attached to the rear side of the bearing groove 51c on the lower surface of the front extending portion 51b of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 by the mounting screw 53.

  When the lock member 52 is attached to the outer frame hinge member 51, the lock body 52a can block the bearing groove 51c in a plan view, and the right side surface near the front end is the end of the outer frame hinge member 51. The edge wall portion 51e extends forward so as to be able to come into contact with a portion extending to the opening of the bearing groove 51c. Further, the tip of the elastic portion 52 c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock main body 52 a is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the edge wall portion 51 e of the outer frame upper hinge member 51. The lock member 52 is urged by the urging force of the elastic portion 52c in the direction in which the front end rotates leftward about the attachment hole 52d. Accordingly, in a normal state, the right side surface of the lock member 52 near the front end of the lock body 52a is in contact with the edge wall portion 51e. In this state, a space capable of accommodating the body frame upper hinge pin 512 of the body frame upper hinge member 510 is formed in a portion of the bearing groove 51c on the front side of the lock body 52a.

  The lock member 52 can rotate the lock body 52a against the urging force of the elastic portion 52c by operating the operation piece 52b. Then, by operating the operation piece 52b, the lock body 52a is rotated in a direction in which the front end thereof moves to the left, whereby the lock body 52a can be retracted from the bearing groove 51c in a plan view, and the bearing groove 51c Can pass through. Thereby, the hinge pin 512 on the body frame can be inserted into the bearing groove 51c, or the hinge pin 512 on the body frame can be removed from the bearing groove 51c.

[2-5. Outer frame lower hinge member]
The outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal portion 60a, and a flat plate-like raised portion 60b that rises upward from a rear portion of the left side of the horizontal portion 60a with respect to the center in the front-rear direction. An outer frame lower hinge pin 60c projecting upward from the vicinity of the front end of the horizontal portion 60a, and a discharge hole 60d having a size penetrating the horizontal portion 60a vertically and allowing only one game ball B to pass therethrough. ing. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding.

  The horizontal portion 60a of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 is formed in a trapezoidal shape with the left side as the bottom in plan view. The outer frame lower hinge pin 60c has a cylindrical shape, and is formed in a truncated cone shape whose upper end is narrower than the center in the vertical direction. The outer frame lower hinge pin 60c is attached to the left position near the front end of the horizontal portion 60a. In the horizontal portion 60a, the discharge hole 60d is in contact with the central portion in the front-rear direction of the upright portion 60b, and is formed to extend in an inverted U shape from the left side of the horizontal portion 60a to the right. The discharge hole 60d has substantially the same size as the first discharge port 44b of the ball engagement prevention mechanism 44 in the outer frame lower assembly 40.

  When the outer frame lower hinge member 60 is assembled to the outer frame 2, the rear portion of the horizontal portion 60 a is mounted on the mounting portion 44 a of the curtain plate rear member 43 in the outer frame lower assembly 40. Is fixed to the curtain plate rear member 43. Further, the upright portion 60b is attached to a portion of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11 in front of the bulging portion 11b with a screw (not shown). The outer frame lower hinge member 60 cooperates with the outer frame upper hinge member 51 by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 60 c into the outer frame lower hinge hole 521 a in the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4. Thus, the main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be opened and closed.

  Further, in a state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge hole 60 d coincides with the first discharge port 44 b of the ball engagement prevention mechanism 44 in the outer frame lower assembly 40. Thereby, the game ball B on the horizontal portion 60a can be dropped (discharged) to the rear of the outer frame 2 through the discharge hole 60d and the first discharge port 44b. More specifically, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the game balls B that have fallen between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 are closed as the main body frame 4 is closed. 4 is gradually narrowed, so that the gap is rolled to the rear side with a wide interval, and can be discharged from the discharge hole 60d. At this time, the discharge hole 60d is formed at a position that is substantially the same as the rear end of the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in a state assembled to the pachinko machine 1. The game ball B dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 can be easily prevented from rolling to the rear side of the main body frame 4 by being discharged from the discharge hole 60d. It is possible to make it difficult for the game ball B to stay on the lower hinge member 60.

[3. Overall structure of door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 22 is a front view of the door frame in the pachinko machine, FIG. 23 is a rear view of the door frame, FIG. 24 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 25 is a right side view of the door frame. FIG. 26 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the right front, FIG. 27 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the left front, and FIG. 28 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the rear. FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view in which the door frame is disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view in which the door frame is disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear.

  The door frame 3 is formed in a quadrangle that is substantially the same size as the inside of the outer frame 2 and extends vertically when viewed from the front, and is attached to the inside of the outer frame 2 via the main body frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed from the front side. It has been. The door frame 3 closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game ball B is to be visibly viewed from the front side, stores the game balls B to be shot into the game area 5a, and stores the stored games. A handle 182 operated by the player for driving the ball B into the game area 5a is provided. The door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1.

  The door frame 3 is a quadrangular and frame-like door frame base unit 100 whose front view extends vertically, and is detachably attached to the door frame base unit 100 and includes a game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4. A glass unit 160 that closes the game area 5a so as to be visible from the front, a security cover 170 attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from the rear side, and the door frame base unit 100 Is attached to the front left part of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the dish unit 200. Door frame left side unit 400 and the door attached to the front right part of the door frame base unit 100 above the dish unit A right side unit 410, and a door frame top unit 450 which is attached to the upper front portion of the door frame base unit 100 at the upper side of the door frame left side unit 400 and the door frame right side unit 410, a.

  The door frame base unit 100 includes a door frame base 101 having a door window 101a that is formed in a quadrangular (rectangular) shape whose front view extends vertically, and penetrates forward and backward, and the front right side of the door frame base 101. The handle attachment member 102 attached below, the speaker duct 103 attached to the lower right corner in the rear view on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and the vicinity of the right end in the rear view on the lower part on the rear side of the door frame base 101 The door frame main relay board 104, the door frame sub relay board 105 attached to the left side of the door frame main relay board 104, and the door frame sub relay board 105 attached to the left side of the door frame sub relay board 105. Rear handle relay board 106, door frame main relay board 104 and door frame sub relay board 105 that cover a part of door frame sub relay board 105 from the rear side, and handle rear relay board 106 from the rear side. A handle after the relay board cover 108 for covering a cable cover 109 for covering the distribution cable, and a.

  The door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcing unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and a door attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110. A frame lower hinge member 125, an opening / closing cylinder lock 130 attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110, and a ball feeding unit 140 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and above the rear handle relay board 106. And a foul cover unit 150 attached to the right side of the rear view of the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101.

  The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the door frame base 101 and give rigidity. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and the door frame lower hinge member 125 are for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable. The cylinder lock 130 is used for opening and closing the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 and for opening and closing the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 in cooperation with the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4.

The ball feeding unit 140 is for supplying the game balls B in the upper plate 201 to the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4 one by one.
Further, the foul cover unit 150 guides the game ball B (foul ball), which has been launched with a weak launch force by the ball launcher 540 and has not reached the game area 5a of the game board 5, to the lower plate 202, This is for guiding the game ball B paid out from the payout device 580 to the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202.

  The glass unit 160 has a transparent glass plate 162 and closes the door window 101 a of the door frame base 101. The security cover 170 is attached to the door frame base 101 so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from behind. The handle unit 180 includes a handle 182 that can be rotated by the player. By operating the handle 182, the game ball B in the upper plate 201 is moved into the game area 5 a of the game board 5 by the ball launcher 540. It ’s what you type

[3-1. Overall configuration of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. 31A is a perspective view of the door frame base unit of the door frame viewed from the front, and FIG. 31B is a perspective view of the door frame base unit viewed from the rear. FIG. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the main part of the door frame base unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the main part of the door frame base unit as seen from the rear. is there.

  The door frame base unit 100 is attached to the main body frame 4 so that the left side of the front view is hinge-rotatable, and the front surface of the main body frame 4 is closed so as to be openable and closable. The game area is visible from the front. The door frame base unit 100 has a rectangular and flat door frame base 101 whose outer shape extends vertically, a handle mounting member 102 for mounting the handle unit 180 attached to the lower right front surface of the door frame base 101, And a speaker duct 103 attached to the rear lower right corner of the rear side of the door frame base 101.

  Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a door frame main relay board 104 attached near the right end in rear view in the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101, and a door frame main relay in the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101. A door frame sub-relay board 105 attached to the left side of the board 104 in the rear view, and a handle rear relay board attached to the left side of the door frame sub-relay board 105 in the lower part on the rear side of the door frame base 101. 106, a door frame relay board cover 107 which is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covers the door frame main relay board 104 and a part of the door frame sub relay board 105 from the rear side, and the door frame base 101. A rear handle relay board cover 108 that is attached to the rear side and covers the rear handle relay board 106 from the rear side, and a case that is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covers the wiring cable. And Burukaba 109, and a.

  Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcing unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and a door attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110. A frame lower hinge member 125, an opening / closing cylinder lock 130 attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110, and a ball feeding unit 140 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and above the rear handle relay board 106. And a foul cover unit 150 attached to the right side of the rear view of the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101.

  The door frame base unit 100 includes a handle unit 180 at the lower front corner, a dish unit 200 at the lower front surface of the door window 101a, a door frame left side unit 400 at the left outer front surface of the door window 101a, and a door window 101a. A door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the right outer front surface, and a door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper outer front surface of the door window 101a.

  In addition, a glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to close the door window 101a from the rear, and a transparent security cover 170 is attached so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from the rear. .

[3-1a. Door frame base]
The door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame base 101 is formed in a quadrangle (rectangular shape) whose outer shape in front view extends vertically. The door frame base 101 is provided with a door window 101a that penetrates in the front-rear direction and is formed in a substantially quadrilateral shape whose inner peripheral shape in the front view extends vertically. In the door window 101a, the upper side and the left and right sides forming the inner periphery are respectively close to the outer periphery of the door frame base 101, and the lower side forming the inner periphery is up and down from the lower end of the door frame base 101. It is located at a height of about 1/3 of the direction. Thus, the door frame base 101 is entirely formed in a frame shape by the door window 101a penetrating in the front-rear direction. The door frame base 101 is integrally formed of synthetic resin.

  The door frame base 101 is formed in the lower right corner in front view on the front surface, and has a handle mounting seat surface 101b inclined so that the left end side protrudes slightly forward from the right end side, the handle mounting seat surface 101b, and the door window 101a. Between the right side and the right side of the front, and is recessed from the rear to the front. The insertion recess 101c into which the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcement unit 110 is inserted, and the insertion recess 101c penetrates back and forth. A cylinder insertion hole 101d through which the cylinder body 131 is inserted, and the cylinder insertion hole 101d and the handle mounting seat surface 101b pass through front and rear on the left side when viewed from the front, and pass forward through the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b of the ball feeding unit 140. And a ball feeding opening 101e to face the surface.

  Also, the door frame base 101 is located on the left side of the center in the left-right direction and penetrates back and forth at substantially the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 101b. A passage opening 101f, a bowl passage opening 101g for an upper dish that penetrates forward and backward so as to be adjacent to the lower side of the door window 101a near the left end in front view, and faces the through-ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 forward, A glass unit mounting portion 101h that is recessed forward from the rear surface along the inner periphery of the window 101a and into which the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 is inserted.

  Further, the door frame base 101 includes a plurality of vertically long slits 101i that are formed in the lower left corner of the front view (below the upper plate ball passage opening 101g) and penetrate forward and backward. A speaker duct 103 is attached to the rear side of the plurality of slits 101i. In addition, the plurality of slits 101i are located in the state in which the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, the speaker port 211b of the dish unit base 211 in the dish unit 200 is located in front, and the body frame in the speaker unit 620a of the body frame 4 in the rear. The speaker 622 is located, and the sound from the body frame speaker 622 can be radiated forward.

  Further, the door frame base 101 includes a through-hole 101j penetrating in the front-rear direction below the door window 101a and above the handle mounting seat surface 101b. The through-hole 101j is inserted through a wiring cable (not shown) that connects the door frame base unit 100 side and the dish unit 200 side, and passes through the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110 described later. It is formed so as to coincide with the portion 114b.

[3-1b. Handle mounting member]
The handle mounting member 102 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The handle attachment member 102 is for attaching the handle unit to the front surface of the door frame base 101, and is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 101 b on the front surface of the door frame base 101.

  The handle mounting member 102 includes a cylindrical tube portion 102a extending in the front-rear direction, an annular flange portion 102b extending outward from the rear end of the tube portion 102a in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the tube portion 102a, A plurality of (three in this example) protrusions 102c that protrude into the portion 102a and extend over the entire length in the axial direction of the tube portion 102a and are arranged at unequal intervals with respect to the circumferential direction of the tube portion 102a; And a plurality of reinforcing ribs 102d that connect the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 102a and the front surface of the flange portion 102b and are arranged in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 102a.

  The handle attachment member 102 is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 101b with a screw in a state where the rear surface of the flange portion 102b is in contact with the front surface of the handle attachment seat surface 101b in the door frame base 101.

  The cylindrical portion 102 a is formed so that its inner diameter is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the base portion 181 a of the handle base 181 in the handle unit 180. One of the three protrusions 102c is provided on the upper portion of the cylindrical portion 102a, and the other two are provided on the lower portion of the cylindrical portion 102a. These three protrusions 102 c are formed at positions corresponding to the three groove portions 181 c in the handle base 181. Therefore, the handle mounting member 102 can insert the base portion 181a of the handle base 181 into the cylindrical portion 102a only when the three protrusions 102c and the three groove portions 181c of the handle base 181 are aligned. The rotational position of the handle base 181 (handle unit 180) can be restricted with respect to the door frame base 101.

  The handle attachment member 102 is attached to the inclined handle attachment seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 because the axis of the cylinder portion 102a extends perpendicularly to the rear surface of the flange portion 102b. The cylinder part 102a is inclined so that the axis of the cylinder part 102a extends to the right front, and the handle unit 180 can be attached to the door frame base 101 in a similarly inclined state.

[3-1c. Speaker duct]
The speaker duct 103 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The speaker duct 103 is formed in a cylindrical shape and is attached to a portion where a plurality of slits 101 i are formed on the rear side of the door frame base 101. The rear end of the cylindrical part of the speaker duct 103 is located in front of the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 in a state where the pachinko machine 1 is assembled. Thereby, the sound (sound) radiated (output) from the body frame speaker 622 of the body frame 4 can be guided forward without being diffused, and the plurality of slits 101 i of the door frame base 101 and the plate unit 200 can be guided. Through the speaker port 211b in the dish unit base 211, it can be satisfactorily guided to the front (player side) of the pachinko machine 1.

  In addition, the speaker duct 103 includes a cable holder 103a that holds the connection cable 503 on the rear surface below the cylindrical portion. The cable holder 103 a is arranged on the left side of the front view of the door frame relay board cover 107, and the connection cable 503 connected to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 is connected to the door frame 3. It is held so as to extend to the left end side.

[3-1d. Door frame main relay board / door frame sub relay board / handle rear relay board]
The door frame main relay board 104, the door frame sub relay board 105, and the post-handle relay board 106 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described with reference mainly to FIGS. The door frame main relay board 104 is formed in a quadrangle whose outer shape extends vertically, and is attached to the lower right corner of the rear side of the door frame base 101 in the rear view. The door frame main relay board 104 is for relaying the connection between the post-handle relay board 106 and the interface board 635 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4, and a connection cable 503 extending from the main body frame 4 (FIG. 83). And a part of (see FIG. 84) are connected.

  The door frame sub-relay substrate 105 is formed in an inverted L shape in which a quadrangle extending left and right is combined on the right side of the front of the upper part of the quadrangle extending up and down. The frame main relay board 104 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to be adjacent to the left in the rear view. The door frame sub relay board 105 includes a handle decoration board 184 of the handle unit 180, a dish unit relay board 214 of the dish unit 200, a door frame left side decoration board 402 of the door frame left side unit 400, and a side of the door frame right side unit 410. It is for relaying the connection between the window interior decoration part decoration board 413, the door frame right side decoration board 418, the door frame top relay board 467 of the door frame top unit 450, and the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4. The rest of the connection cable 503 extending from the main body frame 4 is connected.

  The door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 are attached to the door frame base 101 so that the connection terminals protrude rearward. The door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 are configured so that the door frame base relay board 104 and a portion extending vertically from the door frame sub relay board 105 in the state where the door frame base unit 100 is assembled are doors. The rear side is covered with the frame relay board cover 107, and the remaining part of the door frame sub-relay board 105 is covered with the foul cover unit 150.

  The post-handle relay substrate 106 is formed in a quadrangle whose outer shape extends to the left and right, and is attached to the rear side of the handle attachment seat surface 101 b below the ball feed opening 101 e on the rear side of the door frame base 101. The post-handle relay board 106 connects the door frame main relay board 104 to the handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180, the handle touch sensor 192, the single button operation sensor 194, and the ball feed solenoid 145 of the ball feed unit 140. It is for relaying. The rear handle relay board 106 is in a state where the rear side is covered by the rear handle relay board cover 108 in a state where the door frame base unit 100 is assembled.

[3-1e. Door frame relay board cover, handle rear relay board cover, cable cover]
The door frame relay board cover 107, the post-handle relay board cover 108, and the cable cover 109 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The door frame relay board cover 107 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so that the door frame main relay board 104 and a part of the door frame sub-relay board (a part extending in the inverted L shape vertically) It covers the side. The door frame relay board cover 107 is formed in a box shape with the front and the left in front view opened. When assembled in the door frame base unit 100, the connection terminals of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 covering the rear side are exposed inside the door frame relay board cover 107 and opened. The connection cable 503 can be inserted into the terminal from the left side and connected to these terminals.

  The post-handle relay board cover 108 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to cover the rear side of the post-handle relay board 106. The cable cover 109 is attached to the rear side of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and is a wiring cable (not shown) that connects the door frame main relay board 104 and the ball lending operation unit 220 of the dish unit 200. It is for coating. The cable cover 109 is formed in a box shape extending left and right, and an opening for passing a wiring cable is formed in the vicinity of the left end of the front surface and the center of the lower surface in the left-right direction.

[3-1f. Door frame reinforcement unit]
The door frame reinforcing unit 110 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the flat door frame base 101 and give the door frame base unit 100 rigidity. The door frame reinforcing unit 110 has left and right left and right reinforcing frames 111 and 112 that are spaced apart from each other and are connected to the left and right reinforcing frames 111 and 112. An extended upper reinforcing frame 113, an intermediate reinforcing frame 114 attached to the upper end from the lower end of the left reinforcing frame 111 and extending rightward to the vicinity of the right reinforcing frame 112, and a right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 A cylinder mounting frame 115 that connects the right reinforcing frame 112 and a plurality of the cylinder mounting frame 115 that are mounted on the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112 so as to be spaced apart from each other vertically. The hook member 116 is provided.

  The left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112 have a constant width in the left-right direction and extend vertically with substantially the same length as the vertical height of the door frame base 101. The right reinforcing frame 112 is formed with a plurality of insertion holes that are spaced apart in the vertical direction and penetrate in the front-rear direction. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, these insertion holes are inserted through the ends of the door frame collars 652 of the locking unit 650. The upper reinforcing frame 113 has a constant width in the vertical direction and extends to the left and right with substantially the same length as the left and right widths of the door frame base 101.

  The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 extends from side to side with a width that is wider in the vertical direction than the vertical width of the upper reinforcing frame 113. The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 has a cutout portion 114a that is squarely cut downward from the upper end near the left end, and a through portion 114b that penetrates forward and backward near the right end. The cutout portion 114a is formed at a position where the upper frame ball passage port 101g of the door frame base 101 and the through portion 114b coincide with the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101, respectively.

  The cylinder mounting frame 115 is spaced apart from the left and right, and a pair of rear piece portions formed in a rectangular flat plate shape extending vertically in a front view and a pair of rear piece portions facing each other. A pair of side piece portions extending in a flat plate shape from the side to the front side and a flat plate-like front piece portion for connecting the sides of the front ends of the pair of front extension portions are provided. The cylinder mounting frame 115 is formed in a convex shape whose shape in plan view protrudes forward. The cylinder mounting frame 115 has a left rear piece attached to the right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 and a right rear piece attached to the right reinforcing frame 112. A cylinder lock 130 is attached to the front piece of the cylinder attachment frame 115.

  The hook member 116 is attached to a portion of the insertion hole penetrating forward and backward on the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112. These hook members 116 are hooked with door frame hooks 652 of the locking unit 650.

  The left reinforcing frame 111, the right reinforcing frame 112, the upper reinforcing frame 113, the intermediate reinforcing frame 114, the cylinder mounting frame 115, and the hook member 116 constituting the door frame reinforcing unit 110 are formed by stamping a metal plate by press molding. It is formed by bending. These are assembled by rivets.

  In the door frame reinforcing unit 110, the left reinforcing frame 111, the right reinforcing frame 112, and the upper reinforcing frame 113 are assembled along the left side, the right side, and the upper side of the door frame base 101, and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 is provided. The door frame base 101 is assembled so as to be positioned below the door window 101a.

  The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 with a plurality of screws (not shown). When the door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the door frame base 101, the cutout portion 114a and the through portion 114b of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 coincide with the upper plate ball passing port 101g and the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101. In addition, the cylinder mounting frame 115 is inserted into the insertion recess 101c of the door frame base 101.

[3-1 g. Hinge assembly on door frame]
The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame hinge assembly 120 is attached to the upper left corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 when viewed from the front. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 so as to be capable of hinge rotation in cooperation with the door frame lower hinge member 125. The door frame hinge assembly 120 includes a hinge bracket 121 attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110, a door frame hinge pin 122 attached to the hinge bracket 121 so as to be movable in the vertical direction, and a door frame hinge pin 122. A member 123 and a lock spring 124 that urges the door frame upper hinge pin 122 to move upward are provided.

  The hinge bracket 121 includes a flat plate-like mounting piece 121a having a rectangular shape in front view, and a flat plate-like protruding piece 121b extending forward from the upper and lower sides of the mounting piece 121a. The hinge bracket 121 has an attachment piece 121 a attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110. The hinge bracket 121 is formed by bending a metal plate.

  The hinge pin 122 on the door frame is obtained by bending a cylindrical metal rod into an L shape. When the hinge pin 122 on the door frame is assembled to the hinge assembly 120 on the door frame, the vertically extending portion penetrates from below in the vicinity of the front ends of the pair of protruding pieces 121b in the hinge bracket 121, and the upper end is on the upper side. The part that extends upward from the protruding piece 121b and that extends horizontally is in contact with the lower surface of the lower protruding piece 121b. The upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame is rotatably inserted into the upper hinge hole 511a for the door frame of the upper hinge main body 511 in the main body frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4.

  The eaves member 123 is an E-ring, and is attached to a portion between the pair of protruding pieces 121b in the hinge pin 122 on the door frame. The lock spring 124 is formed in a coil shape, and covers a portion extending vertically between the upper hinge pin 122 on the door frame between the flange member 123 and the lower protruding piece 121b of the hinge bracket 121. The lock spring 124 biases the door frame upper hinge pin 122 upward through the flange member 123.

  The door frame hinge assembly 120 is such that the door frame hinge pin 122 is biased upward by the lock spring 124, and the horizontally extending portion at the lower end of the door frame hinge pin 122 is the lower protruding piece. By contacting the lower surface of 121b, further upward movement is restricted. In this state, the upper end of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame protrudes a predetermined amount above the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 121b.

  When the part of the door frame hinge pin 120 that extends horizontally at the lower end of the door frame hinge assembly 120 is moved downward against the urging force of the lock spring 124, the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is moved as a whole. The upper end of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame can be immersed below the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 121b. Therefore, the door frame hinge assembly 120 can insert the upper end of the door frame hinge pin 122 into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the main body frame hinge member 510 from below or pull it downward. it can. As a result, the upper left end of the door frame 3 is hinge-rotated with respect to the main body frame 4 by inserting the upper end of the upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame into the upper hinge hole 511a for the door frame of the main body frame hinge member 510. It can be supported as possible.

  Further, in the door frame hinge assembly 120, the vertically extending portion of the door frame hinge pin 122 is positioned coaxially with the door frame lower hinge pin 126 of the door frame lower hinge member 125 described later. Thereby, the door frame 3 can be hinge-rotated in a favorable state with respect to the main body frame 4 by the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126.

[3-1h. Hinge member under door frame]
The door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is attached to the lower left corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 when viewed from the front. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 so as to be capable of hinge rotation in cooperation with the door frame upper hinge assembly 120.

  The door frame lower hinge member 125 is attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110 and has a rectangular flat plate-like mounting piece 125a, a flat plate-like protruding piece 125b extending forward from the lower side of the mounting piece 125a, and a protruding piece. And a door frame lower hinge pin 126 (see FIG. 22 and the like) protruding downward from the lower surface near the front end of 125b.

  The attachment piece 125a and the protruding piece 125b of the door frame lower hinge member 125 are formed by bending a metal plate. The door frame lower hinge pin 126 is a cylindrical metal rod, and the outer periphery of the lower end is tapered chamfered. The door frame lower hinge pin 126 is coaxial with the portion of the protruding piece 125b that extends vertically above the door frame hinge pin 122 of the door frame hinge assembly 120 in the assembled state in the door frame base unit 100. Installed.

  The door frame lower hinge member 125 supports the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 so as to be able to rotate by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 126 into the door frame hinge hole of the main body frame side lower hinge member. Can do.

[3-1i. Cylinder lock]
The cylinder lock 130 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The cylinder lock 130 is attached to the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and cooperates with a locking unit 650 described later to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. It is used for opening and closing locking. The cylinder lock 130 includes a columnar cylinder main body 131 extending in the front-rear direction, a key hole 132 formed in the front end surface of the cylinder main body 131, and a rear side of the cylinder main body 131. And a rotation transmission member 133 that rotates together with the rotation of the key.

  The cylinder main body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 has a rear end attached to the front piece through the front piece of the cylinder attachment frame 115 from behind. The rotation transmitting member 133 is formed in a cylindrical shape with an open rear side (specifically, a conical cylinder shape whose diameter increases toward the rear side), and moves from the rear end to the front side at a position facing the center axis. It has a pair of notches cut out. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed so that the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 is inserted from behind, and the pair of protrusions of the transmission cylinder 654 are inserted into the pair of notches to rotate. The rotation of the transmission member 133 (the key inserted into the keyhole 132) can be transmitted to the transmission cylinder 654 and rotated.

  When the cylinder lock 130 is assembled to the door frame 3, the front end of the cylinder main body 131 is substantially aligned with the front end of the cylinder insertion port 252 h of the dish unit main body 252 in the dish unit 200 (see FIG. 22 and the like).

[3-1j. Ball feeding unit]
The ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 34 and FIG. FIG. 34A is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as seen from the front of the ball feeding unit, and FIG. 34B is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from behind. FIG. 35A is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 35B is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear after removing the rear case and the fraud prevention member. is there. The ball feeding unit 140 can supply the game balls B supplied from the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 one by one to the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4, and games stored in the upper plate 201. The ball B can be extracted to the lower plate 202 by operating the upper plate ball extraction button 222.

  The ball feeding unit 140 has an entrance 141a through which the game ball B is supplied from the upper plate 201 of the tray unit 200 and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a ball outlet 141b that opens below the entrance 141a. A box-shaped front cover 141 with the door opened, and a game ball that has entered the front entrance 141a of the front cover 141 penetrating in the front-rear direction in a box shape with the front end closed and the rear end of the front cover 141 closed. A rear cover 142 having a hitting ball supply port 142a for supplying B to the ball launcher 540, and a front cover that is pivotally supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the rear cover 142 and the front cover 141. The ball removal member 143 having a partition portion 143a for partitioning the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b on the rear side of the 141, and the game balls B on the partition portion 143a of the ball removal member 143 one by one in the rear cover 14 , The ball feeding member 144 supported so as to be rotatable about an axis extending in the vertical direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and the ball feeding member 144 are rotated. A ball feeding solenoid 145.

  As shown in the figure, the ball feeding unit 140 has a ball feeding member 144 arranged on the right side of the entrance 141a in front view, and a ball pulling member 143 on the left side of the ball feeding member 144. A ball feeding solenoid 145 is arranged on the right side of the feeding member 144.

  The front cover 141 of the ball feeding unit 140 includes an arc-shaped slit 141c formed concentrically with the rotation center of the ball pulling member 143 on the left side of the ball pulling port 141b in a front view. An operating rod 143c of a ball pulling member 143 described later extends from 141c to the front. Further, the front cover 141 extends upward from the upper edge of the entrance 141a, and when the door frame 3 is assembled, the ball feeding guide path 241b of the rear base 241 in the unit 240 after removing the upper bowl ball is assembled. And it is formed so that the site | part opened to the back of the upstream end side of the ball extraction guide path 241c may be closed from the rear side.

  The ball pulling member 143 has a partition portion 143a that divides the entrance 141a and the ball discharge port 141b below the entrance 141a and has an upper surface that becomes lower toward the ball feeding member 144, and a partition 143a Around the axis that extends downward from the end opposite to the ball feeding member 144, bends in the shape of a letter from the middle in the vertical direction toward the lower center of the ball outlet 141b, and the lower end extends in the front-rear direction A pivot rod 143b that is pivotally supported by the pivot rod 143b, a rod-shaped actuation rod 143c that protrudes forward from the upper end of the pivot rod 143b, and a pivot rod 143b below the actuation rod 143c. A weight portion 143d protruding from the side surface to the opposite side of the partition portion 143a. The operating rod 143c of the ball pulling member 143 is formed so as to protrude forward through an arc-shaped slit 141c formed in the front cover 141 (see FIG. 34A). The operating rod 143c is connected to the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper dish ball removal slider 242 that moves downward by pressing the upper dish ball removal button 222 of the dish unit 200 through the ball feeding opening 101e of the door frame base 101. Abut the top surface.

  The ball feeding member 144 has a fan-shaped blocking portion 144a and a rear portion of the blocking portion 144a in plan view with the rotation axis extending in the vertical direction facing the entrance 141a and the partitioning portion 143a of the ball pulling member 143. A sphere holding portion 144b that is recessed in an arc shape from the end toward the rotating shaft core side, and a rod-shaped flange portion 144c that extends downward from the rear end of the sphere holding portion 144b are provided. The blocking portion 144a and the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 are formed adjacent to each other within an angle range of about 180 ° with the rotation axis as the center. In addition, the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 has a size that can hold one game ball B. The ball feeding member 144 rotates around the rotation axis when the collar 144c arranged at a position eccentric from the rotation axis is moved in the left-right direction by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145.

  The ball feeding member 144 includes a supply position in which the blocking portion 144a faces the direction of the partition portion 143a and at the same time the ball holding portion 144b communicates with the hitting ball supply port 142a, and the ball holding portion 144b of the partition portion 143a. It rotates between the holding position facing in the direction. When the ball feeding member 144 is in the supply position, the game ball B held by the ball holding portion 144b is supplied from the hitting ball supply port 142a to the ball launching device 540 and enters the partition portion 143a from the entrance 141a. The game ball B is blocked from moving toward the ball holding unit 144b (hit ball supply port 142a) by the blocking unit 144a and stays on the partition unit 143a (a state where the game ball B remains in the standby position). On the other hand, when the ball feeding member 144 rotates to the holding position, the ball holding portion 144b faces the partition portion 143a, and the end of the ball holding portion 144b on the side of the flange 144c closes the hitting ball supply port 142a. Thus, only one game ball B on the partition portion 143a which is the standby position is held in the ball holding portion 144b.

  The ball feeding unit 140 includes a ball feeding operation rod 146 whose tip is swung in the vertical direction by driving (energizing) the ball feeding solenoid 145 and a tip which is swung in the vertical direction in the ball feeding operation rod 146. And a ball feeding crank 147 that rotates around the axis extending in the front-rear direction and rotates the ball feeding member 144 around the axis extending in the vertical direction.

  The ball feeding operation rod 146 includes an iron plate 146 a at a portion below the ball feeding solenoid 145. The ball feeding operation rod 146 extends to the left and right, and is attached to the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142 so that the end (right end) opposite to the ball feeding crank 147 can rotate around an axis extending forward and backward. It has been. When the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the ball feeding operation rod 146 draws the iron plate 146a toward the ball feeding solenoid 145 (upward) by the generated magnetic force, and feeds the ball around the right end. It rotates so that the left end side close to the crank 147 moves upward. Thereafter, when the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released, the magnetic force disappears and the weight of the iron plate 146a acts, so that the left end side near the ball feeding crank 147 moves downward with the right end portion as the center. And return to the initial state. As a result, the ball feeding operation rod 146 is swung vertically by the ball feeding solenoid 145 at the left end (tip) near the ball feeding crank 147.

  The ball feeding crank 147 engages with the tip of the ball feeding operating rod 146 that moves up and down and engages with the engaging portion 147a extending in the left-right direction and the ball feeding operating rod 146 of the engaging portion 147a. A shaft portion 147b that is disposed on the opposite side to the side and is pivotally supported around a shaft extending in the front-rear direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and extends upward from the shaft portion 147b. The ball feeding member 144 includes a transmission portion 147c that engages with a rod-shaped flange portion 144c (see FIG. 35B) that protrudes downward from a position eccentric with respect to the rotation center.

  The ball feeding unit 140 moves the tip (left end) of the ball feeding operation rod 146 upward by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145, thereby moving the ball feeding crank 147 through the ball feeding operation rod 146. It can be rotated around an axis extending in the front-rear direction.

  When the ball feeding solenoid 145 is not driven (normal time), the ball feeding unit 140 is in a state where the ball feeding operating rod 146 is separated from the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 and the tip is positioned downward. Then, the ball feeding member 144 is in the supply position. When the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the ball feeding operating rod 146 is attracted to the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 so that the tip (left end) is positioned upward, and the ball feeding member 144 is held. To turn. That is, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven (ON state), the ball feeding member 144 receives one game ball B in the standby position, and the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released (OFF). State) and the game ball B received by the ball feeding member 144 can be sent (supplied) to the ball launcher 540 side. The driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 in the ball feeding unit 140 is controlled in synchronization with the driving control of the firing solenoid 542 by the firing control unit 633b (see FIG. 102) of the payout control board 633.

  Further, the ball feeding unit 140 is applied with a moment that rotates in a counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front by a ball pulling member 143 that is pivotally supported or a weight portion 143d. However, the operating rod 143c protruding forward of the ball removal member 143 comes into contact with the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper plate ball removal slider 242 that is operated by pressing the upper plate ball removal button 222 of the dish unit 200. Therefore, in the normal state, the partitioning part 143a of the ball extraction member 143 is positioned and partitioned between the entrance 141a and the ball extraction port 141b, and the ball extraction port 141b side. The game ball B does not enter.

  Then, when the player presses the upper dish ball removal button of the dish unit downward, the upper dish ball removal slider slides downward together with the operation transmission unit, and the operation rod 143c is moved along with the downward movement of the operation transmission unit. Will also move relatively downward. When the operating rod 143c moves downward together with the operation transmitting portion, the ball extraction member 143 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front, and the partition portion 143a moves from between the entrance 141a and the ball extraction port 141b to partition. Is released. Thereby, the game ball B that has entered from the entrance 141a falls to the ball outlet 141b side, and is discharged from the ball outlet 141b to the ball outlet guide path 241c of the unit 240 after removing the upper dish ball in the dish unit 200, It can be discharged (supplied) to the lower dish 202 through the lower dish ball supply port 211c.

  The upper dish ball removal slider 242 formed with the action transmitting portion 242b with which the action rod 143c of the ball removal member 143 contacts is biased upward by the spring 243, so that the game ball B is placed on the partition portion 143a. Can be absorbed by the spring 243 via the operating rod 143c, the ball pulling member 143 and the like can be prevented from being damaged, and the game ball B can be It is possible to prevent the 143a from bouncing back.

  In addition, the ball feeding unit 140 has a rectangular mounting recess 142b (see FIG. 35 (b) and the like) that is recessed to the upper right in the rear view of the hitting ball supply port 142a in the rear cover 142. The operation line invalidating member 700 serving as the first fraud prevention means is mounted in the mounting recess 142b. The operation line invalidating member 700 of the ball feeding unit 140 is formed of a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is attached to the inside of the mounting recess 142b of the rear cover 142 so as to be detachable from the rear side. Yes. Here, the invalidation of the operation line means that the operation line cannot be normally operated by cutting, pinching (pinching), entanglement (winding), or bonding with hot melt or the like. It means making it into a state.

  The operation line disabling member 700 is formed in a rectangular shape whose front view extends to the left and right, and is a first piece that is vertically separated at the approximate center in the vertical direction within a predetermined distance from the right side to the left. An inclined portion 703 formed in a C-chamfered shape on the distal end side (right end side in front view) of the side facing each other of the portion 701 and the second piece portion 702, and the first piece portion 701 and the second piece portion 702. And. The first piece 701 of the operation line disabling member 700 is bent with respect to the flat surface of the operation line disabling member 700 so that the right end in front view protrudes rearward in FIG. On the other hand, the second piece 702 extends on the same plane as the flat surface of the operation line invalidating member 700. Thus, in plan view, the first piece 701 and the second piece 702 form a shearing portion 700v that spreads in a V shape toward the right.

  The operation line invalidating member 700 is attached to the attachment recess 142b of the rear cover 142, so that the V-shaped shearing portion 700v formed by the first piece 701 and the second piece 702 is formed in the hitting ball supply port 142a. It will be in the state connected with.

According to the operation line invalidating member 700, an illegal ball (a game ball or a metal ball having almost the same diameter as the game ball) to which a flexible string-like operation line (a linear member such as a thread, a piano wire, a wire, or a catheter) is attached. Or a synthetic resin ball having substantially the same diameter as that) is driven into the game area 5a by the ball launcher 540 from the upper plate 201 via the ball feeding unit 140, and comes out to the upper plate 201 side attached to the illegal ball. When an illegal act is performed by operating the operation line to form an illegal ball flow path using an illegal ball, or causing an illegal ball to be taken in or out of the first starting port 2002 or the like, the ball launcher 540 plays a game The operation line attached to the illegal ball is inserted between the first piece 701 and the second piece 702 by the momentum of the illegal ball launched (hit) with a strength that can reach the region 5a. Thus, the first piece 701 and the second piece 702 Can be cut into as scissors by narrowed site of formation shear portion 700v, it is possible to suppress the fraud using a fraud sphere takes place thus invalidates the operating line.
Note that the first fraud prevention means provided in the ball feeding unit 140 is not limited to the above-described form, but may be another form. For example, if the operation line attached to the illegal ball is cut or narrowed so as to suppress illegal acts, the operation line invalidating member 700 may be bent or bent in a form different from that described above. It is good also as a structure provided, and it is good also as a structure which replaces with a metal plate and has the resin molding member which has the shape which can cut | disconnect or narrow the operation line attached to the illegal ball | bowl.
Further, when the illegal ball is made of synthetic resin such as acrylic, a metal game ball at the standby position (on the partition 143a) of the ball feeding unit 140 is a non-contact type (for example, a proximity switch). Detection by a sensor and adding the detection signal to the driving condition of the ball feeding solenoid 145 serving as an electric feeding means can prevent the illegal ball from launching itself. This is because the non-contact type sensor does not detect an illegal sphere made of synthetic resin and the ball feeding solenoid 145 does not perform driving for ball feeding.

[3-1k. Foul cover unit]
The foul cover unit 150 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 36A and 36B. 36A (a) is a perspective view of the door cover base unit as viewed from the front of the foul cover unit, and FIG. 36 (b) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit as viewed from behind. FIG. 36B (a) is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit as viewed from the front with the lid member removed, and FIG. 36 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit as viewed from the rear with the lid member removed.

The foul cover unit 150 is attached to the right side in the rear view in the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101. The foul cover unit 150 is fired by the ball launcher 540 with a weaker force (a launch force that cannot reach the game area 5a) than a predetermined force (a launch force that can reach the game area 5a) and the game area 5a of the game board 5 The game ball B (foul ball) that has not reached the inside is guided to the lower plate 202, and the game ball B paid out from the payout device 580 is guided to the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202. .
As shown in the figure, the foul cover unit 150 includes a shallow box-shaped unit main body 151 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and opened on the front side, and a flat lid member attached to the front surface of the unit main body 151. 152.
The foul cover unit 150 penetrates back and forth in the upper left corner when viewed from the front, and the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full ball path unit 610 of the main body frame 4 and the upper tray ball supply port 211a which is a sphere opening of the tray unit 200. And a through ball passage 150a that communicates with the lower full tank discharge passage 610b of the lower full tank path unit 610 of the main body frame 4 that opens rearward on the lower right side of the through ball passage 150a when viewed from the front. And a full ball receiving port 150b.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 is opened upward on the right side when viewed from the front of the full ball receiving port 150b, and the momentum unit 540 is launched from the launch rail 544 by the ball launcher 540 of the main body frame 4, but lacks momentum. A foul ball receiving portion 150c that receives a game ball B (foul ball) that has fallen into a foul ball drop opening 1013 formed between the firing rail 544 and the outer rail 1001 without reaching the game area 5a, and a front view right A lower tray ball supply port 211c that is opened forward in the vicinity of the lower corner and that releases the game ball B received by the full ball receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving unit 150c and that serves as a ball opening of the dish unit 200. Sphere discharge port 150d communicating with the sphere release port 150d (strictly, a storage passage 150e described later) and a communication passage connecting the foul ball receiver 150c Is provided with a 50h, the. The communication passage 150h includes an upper passage wall 150i disposed on the lower side of the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c with a slope opposite to the bottom wall 150g, and approximately 1 game ball from the upper passage wall 150i. It consists of a lower passage wall 150j arranged in parallel at a distance of the piece, with a start end opening upward at a downwardly inclined end portion of the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c, and a terminal end portion of the storage passage 150e. Open downward.
A series of passages from the foul ball drop opening 1013 established between the launch rail 544 and the outer rail 1001 to the ball discharge port 150d through the foul ball receiving portion 150c, the communication passage 150h and the storage passage 150e are returned to the foul ball. A return passage portion 1014 is formed by a series of elements.

  Further, the foul cover unit 150 is formed between the full ball receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving unit 150c and the ball discharge port 150d by the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152, and stores a predetermined amount of the game ball B. A storage passage 150e having a possible size is provided.

  The through-sphere passage 150 a is formed across both the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152. The full ball receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving portion 150c are formed in the unit main body 151. The ball discharge port 150d is formed in the lid member 152. The storage passage 150e is formed by the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152.

  Further, the foul cover unit 150 constitutes a part of the inner wall of the storage passage 150e, and has a flat plate-like movable piece 153 attached to the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152 so that the lower end thereof is rotatable, and the movable piece 153. A full tank detection sensor 154 that detects rotation in a direction away from the storage passage 150e, and a spring 155 that biases the movable piece 153 toward the storage passage 150e.

  When the inside of the lower plate 202 of the dish unit 200 is filled with the game ball B and the game ball B is not released from the ball discharge port 150d to the lower plate 202 side, the foul cover unit 150 is somewhat in the storage passage 150e. The number of game balls B can be stored. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the upper end of the movable piece 153 moves away from the storage passage 150e against the biasing force of the spring 155 by the weight of the game balls B. Thus, the movable piece 153 rotates, and the rotation is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154. Accordingly, since it can be determined that the lower tray 202 is full of the game balls B, when the full tank detection sensor 154 detects the full tank, the payout of the game balls B beyond this is stopped. At the same time, it is possible to notify the player, a staff member of the game hall, and the like so as to prompt the player to cancel the full tank 202.

  The foul cover unit 150 is attached to the rear side of the unit main body 151 and below the through ball passage 150a, and the payout passage opening / closing door of the lower full ball path unit 610 in the payout unit 560 (to be described later) of the main body frame 4. A door opening / closing contact portion 150f with which the operation protrusion 613a of 613 can contact is provided (see FIG. 91). The door opening / closing contact portion 150f is inclined so that the rear surface moves forward as it goes downward. When the operating protrusion 613a of the discharge passage opening / closing door 613 contacts the door opening / closing contact portion 150f, the discharge passage opening / closing door 613 is rotated so that the downstream end of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full tank discharge passage 610b ( The front opening) can be opened.

  Further, the foul cover unit 150 is provided with an operation line invalidating member 7000 as second fraud prevention means for suppressing fraud due to the illegal ball Q to which the operation line L is attached. The foul ball dropping opening 1013 opened between the rails 1001 is provided with operation line invalidating members 7000H and 7000S as third fraud prevention means.

The second operation line disabling member 7000 provided in the foul cover unit 150 is an internal space between the upper passage wall 150i of the communication passage 150h and the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c. As shown in the drawing, both lateral projections 7001 are fitted and supported in the mounting holes 151h of the unit main body 151 and the mounting holes 152h of the lid member 152, and are fixed (adhered) to the upper surface of the upper passage wall 150i. Furthermore, from the viewpoint of safety, the unit main body 151 and the cover member 152 are externally covered and accommodated so that the hands of employees, game machine assembly workers, and the like are difficult to contact.
A specific operation line invalidating member 7000 includes the same components as the operation line invalidating member 700 provided in the ball feeding unit 140, and corresponds to the bent first piece 701 in FIG. The first piece 7010 to be opened and the second piece 7020 extended from the convex portion 7001 corresponding to the straight second piece 702 are opened in a direction facing the flow direction of the sphere of the communication passage 150h. A V-shaped shearing part 7000v is formed.
In addition, as shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 37B, the foul cover unit 150 of this embodiment has a lid member 152 that forms the foul cover unit 150 at the center of the V-shaped shearing portion 7000v of the operation line invalidating member 7000. The inner surface of the operation line invalidating member 7000 is directed to the shearing portion 7000v at the folded portion between the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c and the upper passage wall 150i of the communication passage 150h. A tapered guiding portion 150k that can guide the operation line L is provided. Specifically, the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c has a surface width necessary for the game ball to flow down on its upper surface, and is directed toward the lid member 152 toward the folded portion with the upper passage wall 150i. The first inclined portion 150ka descending to the operation line invalidating member 7000 side, and the width narrows toward the shearing portion 7000v of the operation line invalidating member 7000 along the lid member 152 so as to be continuous with the first inclined portion 150ka. A tapered portion 150k having a tapered shape (a shape capable of capturing the operation line L) and a second inclined portion 150kb. Then, when the operation line L that receives tension by rolling of the illegal sphere Q or pulling from outside is brought into sliding contact with the guide portion 150k, the first inclined portion 150ka is changed from the first inclined portion 150ka by the tension applied to the operation line L. The operation line L is guided to the operation line invalidating member 7000 so as to slide along the second inclined portion 150 kb. Thus, the operation line L can be reliably captured by the operation line invalidating member 7000. In this way, it is responsible for the smooth flow of the normal foul sphere and the guidance of the operation line L attached to the illegal sphere Q. In order to make it easier to capture the operation line L, the corner portions of the first inclined portion 150ka and the second inclined portion 150kb of the guide portion 150k may be formed in a curved shape.

Since the second operation line disabling member 7000 provided in the foul cover unit 150 is configured as described above, the operation line L is set using the space communicating from the lower tray ball supply port 211c to the game area 5a. The illegal ball Q that has been attached is allowed to enter the game area 5a and the manipulation line L on the lower tray ball supply port 211c side is operated to form an illegal ball flow path using the illegal ball Q. Unauthorized actions that cause the ball Q to be taken in and out of the first starting port or the like can be suppressed.
For example, a fraudulent act (hereinafter referred to as “illegal act”) in which the illegal ball Q is pushed into the return passage portion 1014 from the lower tray ball supply port 211c using a dedicated tool such as a cell plate and is caused to flow backward to the launch position of the ball launcher 540 A ”) is performed, and when the illegal ball Q goes over the folded portion between the upper passage wall 150i of the communication passage 150h and the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c and goes to the firing position of the firing rail 544, When pulled (with tension applied), the operation line L wraps around the U-turn along the folded portion. Then, the operation line L is guided by the operation line invalidating member 7000 along the taper of the guide portion 150k, enters the V-shaped shearing portion 7000v by the first piece 7010 and the second piece 7020, and finally cuts. As a result, the operation line L cannot be operated, so that it is possible to suppress an illegal act using the illegal sphere Q.
In addition, a plurality of illegal balls Q are connected to the operation line L, and one of them is sent from the hitting ball supply port 142a to the launch position, which is intentionally made into a foul ball, and a lower dish ball supply port 211c which is a ball opening. Even when a fraudulent act (hereinafter referred to as “fraud act B”) is performed in which the operation line L connected to the fraudulent ball that has become a foul ball is grabbed and the subsequent fraudulent ball Q is launched into the game area 5a. The operation line L existing at the folded portion between the upper passage wall 150i of the communication passage 150h and the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c is pulled by the subsequent launch of the illegal sphere Q (tension is applied) and the operation line. L is pressed against the folded portion, and the operation line L enters the shearing part 7000v and is cut in the same manner as described above. As a result, the operation line L cannot be operated. OK To become. FIG. 37A and FIG. 37B are explanatory diagrams assuming a case where an illegal act B is performed. In addition, for the above-mentioned fraudulent act B, there is a possibility that the operation line invalidating member 700 or the like as the first fraud prevention means cannot sufficiently exert an effect on the illegal sphere Q that becomes a foul sphere (for example, a foul sphere is obtained) In some cases, even if the illegal ball Q is fired with a certain degree of strength, the operation line L may not be invalidated by the first fraud prevention unit. Therefore, the present embodiment reinforces the fraud countermeasure by the first fraud prevention unit. It also has an effect. For this reason, when targeting the fraudulent act B, the operation line invalidating members 700 and 7000 serving as the first and second fraud preventing means, and the operation line invalidating member 7000H serving as the third fraud preventing means described later. , 7000S are preferably used together as appropriate, and the first operation line disabling member 700 and the second operation line disabling member 7000 or the third operation line disabling member 7000H, 7000S, which are different from the first operation line disabling member 700, are provided. It is good to install together in the pachinko machine 1. In this case, the first operation line disabling member 700 and the second operation line disabling member 7000 are not conspicuous because they are provided together on the door frame 3 side and are not exposed to the outside. Even if the door frame 3 is opened due to the trouble, fraud countermeasure information is difficult to leak. In addition, the operation line invalidating members 700 and 7000 can easily maintain the crime prevention performance if the operation line invalidating members 700 and 7000 are exchanged together with the door frame 3 because the reduction in sharpness or the like affects the crime prevention performance.

  By the way, the above-described operation line invalidating members 700 and 7000 serving as the first and second fraud prevention means cut and invalidate the operation line L by the shearing portions 700v and 7000v. In other words, the manipulation line L is sandwiched between, for example, two metal plates 7011 and 7022 so that the flexible manipulation line L cannot be pushed or pulled, and the manipulation of the illegal sphere Q connected to the manipulation line L cannot be easily performed. You may make it invalidate like this.

Specifically, for example, as shown in FIGS. 37C and 37D, the operation line invalidating member 7000 is formed by two metal plates 7011 and 7022 joined at the hatched portion of the enlarged view of FIG. The first half of the non-joining portion at the tip of 7022 is expanded in a V shape to form an introduction guide portion 7033, and the latter half of the non-joining portion is designated as a pinching portion 7044. Such an operation line invalidating member 7000 is fixedly attached to the inner surface of the lid member 152, and further, for safety reasons, it is difficult to contact the hands of employees, game machine assemblers, and the like. And the cover member 152 is covered and accommodated from the outside.
According to the operation line invalidating member 7000, as shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 37D, the operation line L is pulled by the illegal ball Q and the upper passage wall 150i of the communication passage 150h and the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c. When the fold-back portion of the metal plate 701 wraps around in a U-turn shape, it is guided by the operation line invalidating member 7000 along the taper of the guide portion 150k of the fold-back portion, and the clamping portion in the latter half of the non-joint portion between the metal plate 7011 and the metal plate 7022 7044 is pinched and pinched like tweezers.
As a result, the illegal ball Q that has flowed back from the lower dish ball supply port 211c due to the illegal act A described above reaches the launch position of the launch rail 544, or the illegal ball Q that has been intentionally made a foul ball by the illegal act B. Can be prevented from reaching the lower dish ball supply port 211c, which is a sphere opening, and the operation line L is sandwiched between the operation line invalidating members 7000 even if it reaches that position. Therefore, no matter how much the flexible operation line L is pushed in from the lower tray ball supply port 211c, the flexible operation line L is only loosened, and as a result, the amount of feeding of the operation line L cannot be adjusted. Since the height cannot be adjusted), it is possible to suppress fraud using the illegal sphere Q.
In the above-described embodiment, the first half of the non-joining portion at the tip of the two metal plates 7011 and 7022 is expanded in a V shape to form the introduction guide portion 7033, and the latter half of the non-joining portion is the clamping portion 7044. However, instead of this, a single metal plate is bent so that the plate surfaces overlap each other, and the leading end portion of the bent one plate surface is expanded in a V-shape to introduce guide portion 7033 (guidance portion). In addition, the sandwiched width portion of both plate surfaces may be used as the retaining portion 7044. Thereby, the assembly work efficiency by reducing the number of parts of a metal plate can be improved, producing the same effect as the above-described fraud deterrent effect.

  Further, although not shown, the operation line invalidating member 7000 that clamps the operation line L is provided with a double-sided tape in the gap of the second inclined portion 150 kb of FIG. 37D or filled with an adhesive that does not cure. Then, an adhesive portion may be formed, and the operation line L guided to the second inclined portion 150 kb may be adhered to the adhesive portion so as not to move.

Further, the operation line invalidating member 7000 that clamps the operation line L is changed from the above-described one composed of the two metal plates 7011 and 7022 to a coil spring as shown in FIG. The guiding portion 150k may be installed and formed so that the guiding direction of the second inclined portion 150kb and the central axis of the guiding portion 150k are substantially orthogonal. The operation line L guided by the second inclined portion 150 kb is fitted between the adjacent coils of the coil spring and clamped.
Coil springs that have a structure in which adjacent coils are in contact with each other when no load is applied, such as tension coil springs and torsion coil springs, need to be placed in a compressed state like compression coil springs. It is advantageous in terms of installation work.
Of course, the coil spring may be installed in a straight state when there is no load. However, as shown in FIG. 37E, the coil on the entry side of the operation line L is bent so as to be slightly expanded. This is preferable because the operation line L can enter smoothly.
Thus, when the operation line invalidating member 7000 is formed of a coil spring, the cost can be reduced because it can be manufactured at low cost.

  Further, a foreign object such as a cell plate is inserted into the operation line invalidating member 7000 from the sphere opening (lower dish ball supply port 211c), and the cell plate closes the guide portion 150k to the operation line invalidating member 7000. In order to cope with this, in the form described above to cope with this, the course changing part of the return path part 1014 of the foul ball (the part corresponding to the upper part of the lower dish ball supply port 211c in this embodiment) A slit 1015 into which such a cell plate (foreign matter) enters is formed (see FIG. 37A). Thereby, the further unauthorized operation | work which inserts a foreign material from the opening for balls (lower tray ball supply port 211c) and blocks the guide part 150k can also be suppressed. In addition, as a countermeasure for an illegal work to insert a foreign object such as a cell plate from the opening for the sphere (the lower tray ball supply port 211c) and close the guide portion 150k, a foreign object such as a cell plate is used as in the slit 1015 described above. As shown by a two-dot chain line in FIG. 37A, the configuration is provided with a protruding obstacle 1016 that impinges on a foreign object such as a cell plate and obstructs the arrival to the guiding part 150k, as shown in FIG. 37A. As a result, a higher level of fraud prevention may be achieved.

  Further, the first and second operation line invalidating members 700 and 7000 described so far have a static structure in which they are invalidated after the operation line L enters, but FIG. 37K, FIG. 37L, and FIG. As shown in FIGS. 37N and 37P, a dynamic operation line invalidating member 7000D that actively invalidates the operation line L due to the presence of the illegal sphere Q may be used.

  FIG. 37K, FIG. 37L, and FIG. 37M show one specific example of the dynamic operation line invalidating member 7000D. The operation line invalidating member 7000D is a foul ball return passage (return passage portion 1014). Is pivotally attached to the path changing portion (the corner corresponding to the upper portion of the lower dish ball supply port 211c).

That is, the operation line invalidating member 7000D includes a horizontal plate-shaped ball receiving portion 2645, a plate-shaped invalidating portion 2646 that protrudes perpendicularly to the right end of the ball receiving portion 2645, and a ball receiving portion in FIG. A shaft hole 2647 formed at a corner where the disabling part 2646 and the disabling part 2646 intersect, and an arcuate ball stop 2648 centered on the shaft hole 2647 protruding from the upper edge of the disabling part 2646 to the right. A support shaft 2649 implanted in the foul cover unit 150 is rotatably inserted into the shaft hole 2647 and rotated about 90 ° counterclockwise from the ball receiving posture of FIG. 37L (a). It can swing to the release posture of b). Further, the operation line invalidating member 7000D is provided with a balance weight 2650 on the opposite side across the shaft hole 2647 of the ball receiving portion 2645 and the invalidating portion 2646, and the ball receiving portion 7000D is energized by the bias of the balance weight 2650. 37B (a) is maintained in a state where no external force (specifically, a load for one game ball) is applied to the portion 2645, while a load for one game ball is applied to the ball receiver 2645. When acted, it swings to the release posture of FIG. 37L (b).
Further, the edge of the disabling portion 2646 of the operation line disabling member 7000D is an intersecting side portion 2651 that turns around the shaft hole 2647 and crosses the foul ball return passage (return passage portion 1014). When the disabling member 7000D swings to the release posture shown in FIG. 37L (b), the intersecting side portion 2651 is fitted into the receiving portion 2652 of the foul ball return passage.

When a normal foul ball flows into the foul cover unit 150 having the dynamic operation line invalidating member 7000D described above, the foul ball passes through the communication passage 150h of the foul ball return passage as shown in FIG. 37L (a). Immediately after flowing down and changing the course downward by the course changing unit, it is placed on the ball receiving part 2645 of the operation line invalidating member 7000D in the ball receiving attitude. The operation line disabling member 7000D rotates counterclockwise about the support shaft 2649 by the load of the foul ball, and changes to the release posture shown in FIG. 37L (b). Then, the foul sphere placed on the ball receiving portion 2645 of the operation line invalidating member 7000D is released to the downstream storage passage 150e, so that the operation line invalidating member 7000D released from the foul ball is energized by the balance weight 2650. To return to the original ball receiving position.
In rare cases, a plurality of foul balls may be generated at one time. Even in such a case, while the previous foul ball is processed by the operation line invalidating member 7000D, the subsequent foul ball is as shown in FIG. 37L (b). The arc-shaped ball stop portion 2648 stops the operation line, and the operation line invalidating member 7000D moves backward to continue the processing. Therefore, even if a plurality of foul balls are generated simultaneously, they can be processed one by one without any trouble.

Next, the fraud act B described above is connected to the foul cover unit 150 including the dynamic operation line invalidating member 7000D (a plurality of illegal balls Q are connected to the operation line L, and one of them is launched from the hitting ball supply port 142a. The foul sphere is intentionally weakly fired to form a foul sphere, which is taken out from the lower tray ball supply port 211c, which is the opening for the sphere, and the operation line L connected to the illegal sphere is grabbed and the subsequent fraud When the illegal ball Q flows due to the illegal act of launching the ball Q into the game area 5a), the illegal ball Q flows down the communication passage 150h as shown in FIG. Immediately after the change, it is placed on the ball receiving portion 2645 of the operation line invalidating member 7000D in the ball receiving posture. Then, the operation line invalidating member 7000D rotates counterclockwise around the support shaft 2649 by the load of the irregular ball Q, and changes to the release posture of FIG. 37M (b). At this time, the disabling part 2646 of the operation line disabling member 7000D also rotates, and the crossing edge part 2651 at the edge of the operation line disabling member 7000D crosses the foul ball return passage and fits into the receiving part 2652 on the passage side. When crossing the foul ball return passage, the operation line L passing there naturally also crosses, so that the operation line L is sandwiched between the intersecting side portion 2651 and the receiving portion 2652 as shown in FIG. Pinch). Then, since the illegal sphere Q connected to the operation line L cannot be dropped, the ball receiving portion 2645 of the operation line invalidating member 7000D is not released from the illegal sphere Q and continues the release posture. Of course, since the operation line invalidating member 7000D is in a position that cannot be reached even if a hand is put in from the lower dish ball supply port 211c, which is a sphere opening, there is no possibility that the illegal ball Q that stops at this position is taken out from the outside.
If it is made difficult for the operation line L to reversely move by meandering the operation line L between the intersecting side portion 2651 and the receiving portion 2652, the operation line L is captured by the operation line invalidating member 7000D. It is also difficult to pull the illegal ball Q back to the hitting ball supply port 142a. Thereby, the illegal sphere Q remaining on the operation line invalidating member 7000D can be stored and collected as a evidence sphere.

The dynamic operation line invalidating member 7000D described above uses the dead weight of the illegal sphere Q. However, the operation line invalidating member 7000D is operated by the electric drive means as shown in FIG. 37N. Also good.
That is, the operation line disabling member 7000D in FIG. 37N connects the plunger 2654 of the solenoid 2653 as an electric drive means to the portion where the balance weight 2650 is provided, and a ball detector connected to the disabling part 2646 of the operation line disabling member 7000D. 2655 is provided, and when a game ball is placed on the ball receiving portion 2645 and detected by the ball detector 2655, the plunger 2654 of the solenoid 2653 is raised, and the operation line invalidating member 7000D is changed from the ball receiving posture to the released posture. When the game ball is released from the ball receiving portion 2645 and is detected by the ball detector 2655 (change in signal from presence to absence of the game ball), the plunger 2654 of the solenoid 2653 is lowered and the operation line is changed. The disabling member 7000D moves back from the release posture to the ball receiving posture. That.
When a normal foul ball is placed on the ball receiving portion 2645 of the operation line invalidating member 7000D, the generation and release of the foul ball is detected by a change in the signal of the ball detector 2655, and the solenoid 2653 is received in response to the detection. In order to operate appropriately, the foul balls are processed one by one in the same manner as the operation line invalidating member 7000D using its own weight.
On the other hand, when the illegal ball Q is placed on the ball receiving portion 2645 of the operation line invalidating member 7000D, the illegal ball Q is detected by the ball detector 2655, so that the plunger 2654 of the solenoid 2653 is raised and the operation line is invalidated. Although the member 7000D changes to the release posture with the illegal ball Q, as described above, the operation line L is pinched by the intersecting side portion 2651 and the receiving portion 2652 of the invalidating portion 2646, and the illegal ball Q does not fall. Since no release signal is issued from the ball detector 2655, the plunger 2654 of the solenoid 2653 stops at the raised position. Therefore, since the illegal ball Q cannot be taken out from the target ball opening, it is possible to prevent fraud.

The above-described dynamic operation line invalidating member 7000D cuts and invalidates the operation line L by providing a cutting blade in the intersecting side portion 2651 and / or the receiving portion 2652 of the invalidating portion 2646. be able to. Further, the operation line invalidating member 7000D of the present embodiment has a function of preventing the intrusion of the illegal sphere Q from the sphere opening side in a state where the ball receiving portion 2645 blocks the return passage portion 104. It can also be used as a reverse prevention means. Therefore, a higher fraud prevention function is exhibited.
In addition to the above-described configuration, the dynamic operation line invalidating member 7000D has, for example, an invalidating portion formed in a shutter plate structure that linearly advances and retracts to open and close the communication passage 150h, and the front end of the shutter plate. Is formed as an intersection that crosses the foul ball return passage, and a ball detector is installed in the middle of the flow path of the communication passage 150h and downstream of the movable region of the intersection, and the movable region of the intersection is The invalid sphere Q after passing is detected by the sphere detector so as to activate the invalidating portion, and the operation line L is pinched or cut at the crossing side crossing the communication passage 150h. May be.
The dynamic operation line invalidating member 7000D described above can also be applied to the first operation line invalidating member 700 of the ball feeding unit 140. Specifically, the ball feeding solenoid 145 provided in the ball feeding unit 140 is replaced with the solenoid 2653 of the operation line invalidating member 7000D, and the ball feeding member 144 is replaced with the operation line invalidating member 7000D. In this case, since the illegal ball Q stops in the ball feeding unit 140 and is not supplied to the ball launching device 540, the illegal deterrent effect can be reliably increased.

FIG. 37P shows a dynamic operation line invalidating member 7000D that winds up the operation line L and invalidates it.
That is, the operation line disabling member 7000D is a square ring disabling portion 2646 that is attached to the communication passage 150h of the foul cover unit 150 so as to be rotatable about a rotation shaft 2656 oriented in a direction orthogonal to the passage. And a motor 2657 which is an electric drive means for rotating the invalidating portion 2646, and a horizontal bar crossing the communication passage 150h of the invalidating portion 2646 as an intersecting side portion 2651 downstream from the movable (rotating) region of the intersecting side portion 2651 The invalidation unit 2646 is rotated once each time a foul sphere is detected by the sphere detector 2655.
When a normal foul ball flows into the foul cover unit 150 provided with such an operation line invalidating member 7000D, the foul ball enters the communication passage 150h and passes through the invalidating unit 2646, and the foul ball detects the ball. The invalidation unit 2646 idles once by being detected by the detector 2655, but the foul sphere flows down as it is and is discharged to the outside through the sphere opening.
On the other hand, when the illegal ball Q due to the fraud act B described above flows into the foul cover unit 150 provided with the operation line invalidating member 7000D, the operation line L is also invalidated when the illegal ball Q enters the invalidation unit 2646. Since the illegal sphere Q is detected by the sphere detector 2655 and the invalidation unit 2646 makes one rotation because it passes through the invalidation unit 2646, the operation line L is wound around the invalidation unit 2646. Therefore, since the illegal ball Q stops in the communication passage 150h, there is no possibility that the illegal ball Q will reach the unauthorized person.
Note that the sphere detector 2655 for detecting the illegal sphere Q may be displaced by receiving the tension of the operation line L attached to the illegal sphere Q. In such a case, the illegal sphere Q can be reliably detected. Therefore, useless emptying of the operation line invalidating member 7000D that winds up the operation line L described above can be eliminated.

The following description of the dynamic operation line invalidating member includes the following technical idea.
“A game area where games are played with game balls,
A ball launcher that launches game balls;
A launch passage portion that forms a launch ball passage communicating with the game area from a launch position of the ball launch device; and
A return passage portion that forms a foul ball return passage that connects a foul ball drop opening that is established in the middle of the launch ball passage and a ball opening that discharges a game ball to the outside of the aircraft,
Fraud prevention means capable of preventing operation from the front of the operation line attached to the illegal ball,
The fraud prevention means is an operation line invalidating member that invalidates the operation line by pinching, cutting, or winding.
The operation line invalidating member includes an intersection side portion that traverses the foul ball return passage of the game ball, and operates the intersection side portion after the illegal ball passes through the movable region of the intersection side portion, thereby the foul ball. A gaming machine that traverses the return passage, and thus invalidates the operation line passing through the foul ball return passage at the intersection by pinching, cutting, or winding. "

  Next, as shown in FIGS. 10A, 10B, 37A, 37I, and 37J, the third fraud prevention means provided in the foul ball dropping opening 1013 described above is the end (terminal) of the firing rail 544. And an operation line invalidating member 7000S provided at an end of the outer rail 1001 (specifically, a rail base 1001x made of resin).

The operation line disabling member 7000H provided at the projecting side end of the firing rail 544 is a sharp cutting blade, and a metal triangular plate is comb-toothed so that the operator's hand does not directly touch the blade edge. It covers with the safety cover part 1017 arranged in order. The cutting blade is supported by the safety cover portion 1017.
Therefore, as described above, an illegal act of pushing the illegal ball Q back into the return passage portion 1014 using a dedicated tool such as a cell plate from the lower tray ball supply port 211c and sending it back to the launch position of the ball launcher 540 When A is performed, when the illegal ball Q is placed on the end of the firing rail 544 and rolls by tilting toward the launching position, the manipulation line L is pulled (with tension applied) and the operation line L becomes an operation line invalidating member. It is cut by touching a cutting blade of 7000H. Therefore, the operation line L cannot be operated.
Further, a plurality of illegal balls Q are connected to the operation line L, and one of them is sent from the hitting ball supply port 142a to the launch position, and is intentionally made into a foul ball from the lower dish ball supply port 211c which is a ball opening. Even when an illegal act B is performed in which the operation line L connected to the illegal ball Q is grabbed and the subsequent illegal ball Q is launched into the game area 5a, the illegal ball Q becomes a foul ball and the return passage portion 1014 is Since the operation line L touches the cutting blade of the operation line invalidating member 7000H in the process of dropping, the operation line L is cut at that stage. Therefore, the operation line L cannot be operated.

On the other hand, the operation line disabling member 7000S provided on the resin rail base 1001x constituting the outer rail 1001 has a large number of hard resin wires in a brush shape as shown in FIGS. 10A, 37A and 37I. Protruding.
According to the operation line invalidating member 7000S, if the illegal ball Q reaches the game area 5a and hangs in a state of being connected to the operation line L, the end of the operation line L is a lower tray ball supply port which is a ball opening. Even if an unauthorized person is grasping via 211c, when the operation line L is pulled from the outside to raise the illegal ball Q in the game area 5a, the operation line L is pulled between the wires of the operation line invalidating member 7000S by the tension. After that, even if the hand that manipulates the operation line L to lower the illegal ball Q is loosened, the operation line L is less likely to slip due to the resistance received from the wire group of the operation line invalidating member 7000S. The movement of the loosened hand is not transmitted to the illegal ball Q. That is, since the illegal ball Q in the game area 5a cannot be lowered, the illegal act using the illegal ball Q can be suppressed as a result.

As described above, the third fraud prevention means is effective in the operation line invalidating member 7000H on the firing rail 544 side in the initial stage of the fraud acts A and B, and even if it is broken, the outer rail 1001 Since the operation line invalidating member 7000S on the side exhibits an effect, a higher level of fraud prevention effect can be obtained.
Of course, any one of the operation line invalidating members 7000H and 7000S can be used alone, and the specific invalidating members of the operation line invalidating member 7000H and the operation line invalidating member 7000S are both used. The forms may be interchanged or the same invalidating member may be employed.
In addition to the case where the operation line invalidating members 7000H and 7000S are made as separate parts and attached to the firing rail 544 and the outer rail 1001 as in this embodiment, for example, the operation plate is invalidated by appropriately processing a metal plate constituting the firing rail 544, for example. The forming member 7000H is integrally formed, or a wire rod is integrally formed on a resin-made rail base 1001x constituting the outer rail 1001, or V-grooves are formed at corners of the rail base 1001x as shown in FIG. 8B. It is also possible to engrave a pin-shaped clamping part 7000Sv and attract the operation line L to the back of the groove of the clamping part 7000Sv.
Furthermore, the operation line disabling member 7000S of the outer rail 1001 has the same configuration as the second operation line disabling member 7000 as shown in FIG. 37J, for example, the two metal plates 7011 described in FIG. 37C and FIG. 37D. , 7022, and a guide base 150k including a first inclined portion 150ka and a second inclined portion 150kb may be provided on the rail base 1001x of the outer rail 1001.

As described above, the second operation line disabling member 7000 for disabling the operation line L attached to the illegal sphere Q is provided in the return passage 1014. Similarly, the third operation line disabling member 7000 is the foul ball. Although the form provided in the drop port 1013 has been described, of course, the present invention is not limited to the above form.
For example, in the above embodiment, the operation line invalidating member 7000 is provided in the folded portion between the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c and the upper passage wall 150i of the communication passage 150h, that is, the entrance portion of the communication passage 150h. The disabling member 7000 is provided at the exit portion (see arrow z in FIG. 37A) of the communication passage 150h, the rear surface side of the ball discharge port 150d in FIG. 36B (a), or the outer rail constituting the foul ball dropping port 1013 The operation line L is a part where the operation line L abuts against a part of the return passage portion 1014 and bends, such as being provided at each of the start end part 1001 and the end part of the launch rail 544, and the operation line L is illegal with the weight of the illegal sphere Q etc. Provided in any position in the return passage 1014 on the condition that it is a part that receives a pressing force when it is going to be stretched straight by receiving tension by a person's pulling force. It may be so. In addition, the installation position of the operation line invalidating member 7000 of this embodiment is a position where the player cannot touch even if the fingertip is inserted from the ball opening, and this position is the player's safety aspect and the operation line invalidity. It is preferable in view of a crime prevention surface that makes it difficult to perform illegal manipulations on the adjusting member 7000 itself.

Further, in this embodiment, the operation line invalidating member 7000 is provided so as to be shifted to one side of the communication passage 150h. However, as shown in FIGS. A cutting blade may be arranged. 37F (a) and 37 (b), the end of the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c and the start end of the communication passage 150h are comb-shaped safety cover portions 1017, and the cutting edge of the cutting blade is the operator. Is not touching. In this case, the cutting blade of the operation line disabling member 7000 uses a well-known broken blade structure or chip structure, which is installed in the sheath-like holder portion 1018 on the upper surface of the upper passage wall 150i and the unit main body 151. If the loading port 1019 and the discharge port 1020 are provided in each of the lid members 152 so that the cutting blade can be pushed out and replaced with a new one, the sharpness can always be maintained.
37F (a) and 37 (b), reference numeral 1021 denotes a clip part for the operation line L cut into the trough of the safety cover part 1017, and the operation line L is connected to the clip part 1021. You can bite in. Therefore, even if the operation line disabling member 7000 of the cutting blade fails to cut the operation line L, the operation line L can bite into the holding split line portion 1021 such as the bottom wall 150g. Will improve.

  Moreover, although the example in which the foul ball is returned to the lower plate is shown in the above-described form, there is a gaming machine having a structure in which the foul ball is returned to the upper plate (including the case where there is no lower plate). In this case, a fraudulent act (the fraudulent acts A and B described above) that causes the illegal ball Q attached with the operation line L to enter the game area 5a using the space communicating from the upper bowl supply port (ball opening) to the game area 5a. Fraud). In the case of such a gaming machine, it is exemplified that the second fraud prevention means is provided at a predetermined portion of the foul return passage located in a space communicating from the upper tray ball supply port to the gaming area 5a as in the above-described embodiment. it can.

  In the above-described embodiment, the foul cover unit 150 constituting the return passage portion 1014 is provided on the door frame 3 side. However, the foul cover unit 150 may be provided on the main body frame 4 side.

  Moreover, in the above-mentioned form, although the 2nd fraud prevention means was provided in the foul cover unit 150 which comprises the return channel | path part 1014, you may make it provide multiple. For example, in the case of a passage configuration in which a plurality of bent portions such as the folded portion of the above-described form are formed in the return passage portion 1014, each of the bent portions (for each of the folded portions) has a second shape as described above. A fraud prevention means may be provided. Thereby, it becomes possible to further enhance the deterrence effect of fraud using the illegal ball Q.

  In the above-described embodiment, the metal plate is provided as the second fraud prevention means in the foul cover unit 150 constituting the return passage portion 1014. However, a resin molded product having the same configuration is provided instead of the metal plate. Or, the molding itself of the foul cover unit 150 may have a special shape so as to function as the second fraud prevention means. For example, the metal plate which is the second fraud prevention means in the above-described form is not provided, but instead, a tapered shape provided at a folded portion between the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c and the upper passage wall 150i of the communication passage 150h. In order to capture the operation line L at the narrowest part (narrowest part) of the guiding part 150k, a slit-shaped capturing part is formed in the resin molded part constituting the return passage part 1014. The operation line L attached to the illegal sphere Q may be clamped by the capture part which is the narrowest part of the guide part 150k. Even with such a configuration, an illegal deterrent effect equivalent to that of the above-described embodiment can be achieved.

In the above-described embodiment, the operation line L attached to the illegal ball Q is cut or pinched by the operation line invalidating member 7000. However, as shown in FIG. 37H and 37K, the intrusion of the illegal sphere Q from the opening for the sphere is prevented without affecting the flow of the normal foul sphere (the reverse or reverse flow of the illegal sphere Q is prevented). By providing the advance prevention means, fraud due to the illegal ball Q is prevented.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 37G, a dedicated tool such as a cell plate (foreign material) that pushes the illegal ball Q into the course changing portion of the return passage portion 1014 (the portion corresponding to the portion directly above the lower dish ball supply port 211c). In addition, it is possible to exemplify the provision of an attracting part 1022 for attracting the illegal sphere Q itself to another passage and sealing the movement (first illegal sphere reverse prevention means). As a result, it is possible to suppress an illegal act that causes the illegal sphere Q to flow backward, such as the above-described illegal action A, without affecting the flow of the normal foul sphere. In addition, a trapping valve capable of swinging only in the intrusion direction of the backflowed illegal sphere Q into the attraction portion 1022 at the entrance portion of the attraction portion 1022 (allowing intrusion to the attraction portion 1022 and A single-opening valve (not shown) that makes disengagement of the sphere Q not shown) may be provided, so that a trace using the illegal sphere Q and evidence of the illegal act can be left.
In addition, as shown in FIG. 37H, a check valve 1023 that can swing only in the flow-down direction of the game ball is provided at a predetermined portion of the return passage portion 1014 to prevent the backward movement (reverse flow) of the illegal ball Q. Yes (second illegal ball reverse prevention means). Even with such a configuration, it is possible to suppress an illegal act that causes the illegal sphere Q to flow backward, such as the above-described illegal act A, without affecting the normal flow of the foul sphere. The operation line disabling member 7000D in FIG. 37K is also a kind of check valve, and exhibits the same effect as the check valve 1023.
Of course, the static operation line invalidation member and the dynamic operation line invalidation member described above may both be provided.

  In the above embodiment, an operation line invalidating member different from the first operation line invalidating member 700 is provided in the return passage 1014. However, such an operation line invalidating member is, for example, a foul ball dropping port 1013. It may be provided between the launch position or between the foul ball dropping opening 1013 and the upper end of the inner rail 1002.

  Moreover, although what was applied to the pachinko machine 1 as a gaming machine was shown in the above-mentioned form, it is not limited to this, It applies to a pachislot machine or the gaming machine which united the pachinko machine and the pachislot machine. Even in this case, the same effect as described above can be obtained.

[3-2. Glass unit]
The glass unit 160 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30. The glass unit 160 is inserted into the glass unit mounting portion 101h from the rear and is detachably mounted so as to close the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100. The glass unit 160 allows the game area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 to be viewed from the player side (front side) when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4. The front of the region 5a is closed.

  The glass unit 160 has a frame-shaped glass frame 161 that is larger than the inner peripheral shape of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 and can be attached to the glass unit mounting portion 101h, and the outer periphery of the glass unit 161 is closed. Two transparent glass plates 162 attached to 161 and a pair of glass units for attaching the glass frame 161 to the door frame base 101 rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100. An attachment member 163.

  The glass frame 161 has a pair of attachment pieces 161a extending outwardly from a position below the upper left and right upper corners in a front view, and a band extending downward from the lower end and extending along the lower side. A plate-like locking piece 161b. The attachment piece 161 a of the glass frame 161 can be brought into contact with the protruding portion 163 b of the glass unit attachment member 163. The locking piece 161b can be inserted into a space between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 (see FIG. 97). The two glass plates 162 are respectively attached to the front end side and the rear end side of the glass frame 161, and are separated from each other in the front-rear direction so that a space is formed between them (see FIG. 97).

  The glass unit mounting member 163 is a disc-shaped base portion 163a that is rotatably attached to an axis extending in the front-rear direction on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and protrudes in a bar shape from the base portion 163a in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. And a protruding portion 163b. The glass unit attachment member 163 is rotatably attached to the outside of the upper two corners of the four corners of the door window 101a on the rear surface of the door frame base 101.

  To attach the glass unit 160 to the door frame base 101, first, the glass unit attachment member 163 attached to the door frame base 101 is rotated so that the protruding portion 163b is positioned above the base portion 163a. To do. Then, from the rear side of the door frame base 101, the locking piece 161b of the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 is inserted from above into the gap between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110. The front end of the glass frame 161 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit mounting portion 101 h of the door frame base 101. Thereafter, the glass unit mounting member 163 is rotated so that the protruding portion 163b is positioned below the base portion 163a, and the protruding portion 163b is brought into contact with the rear surface of the mounting piece 161a of the glass frame 161. Thereby, the glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base 101.

  When removing the glass unit 160 from the door frame base 101, the glass unit 160 can be removed by a procedure reverse to the above. Thereby, the glass unit 160 is detachable with respect to the door frame base 101 (door frame base unit 100).

  In the glass unit 160, when the protruding portion 163b of the glass unit mounting member 163 is in the rotational position positioned below the base portion 163a, the rearward movement of the glass frame 161 is restricted by the protruding portion 163b. Therefore, even if vibration or the like acts on the glass unit mounting member 163, the protruding portion 163b does not rotate to a position so as to be above the base portion 163a. Therefore, the restriction | limiting of the movement to the back of the glass frame 161 is not cancelled | released naturally, and the glass unit 160 does not remove | deviate from the door frame base 101 naturally.

[3-3. Security cover]
The security cover 170 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30. The security cover 170 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower rear portion of the glass unit 160, and is formed of a transparent synthetic resin. The security cover 170 is arranged with a flat plate-like main body portion 171 whose outer periphery is formed in a predetermined shape, a flat plate-like rear protruding piece 172 that protrudes rearward along the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 171, and is separated from the left and right. And a pair of locking pieces 173 that protrude forward from the main body 171 and can be locked to the rear side of the door frame base 101.

  The main body 171 of the security cover 170 is formed so that the lower end protrudes below the lower end of the glass unit 160 in a state of being attached to the door frame base unit 100. The main body 171 is formed in a shape along the lower end of the game area 5 a in the game board 5 with the upper end assembled in the pachinko machine 1. More specifically, the upper end of the main body 171 is formed in a shape along a part of an inner rail 1002 of the front constituent member 1000 to be described later, a part of the out guiding part 1003, a part of the lower right rail 1004, and the right rail 1005. The pachinko machine 1 is assembled so as not to protrude into the game area 5a.

  The rear protrusion 172 is formed over substantially the entire circumference of the outer peripheral edge of the main body 171. Therefore, the security cover 170 is formed in a shallow box shape opened rearward by the main body portion 171 and the rear protrusion 172, and has high strength and rigidity. Further, the rear protrusion 172 protrudes rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 171 different from the outer peripheral edge of the main body 171. The rear protrusion 172 protruding rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 171 is formed so as to be along a part of the outer rail 1001 in the front component member 1000 of the game board 5 in a state assembled to the pachinko machine 1. ing.

  Note that the rear protrusion 172 is not formed in a portion located between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in the game board 5 in a state assembled to the pachinko machine 1. Thereby, the game ball B (the game ball B launched by the ball launcher 540) passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 does not contact the rear protrusion 172 of the crime prevention cover 170, and the game area The game ball B is not hindered into the 5a.

  The pair of locking pieces 173 are elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 (the speaker duct 103 and the cable cover 109). Thereby, the security cover 170 can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame base unit 100.

  When the security cover 170 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the front surface of the main body portion 171 is in contact with the rear surface of the glass unit 160 (the rear end of the glass frame 161) and protrudes backward from the lower side of the main body portion 171. The removed rear protrusion 172 is inserted into the security recess 1009 of the front component member 1000. Further, the security cover 170 is in a state in which the rear protrusion 172 protruding rearward from the lower side of the main body 171 protrudes rearward from the front surface of the front structural member 1000 so as to contact the lower surface of the front structural member 1000. . Accordingly, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (the front component member 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear protruding piece 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess portion 1009 of the front component member 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire enters the game area 5a through the space between the security cover 170 and the front structural member 1000 from below the front surface of the board 5, it will be blocked by the rear protrusion 172 and the security recess 1009. The unauthorized tool can be prevented from entering the game area 5a.

[3-4. Handle unit]
The handle unit 180 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 38A is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit in the door frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 38B is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit as seen from the back. The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle attachment member 102 (see FIGS. 29 and 31 to 33) of the door frame base unit 100, and the player operates the game ball B in the upper plate 201 to play the game board 5. Can be driven into the game area 5a.

  The handle unit 180 covers the handle base 181 attached to the cylinder portion 102a of the handle attachment member 102 in the door frame base unit 100, the handle 182 rotatably attached to the front end of the handle base 181, and the front end side of the handle 182. A disc-shaped cover base 183 attached to the handle base 181; a handle decoration board 184 attached to the front side of the cover base 183 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front face; and a front side of the handle decoration board 184 so as to cover And a handle cap 185 attached to the cover base 183.

  The handle unit 180 has an inner base 186 attached to the front surface of the handle base 181 on the rear side of the handle 182 and a handle 182 attached to the front end, and is rotatably attached by the inner base 186 and the handle base 181. A shaft member 187 having a drive gear portion 187a, a transmission gear 188 meshing with the drive gear portion 187a of the shaft member 187, a detection shaft 189a rotating integrally with the transmission gear 188, and a handle base 181 and an inner And a handle rotation detection sensor 189 sandwiched between the base 186 and the base 186.

  Further, the handle unit 180 has one end attached to the handle base 181 and the other end attached to the handle 182 so that the handle 182 is returned to the initial rotation position (the rotation starting end in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front). One end side is attached to the inner base 186 and the other end side is attached to the transmission gear 188, and the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is rotated clockwise in front view via the transmission gear 188. And an auxiliary spring 191 biasing in the direction.

  The handle unit 180 includes a handle touch sensor 192 attached to the handle base 181 at the rear of the inner base 186, and a distal end projecting outward from the left side of the outer peripheral surface of the front end of the handle base 181 when viewed from the front. A single button 193 which is attached to the handle base 181 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending rearward and forward on the handle base 181 at the end side behind the inner base 186, and a single button attached to the handle base 181 by detecting the pressing operation of the single button 193 And an operation sensor 194.

  A handle base 181 of the handle unit 180 includes a cylindrical base portion 181a extending in the front-rear direction, a disk-shaped front end portion 181b protruding radially from the front end of the base portion 181a, and an inward direction from the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical base portion 181a. And three groove portions 181c formed in the circumferential direction at irregular intervals and extending in the axial direction. The base portion 181 a of the handle base 181 is formed so that the outer diameter is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the cylindrical portion 102 a of the handle mounting member 102. Further, the three groove portions 181c are formed at positions corresponding to the three protrusions 102c of the cylindrical portion 102a in the handle mounting member 102. Accordingly, the base portion 181a can be inserted into the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 with the three groove portions 181c aligned with the three protrusions 102c, and the protrusions 102c are respectively inserted into the three groove portions 181c. By being inserted, the handle base 181 cannot be rotated relative to the handle mounting member 102.

  The handle 182 includes four first protrusions 182a, second protrusions 182b, third protrusions 182c, and fourth protrusions 182d that protrude outward in the circumferential direction from the outer peripheral surface, and a rotation shaft (shaft member 187). Two slits 182e extending in a circular arc shape as a center and penetrating in the front-rear direction, projecting rearward from a position inside the rotation center with respect to the center of rotation, and the other end side of the handle return spring 190 is locked A locking projection 182f.

  The four first protrusions 182a, the second protrusion 182b, the third protrusion 182c, and the fourth protrusion 182d are sequentially provided in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. More specifically, the first protrusion 182a bulges so that the side surface in the clockwise direction of the front view of the portion that protrudes most from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 bulges outward, and is counterclockwise on the opposite side. The side surface of the direction is recessed (curled) so as to curve inward. The portion of the second protrusion 182b that protrudes most from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from the portion of the first protrusion 182a that protrudes most in the clockwise direction by a rotation angle of about 85 degrees, and from the first protrusion 182a. Slightly low. The second protrusion 182b bulges so that the side surface in the clockwise direction of the front projection of the second protrusion 182b bulges outward, and the side surface in the counterclockwise direction that is the opposite side is curved inward. And is formed in a shape similar to the first protrusion 182a.

  The portion of the third protrusion 182c that protrudes most from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is away from the most protruded portion of the second protrusion 182b in a clockwise direction by a rotation angle of about 70 degrees, and the first protrusion 182a It protrudes at about half the height. The third protrusion 182c is inclined substantially linearly on the side surfaces on both sides, and more gently than the side surface in the counterclockwise direction where the side surface in the clockwise direction is the opposite side. The fourth protrusion 182d has a portion that protrudes most from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 away from the most protruded portion of the third protrusion 182c in a clockwise direction by a rotation angle of about 55 degrees, and from the first protrusion 182a. It protrudes slightly higher. The fourth protrusion 182d is formed in a substantially isosceles triangle with side surfaces on both sides inclined substantially linearly.

  The cover pedestal 183 is formed in a disk shape and includes three mounting bosses 183a that protrude rearward from the rear surface. The three mounting bosses 183a are attached to the front surface of the handle base 181 through the slit 182e of the handle 182 from the front. Since the mounting boss 183a of the handle cap 185 passes through the slit 182e of the handle 182, the mounting boss 183a comes into contact with the circumferential end of the slit 182e, thereby restricting the rotation angle of the handle 182. In this example, the handle 182 can be rotated within a range of a rotation angle of about 120 degrees.

  The handle cap 185 has a front surface that bulges forward and has translucency. The handle cap 185 includes a lens member that is three-dimensionally formed of a transparent member. The handle cap 185 is decorated with light emission by appropriately emitting light on the front surface of the handle decoration substrate 184.

  The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 101 b of the door frame base 101 via the handle attachment member 102. The handle mounting seating surface 101b of the door frame base 101 is inclined so that the right end side is located rearward of the left end side in plan view, and faces the outside (open side). The handle unit 180 that is attached to the pachinko machine 1 is also inclined to the outside in a plan view (in other words, the front end of the pachinko machine 1 is inclined to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line orthogonal to the front surface of the pachinko machine 1). Are attached and fixed to the door frame 3. Thereby, it is easy for a player to grip the handle 182 of the handle unit 180, and it is possible to perform a turning operation without feeling uncomfortable.

  The handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180 is a variable resistor. When the handle 182 is rotated, the detection shaft 189 a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 rotates via the shaft member 187 and the transmission gear 188. The internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft 189a, and the driving force of the firing solenoid 542 in the ball launching device 540 described later changes according to the internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189. The game ball B is driven into the game area 5a with the strength according to the rotation angle of the handle 182, that is, the strength input by the player.

  The handle touch sensor 192 detects static electricity acting on the handle unit 180. When the player touches the handle 182 or the like, the handle touch sensor 192 detects static electricity acting from the player, and the player touches the handle 182 or the like. Detect contact. When the handle 182 is rotated while the handle touch sensor 192 detects a player's contact, the detection of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is accepted, and the firing solenoid has a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182. The drive of 542 is controlled and the game ball B can be driven. That is, the handle touch sensor 192 does not detect the player's contact even if the player tries to drive the game ball B into the game area 5a by rotating the handle 182 by some method without touching the handle 182. Therefore, the firing solenoid 542 is not driven and the game ball B cannot be driven. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from playing the game by rotating the handle 182 in a different way from the original, and to reduce the load (burden) on the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. .

  Further, when the player presses the single button 193 while the player rotates the handle 182, the single button operation sensor 194 detects the operation of the single button 193, and the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 detects the handle unit 180. The driving of the firing solenoid 542 is stopped. Thereby, even if it does not return rotation operation of the handle | steering-wheel 182, while launching of the game ball B can be stopped temporarily, by releasing the press operation of the single button 193, before operating the single button 193, The game ball B can be driven again into the game area 5a with the driving strength.

  Furthermore, the handle unit 180 includes four first protrusions 182a, second protrusions 182b, third protrusions 182c, and fourth protrusions 182d on the handle 182, and the handle 182 is greatly rotated in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. Thus, when the game ball B is strongly driven into the game area 5a (so-called “right-handed”), the position of the first protrusion 182a when the handle 182 is not rotated by the fourth protrusion 182d. Therefore, by changing the handle 182 with the fourth protrusion 182d as the first protrusion 182a, the player can maintain the handle 182 in the "right-handed" position in an easy state. It is possible to reduce the feeling of fatigue of the game by reducing the feeling of fatigue.

[3-5. Overall configuration of pan unit]
The dish unit 200 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42. FIG. 39 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the tray unit, and FIG. 40 is a perspective view of the tray unit as viewed from behind. FIG. 41 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit as viewed from the front after being disassembled for each main member, and FIG. 42 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit as viewed from the back after being disassembled for each of the main members. The dish unit 200 is attached to a portion below the door window 101 a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100. The dish unit 200 is an upper dish 201 that stores a game ball B to be driven into the game area 5a, and a game ball that is disposed below the upper dish 201 and is supplied from the upper dish 201 or the foul cover unit 150. And a lower plate 202 capable of storing B.

  The dish unit 200 includes an upper dish 201, a dish base unit 210 attached to the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and a lower dish 202 attached to the front surface of the dish base unit 210. And a stage operation unit 300 that is attached to the front surface of the dish decoration unit 250 and the dish base unit 210 and can be operated by the player.

  The dish base unit 210 includes a plate-shaped dish unit base 211 extending in the left and right direction, an upper dish body 212 having an upper dish 201 attached to the upper front of the dish unit base 211, and a right side of the upper dish body 212. A mounting base 213 that is attached to the front of the mounting base 213, a dish unit relay board 214 that is mounted to the right of the mounting base 213, and a ball lending operation unit 220 that is mounted on the upper surface of the mounting base 213. A unit 230 before removing the upper bowl ball attached to the lower side of the mounting base 213 and a unit 240 after removing the upper bowl ball attached to the rear of the unit 230 before removing the upper bowl ball are provided.

  The dish decoration unit 250 is attached to the front lower portion of the dish unit base 211 and is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 so as to cover the lower dish body 251 having the lower dish 202 and the outer periphery of the lower dish body 251. A dish unit main body 252, a lower dish ball removal unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower dish body 251, a dish upper left decoration unit 270 attached to the upper part of the front surface of the dish unit body 252, and left and right respectively. The dish upper right decoration unit 275, and the dish lower left decoration unit 280 and the dish lower right decoration unit 285 are provided below the dish upper left decoration unit 270 and the dish upper right decoration unit 275, respectively.

  The effect operation unit 300 includes, as the effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player, a rotation operation unit 302 that can be rotated by the player, and a press operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player. The production operation unit 300 is attached to the production operation unit cover unit 310 attached to the front surface of the dish decoration unit 250, the operation unit base 320 housed in the production operation unit cover unit 310, and the upper surface of the operation unit base 320. An annular effect operation ring 330 having a cage rotation operation unit 302, a rotation drive unit 340 for rotating the rotation operation unit 302, and an operation ring transmission for transmitting the rotation of the rotation drive unit 340 to the rotation operation unit 302 A gear 350 and a gear attachment member 351 for rotatably attaching the operation ring transmission gear 350 are provided.

  The effect operation unit 300 is attached to the effect operation ring decoration board 352 for decorating the effect operation ring 330 with light, the decoration board cover 353 covering the upper side of the effect operation ring decoration board 352, and the lower surface of the operation unit base 320. The vibration speaker 354, the effect operation button unit 360 attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to face the ring of the effect operation ring 330, and the operation unit relay board unit 390 attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 320. And.

  The entire plate unit 200 bulges forward, and the rendering operation unit 300 is arranged so that the upper surface of the rendering operation unit 301 faces obliquely upward and forward in the center in the left-right direction, and the left side of the rendering operation unit 300 on the upper surface. In addition, a ball lending operation unit 220 is disposed on the right side of the effect operation unit 300, and a lower plate 202 is disposed on the left side of the effect operation unit 300 below the upper plate 201. As is apparent from the above description, the upper plate 201 and the production operation unit 300 and the like of the plate unit 200 are projected toward the player side in the middle region in the left and right direction of the lower half of the front surface of the door frame 3. A forward bulging structure is formed.

[3-5a. Top plate]
The upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42 and the like. The upper plate 201 is formed by a plate unit base 211 and an upper plate body 212, and is formed in a container shape in which the left side is larger than the center of the left and right sides when viewed from the front, and bulges forward. The upper plate 201 (upper plate main body 212) has a portion of about 1/3 bulging forward from the left end to the right with respect to the width of the door frame 3 in the left-right direction. As the upper plate 201 moves from the most bulged portion toward the right in front view, the front end is retracted backward, and the depth of the front-rear direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B (see FIG. 46). For example). The upper plate 201 is inclined so that the entire bottom surface including the guide passage portion 201a is lower on the right end side, and the right end side in front view of the guide passage portion 201a is under the ball lending operation unit 220.

  When the upper plate 201 is assembled to the plate unit 200, the bottom surface of the upper plate 201 is a position lower than the upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 with respect to the upper end of the upper plate ball supply port 211e. It is inclined so as to become slightly lower toward the position below the outer diameter of B. Thereby, the game ball B released forward from the upper plate ball supply port 211a can be received and stored in the upper plate 201, and the received game ball B can be stored from the right end side of the guide passage portion 201a. It can be supplied to the ball feeding unit 140 side through the upper tray ball feeding port 211e.

  The guide passage 201a is provided with a metal grounding metal 201b that is electrically grounded (grounded) in the pachinko machine 1, and the game ball B comes into contact with (rolls) the game ball. Static electricity charged on B can be removed.

[3-5b. Lower plate]
The lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42 and the like. The lower plate 202 is disposed below the upper plate 201 and on the left side of the center of the plate unit 200 (door frame 3) in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. The lower plate 202 is formed by the lower plate body 251 and the plate unit base 211. The lower tray 202 is formed in a container shape that can store the game balls B, and includes a lower tray ball hole 202a that penetrates the bottom wall in the vertical direction so that the game balls B can be discharged. The lower dish ball removal hole 202a of the lower dish 202 is closed by the lower dish ball removal unit 260 so as to be opened and closed.

  The lower plate 202 is formed in a substantially quadrilateral shape in plan view extending left and right, and the front end on the left side from the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward from the right side. In the lower plate 202, a lower plate ball hole 202a penetrating vertically is arranged near the front end near the right end. The lower dish 202 is inclined such that the bottom surface becomes lower toward the lower dish ball hole 202a. The lower dish ball extraction hole 202a of the lower dish 202 is positioned in front of the lower dish ball supply port 211c and below the rendering operation unit 300 in a state assembled to the dish unit 200.

  The lower dish 202 can store the game ball B released forward from the lower dish ball supply port 211c in a state in which the lower dish ball hole 202a is closed, and open the lower dish ball hole 202a. Can be discharged to the lower side of the dish unit 200 (for example, a dollar box). Further, in the state where the lower dish ball hole 202a is opened, the lower dish ball hole 202a is disposed in front of the lower dish ball supply port 211c, and therefore forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211c. The released game ball B can be quickly discharged downward from the lower dish ball hole 202a by movement of the shortest distance.

[3-5c. Dish base unit]
The dish base unit 210 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 43 to 46. FIG. 43 is a perspective view of the dish base unit in the dish unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 44 is a perspective view of the dish base unit in the dish unit as seen from the rear. 45 is an exploded perspective view of the plate base unit as seen from the front after being disassembled for each main member, and FIG. is there. The dish base unit 210 is mounted below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and the dish decoration unit 250 and the rendering operation unit 300 are mounted on the front surface.

  The dish base unit 210 is a flat dish unit base 211 attached to the lower front part of the door frame base unit 100 and extending left and right, and an upper dish attached to the upper front part of the dish unit base 211 and having an upper dish 201. A main body 212, a mounting base 213 that is attached to the right of the upper dish main body 212 at the upper front of the dish unit base 211 and protrudes forward, and is attached to the right of the mounting base 213 on the front surface of the dish unit base 211. The dish unit relay board 214 is provided.

  The dish base unit 210 includes a ball lending operation unit 220 attached to the upper surface of the attachment base 213, and a unit 230 before removing the upper dish ball attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 below the attachment base 213. , A unit 240 after removing the upper dish ball attached to the rear side of the dish unit base 211 behind the unit 230 before removing the upper dish ball.

[3-5c-1. Dish unit base]
The dish unit base 211 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46. FIG. The dish unit base 211 is attached below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and extends in the left-right direction over the entire width of the door frame base 101 (shallow open at the rear). It is formed in a box shape.

  The dish unit base 211 penetrates back and forth in the vicinity of the upper left corner when viewed from the front, and penetrates back and forth below the upper dish ball supply port 211a extending in a cylindrical shape to the rear and the upper dish ball supply port 211a. A speaker opening 211b having a punching metal attached to the front side, a lower dish ball supply opening 211c penetrating forward and backward in a lower left portion with respect to the center of the left and right sides when viewed from the front, and extending rearward in a cylindrical shape; A notch 211d that is cut out in a size that allows the game ball B to pass through the right side wall of a portion that extends in a cylindrical shape to the rear of the ball supply port 211c, and front and rear in the upper right side of the lower dish ball supply port 211c And an upper tray ball feeding port 211e that extends vertically and has an upper portion positioned at the right end of the upper tray main body 212.

  The dish unit base 211 protrudes forward to the right of the upper dish ball feeding port 211e and is placed on the left side of the upper dish ball feeding port 211e. Under the dish main body, it penetrates back and forth and passes through the slider insertion port 211g through which the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper dish ball removal slider 242 in the unit 240 after the upper dish ball removal is inserted, and the front right and left in the lower right corner of the front view. The handle insertion port 211h through which the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 of the cage door frame base unit 100 is inserted, and the cylinder insertion through which the cylinder main body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 passes through the front and rear in the vicinity of the right corner when viewed from the front. And a mouth 211i.

  The upper tray ball supply port 211a of the tray unit base 211 is assembled to the door frame 3, the front end opens on the rear wall of the upper plate 201, and the cylindrical rear end passes through the upper tray ball of the door frame base 101. The opening 101g penetrates from the front side and is connected to the front end of the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150. Thereby, the game ball B paid out from the payout device 580 of the payout unit 560 is supplied (paid out) into the upper plate 201 through the upper plate ball supply port 211a.

  The lower tray ball supply port 211c is assembled to the door frame 3 and has a front end that opens to the rear wall of the lower plate 202 and a cylindrical rear end that opens the lower tray ball passage port 101f of the door frame base 101 from the front side. It penetrates and is connected to the front end of the ball discharge port 150d of the foul cover unit 150. As a result, the game balls B flowing in the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 are supplied into the lower plate 202 through the lower plate ball supply port 211c. Further, the downstream end of the ball removal guide path 241c in the rear base 241 of the unit 240 after removing the upper plate ball is connected to the notch 211d formed in the cylindrical portion of the lower plate ball supply port 211c. ing. As a result, the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 is moved to the upper plate ball feeding port 211e, the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b of the ball feeding unit 140, After the dish ball removal, the ball 240 is discharged from the lower dish ball supply port 211c into the lower dish 202 through the ball feeding guide path 241b and the ball removal guide path 241c of the unit 240 and the notch 211d.

  The upper tray ball feeding port 211e is located in front of the ball receiving port 241a of the rear base 241 in the unit 240 after removing the upper tray ball in a state assembled to the tray base unit 210. B is supplied from the ball receiving port 241a of the unit 240 to the ball feeding guide path 241b after removing the upper plate ball.

[3-5c-2. Upper plate body]
The upper plate body 212 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The upper plate body 212 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 and forms the upper plate 201 in cooperation with the plate unit base 211. The upper plate body 212 is formed in a container shape (dish shape) whose upper and rear sides are open. The upper plate body 212 extends to the left and right, and the left side is larger than the center of the left and right when viewed from the front, and bulges forward. The upper plate body 212 has a front end that is retracted rearward from the most bulged portion toward the right in front view, and the depth in the front-rear direction is formed to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. ing. The bottom surface of the upper plate body 212 is inclined so that the right end is lowest. The upper plate body 212 is closed at the upper part near the right end.

  The upper plate body 212 is attached so that a portion where the upper portion near the right end is closed in a state where the upper plate main body 212 is assembled to the plate unit 200 lies under the ball lending operation unit 220. Further, the upper plate body 212 has an effect operation unit mounting portion 212a formed at an intermediate portion in the left-right direction at the upper portion, and a part of the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 212a.

[3-5c-3. Mounting base]
The mounting base 213 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46. The mounting base 213 is mounted on the front surface of the tray unit base 211 while being mounted on the upper surface of the mounting protrusion 211f of the tray unit base 211, and the ball lending operation unit 220 is mounted on the upper side. The mounting base 213 is formed in a shallow box shape with the top opened. The mounting base 213 includes an insertion port 213a penetrating up and down in the vicinity of the left end and a through port 213b penetrating up and down in the right corner of the rear end.

  The insertion opening 213a of the mounting base 213 is used to insert the front slider 232 of the unit 230 before removing the upper bowl. Further, the through-hole 213b is for inserting a wiring cable for connecting the ball lending operation unit 220 and the door frame main relay board 104.

[3-5c-4. Plate unit relay board]
The dish unit relay board 214 of the dish base unit 210 includes the door frame sub-relay board 105 in the door frame base unit 100, the dish upper left decorative board 273, the dish upper right decorative board 278, the dish lower left decorative board 283, and the dish lower right decorative board 288. , And for relaying the connection with the operation unit relay board 392. The dish unit relay board 214 is attached to the right side of the mounting protrusion 211 f on the front surface of the dish unit base 211. When the dish unit relay board 214 is attached to the dish unit base 211, the rear surface faces the rear side of the dish unit base 211.

[3-5c-5. Ball rental operation unit]
The ball lending operation unit 220 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The ball lending operation unit 220 is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 via the attachment base 213. The ball lending operation unit 220 discharges the game balls B stored in the upper plate 201 to the lower plate 202 or cashes a ball lending machine (not shown) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1. Or a prepaid card, and a predetermined number of game balls B are lent out into the upper plate 201 of the dish unit 200, the remaining amount of cash or prepaid card inserted into the ball lending machine is displayed, This is for subtracting and returning the game balls B from which the rented cash or prepaid card has been lent.

  The ball lending operation unit 220 includes a base part 221 attached to the upper side of the attachment base 213, an upper dish ball removal button 222 disposed near the left end of the upper surface of the base part 221, and an upper dish ball on the upper surface of the base part 221. A disc-shaped ball lending operation base 223 disposed on the right side of the unplug button 222, a translucent disk lending operation base 223, a ball lending button 224 disposed on the front left side of the ball lending operation base 223, and a ball lending operation A return button 225 disposed on the front right side of the base 223 and a ball lending display unit (not shown) disposed below the rear of the ball lending operation base 223 are provided.

  The upper dish ball removal button 222 protrudes upward in a cylindrical shape from the upper surface of the base portion 221, and can be moved downward by a player pressing. The ball lending button 224 is formed in a circular shape. The return button 225 is formed in a triangular shape. The ball lending display unit is composed of three 7-segment LEDs, and can be visually recognized through the transparent ball lending operation base 223 in a light-emitting state.

  The ball lending operation unit 220 can discharge the game balls B stored in the upper plate 201 to the lower plate by pressing the upper plate ball removal button 222. Further, when a prepaid card with cash or balance is inserted into the ball lending machine and the ball lending button 224 is pressed, a predetermined number of game balls B are supplied to the upper plate 201. When the return button 225 is pressed, the game balls B that have been rented are deducted and returned to the cash or prepaid card that has been put into the ball lending machine. In the ball lending display section, the remaining amount of cash or prepaid card that has been put into the ball lending machine is displayed. The ball lending display section displays an error code when the ball lending machine breaks down.

[3-5c-6. Unit before removing the upper bowl and after removing the upper bowl]
The pre-top bowl removal unit 230 and the post-top bowl removal unit 240 in the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 45 and 46. When the upper plate ball removal button 222 of the ball lending operation unit 220 is pressed, the upper plate ball removal unit 230 and the upper plate ball removal unit 240 cooperate with the ball feeding unit 140 to operate the upper plate 201. The game balls B stored inside are discharged to the lower plate 202.

  The unit 230 before removing the upper dish ball is attached to the lower side of the ball lending operation unit 220 on the left side of the mounting protrusion 211f on the front surface of the dish unit base 211. The unit 240 after the top dish ball removal is attached to the rear side of the unit 230 before the top dish ball removal on the rear surface of the dish unit base 211.

  The unit 230 before removing the upper dish ball is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 and has a cylindrical front base 231 that extends vertically, and a front part that is inserted into the cylinder of the front base 231 so as to be movable in the vertical direction. And a slider 232. The front base 231 is attached near the front of the upper tray ball feeding port 211e and the slider insertion port 211g on the front surface of the tray unit base 211. The front slider 232 extends vertically and has an upper end that is in contact with a lower end of the upper dish ball removal button 222 and a lower end of the operation receiving portion 242a of the upper dish ball removal slider 242 after the upper dish ball removal unit 240. It is in contact with the top surface.

  The post-top ball removal unit 240 includes a rear base 241 attached to the rear surface of the plate unit base 211 so as to close the upper plate ball feeding port 211e and the slider insertion port 211g from the rear, and a vertical direction on the front surface of the rear base 241. An upper plate ball removal slider 242 that is slidably attached to the upper plate, a spring 243 that urges the upper plate ball removal slider 242 upward, a rear cover 244 that is attached to the rear side of the rear base 241; It has.

  The rear base 241 protrudes upward from a portion where the upper dish ball removal slider 242 is slidably attached and opens forward, and is connected to the ball receiving port 241a through which the game ball B can pass and the ball receiving port 241a. A ball feeding guide path 241b that guides the received game ball B downward on the rear surface of the rear base 241 and then guides it backward, and a game on the rear surface of the rear base 241 from a position below the ball feeding guide path 241b. A ball extraction guide path 241c that guides the sphere B downward and then guides it to the right in the rear view.

  The ball receiving port 241a is assembled to the plate base unit 210, and moves forward through the upper plate ball feeding port 211e of the plate unit base 211 at the downstream end (right end in front view) of the guide passage portion 201a of the upper plate 201. It is formed at an opening position. The ball feeding guide path 241b is formed so that the entrance 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 is located behind the lower part in a state assembled to the door frame 3. Accordingly, the game ball B supplied to the upper plate 201 enters the entrance 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 through the ball receiving port 241a and the ball feeding guide path 241b.

  The part extending to the left and right of the ball extraction guide path 241c protrudes to the right in the rear view, and inclines so that the right end side in the rear view is lower than the part where the upper dish ball removal slider 242 is slidably attached. It opens on the right side when viewed from the back. The rear side of the portion extending to the left and right of the ball extraction guide path 241 c is closed by the rear cover 244. The ball extraction guide path 241c is assembled to the door frame 3, and the upper portion of the portion extending vertically below the ball supply guide path 241b is located in front of the ball extraction opening 141b of the ball supply unit 140. At the same time, the right end of the portion extending in the left-right direction as viewed from the back is connected to the notch 211 d of the lower dish ball supply port 211 c in the dish unit base 211. Thereby, the game ball B discharged from the ball outlet 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 is discharged into the lower plate 202 from the lower tray ball supply port 211c through the ball outlet guide path 241c and the notch 211d.

  The upper dish ball removal slider 242 is formed in a quadrangular shape in front view, and protrudes rearward from the operation receiving portion 242a protruding forward from the upper left corner and the rear surface on the rear side of the operation receiving portion 242a. An operation transmission unit 242b. The operation receiving portion 242a has a flat upper surface. Further, the operation transmitting portion 242b is inclined so that the upper surface is positioned downward as it goes rearward, and the lower surface extends horizontally so as to be connected to the rear end of the upper surface.

  The upper tray ball removal slider 242 is assembled to the door frame 3, and the operation receiving portion 242a protrudes forward through the slider insertion port 211g of the tray unit base 211 from the rear side, and the operation receiving portion 242a. Is in contact with the lower end of the front slider 232 of the unit 230 before removing the upper bowl. Further, in the state where the upper dish ball removal slider 242 is assembled to the door frame 3, the operation transmitting portion 242 b protrudes rearward of the rear base 241, and the operation at the ball removal member 143 of the ball feeding unit 140 is on the upper surface. The collar 143c is in contact.

  The spring 243 has an upper end attached to the rear base 241 and a lower end attached to the upper dish ball removal slider 242, and urges the upper dish ball removal slider 242 upward. Therefore, the upper tray ball removal slider 242 is positioned at the upward movement end by the urging force of the spring 243 and can move downward by resisting the urging force of the spring 243.

  In the pre-top ball removal unit 230 and the post-top ball removal unit 240, the upper plate ball removal slider 242 is positioned at the moving end upward by the biasing force of the spring 243, and the upper plate ball removal slider 242 The upper pan ball removal button 222 is positioned upward at the moving end via the front slider 232 that is in contact with the upper surface of the operation receiving portion 242a. Further, since the upper plate ball removal slider 242 is positioned at the upward movement end by the biasing force of the spring 243, the downward movement of the operating rod 143c that is in contact with the upper surface of the operation transmitting portion 242b is prevented. The partition portion 143a of the ball extraction member 143 is positioned between the entrance 141a and the ball extraction port 141b to partition the two.

  Accordingly, when the upper tray ball removal button 222 is not pressed, the ball feeding unit 140 separates the entrance 141a and the ball withdrawal port 141b from the upper plate 201 and sends them to the ball reception port 241a. The game ball B can be sent from the hitting ball supply port 142a to the ball launching device 540 side via the entrance 141a and the ball feeding member 144.

  On the other hand, when the upper dish ball removal button 222 is pressed downward against the urging force of the spring 243, the upper dish ball removal slider 242 moves downward via the front slider 232, and the upper dish ball removal slider 242 operates. The operating rod 143c of the ball pulling member 143 that is in contact with the upper surface of the transmission portion 242b can move downward, and the ball pulling member 143 is rotated by the load of the weight portion 143d of the ball pulling member 143 to rotate the partition portion 143a. Retreats from between the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b. Thereby, the game ball B that has entered the entrance 141a from the upper plate 201 through the ball receiving port 241a and the ball feeding guide path 241b is discharged forward from the ball outlet 141b that opens below the entrance 141a. Will be. Then, the game ball B discharged forward from the ball outlet 141b is guided from the notch 211d into the lower dish ball supply port 211c through the ball extraction guide path 241c, and then lowered from the lower dish ball supply port 211c. It is discharged into the tray 202, and the game ball B in the upper tray 201 is discharged into the lower tray 202.

  When the downward pressing of the upper dish ball removal button 222 is released, the upper dish ball removal slider 242 is moved upward by the biasing force of the spring 243, and the upper dish is moved via the front slider 232 in contact with the operation receiving portion 242a. While the ball removal button 222 is raised, the ball removal member 143 is rotated by the operation rod 143c that is in contact with the operation transmission portion 242b, and the partition portion 143a is positioned between the entrance 141a and the ball removal port 141b. It will return to the original state.

  In this manner, the game ball B in the upper plate 201 is fed to the ball launcher 540 side via the ball feeding unit 140 by the unit 230 before removing the upper plate ball and the unit 240 after removing the upper plate ball, It can be discharged to the lower plate 202 side.

[3-5d. Dish decoration unit]
The dish decoration unit 250 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. 47 is a perspective view of the dish decoration unit in the dish unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 48 is a perspective view of the dish decoration unit as seen from the back. FIG. 49 is an exploded perspective view of the main body of the dish decoration unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 50 is an exploded perspective view of the main body of the dish decoration unit as viewed from the rear. is there. The dish decoration unit 250 has a lower dish 202 and is attached to the front surface of the dish base unit 210, and the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the center in the left-right direction from the front. The dish decoration unit 250 decorates substantially the entire dish unit 200.

  The dish decoration unit 250 is attached to the lower front portion of the dish unit base 211 and cooperates with the dish unit base 211 to form the lower dish 202. The dish unit base covers the outer periphery of the lower dish body 251. 211, a tray unit main body 252 attached to the front surface of the lower plate body 211, a lower dish ball removing unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower plate body 251 The upper left decorative unit 270 and the upper right decorative unit 275 of the dish, and the lower left decorative unit 280 and the lower right decorative unit of the dish unit main body 252 that are attached below the upper left decorative unit 270 and the upper right decorative unit 275 of the dish. 285.

[3-5d-1. Lower plate body]
The lower plate body 251 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The lower dish body 251 forms the lower dish 202 in cooperation with the dish unit base 211 of the dish base unit 210. The lower dish main body 251 is formed in a container shape (dish shape) that extends left and right and is open at the top and rear. The lower plate body 251 is attached to a portion on the left side of the center in the left-right direction in the lower front portion of the plate unit base 211 so that the opened rear side is closed.

  The lower dish main body 251 is formed in a substantially quadrangular shape whose plan view extends to the left and right, and the front end on the left side from the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward from the right side. The lower dish main body 251 is formed with a lower dish ball hole 202a penetrating vertically in the vicinity of the front end of the right end in plan view. The lower plate body 251 is inclined so that the bottom surface becomes lower toward the lower plate ball hole 202a. The lower dish ball extraction hole 202a is closed by the lower dish ball extraction unit 260 so that it can be opened and closed.

  The lower dish body 251 is in a state where the outer periphery and a part of the lower surface are covered with the dish unit body 252 in a state where the lower dish body 251 is assembled to the dish decoration unit 250. The bottom plate body is assembled to the plate unit 200, and the bottom surface is positioned below the lower plate ball supply port 211c of the plate unit base 211, and the lower plate ball discharge hole 202a has the lower plate ball supply port. It is located in front of 211c. Thereby, the game ball | bowl B discharge | released ahead from the lower tray ball supply port 211c can be stored.

[3-5d-2. Plate unit body]
The dish unit main body 252 in the dish decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The dish unit main body 252 is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 in the dish base unit 210 and decorates the front surface of the dish unit 200. The dish unit main body 252 bulges so that the center in the left-right direction projects forward on the upper side, and bulges so that the left side in the left-right direction projects forward on the lower side. Further, the upper surface of the dish unit main body 252 is curved so that the center in the left-right direction is lowest. The dish unit main body 252 is formed in a box shape opened rearward.

  The dish unit main body 252 has an upper side bulging portion 252a that bulges forward and extends downward from the left and right ends toward the center in the left and right direction at the upper part, and a left side from the center in the left and right direction at the lower part. Includes a lower front decorative portion 252b that bulges forward so as to cover the outer periphery of the lower plate body 251 and a bottom plate portion 252c that extends rearward from the lower end of the lower front decorative portion 252b. .

  The left and right upper side bulging portions 252a are formed in a box shape with the rear opened, and the dish upper left decorative unit 270, the dish lower left decorative unit 280, the dish upper right decorative unit 275, and the dish lower right decorative unit are provided on the respective front surfaces. 285 is attached. The left upper side bulging portion 252a has a lower right end connected to the lower front decorative portion 252b. Moreover, the lower end of the right upper side bulging portion 252a is connected to the lower front decorative portion 252b.

  The dish unit main body 252 is formed with a lower dish opening 252d penetrating back and forth between the left upper side bulging part 252a and the lower front decoration part 252b. The lower dish opening 252d has such a size that the player's fingers can be inserted, and is formed so that the upper and lower sides become wider toward the left. The lower dish opening 252d is formed in a cylindrical shape extending in the front-rear direction by the lower dish body 251 and the lower surface of the left upper side bulging part 252a.

  In addition, the dish unit main body 252 includes a front notch 252e that is notched upward from the front lower end of the portion covering the outer periphery of the lower dish main body 251 in the lower front decoration part 252b, and a lower dish main body 251 in the bottom plate part 252c. , And a bottom notch 252f that is notched at a portion below the bottom. The lower dish ball removal unit 260 is inserted into the front cutout part 252e and the bottom cutout part 252f.

  Further, the dish unit main body 252 penetrates back and forth in the lower right corner of the lower front decorative portion 252b and is inserted into the handle insertion port 252g through which the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 is inserted, and the lower front surface above the handle insertion port 252g. An effect operating unit formed between a cylinder insertion opening 252h that passes through the decorative portion 252b in the front-rear direction and through which the cylinder main body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted, and a pair of upper side bulging portions 252a that are the center in the left-right direction. And an effect operation unit attachment portion 252i to which 300 is attached. The effect operation unit attachment portion 252i is formed to have a width that is about 1/3 of the horizontal width of the dish unit main body 252.

  The dish unit main body 252 is formed so as to cover the entire front surface of the dish base unit 210 when assembled in the dish unit 200, and the speaker port 211b faces forward through the lower dish opening 252d. . When assembled in the dish decoration unit 250, the lower dish ball removal button 263 faces the front from the front notch 252 e and the lower dish ball removal unit 260 has a lower dish ball removal base 261. The bottom surface notch 252f is closed and the bottom surfaces are in the same plane.

[3-5d-3. Lower dish ball removal unit]
The lower dish ball removal unit 260 in the dish decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The lower dish ball removal unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower dish body 251, and opens and closes the lower dish ball removal hole 202 a to store the game ball B in the lower dish 202 and discharge the game ball B from the lower dish 202. It is for letting you do.

  The lower dish ball removal unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower dish body 251 and has a flat plate-like lower dish ball removal base 261 having a through-hole penetrating up and down at the right front corner in plan view, and a lower dish ball removal unit 260. A slider 262 slidably attached back and forth on the upper surface side of the base 261, a lower dish ball removal button 263 attached to the front end of the slider 262, a spring 264 urging the slider 262 forward, A lower dish ball removing lid 265 that opens and closes the through hole by the movement of the slider 262 in the front-rear direction, and a holding mechanism 266 that holds the lower dish ball removing lid 265 through the slider 262 are provided.

  The lower dish ball removal base 261 is formed in a size that closes the bottom notch 252f of the dish unit main body 252, and is vertically moved to a position that coincides with the lower dish ball removal hole 202a of the lower dish 202 (lower dish body 251). A penetrating through-hole is formed. The through hole of the lower dish ball removal base 261 is formed in the same size as the lower dish ball removal hole 202a. The slider 262 is formed in a flat plate shape extending in the front-rear direction, and is attached to a portion of the lower dish ball removal base 261 leftward from the center in the left-right direction so as to be slidable back and forth. The slider 262 includes a projecting pin that projects upward in a cylindrical shape.

  The lower dish ball removal lid 265 is attached to the lower dish ball removal base 261 at the left end side of the left side of the slider 262 so as to be rotatable about the vertically extending axis, and the right end side is attached to the slider 262. The right end side is formed so that the through hole can be closed. The lower dish ball removal lid 265 is formed with a slit extending left and right into which a protruding pin of the slider 262 is slidably inserted.

  When the lower dish ball removal unit 260 is assembled to the dish decoration unit 250, the lower dish ball removal base 261 closes the bottom surface notch portion 252 f of the dish unit main body 252, and the lower surface of the lower dish ball removal base 261 is It is located on the same plane as the lower surface of the bottom plate portion 252c. Further, the lower dish ball removal button 263 faces forward from the front notch 252e of the dish unit main body 252. In the normal dish ball removal unit 260, the slider 262 is positioned at the moving end on the front side by the urging force of the spring 264, and the right edge side of the lower dish ball removal cover 265 is located immediately above the through hole. The through-hole (lower dish ball hole 202a) is closed.

  In this normal state, the lower dish ball extraction hole 202 a is closed by the lower dish ball extraction cover 265, and the game ball B can be stored in the lower dish 202. Further, in a normal state, the front surface of the lower dish ball removal button 263 substantially coincides with the front surface around the front cutout portion 252e on the front surface of the lower front decoration portion 252b.

  In a normal state, when the lower dish ball removal button 263 is pressed rearward and moved backward against the biasing force of the spring 264, the slider 262 moves rearward together with the lower dish ball removal button 263. It becomes. As the slider 262 moves rearward, the protruding pin of the slider 262 presses the lower dish ball removal cover 265 rearward through the slit, and the lower dish ball removal cover 265 is centered on the left end side and the right end side is rearward. It will turn in the direction of movement. Then, the right end side of the lower dish ball removal lid 265 located immediately above the through hole moves backward from the position of the through hole, so that the through hole is opened and the lower dish ball removal hole 202a is opened. The game ball B in the lower tray 202 can be discharged to the lower side of the tray unit 200 through the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a.

  When the slider 262 is moved rearward by pressing the lower dish ball removal button 263, the rear end of the slider 262 is held by the holding mechanism 266, and the pressing of the lower dish ball removal button 263 is released. However, the slider 262 does not move forward by the biasing force of the spring 264. As a result, the right end side of the lower dish ball removal lid 265 is rotated rearward, and the lower dish ball removal hole 202a is kept open, and the game balls B in the lower dish 202 are continuously placed. It can be discharged downward.

  To close the lower dish ball removal hole 202a from this state, when the lower dish ball removal button 263 retracted from the front surface of the lower front decorative portion 252b is pressed backward, the holding of the slider 262 by the holding mechanism 266 is released. The When the lower dish ball removal button 263 is released, the slider 262 moves forward by the biasing force of the spring 264, and the front surface of the lower dish ball removal button 263 returns to the state where it coincides with the front surface of the lower front decorative portion 252b. At the same time, the lower dish ball removal lid 265 rotates and the right end side is positioned immediately above the through hole, and the lower dish ball removal hole 202a is closed by the lower dish ball removal cover 265. Thereby, the game ball B can be stored in the lower dish 202.

[3-5d-4. Dish upper left decorative unit and Dish upper right decorative unit]
The dish upper left decoration unit 270 and the dish upper right decoration unit 275 in the dish decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The dish upper left decorative unit 270 and the dish upper right decorative unit 275 are attached to the upper part of the front surface of the upper side bulging portion 252a of the dish unit main body 252. The dish upper left decoration unit 270 and the dish upper right decoration unit 275 decorate the left and right sides of the effect operation unit 300 at the upper part of the dish unit 200.

  The dish upper left decorative unit 270 is a semi-cylindrical shape that extends left and right and has translucency. The dish upper left decorative body 271, and the dish upper left reflector 272 attached to the rear side of the dish upper left decorative body 271, And a dish upper left decorative board 273 mounted on the rear side of the dish upper left reflector 272 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface thereof.

  The dish upper left decorative body 271 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and move downward as it goes from the left end to the right end, and is attached to the upper portion of the left upper side bulging portion 252a. The dish upper left decorative body 271 has a semicircular arc that bulges forward, with the center axis extending obliquely to the upper left at the left end and the center axis extending left and right at the right end, so that the half cylinder is twisted. Is formed. This dish upper left decorative body 271 is formed milky white.

  The dish upper left reflector 272 is inserted into the dish upper left decorative body 271 from the rear, and a through hole is formed at a portion corresponding to the LED of the dish upper left decorative substrate 273. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the dish upper left decorative substrate 273 are full color LEDs, and the dish upper left decorative body 271 can be decorated with light emission by emitting light.

  In the state where the dish upper left decorative unit 270 is assembled to the door frame 3, the left end is continuous with the lower end of the door frame left side unit 400, and the right end is the left end of the dish center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312 in the rendering operation unit 300. Is continuous. Since the dish upper left decorative unit 270 does not have a rib in the middle in the longitudinal direction of the dish upper left decorative body 271, when the plurality of LEDs on the dish upper left decorative board 273 are caused to emit light, the entire front surface of the dish upper left decorative body 271 is exposed. The light emission can be decorated almost uniformly, and it can be seen that a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

  The dish upper right decorative unit 275 has a semi-cylindrical shape that extends left and right and has translucency. The dish upper right decorative body 276, and a dish upper right reflector 277 attached to the rear side of the dish upper right decorative body 276, A dish upper right decorative board 278 mounted on the rear side of the dish upper right reflector 277 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface thereof.

  The dish upper right decorative body 276 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and move downward as it goes from the right end to the left end, and is attached to the upper portion of the right upper side bulging portion 252a. The dish upper right decorative body 276 has a semicircular arc that bulges forward, with the central axis extending diagonally to the upper right at the right end and the central axis extending left and right at the left end, so that the semicylinder is twisted. Is formed. This dish upper right decorative body 276 is formed milky white.

  The dish upper right reflector 277 is inserted into the dish upper right decorative body 276 from the rear, and a through hole is formed in a portion corresponding to the LED of the dish upper right decorative board 278. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the dish upper right decorative board 278 are full color LEDs, and the dish upper right decorative body 276 can be illuminated and decorated by emitting light.

  In the state where the dish upper right decorative unit 275 is assembled to the door frame 3, the right end is continuous with the lower end of the door frame right side unit 410, and the left end is the right end of the dish center upper decorative body 312 a of the unit front cover 312 in the rendering operation unit 300. Is continuous. Since the dish upper right decorative unit 275 does not have a rib in the middle of the longitudinal direction in the dish upper right decorative body 276, when the plurality of LEDs on the dish upper right decorative board 278 emit light, the entire front surface of the dish upper right decorative body 276 is exposed. The light emission can be decorated almost uniformly, and it can be seen that a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-5d-5. Dish lower left decorative unit and Dish lower right decorative unit]
The dish lower left decoration unit 280 and the dish lower right decoration unit 285 in the dish decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The dish lower left decoration unit 280 and the dish lower right decoration unit 285 are attached to the lower part of the front surface of the upper side bulging portion 252a of the dish unit main body 252 so as to extend along the dish upper left decoration unit 270 and the dish upper right decoration unit 275, respectively. It is done. The dish lower left decoration unit 280 and the dish lower right decoration unit 285 cooperate with the dish upper left decoration unit 270 and the dish upper right decoration unit 275 to decorate the front surface of the dish unit 200 and the left and right sides of the effect operation unit 300. .

  The dish lower left decorative unit 280 has a semi-cylindrical shape that extends left and right and has translucency. The dish lower left decorative body 281, and a dish lower left reflector 282 attached to the rear side of the dish lower left decorative body 281, And a dish lower left decorative board 283 mounted on the rear side of the dish lower left reflector 282 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

  The dish lower left decorative body 281 extends in a curved line so as to move forward and move downward as it goes from the left end to the right end, and extends in an arc shape having a center in the rear in plan view. It is attached to the lower part of the upper side bulging part 252a. The dish lower left decorative body 281 has a semicircular arc that bulges forward with a smaller radius than the dish upper left decorative body 271 and the dish upper right decorative body 276, with the central axis extending slightly diagonally to the upper left and rear at the left end and the center at the right end. The shaft extends left and right, and is formed in a shape such that the half cylinder is bent. The dish lower left decorative body 281 has a left end formed in a spherical shape. The curvature of the semicircular arc is changed so that the dish lower left decorative body 281 becomes thinner toward the left end side. The dish lower left decorative body 281 is milky white.

  The dish lower left reflector 282 is inserted into the dish lower left decorative body 281 from behind, and a through hole is formed in a portion corresponding to the LED of the dish lower left decorative substrate 283. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the dish lower left decorative board 283 are full color LEDs, and the dish lower left decorative body 281 can be decorated by emitting light.

  The dish lower left decoration unit 280 is assembled to the door frame 3, the left end is positioned below the left end of the dish upper left decoration unit 270, and the right end of the dish center lower decoration body 312 b of the unit front cover 312 in the effect operation unit 300. It is continuous with the left end. In the dish lower left decorative unit 280, the left end of the dish lower left decorative body 281 is formed in a spherical shape, so that the left end appears to be embedded in the door frame 3. Since the dish lower left decorative unit 280 does not have a rib in the longitudinal direction of the dish lower left decorative body 281, when the plurality of LEDs on the dish lower left decorative board 283 are caused to emit light, the entire front surface of the dish lower left decorative body 281 is exposed. The light emission can be decorated almost uniformly, and it can be seen that a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

  The dish lower right decoration unit 285 has a semi-cylindrical shape extending right and left and has a translucent dish right lower decoration body 286, and a dish lower right decoration body 286 attached to the rear side of the dish lower right decoration body 286. A reflector 287 and a dish lower right decorative board 288 mounted on the rear side of the dish lower right reflector 287 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface thereof are provided.

  The dish lower right decorative body 286 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward as it goes from the right end to the left end, and extends in an arc shape having a center in the rear in plan view. It is attached to the lower part of the upper side bulge 252a on the right side. The dish lower right decorative body 286 has a semicircular arc that bulges forward with a smaller radius than the dish upper left decorative body 271 and the dish upper right decorative body 276, with the central axis extending slightly diagonally to the upper right rear at the right end, The central axis extends to the left and right, and the semi-cylinder is bent. The dish lower right decorative body 286 has a spherical right end. The curvature of the semicircular arc changes so that the dish lower right decorative body 286 becomes thinner toward the right end side. The dish lower right decorative body 286 is formed in milky white.

  The dish lower right reflector 287 is inserted into the dish lower right decorative body 286 from the rear, and a through hole is formed at a portion corresponding to the LED of the dish lower right decorative substrate 288. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the dish lower right decorative board 288 are full color LEDs, and the dish lower right decorative body 286 can be decorated by emitting light.

  In the state where the dish lower right decoration unit 285 is assembled to the door frame 3, the right end is located below the right end of the dish upper right decoration unit 275, and the left end is the dish center lower decoration body 312b of the unit front cover 312 in the effect operation unit 300. Continuation with the right end of. In the dish lower right decorative unit 285, the right end of the dish lower right decorative body 286 is formed in a spherical shape, so that the right end appears to be embedded in the door frame 3. Since the dish lower right decorative unit 285 does not have a rib in the middle of the longitudinal direction in the dish lower right decorative body 286, when the plurality of LEDs on the dish lower right decorative board 288 are caused to emit light, the dish lower right decorative body 286 is provided. It is possible to decorate the entire front surface of the lamp substantially uniformly and to make it appear that a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-5e. Overall structure of production operation unit]
The overall configuration of the rendering operation unit 300 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 51 is a plan view of the effect operation unit in the dish unit as viewed from the advance / retreat direction of the effect operation buttons. FIG. 52A is a perspective view of the rendering operation unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 52B is a perspective view of the rendering operation unit viewed from the back. 53 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit as seen from the front after being disassembled for each main member, and FIG. 54 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit as seen from the rear after being disassembled as the main members. The production operation unit 300 is provided at the center of the plate unit 200 in the left-right direction, decorates the plate unit 200, and participates in the production by the player operating when the player participation type production is executed. It is something that can be done. The production operation unit 300 is attached to the dish base unit 210 and the dish decoration unit 250.

  The effect operation unit 300 includes an effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by a player. The effect operation unit 301 includes a rotation operation unit 302 that can be rotated by the player, and a pressing operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player. In the effect operation unit 301, the rotation operation unit 302 is formed in an annular shape having an inner diameter of about 3/5 with respect to the outer diameter, and the pressing operation unit 303 is disposed in the ring. . The pressing operation unit 303 is arranged at the center of the rotation operation unit 302, and has a central pressing operation unit 303 a having a diameter slightly larger than half of the inner diameter of the rotation operation unit 302, an outer periphery of the central pressing operation unit 303 a, and the rotation operation unit 302. It is comprised with the annular | circular shaped outer periphery press operation part 303b arrange | positioned between inner periphery.

  The production operation unit 300 is attached to the production operation unit cover unit 310 attached to the front surface of the dish decoration unit 250, the operation unit base 320 accommodated in the production operation unit cover unit 310, and the upper surface of the operation unit base 320. A ring-shaped production operation ring 330 having a rotation operation unit 302, a rotation drive unit 340 for rotating the rotation operation unit 302 of the production operation ring 330, and a rotation operation of the rotation drive unit 340 and the production operation ring 340. An operation ring transmission gear 350 that transmits rotation to and from the unit 302, and a gear attachment member 351 that rotatably attaches the operation ring transmission gear 350 to the operation unit base 320 are provided.

  The effect operation unit 300 is attached to the upper surface of the operation unit base 320 below the effect operation ring 330, and an effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface, and an effect operation ring decoration substrate 352. The decorative board cover 353 attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to cover the upper side of the operation unit, the vibration speaker 354 attached to the lower surface of the operation unit base 320, and the operation unit so as to face the ring of the effect operation ring 330 An effect operation button unit 360 attached to the base 320 and an operation part relay board unit 390 attached to the rear surface of the operation part base 320 are provided.

[3-5e-1. Production operation unit cover unit]
The production operation unit cover unit 310 of the production operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. The effect operation unit cover unit 310 is attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 252i of the dish unit main body 252 of the dish decoration unit 250, and decorates the front surface of the effect operation unit 300 at the center in the left-right direction of the dish unit 200. The effect operation unit cover unit 310 is formed in a container shape whose upper and rear sides are open.

  The production operation unit cover unit 310 includes a semispherical unit lower cover 311 that is recessed downward, a semicircular unit front cover 312 that is attached to the front upper end of the unit lower cover 311 and bulges forward, A dish center upper reflector 313 mounted from behind in the dish center upper decorative body 312a of the cover 312 and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the dish center upper reflector 313 and capable of emitting light forward are mounted. The dish center upper decorative substrate 314, the dish center lower reflector 315 mounted from behind in the dish center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312, and the dish center lower reflector 315 are attached to the dish center lower reflector 315 and light forward. The dish center lower decoration board 316 with which a plurality of LEDs which can irradiate is mounted.

  The unit lower cover 311 is formed in a hemispherical shape in which the front side of the unit lower cover 311 bulges downward from the back in the center in the front-rear direction, and the rear side is the rendering operation unit mounting portion of the dish unit main body 252. It is attached to 252i so as to be placed from above. The unit lower cover 311 is attached in an inclined state so that an axis perpendicular to an imaginary plane formed at the upper edge extending in a semicircular arc shape at the front part is positioned forward as it goes upward. In this embodiment, it is inclined at an angle of about 18 degrees (18.65 degrees) with respect to the vertical line. The unit lower cover 311 has a plurality of drain holes 311a at the lowest part when assembled in the dish unit 200.

  The unit front cover 312 is formed in a semicircular arc shape that bulges forward so that the shape in plan view is along the front end of the unit lower cover 311, and the unit front cover 312 is formed at the upper end of the front portion of the unit lower cover 311. Installed. The unit front cover 312 includes a dish center upper decorative body 312a that extends in a semicircular arc shape so that a semicircular arc that bulges forward is along the front end of the unit lower cover 311, and a front lower portion of the dish center upper decorative body 312a. A dish center lower decorative body 312b extending in a semicircular arc shape so that the bulged semicircular arc extends along the front end of the unit lower cover 311. In the unit front cover 312, the lower end of the dish center lower decorative body 312 b is attached to the unit lower cover 311.

  The dish center upper decorative body 312a and the dish center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312 divide a cylinder having substantially the same thickness (radius) into half and extend in a semicircular shape with the split surface toward the center. It is formed in a bent shape. The dish center lower decorative body 312b extends in a semicircular arc shape with a large curvature with respect to the dish center upper decorative body 312a, and the dish center lower decorative body 312b is slightly thinner than the dish center upper decorative body 312a. It is formed in a semi-cylindrical shape. In the state where the unit front cover 312 is assembled to the dish unit 200, the front end of the dish center upper decorative body 312a projects forward from the front end of the dish center lower decorative body 312b. When assembled in the dish unit 200, the left and right ends of the dish center upper decorative body 312a are continuous with the right end of the dish upper left decorative unit 270 and the left end of the dish upper right decorative unit 275, respectively. The left and right ends of 312b are connected to the right end of the dish lower left decoration unit 280 and the left edge of the dish lower right decoration unit 285, respectively. The unit front cover 312 has translucency and is milky white.

  The unit front cover 312 is assembled to the door frame 3, and the front end thereof is the front end of the door frame 3. The distance from the front surface of the door frame base 101 to the front end of the unit front cover 312 is the door frame. The distance is about ½ of the full width of the base 101 in the left-right direction.

  The dish center upper reflector 313 is formed in a semicircular arc shape that bulges forward, and is inserted into the dish center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312 from the rear and attached. The dish center upper reflector 313 blocks light from the LED mounted on the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 from leaking backward (inside). The dish center upper decorative substrate 314 is formed in a semicircular arc shape along the dish center upper decorative body 312a, and a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light forward (outward) are mounted on the upper surface. The plurality of LEDs on the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 are full-color LEDs, and the dish center upper decorative body 312a can be decorated by emitting light.

  The dish center lower reflector 315 is formed in a semicircular arc shape that bulges forward, and is inserted into the dish center lower decoration body 312b of the unit front cover 312 from the rear and attached. The dish center lower reflector 315 blocks light from the LED mounted on the dish center lower decorative board 316 from leaking backward (inside). The dish center lower decorative substrate 316 is formed in a semicircular arc shape along the dish center lower decorative body 312b, and a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light forward (outward) are mounted on the upper surface. The plurality of LEDs on the dish center lower decoration board 316 are full-color LEDs, and the dish center lower decoration body 312b can be decorated by emitting light.

  The effect operation unit cover unit 310 does not have a reinforcing rib in the middle of the dish center upper decorative body 312a and the dish center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312 while extending in a semicircular shape. When the LED on the center upper decorative board 314 and the LED on the dish lower central decorative board 316 are made to emit light, each of them can be made to emit light almost uniformly, and it can be seen that a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

  In the state in which the effect operation unit cover unit 310 is assembled to the dish unit 200, the front end protrudes more forward than the upper dish 201 and the lower dish 202. In addition, the production operation unit cover unit 310 includes a plate center upper decorative body 312a that is continuous with a plate left upper decorative body 271 and a plate upper right decorative body 276, and a plate center lower decorative body 312b is a plate left lower decorative body 281 and a dish right The lower decorative body 286 is continuous. Thereby, the production operation unit 300 is made conspicuous, and the appearance is improved by the integral decoration.

[3-5e-2. Operation unit base]
The operation unit base 320 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54. The operation unit base 320 is inserted into the production operation unit cover unit 310 from above, the lower end is attached to the production operation unit cover unit 310, and the upper rear end is attached to the production operation unit of the upper plate body 212 in the plate base unit 210. It is attached to the part 212a. The operation unit base 320 is formed in a container shape that is open at the top.

  The operation unit base 320 is formed in a box shape having an outer shape of a substantially cubic shape, and has a main body 321 that is open at the top, and extends outward from the upper end of the main body 321 and has a circular outer periphery. Flange portion 322, a plurality (four in this case) of leg portions 323 projecting downward from the bottom surface of the main body portion 321, and an upper attachment formed on the rear end of the flange portion 322 and attached to the dish base unit 210. And a gear bearing portion 325 that opens upward through the flange portion 322 on the left outer side of the main body portion 321 and rotatably supports the operation ring transmission gear 350.

  The operation unit base 320 is formed such that the main body unit 321 can accommodate the effect operation button unit 360 therein. In the main body 321, the vibration speaker 354 is attached to the bottom wall from the lower side, and the portion where the vibration speaker 354 is attached on the lower surface is formed on a flat surface. The bottom wall of the main body 321 is formed so as to easily resonate with the vibration from the vibration speaker 354. The vibration can be amplified, and the vibration can be converted into sound such as voice or music and output. it can.

  A leg portion 361 b of the button unit base 361 in the effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the upper surface of the bottom wall of the main body portion 321. In addition, the main body 321 is formed with a through-hole for discharging the liquid that has entered the main body 321 at the outer peripheral edge of the bottom wall. The main body 321 has a rotation drive unit 340 attached to the outside of the left side wall and an operation unit relay board unit 390 attached to the outside of the rear side wall.

  The flange portion 322 has a diameter that substantially matches the inner periphery of the upper central decorative body 312 a of the unit front cover 312. On the upper surface of the flange portion 322, the effect operation ring decoration board 352 and the decoration board cover 353 are attached, and the ring attachment base 331 of the effect operation ring 330 is attached. The lower ends of the plurality of leg portions 323 are attached to the upper surface of the unit lower cover 311 in the effect operation unit cover unit 310.

  The gear bearing portion 325 can cooperate with the gear attachment member to attach the operation ring transmission gear so as to be rotatable around a shaft extending in the left-right direction. When the operation ring transmission gear 350 is attached to the gear bearing portion 325, the upper portion of the operation ring transmission gear 350 protrudes upward, and the drive side gear portion 350b of the operation ring transmission gear 350 has a flange portion. Under the 322, it is exposed to the outside.

  In the state where the operation unit base 320 is assembled to the effect operation unit 300, the upper surface of the flange portion 322 is positioned slightly below the upper surface of the dish center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312. Further, when assembled in the rendering operation unit 300, the vibration speaker 354 is attached in contact with the lower surface of the main body 321.

[3-5e-3. Production control ring]
The production operation ring 330 of the production operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 55A is a perspective view of the effect operation ring of the effect operation unit as viewed from above, and FIG. 55B is a perspective view of the effect operation ring as viewed from below. FIG. 56 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation ring disassembled and viewed from above, and FIG. 56 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation ring disassembled and viewed from below. The effect operation ring 330 is attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 in the operation portion base 320 and has a rotation operation portion 302 that can be rotated by the player. The production operation ring 330 (the rotation operation unit 302) has a diameter (outer diameter) that is about twice the size of the upper plate 201 in the front-rear direction, and an inner diameter that is about 3/5 of the outer diameter. It is formed in an annular shape. In this embodiment, the outer diameter of the effect operation ring 330 is about 13 cm.

  The effect operation ring 330 includes an annular ring attachment base 331 attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operation part base 320, an annular rotation base 332 that is rotatably mounted on the ring attachment base 331, and a rotation base. A plurality of bushes 333 that are in contact with the outer peripheral surface of 332 and are rotatably attached to the ring mounting base 331 about an axis extending vertically, and the upward movement of the rotating base 332 is attached to the ring mounting base 331. And a ring retaining member 334 that regulates.

  Further, the production operation ring 330 is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332 and is attached to the lower side of the ring outer upper cover 335 constituting a part of the rotation operation unit 302 and the lower ring outer cover 335. A ring outer lower cover 336 constituting a part of the rotation operation unit 302 and an inner peripheral side of the ring outer upper cover 335 are attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332 and constitute a part of the rotation operation unit 302. A ring inner cover 337. The ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 are each formed in an annular shape having translucency.

  The ring mounting base 331 has an outer diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320 and has an inner diameter that is substantially the same as the inner diameter of the flange portion 322. The ring mounting base 331 has a mounting portion 331a on which the rotation base 332 is slidably mounted on the upper surface side along the inner peripheral edge, and is spaced apart in the circumferential direction outside the mounting portion 331a on the upper surface. Boss portion 331b for projecting in a cylindrical shape upward from a plurality of (four in this case) portions and rotatably mounting bush 333, and spaced apart in the circumferential direction on the outer side of mounting portion 331a on the upper surface. A plurality of through holes 331c penetrating vertically. The plurality of through holes 331c are formed at positions corresponding to the LEDs of the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352.

  The rotation base 332 is formed so that the outer diameter is slightly smaller than the diameter (outer diameter) of the mounting portion 331 a of the ring mounting base 331 and the inner diameter is smaller than the inner diameter of the ring mounting base 331. The rotation base 332 includes a ring gear 332a that protrudes downward from the lower surface and extends in the circumferential direction. The ring gear 332 a is formed as a bevel gear so as to protrude downward as it goes toward the center of the rotation base 332. The ring gear 332a is formed to have an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the ring mounting base 331. When assembled in the effect operation ring 330, the ring gear 332a faces downward from the inner peripheral side of the ring mounting base 331. The ring gear 332a meshes with the ring-side gear portion 350a of the operation ring transmission gear 350 in a state assembled to the rendering operation unit 300.

  The ring outer upper cover 335 is formed three-dimensionally on the outer upper surface part 335a in which the circular arc that forms the outer and upper part in a circular shape extends in an annular shape, and a plurality of rings are arranged in the circumferential direction. A decorative portion 335b, and an outer upper cover mounting portion 335c that extends downward from the inner peripheral end of the outer upper surface portion 335a and then extends toward the center and is arranged in the circumferential direction. Yes. The outer upper surface portion 335a of the ring outer upper cover 335 is formed in a shape in which an arc in a range of ¼ of a circle extends in an annular shape. The decorative portion 335b has a hexagonal outer shape. The outer upper cover attaching portion 335 c extends slightly below the lower end of the outer upper surface portion 335 a and is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332.

  The ring outer lower cover 336 has an outer lower surface portion 336a in which a circular arc that forms the outer and lower part of the circular shape extends in an annular shape, and protrudes upward and centrally from the inside of the outer lower surface portion 336a. And a plurality of outer lower cover mounting portions 336b. An outer lower surface portion 336a of the ring outer lower cover 336 is formed in a shape in which an arc in a range of 1/8 of a circle extends in an annular shape. The outer lower cover attaching portion 336b is attached to the ring outer upper cover 335.

  The ring inner cover 337 includes an inner surface portion 337a in which a circular arc that forms an inner portion and an upper portion in a circular shape extends in an annular shape, and a cylinder that extends downward from the inner end portion of the inner surface portion 337a in parallel to the central axis. A cylindrical surface portion 337b and a plurality of inner cover attachment portions 337c formed on the outer periphery of the cylindrical surface portion 337b and arranged in the circumferential direction. The inner surface 337a of the ring inner cover 337 is formed in a shape in which an arc in a range of 1/8 of a circle extends in an annular shape. The cylindrical surface portion 337 b has a cylindrical inner diameter that is the same as the inner diameter of the rotation base 332. The inner cover attachment portion 337c is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332.

  The ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 are assembled to the effect operation ring 330, and the outer upper surface portion 335a, the outer lower surface portion 336a, and the inner surface portion 337a are continuous. The outer upper surface part 335a, the outer lower surface part 336a, and the inner surface part 337a constitute a part of a range of 1/2 or more of a circle, and the whole becomes a donut shape. The effect operation ring 330 can be decorated with light emission by the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352.

[3-5e-4. Rotation drive unit]
The rotation drive unit 340 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. FIG. 57A is a perspective view of the rotary drive unit of the effect operation unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 57B is a perspective view of the rotary drive unit as seen from the back. 58 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit as seen from the right front side, and FIG. 59 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit as seen from the left front side. The rotation drive unit 340 is for rotating the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 and detecting the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302. The rotation drive unit 340 is attached to the outside of the left side surface of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320.

  The rotation drive unit 340 includes a rotation drive base 341 that is attached to the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320, and an operation ring drive motor 342 that is attached to the rear side of the right side surface of the rotation drive base 341 so that the rotation shaft projects leftward. , A drive gear 343 attached to the rotation shaft of the operation ring drive motor 342, a transmission gear 344 rotated by the drive gear 343, and a transmission detection gear member rotated by the transmission gear 344 and rotating the operation ring transmission gear 350 345, a transmission gear 344 and a transmission detection gear member 345 are rotatably mounted in cooperation with a rotational drive base, and are covered from the left side of the drive gear 343, the transmission gear 344 and the transmission detection gear member 345. 346.

  The rotation drive unit 340 is attached to the gear cover 346 and detects the rotation position of the transmission detection gear member 345. The first rotation detection sensor 348 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, and the first rotation detection sensor 347. And a sensor cover 349 attached to the gear cover 346 so as to cover the second rotation detection sensor 348 from the left side.

  The rotation drive base 341 is formed in a shallow box shape that is short in the left-right direction and extends in the front-rear direction, and is open to the left. The operation ring drive motor 342 is a stepping motor. The drive gear 343 is a spur gear. The transmission gear 344 includes a spur gear-shaped first gear 344a that meshes with the drive gear, and a spur gear-shaped second gear 344b that rotates integrally with the first gear 344a and has a large diameter. Yes. The second gear 344 b of the transmission gear 344 meshes with the gear portion 345 a of the transmission detection gear member 345.

  The transmission detection gear member 345 has a gear portion 345a having a larger diameter than the transmission gear 344 (twice the diameter of the second gear 344b), and protrudes leftward from the left side surface of the gear portion 345a. And a plurality of detection pieces 345b arranged at regular intervals. The gear portion 345 a meshes with the second gear 344 b of the transmission gear 344 and meshes with the drive side gear portion 350 b of the operation ring transmission gear 350. The plurality of detection pieces 345b have the same length in the circumferential direction as the interval apart in the circumferential direction. In this embodiment, eight detection pieces 345b are arranged in the circumferential direction at intervals of a rotation angle of 45 degrees. These detection pieces 345b are detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348.

  The first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 detect the detection piece 345b of the transmission detection gear member 345. The first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are spaced apart from each other in the circumferential direction at intervals different from an integral multiple of the interval between the detection pieces 345b arranged in the circumferential direction. In this embodiment, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are separated by a rotation angle of 101.25 degrees. Thereby, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 do not detect the detection piece 345b at the same timing, and one of them detects the detection piece 345b first. It is like that. Thereby, the rotation direction and rotation speed of the rotation operation unit 302 in the effect operation ring 330 can be detected via the transmission detection gear member 345.

  When the rotary drive unit 340 is assembled, the upper portion of the gear portion 345a of the transmission detection gear member 345 is exposed upward, and the exposed portion of the gear portion 345a is the drive side gear portion 350b of the operation ring transmission gear 350. Mesh with. Further, the rotary drive unit 340 is located in the effect operation unit cover unit 310 in a state assembled to the effect operation unit 300.

  The rotation drive unit 340 arbitrarily drives the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 through the drive gear 343, the transmission gear 344, the transmission detection gear member 345, and the operation ring transmission gear by driving the operation ring drive motor 342. Can be rotated in the direction of. In addition, the rotation drive unit 340 causes the rotation operation unit 302 to reciprocate and vibrate by causing the operation ring drive motor 342 to rotate the drive gear 343 forward and backward within a predetermined rotation angle range. it can.

  Further, in the rotation drive unit 340, when the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 is rotated by the player, the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates via the operation ring transmission gear 350, and the transmission detection gear member 345 The detection piece 345b is detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, and the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected. Therefore, the content of the player participation type effect can be changed according to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302.

  Further, in the rotation drive unit 340, the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348. Therefore, the operation ring drive is performed in the same direction as the rotation operation. By driving the motor 342, the player's rotation operation can be assisted. Alternatively, by driving the operation ring drive motor 342 in a direction opposite to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302, a load can be applied to the player's rotation operation. Therefore, by appropriately combining these, it is possible to give the rotation operation unit 302 an operation feeling corresponding to the content of the player participation type effect or a click feeling.

[3-5e-5. Transmission gear for operation ring]
The operation ring transmission gear 350 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. The operation ring transmission gear 350 transmits the rotation between the transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotation drive unit 340 and the rotation base 332 of the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 340. The bearing portion 325 is rotatably attached.

  The operation ring transmission gear 350 is a bevel gear-shaped ring side gear portion 350a that meshes with the ring gear 332a in the rotation base 332 of the effect operation ring 340, and the rotation detection unit 340 detects the transmission by rotating integrally with the ring side gear portion 350a. A spur gear-like drive side gear portion 350b that meshes with the gear portion 345a of the gear member 345. The ring-side gear portion 350a and the drive-side gear portion 350b have pitch circles with the same diameter. The bevel gear-shaped ring-side gear portion 350 a is constricted in the direction of the rotation axis of the rotation base 332.

  The operation ring transmission gear 350 is attached to the operation unit base 320 so that the rotation shaft extends in the left-right direction and intersects with the rotation shaft of the rotation base 332 of the effect operation ring 340. The operation ring transmission gear 350 is inserted into the gear bearing portion 325 of the operation unit base 320 from above, and the gear attachment member 351 is attached to the operation unit base 320, so that the operation ring transmission gear 350 is rotatably attached to the operation unit base 320. It is done.

  When the operation ring transmission gear 350 is assembled in the effect operation unit 300, the ring side gear portion 350a is engaged with the ring gear 332a of the rotation base 332 in the effect operation ring 330, and the drive side gear portion 350b is engaged. The rotation detection unit 340 meshes with the gear portion 345a of the transmission detection gear member 345. Therefore, the operation ring transmission gear 350 can transmit the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 to the rotation drive unit 340 side, and can rotate the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340. It can be transmitted to the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 and rotated.

[3-5e-6. Stage control ring decoration board]
The effect operation ring decoration board 352 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described with reference mainly to FIGS. The effect operation ring decoration board 352 is attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 in the operation unit base 320, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the upper surface. The effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 is attached below the effect operation ring 330, and the effect operation ring 330 (the rotation operation unit 302) can be illuminated and decorated by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

  The effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 is formed in a form in which an annulus is divided into front and rear, and includes a front decorative substrate 352a on the front side and a rear decorative substrate 352b on the rear side. A plurality of LEDs are arranged along the outer periphery on each of the upper surfaces of the front decorative substrate 352a and the rear decorative substrate 352b. The plurality of LEDs on the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 are full-color LEDs.

  The effect operation ring decoration board 352 is located below the ring mounting base 331 of the effect operation ring 330 in a state assembled to the effect operation unit 300. The effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 is covered with a decorative substrate cover 353 whose upper side is transparent. The decorative board cover 353 is formed in a front and rear divided form, similar to the production operation ring decorative board 352, and covers the front decorative board 352a from above and is attached to the flange portion 322 of the operation unit base 320. 353a and a rear substrate cover 353b that covers the rear decorative substrate 352b from the upper side and is attached to the flange portion 322 of the operation unit base 320.

  The stage operation ring decoration board 352 emits a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface thereof, thereby allowing the decoration board cover 353 and the through hole 331c of the ring attachment base 331 to pass through the through-hole 331c. The cover 335, the outer ring lower cover 336, and the inner ring cover 337 can be decorated with light emission from the inside. Accordingly, it is possible to show the player a light emitting decoration such that the LED is provided in the rotation operation unit 302.

[3-5e-7. Vibration speaker]
The vibration speaker 354 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The vibration speaker 354 is attached to the lower surface of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320 with the output direction facing upward, and can output vibrations of various frequencies in addition to sound such as voice and music. It is.

  The vibration speaker 354 can output sound such as voice or music by vibrating the bottom wall of the operation unit base 320 as a diaphragm. The vibration speaker 354 can vibrate the entire presentation operation unit 300 via the operation unit base 320. The vibration speaker 354 can generate vibrations of various frequencies as compared with a vibration device that rotates an eccentric weight with a motor, and can present more various effects to the player.

[3-5e-8. Production operation button unit]
The effect operation button unit 360 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 60 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation button unit of the effect operation unit as seen from the front and above, and FIG. 61 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation button unit as seen from the front and bottom. 62A is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is in the lowered position, and FIG. 62B is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is in the raised position. The effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to face the ring of the effect operation ring 330, and has a pressing operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player. The press operation unit 303 of the effect operation button unit 360 includes a columnar center press operation unit 303a and a cylindrical outer periphery press operation unit 303b formed so as to cover the outer periphery of the center press operation unit 303a. ing.

  The production operation button unit 360 has a substantially circular outer periphery, and is arranged on the object with the button unit base 361 attached in the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320 and the central axis of the button unit base 361 as a boundary. A pair of guide shafts 362 extending upward in a columnar shape, and the upper ends of the pair of guide shafts 362 are connected to each other and the outer periphery is formed in a circular shape smaller than the button unit base 361. The upper base 363 and a pair of guide shafts 362 are attached between the upper base 363 and the button unit base 361 so as to be movable in the vertical direction, and the outer periphery is formed in a circular shape having substantially the same size as the button unit base 361. The disc-shaped lifting base 364 and the pair of guide shafts 362 are inserted respectively. It includes a pair of lift springs 365, the a and elevating base 364 is being biased upward.

  In addition, the production operation button unit 360 has a central shaft 366 that extends upward from the center of the button unit base 361 and has an upper end attached to the upper base 363, and a rotating shaft on the lower surface of the button unit base 361. The operation button lifting / lowering drive motor 367 mounted so as to protrude upward, the spur gear-shaped lifting / lowering driving gear 368 mounted on the rotation shaft of the operation button lifting / lowering driving motor 367, and the lifting / lowering driving gear 368 mesh with each other. A spur gear-like driven gear 369 that is rotatably attached to the upper side of the cage button unit base 361, and a lift cam drive gear member that is rotated by the driven gear 369 and is rotatably attached with the central shaft 366 inserted therethrough. 370, elevating cam drive gear member 370 and the lower end are coupled and the central shaft 66 is inserted so as to be rotatable and is rotated so as to cover the elevating cam member 371 for elevating the elevating base 364, the elevating drive gear 368, the driven gear 369, and the elevating cam drive gear member 370 from above. A disk-shaped gear cover 372 attached to the upper side of the button unit base 361.

  Further, the production operation button unit 360 is formed in a bottomed cylindrical shape having an inner diameter larger than that of the upper base and extending vertically, and is mounted on the upper side of the elevating base 364 so as to be vertically movable by a pair of guide shafts 362. A central button main body 373, a pair of button springs 374 disposed between the central button main body 373 and the lifting base 364 and biasing the central button main body 373 upward, and substantially the same as the central button main body 373 A central button cover 375 is formed on the upper end of the central button body 373 so as to cover the upper part of the upper base 363, and is attached to the upper surface of the upper base 363. And a central button decoration board 376 on which a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light upward are mounted. In the effect operation button unit 360, the central button body 373 and the central button cover 375 constitute a central pressing operation portion 303a.

  In addition, the production operation button unit 360 is attached to a portion outside the central button body 373 on the upper surface of the lifting base 364 and has an annular outer peripheral button decoration board 377 in which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the upper surface. An outer peripheral board cover 378 that is attached to the lifting base 364 so as to cover the upper side of the button decoration board 377 and cover the outer periphery of the central button main body 373, and a portion of the outer peripheral board cover 378 that covers the outer periphery of the central button main body 373. A cylindrical outer periphery decorative lens 379 that is arranged on the outer periphery side above the outer periphery button decoration substrate 377 and has a three-dimensional decoration, and the outer periphery and the upper surface of the outer periphery decoration lens 379 are moved up and down. A transparent outer peripheral button attached to the base 364 and having a central button cover 375 facing upward at the center. Is provided with a bar 380, a. In the effect operation button unit 360, the outer peripheral board cover 378, the outer peripheral decorative lens 379, and the outer peripheral button cover 380 constitute an outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b.

  The effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the button unit base 361 and detects the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303, and the button operation base unit 361 is attached to the button unit base 361 and the lift cam drive gear member 370. And a lift detection sensor 382 that detects the lift of the lift base 364 by detecting the rotational position.

  The button unit base 361 includes a base body 361a formed in a disk shape and a plurality of legs 361b projecting downward from the base body 361a. The base main body 361 a of the button unit base 361 has an outer diameter that is slightly smaller than the inner peripheral diameter of the main body 321 in the operation unit base 320. The base body 361a has a pair of guide shafts 362, a central shaft 366, a driven gear 369, a lift cam drive gear member 370, and a gear cover 372 attached to the upper surface, and a pressure detection sensor 381 and a lift detection sensor 382 on the lower surface. Is installed. In the button unit base 361, the lower end of the leg 361 b is attached to the bottom wall of the main body 321 in the operation unit base 320.

  The pair of guide shafts 362 are respectively attached to the upper surface of the base body 361a of the button unit base 361 from the center to the front and the rear at a distance that is half the diameter of the base body 361a. The pair of guide shafts 362 and the central shaft 366 are formed of metal bars. The pair of guide shafts 362 are formed thicker than the central shaft 366.

  The upper base 363 has an outer diameter that is about ½ of the outer diameter of the base body 361a of the button unit base 361. The pair of elevating springs 365 are coil springs, and the lower ends are in contact with the base body 361 a of the button unit base 361 and the upper ends are in contact with the elevating base 364. The elevating spring 365 is a spring having a stronger urging force than the button spring 374.

  The lifting base 364 has an outer diameter that is substantially the same as the outer diameter of the base body 361 a of the button unit base 361. The elevating base 364 includes a pair of guide holes 364a into which a pair of guide shafts 362 are slidably inserted, and a central hole 364b penetrating vertically with a size that allows the elevating cam member 371 to pass through at the center. And a pair of guide pins 364d projecting so as to face each other into the center hole 364b in the vicinity of the lower end of the standing wall 364c. Yes. The pair of guide pins 364d face each other on the same axis and are attached to be rotatable around the axis.

  The elevating base 364 is guided to be movable up and down by inserting a pair of guide shafts 362 through the pair of guide holes 364a. The elevating base 364 is restricted from moving upward by the upper end of the standing wall 364c coming into contact with the upper base 363, and has a space in which the bottom 373b of the central button body 373 can move between the upper base 363 and the elevating base 364. Forming. The elevating base 364 is moved in the vertical direction by the pair of guide pins 364d being guided by the cam portion 371a of the elevating cam member 371.

  The raising / lowering cam drive gear member 370 includes a spur gear-like gear portion 370a that meshes with the driven gear 369, a connecting portion 370b that protrudes upward from the gear portion 370a and to which the lower end of the raising / lowering cam member 371 is connected, and a gear portion 370a. And a lift detection piece 370c that is notched at two locations facing each other and is notched and is detected by the lift detection sensor 382. The raising / lowering cam drive gear member 370 is rotatably attached by inserting the central shaft 366 into the center of the gear portion 370a.

  The elevating cam member 371 is rotatably mounted by inserting the central shaft 366 through the center. The elevating cam member 371 includes a pair of cam portions 371a that are 180 degrees apart in the circumferential direction on the columnar outer peripheral surface and project outward. The pair of cam portions 371a guide the guide pins 364d of the elevating base 364.

  The cam portion 371a includes a first cam 371b extending in a direction perpendicular to the shaft center in the vicinity of the lower end, a locking portion 371c recessed upward in the middle of the first cam 371b, and one of the first cam 371b. A second cam 371d extending upward in parallel with the axis from the end, and a third cam 371e extending spirally upward from the end of the first cam 371b opposite to the second cam 371d, (See FIG. 62). The second cam 371d and the third cam 371e extend upward to the same height, and are separated by a distance smaller than the diameter of the guide pin 364d of the lifting base 364 between the adjacent cam portions 371a.

  The elevating cam member 371 includes a connected portion 371f connected to the connecting portion 370b of the elevating cam drive gear member 370 at the lower end.

  The raising / lowering cam member 371 extends upward from the rear end side of the first cam 371b when the second cam 371d rotates the raising / lowering cam member 371 in the counterclockwise direction in plan view in the cam portion 371a. It is formed as follows. When the elevating cam member 371 rotates, the elevating base 364 can be moved up and down by guiding the guide pins 364d of the elevating base 364 by the cam portion 371a.

  The central button body 373 includes a cylindrical tube portion 373a extending vertically, a bottom portion 373b closing the lower end side of the tube portion 373a, and a pair of guide shafts passing through the bottom portion 373b. A pair of guide holes 373c into which 362 is slidably inserted, a central port 373d penetrating with a diameter larger than the outer diameter of the standing wall 364c of the elevating base 364 at the center of the bottom 373b, and downward from the bottom 373b A pressing detection piece 373e that protrudes and is detected by the pressing detection sensor 381 and a pair of guide bosses 373f that protrude rearward from the bottom 373b in a cylindrical shape and are inserted into the button spring 374 are provided.

  The central button body 373 is formed in a bottomed cylindrical shape by a cylindrical portion 373a and a bottom portion 373b. The center button body 373 is formed such that a bottom portion 373b is disposed between the upper base 363 and the elevating base 364, and an upper end of the cylindrical portion 373a projects upward from the upper base 363. The central port 373d is formed in a cylindrical shape that extends short downward, and the lower end of the central port 373d abuts on the upper surface of the lifting base 364, thereby restricting the downward movement of the central button body 373. The upper end of the standing wall portion 364 c of the elevating base 364 contacts the upper base 363 through the central port 373 d of the central button body 373.

  The central button body 373 is biased upward by a pair of button springs 374 through which a pair of guide bosses 373f are inserted. The pair of guide bosses 373f are formed such that their lower ends pass through the lifting base 364 and extend downward, and screws with washers inserted into the lower ends are attached. The washer attached to the lower end of the guide boss 373f comes into contact with the lower surface of the elevating base 364, so that the upward movement of the central button body 373 is restricted.

  The pressing detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 is moved up and down when the bottom 373b of the central button body 373 (the lower end of the central port 373d) abuts the upper surface of the lifting base 364 against the urging force of the pair of button springs 374. It is formed so as to penetrate through 364 and protrude downward. The central button body 373 is formed opaque. The pair of button springs 374 are coil springs having a lower urging force than the elevating spring 365.

  The central button cover 375 includes a disk-shaped top plate portion 375a having a diameter substantially the same as the cylindrical portion 373a of the central button body 373, and a cylindrical peripheral wall portion 375b extending downward from the outer periphery of the top plate portion 375a. It is provided and is formed to have translucency. The center button cover 375 is formed in a bottomed cylindrical shape by a top plate portion 375a and a peripheral wall portion 375b. In the central button cover 375, the lower end of the peripheral wall portion 375 b is attached to the upper end of the cylinder portion 373 a in the central button main body 373.

  In the central button decoration board 376, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface are full-color LEDs. The central button decoration substrate 376 can decorate the central button cover 375 by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface of the outer peripheral button decoration board 377 are full-color LEDs. The outer periphery button decoration board 377 can make the outer periphery decoration lens 379 and the outer periphery button cover 380 emit light decoration by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The outer peripheral board cover 378 covers the upper side of the outer peripheral button decoration board 377 and is attached to the elevating base 364. The outer peripheral board cover 378 extends in a cylindrical shape upward from the inner periphery of the base board portion 378a. A cylindrical portion 378b covering the outer periphery. The outer peripheral substrate cover 378 is formed to be transparent.

  In the outer periphery decorative lens 379, twisted portions extending so as to move in the circumferential direction as it goes upward are arranged in a row at a constant interval in the circumferential direction. The outer periphery decorative lens 379 is attached to the upper side of the substrate portion 378 a in the outer periphery substrate cover 378. The outer peripheral button cover 380 includes a cylindrical cylindrical portion 380a that covers the outer periphery of the outer peripheral decorative lens 379, and an annular annular portion 380b that extends from the upper end of the cylindrical portion 380a toward the center. As for the outer periphery button cover 380, the lower end of the cylindrical part 380a is attached to the raising / lowering base 364. As shown in FIG. The annular portion 380 b has an inner diameter that is substantially the same size as the cylindrical portion 378 b of the outer peripheral substrate cover 378.

  When the production operation button unit 360 is assembled, as shown in FIG. 62 (a), the guide pin 364d of the lift base 364 is in a state where the lift base 364 is biased upward by a pair of lift springs 365. It is inserted from below into the engaging portion 371c of the cam portion 371a of the lifting cam member 371. In this state, the lift base 364 is in the lowered position where it has moved downward, and the pair of lift springs 365 is compressed. Further, in this state, the central button body 373 is positioned at the upward movement end by the urging force of the button spring 374, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 protrudes upward from the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. It has become.

  Accordingly, when assembled in the effect operation unit 300, the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 protrudes slightly above the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 is higher than the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. Also protrudes upward (see FIG. 63 and the like).

  In this state (the state shown in FIG. 62A), when the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303a) is pressed downward and moved downward against the urging force of the button spring 374, the central button body 373 is moved. The pressure detection piece 373e is detected by the pressure detection sensor 381, and the pressing operation of the central pressing operation portion 303a is detected. In a state in which the center pressing operation portion 303a is pressed, the upper surface of the center button cover 375 is substantially the same height as the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 (see FIG. 65C).

  In this state, even if the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b) is pressed downward, the outer peripheral button cover 380 does not move downward, and the press detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 is pressed. It is not detected by the detection sensor 381. That is, the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303 is not detected.

  When the lift drive gear 368 is rotated counterclockwise in plan view by the operation button lift drive motor 367 in the lowered position, the lift cam is driven via the driven gear 369 engaged with the lift drive gear 368. The gear member 370 rotates in the counterclockwise direction in plan view, and the elevating cam member 371 connected to the elevating cam drive gear member 370 also rotates in the same direction. When the elevating cam member 371 rotates counterclockwise, the cam portion 371a seen in the front in FIG. 62 moves to the right, and the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 is moved from the locking portion 371c to the first position. The cam 371b rolls to the left portion of the locking portion 371c, and the lifting base 364 moves downward against the biasing force of the lifting spring 365 via the guide pin 364d.

  When the guide pin 364d that rolls relatively to the left along the first cam 371b with the rotation of the lifting cam member 371 is positioned from the left end of the first cam 371b to the second cam 371d side, Since the two cams 371d extend vertically upward with respect to the first cam 371b, the urging force of the elevating spring 365 moves the guide pin 364d along the second cam 371d, and the guide pin 364d At the same time, the lifting base 364 is raised to a raised position.

  In the raised position, as shown in FIG. 62 (b), the guide pin 364d of the lifting base 364 is in contact with the second cam 371d of one cam portion 371a and the third cam 371e of the remaining cam portion 371a. It is in a state. In this state, the driving of the operation button lifting / lowering drive motor 367 is temporarily stopped.

  In the raised position, the upper end of the upright wall portion 364c of the lifting base 364 is in contact with the lower surface of the upper base 363, and further upward movement of the lifting base 364 is restricted. In the raised position, the positional relationship between the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303a) and the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b) at the lowering position is maintained, and the central button cover 375 is maintained. In addition, the entire pressing operation unit 303 including the outer peripheral button cover 380 is moved upward, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 protrudes upward from the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380.

  When assembled in the production operation unit 300 and moved to the raised position, the center button cover 375 and the outer button cover 380 are in a state of projecting larger than the upper surface of the production operation ring 330 (see FIG. 65B, etc.). reference).

  When the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303 a) is pressed downward with a force stronger than the urging force of the button spring 374 in the raised position, the central button cover 375 and the central button body 373 are attached to the button spring 374. The center button body 373 comes into contact with the lifting base 364 by moving downward against the force. In a state where the central button body 373 is in contact with the lifting base 364, the press detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 protrudes downward from the lifting base 364, but the lifting base 364 is the button unit base 361. Therefore, the pressure detection piece 373e is not detected by the pressure detection sensor 381.

  When the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303a) is pressed downward with a force stronger than the urging force of the elevating spring 365, the central button cover 375 and the central button body 373 resist the urging force of the button spring 374, After the central button body 373 contacts the lifting base 364, the lifting base 364 moves downward against the urging force of the lifting spring 365, and the lower end of the lifting base 364 contacts the button unit base 361. Become. When the elevating base 364 contacts the button unit base 361, the elevating base 364 is in the lowered position, and the outer button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b) is also in the lowered position together with the elevating base 364.

  As described above, when the elevating base 364 contacts the button unit base 361 in a state where the central button main body 373 is in contact with the elevating base 364, the pressing detection piece 373e of the central button main body 373 protruding downward from the elevating base 364. Is detected by the press detection sensor 381, and the pressing of the center button cover 375 (the center pressing operation portion 303a) is detected.

  On the other hand, when the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b) is pressed downward with a force higher than the urging force of the elevating spring 365 in the raised position, the elevating base 364 is moved up and down via the outer peripheral button cover 380. The lower end of the elevating base 364 comes into contact with the button unit base 361 by moving downward against the urging force of 365. In this state, the outer peripheral button cover 380 is in the lowered position together with the elevating base 364. However, since the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303a) protrudes upward by the urging force of the button spring 374, the central button body The pressure detection piece 373e of 373 does not protrude downward from the lift base 364, and the pressure detection piece 373e is not detected by the pressure detection sensor 381.

  In order to return the central button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 (the pressing operation unit 303) from the raised position to the lowered position, the raising / lowering cam member 371 is rotated counterclockwise by the operation button raising / lowering drive motor 367. 62B, the third cam 371e that is in contact with the upper left of the guide pin 364d of the lifting base 364 moves to the right (in the direction of the guide pin 364d). The guide pin 364d is pressed downward by 371e, and the lift base 364 moves downward against the biasing force of the lift spring 365 via the guide pin 364d.

  When the guide pin 364d moves from the lower end of the third cam 371e toward the first cam 371b along with the rotation of the lift cam member 371, the downward movement of the lift base 364 stops, and the guide pin 364d moves to the first cam. Roll along 371b. Thereafter, when the guide pin 364d reaches the position of the locking portion 371c in the middle of the first cam 371b, the guide pin 364d is inserted into the locking portion 371c recessed upward by the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the operation By stopping the rotation of the lift cam member 371 by the button lift drive motor 367, the original lowered position is obtained.

[3-5e-9. Operation unit relay board unit]
The operation unit relay board unit 390 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. The operation unit relay board unit 390 is attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 320. The operation unit relay board unit 390 includes a box-shaped substrate box 391 attached to the rear surface of the main body 321 in the operation unit base 320, and an operation unit relay board 392 attached in the board box 391.

  The board box 391 has a motor cover part 391a that covers the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340 from the rear side when the board box 391 is assembled to the effect operation unit 300. The operation unit relay board 392 includes a dish center upper decoration board 314, a dish center lower decoration board 316, an operation ring drive motor 342, a first rotation detection sensor 347, a second rotation detection sensor 348, a production operation ring decoration board 352, and a vibration speaker. 354, the operation button lifting / lowering drive motor 367, the central button decorative board 376, the outer peripheral button decorative board 377, the press detection sensor 381, the lift detection sensor 382, and the tray unit relay board 214 of the dish base unit 210 are relayed. Yes.

[3-5e-10. Effect of production operation unit]
Next, the operation of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. FIG. 63 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the effect operation ring and the rotary drive unit in the left side view of the effect operation unit. FIG. 64 is an explanatory diagram showing a relationship between the effect operation ring and the effect operation ring decorative board in a plan view of the effect operation unit as seen from the pressing direction of the pressing operation unit. FIG. 65A is a front view of the dish unit shown in a normal state, FIG. 65B is a front view of the dish unit when the pressing operation unit is in the raised position, and FIG. It is a front view of a dish unit when an operation part is pressed.

  The effect operation unit 300 includes an effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by a player on the upper surface. The effect operation unit 301 includes a large annular rotation operation unit 302 and a pressing operation unit 303 arranged in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302. The pressing operation unit 303 includes a columnar central pressing operation unit 303 a located at the center of the rotation operating unit 302, and an annular outer peripheral pressing operation unit disposed between the central pressing operation unit 303 a and the rotation operating unit 302. 303b.

  The rotation operation unit 302 is formed by the ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 of the effect operation ring 330. The central pressing operation portion 303a is formed by the central button cover 375 and the central button body 373 of the effect operation button unit 360, and the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b is formed by the outer peripheral button cover 380 and the outer peripheral substrate cover 378.

  The production operation unit 300 is assembled to the dish unit 200 in an inclined state so that the front side of the virtual plane formed by the upper surface of the annular rotation operation unit 302 (production operation ring 330) is lowered. Accordingly, the pressing direction of the pressing operation unit 303 disposed in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302 is inclined so as to move backward as it goes downward (in other words, move forward as it goes upward). .

  In the normal operation state, the production operation unit 300 has a state in which the pressing operation unit 303 slightly protrudes from the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302. Specifically, the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 slightly protrudes upward from the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 protrudes upward from the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. (See FIG. 63 and the like).

  In this normal state, when the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated clockwise as viewed from the left side by the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340, the effect operation ring 330 is transmitted via the operation ring transmission gear 350. The rotation operation unit 302 rotates in the clockwise direction in plan view. On the other hand, when the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated counterclockwise in the left side view by the operation ring drive motor 342, the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in the plan view. .

  The operation ring drive motor 342 is a stepping motor, and can rotate and reciprocate the rotation operation unit 302 by repeating normal rotation and reverse rotation within a range of a predetermined rotation angle. Unlike the vibration by the vibration speaker 354, only the rotation operation unit 302 vibrates.

  The rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 can be rotated not only by the operation ring drive motor 342 but also by the player. When the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated in the clockwise direction in a plan view, the transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotation drive unit 340 is rotated in the clockwise direction in the left side view via the operation ring transmission gear 350 and rotated. When the operation unit 302 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in plan view, the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in left side view. The transmission detection gear member 345 detects rotation by two sensors, a first rotation detection sensor 347 and a second rotation detection sensor 348.

  The rotation of the transmission detection gear member 345 is detected by detecting the plurality of detection pieces 345b by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348. More specifically, the interval between the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 that are separated in the circumferential direction is smaller than the interval between the plurality of detection pieces 345b that are arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. The interval is not an integer multiple. Thereby, the 1st rotation detection sensor 347 and the 2nd rotation detection sensor 348 are constituted so that detection piece 345b may not be detected at the same timing.

  In this embodiment, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates in the clockwise direction in the left side view, the first rotation detection sensor 347 detects the detection piece 345b after the second rotation detection sensor 348 detects the detection piece 345b. . On the other hand, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates counterclockwise in the left side view, the first rotation detection sensor 347 detects the detection piece 345b and then the second rotation detection sensor 348 detects the detection piece 345b. Detect. Therefore, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 can detect the rotation direction of the transmission detection gear member 345 (the rotation operation unit 302) according to the order in which the detection pieces 345b are detected. Further, the rotation speed of the transmission detection gear member 345 (the rotation operation unit 302) can be detected based on the detection time of the detection piece 345b in the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348.

  Thus, since the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected, the content of the player participation type effect can be changed according to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302. Further, when the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 is detected, the rotation operation unit 302 is driven to rotate in the same direction as the rotation operation direction by the operation ring drive motor 342, so that the rotation operation can be lightly assisted. . Alternatively, by rotating the rotation operation unit 302 in the direction opposite to the rotation operation direction by the operation ring drive motor 342, the rotation operation can be made heavy or a click feeling can be given.

  The rotation operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330 is formed by a ring outer upper cover 335, a ring outer lower cover 336, and a ring inner cover 337, and is formed in a shape in which an arc of more than half of a circle extends in an annular shape. ing. In other words, the rotation operation unit 302 is formed in a donut shape. As shown in the figure, the rotation operation unit 302 is attached in a state in which the outer peripheral surface, the upper surface, and a part of the inner peripheral surface are exposed, and thus is formed in a shape that can be easily grasped by the player's hand. .

  Thereby, since the player can touch the rotation operation unit 302 from various directions, the rotation operation unit 302 can be operated to rotate in a manner that is easy for the player to perform. Sexuality is enhanced. Further, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated even when the pressing operation unit 303 is in either the lowered position or the raised position. In addition, since the lower surface side of the rotation operation unit 302 is attached to the operation unit base 320, the rotation operation unit 302 cannot be gripped like a car handle.

  As shown in FIG. 64, the effect operation unit 300 includes an effect operation ring decoration board 352 in which a plurality of LEDs are arranged in an annular shape below the effect operation ring 330. As a result, the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 can be illuminated and decorated by causing the LEDs of the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 to emit light. In addition, since the plurality of LEDs are arranged in a ring shape along the rotation operation unit 302 in the production operation ring decorative substrate 352, the plurality of LEDs arranged in sequence are sequentially arranged in accordance with the rotation of the rotation operation unit 302. By emitting light, it is possible to decorate only a specific part of the rotating operation unit 302 that is rotating. Thereby, it is possible to make the player have an illusion that an LED (decorative substrate) is provided in the rotating operation unit 302 that rotates.

  As shown in FIG. 65A, the production operation unit 300 has a pressing operation unit 303 arranged in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302 with an upper surface higher than the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302 in a normal state. It is in a state of a lowered position slightly protruding upward. In this state, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated, and the center pressing operation unit 303a in the pressing operation unit 303 can be pressed. When the center pressing operation portion 303a is pressed downward, the upper surface of the center pressing operation portion 303a (central button cover 375) is lowered to substantially the same height as the upper surface of the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b (outer periphery button cover 380). The pressure is detected by the sensor 381.

  In this normal (downward position) state, even if the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b of the pressing operation portion 303 is pressed downward, the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b (outer periphery button cover 380) does not move downward, and pressure detection is performed. The pressure is not detected by the sensor 381.

  When the lifting cam member 371 is rotated counterclockwise in plan view by the operation button lifting drive motor 367 in a normal state, the guide pin 364d of the lifting base 364 is detached from the cam portion 371a (first cam 371b). Due to the urging force of the pair of elevating springs 365, the pressing operation portion 303 together with the elevating base 364 vigorously protrudes upward to be in the raised position (see FIG. 65 (b)). In this raised position state, the upper surface of the pressing operation unit 303 is positioned higher than the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302. In other words, the center button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 protrude upwardly from the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330.

  When the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed downward while the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position, the central pressing operation unit 303a first moves downward against the urging force of the button spring 374, and the central pressing operation unit 303a The upper surface and the upper surface of the outer periphery pressing operation part 303b are in a state of substantially the same height. In this state, the pressure detection sensor 381 does not detect pressure. Further, the central pressing operation portion 303 a moves downward together with the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303 b against the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the upper surfaces of the central pressing operation portion 303 a and the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303 b are the rotation operating portion 302. The height is substantially the same as the top surface (see FIG. 65C). In this state, the press detection sensor 381 detects the press.

  Further, when the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b is pressed downward in a state where the pressing operation portion 303 is in the raised position, the upper surface of the central pressing operation portion 303a remains protruding above the upper surface of the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b. The outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b and the center pressing operation portion 303a move downward, and the upper surface of the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b is substantially in the same height as the upper surface of the rotation operation portion 302 (see FIG. 65 (a)). . In this state, the pressure detection sensor 381 does not detect pressure.

  As described above, the pressing operation unit 303 of the present embodiment is not detected by the pressing detection sensor 381 unless the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed to the lower moving end regardless of the lowered position or the raised position. Yes. Accordingly, it is possible to prompt the player to firmly press the center pressing operation portion 303a, and thus attention can be drawn to the operation of the effect operation portion 301 in the player participation type effect. , The player participation type production can be more enjoyed.

  Even when the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated. Therefore, when the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position, depending on the player, the rotation operation becomes easier with the pressing operation unit 303 as a clue, or the rotation operation is difficult due to the pressing operation unit 303 being in the way. Therefore, the operability of the rotation operation unit 302 can be changed, and more various operations can be enjoyed.

[3-6. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 400 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 66 to 68. FIG. 66A is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 66B is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from the rear. 67 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit as seen from the back. The door frame left side unit 400 is attached to the front left part of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the dish unit 200, and decorates the left outer side of the game area 5a in front view.

  The door frame left side unit 400 is attached to the front side of the door frame left side base 401 and the door frame left side base 401 attached to the left outer side of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100. A door frame left side decorative substrate 402 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the cage, and a left side reflector 403 attached to the door frame left side base 401 so as to cover the front side of the door frame left side decorative substrate 402; A door frame left side decoration body 404 attached to the door frame left side base 401 so as to cover the front side of the left side reflector 403.

  The door frame left side base 401 is formed in a box shape that extends vertically and opens forward. The door frame left side decorative substrate 402 is formed in a strip shape extending vertically, and includes a left side upper decorative substrate 402a and a left side lower decorative substrate 402b. In the door frame left side decorative substrate 402, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are full color LEDs. The door frame left side decorative board 402 can light up and decorate the door frame left side decorative body 404 by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The left side reflector 403 has a through-hole 403a penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the LED mounted on the door frame left-side decorative board 402. The door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in milky white having translucency. The door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in a form in which a semicircular arc bulging forward extends vertically. Thereby, the door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in a semi-tube shape opened rearward.

  The door frame left side unit 400 is formed such that the lower end is continuous with the left end of the dish upper left decorative body 271 of the dish upper left decorative unit 270 in the dish unit 200, and the upper end is the door frame top decorative body of the door frame top unit 450. It is formed to be continuous with the lower left end of 453.

  In the door frame left side unit 400, the width in the left-right direction and the depth in the front-rear direction are formed at substantially the same distance. The door frame left side unit 400 in the state assembled to the door frame 3 decorates the left outer side of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101, and it looks as if a columnar fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-7. Door frame right side unit]
The door frame right side unit 410 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71. FIG. 69A is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 69B is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit as viewed from the rear. 70 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 71 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit as seen from the back. The door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the right front portion of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the dish unit 200, and decorates the right outer side of the game area 5a in front view.

  The door frame right side unit 410 extends in a flat plate shape from the right side of the door frame 3 to substantially the same position as the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200, and penetrates in the left-right direction. And a plurality of side window decorations 410b capable of emitting light disposed in the side window 410a. This door frame right side unit 410 makes it difficult to see the game area of the pachinko machine arranged on the right side in the game hall or the like where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, or is playing with the right pachinko machine. Therefore, it is possible to make the inside of the game area 5a of the pachinko machine 1 difficult to see, and to form a personal space for the player that protects the privacy of the game.

  The door frame right side unit 410 includes a door frame right side base 411 that is attached to the right outside of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 and extends vertically, and a door frame right side base 411. A side window decoration member 412 having a plurality of side window decoration parts 410b attached to the front surface and extending in a cylindrical shape forward and arranged vertically, and a plurality of sides of the side window decoration member 412 on the front surface A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the part corresponding to the interior decoration part 410b, and the side window interior decoration part decoration substrate 413 attached to the front side of the door frame right side base 411, and the plurality of side window interior decoration members 412 And an internal reflector 414 inserted into the interior of the side window interior decoration portion 410b.

  The door frame right side unit 410 is disposed on the front side of the front end of the side window decorative member 412 and is attached to the right side reflector 415 extending vertically and the door frame right side base 411. A door that extends in a flat plate shape in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction so as to cover the right side surfaces of the right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415 and that has a through-hole 416a that penetrates in the left-right direction and constitutes the side window 410a. It is attached to the frame right side outer panel 416, the door frame right side base 411, and the right side reflector 415, and is flat in the vertical direction and the front / rear direction so as to cover the left side surfaces of the door frame right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415. The door frame is formed with a through-hole 417a that extends in a shape and penetrates in the left-right direction and forms the side window 410a. The side panel and 417, and a.

  Further, the door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the rear surface of the right side reflector 415 so as to cover the door frame right side decorative board 418 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface and the front side of the right side reflector 415. And a door frame right side decorative body 419 attached to the right side reflector 415.

  The door frame right side base 411 is formed in a box shape that extends vertically and is opened rearward. The side window decorative member 412 has a flat connection base 412a that connects the lower ends of a plurality (three here) of side window decorative portions 410b arranged in the vertical direction. The side window decorative member 410b of the side window decorative member 412 is formed in a truncated cone shape having a slightly smaller outer diameter on the front end side than the rear end side, and the front end of the cylinder is formed in a hemispherical shape. ing. In the side window decorative member 412, the front end of the side window decorative portion 410 b is attached to the door frame right side outer panel 416. The side window decorative member 412 is attached to the upper portion of the front surface of the door frame right side base 411 from the lower position with respect to the vertical center. The side window decorative member 412 is formed in a milky white color having translucency.

  The side window interior decoration part decoration board 413 is attached to a portion of the front side of the door frame right side base 411 that is behind the connection base 412a of the side window interior decoration member 412. The plurality of LEDs provided on the side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413 are full-color LEDs. In the side window decoration part decoration board 413, four LEDs are arranged in a cross shape in the vertical and horizontal directions around the axis of the side window decoration part 410b in the rear part of each of the side window decoration parts 410b. Has been.

  The internal reflector 414 is formed in an X shape when viewed from the front, and extends in the front-rear direction along the inner surface of the side window interior decoration portion 410b to be inserted. The internal reflector 414 partitions the interior of the side window interior decoration portion 410b into four parts, top, bottom, left, and right.

  The right side reflector 415 is vertically extended at the same height as the door frame right side base 411, and the shape in the front-rear direction is formed in a wave shape that moves forward and then moves backward as it goes from the upper end to the lower end. Has been. The right side reflector 415 penetrates back and forth, and a plurality of through holes 415a are formed through which the LEDs on the door frame right side decorative board 418 face forward.

  The door frame right side outer panel 416 is flat and extends up and down and front and rear, the rear side extends vertically linearly, and the front side extends in a wave shape along the right side reflector 415. The door frame right side outer panel 416 has a through-hole 416a penetrating in the left-right direction and formed in a deformed elliptical shape extending vertically, and the door frame and the front side of the connection base 412a of the side window interior decoration member 412 The rear side of the right side decorative board 418 (right side reflector 415) is formed so as to be covered. The door frame right side outer panel 416 is formed to be opaque.

  The door frame right side inner panel 417 is flat and extends vertically and front and rear. The rear side extends vertically linearly, and the front side extends in a wave shape along the right side reflector 415. The door frame right side inner panel 417 has a through-hole 417a penetrating in the left-right direction and formed in a deformed elliptical shape extending vertically, and the front side of the connection base 412a of the side window interior decoration member 412 and the door frame. The rear side of the right side decorative board 418 (right side reflector 415) is formed so as to be covered. The door frame right side inner panel 417 is formed to be opaque.

  The door frame right side decorative substrate 418 is formed in a strip shape extending vertically, and includes a right side upper decorative substrate 418a and a right side lower decorative substrate 418b. In the door frame right side decorative board 418, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front face are full color LEDs. The door frame right side decorative board 418 can light up and decorate the door frame right side decorative body 419 by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed in milky white having translucency. The door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed in a form in which a semicircular arc that bulges forward extends in a wave shape up and down along the right side reflector 415. As a result, the door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed in a semi-tube shape opened rearward.

  The door frame right side unit 410 is formed such that the lower end is continuous with the right end of the dish upper right decorative body 276 of the dish upper right decorative unit 275 in the dish unit 200, and the upper end is the door frame top decoration of the door frame top unit 450. It is formed to be continuous with the lower right end of the body 453.

  The door frame right side unit 410 decorates the right outer side of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in a state assembled to the door frame 3, and a portion of the door frame right side decorative body 419 is a columnar fluorescent lamp. Looks like it's embedded. The door frame right side unit 410 has a front end (front side) that extends forward in a wave shape so that a quarter portion from the top projects forward, and is formed in a partition shape. The door frame right side unit 410 has a side window 410a penetrating in the left-right direction, and the opposite side can be visually recognized through the side window 410a.

  The door frame right side unit 410 is provided with a cylindrical (columnar) side window decorative portion 410b extending in the front-rear direction in the side window 410a, and causes the LED of the side window decorative portion decorative substrate 413 to emit light. Thus, the side window decoration part 410b can be decorated with light emission. Then, by decorating the side window decoration part 410b with light emission, the inside of the side window 410a can be made dazzling, and the opposite side can be made difficult to see through the side window 410a.

  According to the door frame right side unit 410 of the present embodiment, in the normal state, the LED of the side window decoration part decoration board 413 for emitting and decorating the plurality of side window decoration parts 410b is turned off. The inside of the game area 5a can be viewed from the side of the pachinko machine 1 (the end of the island facility) through the three side window interior decoration portions 410b. Therefore, even if a player who is looking for the pachinko machine 1 (the game board 5) as a pachinko machine to play a game does not move to the front of the pachinko machine 1 along the island facility, the pachinko machine 1 can be easily used. It can be found in the above, and a sense of expectation for a game in the pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Further, even if the side window 410a penetrates the door frame right side unit 410, other parts including the side window interior decoration portion 410b can block the line of sight of the player located nearby, It is possible to make it difficult for a player to see the entire game area 5a, and to make it difficult for other players to feel like being seen by other players, so that other players can play games without hesitation. .

  Further, when the three side window decoration portions 410b are caused to emit light by the LED of the side window decoration portion decoration board 413, the inside of the side window 410a can be dazzled by the light, and the visibility through the side window 410a is changed. Let At this time, since the three side window decorative portions 410b are formed in a columnar shape, light is emitted in a band shape and a radial shape. It can be made difficult to see, and it can be made difficult to look into the game area 5a from other players such as the neighbors. In this way, since it is possible to make it difficult to look inside the game area 5a, it is possible to prevent other players from paying attention to the pachinko machine 1, so that other players are interested in being noticed. It is possible to prevent feelings of discomfort from being unable to devote themselves to the game and to feel uncomfortable due to mistakes being induced, making the game more enjoyable by dedicating the player to the game. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

[3-8. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 450 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 72 to 74A. 72A is a perspective view of the door frame top unit in the door frame as viewed from the front, FIG. 72B is a perspective view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the rear, and FIG. It is a bottom view of the door frame top unit shown in the state. FIG. 73 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and viewed from the front top, and FIG. 74A is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and viewed from the front bottom. The door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 above the door frame left side unit 400 and the door frame right side unit 410.

  The door frame top unit 450 covers the door frame top base 451 attached to the upper side of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, the left and right sides of the door frame top base 451, and the upper front surface. The top upper cover 452 attached to the door frame top base 451, the door frame top decorative body 453 attached to the front end of the top upper cover 452, the lower end of the door frame top decorative body 453, and the door frame top base 451. Door frame top bottom plate 454 connecting the lower ends of the door frame.

  The door frame top unit 450 includes a door frame top central decorative substrate 455 that is attached to the front center of the top upper cover 452 behind the door frame top decorative body 453 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. A door frame top left decorative board 456 mounted on the left side of the door frame top central decorative board 455 on the front of the top upper cover 452 behind the frame top decorative body 453, and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front face; A door frame top right decorative board 457 that is attached to the right of the door frame top central decorative board 455 on the front surface of the top upper cover 452 behind the frame top decorative body 453 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front face. I have.

  The door frame top unit 450 includes a top center reflector 458 disposed between the door frame top decorative body 453 and the door frame top central decorative substrate 455 and attached to the front surface of the top upper cover 452; The top left reflector 459 disposed between the body 453 and the door frame top left decorative board 456 and attached to the front surface of the top upper cover 452, and between the door frame top decorative body 453 and the door frame top right decorative board 457 And a top right reflector 460 attached to the front surface of the top upper cover 452.

  Further, the door frame top unit 450 includes a central speaker box 461 attached to the center of the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454, a pair of top central speakers 462 attached to the central speaker box 461 downward, and a door. A pair of speaker brackets 463 attached near the front left and right ends of the frame top base 451, a pair of top side speakers 464 respectively attached to the pair of speaker brackets 463, and the door frame top bottom plate 454 are covered from below. A top lower cover 465 attached to the door frame top bottom plate 454, a lower cover frame 466 attached to the door frame top bottom plate 454 so as to press the outer peripheral edge of the top lower cover 465 from below, and a door frame top Door frame top relay board mounted near the upper right end of the base 451 67, includes a door frame top top plate 468 is attached to the top on the cover 452 so as to cover the upper part of the door frame top base 451, a.

  The door frame top base 451 includes a flat plate-like main body portion 451a that extends to the left and right at the same length as the width of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and from both the left and right ends of the front surface of the main body portion 451a. A forward projecting portion 451b projecting forward. The main body 451a is formed in a curved shape such that the center in the left-right direction is positioned upward so that the lower side is along the upper edge of the door window 101a in the door frame base 101. The left and right front protrusions 451b are inclined so as to move rearward as the front ends go downward, and are formed in a box shape opened rearward. The front protrusion 451b on the right side when viewed from the front is also open upward.

  The top upper cover 452 is formed in substantially the same shape as the door frame top base 451 in a front view. The top upper cover 452 is formed in a shape that covers the outer sides of the left and right front protrusions 451b of the door frame top base 451 and connects the upper front ends of the left and right front protrusions 451b. The front end of the top upper cover 452 protrudes most forward in the left-right direction, and extends in a curved shape so as to move downward and rearward from the left-right direction center toward both ends in the left-right direction. Further, the top upper cover 452 has an opening 452a that is largely cut from the rear end toward the front on the upper surface. The opening 452a is closed by a door frame top top plate 468.

  The door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in a milky white color having translucency. The door frame top decorative body 453 has a shape in which the semicircular arc that bulges forward decreases in curvature from the left and right ends toward the center in the left-right direction, and extends in the left-right direction along the front end of the top upper cover 452. Is formed. Thereby, the door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in a semi-tubular shape opened rearward. The door frame top decorative body 453 is oriented so that both ends in the left-right direction extend downward, and are formed so as to be continuous with the upper ends of the door frame left side decorative body 404 and the door frame right side decorative body 419, respectively.

  The door frame top bottom plate 454 extends in the front-rear direction so as to connect the lower end of the door frame top decorative body 453 and the lower end of the main body 451a of the door frame top base 451, and the center in the left-right direction bulges upward. As shown in FIG. The door frame top bottom plate 454 is formed in a bent shape so that the center in the front-rear direction protrudes downward. The door frame top bottom plate 454 is vertically spaced between a pair of reinforcing ribs 454a and a pair of reinforcing ribs 454a that are spaced apart in the left-right direction and connect the front and rear ends and extend upward in a flat plate shape. A pair of central speaker ports 454b facing the top center speaker 462, and a pair of side speaker ports 454c penetrating vertically on the outer sides of the pair of reinforcing ribs 454a and facing the top side speaker 464. ing. A central speaker box 461 is attached between the pair of reinforcing ribs 454 a on the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454.

  The door frame top center decorative board 455 is formed in a strip shape extending in the left-right direction. In the door frame top center decorative substrate 455, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are full-color LEDs. The door frame top center decorative board 455 can light-decorate the central portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The door frame top left decorative substrate 456 is formed in a strip shape extending left and right. In the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are full-color LEDs. The door frame top left decorative substrate 456 can light-decorate the left portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The door frame top right decorative substrate 457 is formed in a band plate shape extending left and right. In the door frame top right decorative board 457, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are full-color LEDs. The door frame top right decorative substrate 457 can light-decorate the right portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The top center reflector 458, the top left reflector 459, and the top right reflector 460 extend in the left-right direction, respectively, and are provided on the door frame top center decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457, respectively. A through-hole penetrating back and forth is formed at a position corresponding to each mounted LED.

  The central speaker box 461 is formed in a box shape extending to the left and right, and a pair of top central speakers 462 are attached so as to face downward and forward. The central speaker box 461 is attached between a pair of reinforcing ribs 454 a on the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454. The top center speaker 462 is a full range speaker and outputs sound such as voice and music in a wide frequency band.

  The speaker bracket 463 is attached to the lower surfaces of the left and right front protrusions 451b of the door frame top base 451. The top side speaker 464 is a tweeter and outputs a high frequency range of sounds such as voice and music.

  The top lower cover 465 is formed of a punching metal made of a metal plate having countless through holes. Sound output from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 is radiated forward and downward through the top lower cover 465.

  The door frame top relay substrate 467 includes a door frame top center decorative substrate 455, a door frame top left decorative substrate 456, a door frame top right decorative substrate 457, a top central speaker 462, a top side speaker 464, and the door frame base unit 100. This relays the connection with the door frame sub-relay board 105.

  The door frame top top plate 468 closes the opening 452 a of the top upper cover 452, the front end is locked to the top upper cover 452, and the rear end is attached to the door frame base unit 100.

  The door frame top unit 450 decorates the upper and outer sides of the door window 101 a of the door frame base 101 in a state assembled to the door frame 3. In the door frame top unit 450, the left and right ends of the door frame top decorative body 453 are respectively continuous with the upper ends of the door frame left side decorative body 404 and the door frame right side decorative body 419, thereby forming an integral decoration. Yes. Further, the door frame top unit 450 can output sound such as voice and music to the player side through the pair of top center speakers 462 and the pair of top side speakers 464.

[3-9. Door frame decoration]
The decoration in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 75 is a front view of a door frame shown together with each decorative board. As shown in the figure, the door frame 3 has a substantially rectangular door window 101a extending in the vertical direction and closed by a transparent glass plate 162 of the glass unit 160 at the center in front view. The door frame 3 includes a dish upper left decorative body 271 of the dish unit 200, a dish upper right decorative body 276, a dish center upper decorative body 312a of the rendering operation unit 300, a door frame left side decorative body 404 of the door frame left side unit 400, a door frame. The outer periphery of the door window 101a is surrounded by the door frame right side decorative body 419 of the right side unit 410 and the door frame top decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450 over the entire periphery.

  Dish left upper decorative body 271, dish upper right decorative body 276, dish center upper decorative body 312 a, door frame left side decorative body 404, door frame right side decorative body 419, and door frame top decorative body surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101 a Since 453 is formed in a semi-tube shape, it is possible to show the player a decoration such that the entire periphery of the door window 101a is surrounded by a fluorescent lamp.

  In the door frame 3, a dish upper left decorative body 271 surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a, a dish upper right decorative body 276, a dish center upper decorative body 312a, a door frame left side decorative body 404, a door frame right side decorative body 419, and Behind the door frame top decorative body 453, the dish upper left decorative board 273, the dish upper right decorative board 278, the dish center upper decorative board 314, the door frame left side decorative board 402, the door frame right side decorative board 418, and the door frame top central decoration. Since the substrate 455, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 are arranged, by appropriately emitting the LEDs of the decorative substrate, the entire outer periphery of the door window 101a can be decorated with light emission, It is possible to show the player the light emission effect so that the light moves along the outer periphery of the door window 101a.

  In the tray unit 200 of the door frame 3, an annular and donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 having a diameter larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201 is coaxially disposed in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302 on the upper surface. A pressing operation unit 303 including a cylindrical outer periphery pressing operation unit 303 b and a columnar central pressing operation unit 303 a is attached, and a semicircular arc similar to the rotation operation unit 302 is provided below the rotation operation unit 302. A doughnut-shaped (semi-cylindrical or semi-tube-shaped) two large dish central upper decorative body 312a and dish central lower decorative body 312b are attached two apart vertically and The door frame left side decorative body 404 and the door frame right side unit 41 of the door frame left side unit 400 having the same shape so as to be continuous with both ends of the decorative body 312a and the dish lower central decorative body 312b. Door frame right side decorative body 419, and the door frame top decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450 is attached to the outside of Tobiramado 101a of the door frame base 101 so as to surround the outer periphery of the gaming region 5a.

  As a result, in the dish unit 200, three donut-shaped members are lined up and down in the rotation operation section 302, the two dish center upper decoration bodies 312a, and the dish center lower decoration body 312b. Since the pressing operation unit 303b and the central pressing operation unit 303a are arranged concentrically, the impact of appearance can be increased, and the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be made conspicuous.

  Further, the upper left decorative body 271, the upper right decorative body 276 of the dish, the lower left decorative body 281, the lower right decorative body 286 of the dish, and the lower central decorative body 312 b of the dish are arranged in half. The thickness of the tube-like tube is slightly reduced, and a hemispherical unit lower cover 311 is provided below the dish center lower decorative body 312b. Thereby, in the production operation unit 300, since it becomes larger from the lower end toward the upper side, it is possible to emphasize the perspective in the vertical direction, and the rotation operation unit 302 that can be operated by the player arranged on the upper side, The pressing operation unit 303 can be shown large, and the interest of the player can be strongly attracted to the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 in the effect operation unit 300 on the upper surface of the dish unit 200 to suppress a decrease in interest. it can.

  Further, a donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 is attached to the upper surface of the dish unit 200 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending forward as it goes upward. Since it is inclined so as to be lowered, the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 faces the head (face) of the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, and the player rotates from the player. The entire contents of the operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be easily seen, and the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be shown larger. Further, as described above, since the entire contents of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 are easily understood, the player can easily recognize that the rotation operation unit 302 has a donut shape. Therefore, the player can immediately recognize that the donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 is rotating, so that when the player participation type effect is executed, the player rotates immediately. The operation unit 302 can be rotated, and the player's participation type effect can be enjoyed by the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Further, the diameter of the rotation operation unit 302 is made larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201, and the diameters of the plate center upper decoration body 312 a and the plate center lower decoration body 312 b are made larger than those of the rotation operation unit 302. In the dish unit 200 of the pachinko machine 1, the front end side of the rotation operation unit 302, the dish center upper decorative body 312a, and the dish center lower decorative body 312b protrudes more forward than the upper dish 201, and Since the decoration body 312a and the dish center lower decoration body 312b are in a state of decorating the outer periphery of the rotation operation section 302, the rotation operation section 302, the dish center upper decoration body 312a, and the dish center lower decoration body 312b are made conspicuous. At the same time, it is possible to improve the appearance around the rotary operation unit 302 by the dish center upper decorative body 312a and the dish center lower decorative body 312b. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the pachinko machine 1 is different from other pachinko machines at first glance, attract the player's interest strongly, and appeal to the player. The pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as a pachinko machine to be played.

[4. Overall structure of main frame]
The overall configuration of the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 76 to 82. FIG. 76 is a front view of the main body frame in the pachinko machine, and FIG. 77 is a rear view of the main body frame in the pachinko machine. 78 is a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the right front, FIG. 79 is a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the left front, and FIG. 80 is a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the rear. 81 is an exploded perspective view in which the main body frame is disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 82 is an exploded perspective view in which the main body frame is disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear.

  The main body frame 4 holds a game board 5 having a game area 5a in which a game is played by hitting the game ball B, and also pays out the game ball B to the player side or uses the game ball B used in the game. Is discharged to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (island equipment side of the game hall). As shown in the figure, the main body frame 4 is formed in a box shape with the front opened, and the game board 5 is detachably accommodated therein from the front. The body frame 4 is attached to the frame-like outer frame 2 attached to the island equipment of the game hall at the top and bottom of the front left side front end so that it can be opened and closed, and the door frame 3 is opened and closed so that the opened front side is closed Mounted as possible.

  The main body frame 4 has a frame-shaped main body frame base unit 500 whose rear portion can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the left side of the main body frame base unit 500 in front view. A main body frame upper hinge member 510, which is rotatably attached to the outer frame hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 and is rotatably mounted to the door frame hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3, and the main body frame. A body frame lower hinge assembly that is attached to the lower end of the base unit 500 on the left side when viewed from the front and is rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 and the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is rotatably attached. A solid body 520.

  The main body frame 4 is attached to the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 attached to the left side of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front, and is attached to the lower front portion of the main body frame base unit 500. A ball launcher 540 for driving the ball B, an inverted L-shaped payout base unit 550 attached along the front side and the left side on the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500, and the payout base unit 550 A payout unit 560 for paying out the game ball B to the player side, a board unit 620 attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500, and a rear of the main body frame base unit 500. A back cover 640 covering the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 501 so as to be openable and closable on the side, and a main body frame base unit 00 viewed from the front right side with an installed and the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4, and the door frame 3 and the locking unit 650 for locking between the body frame 4, and a.

  The main body frame base unit 500 is a connection cable guide member for guiding a main body frame base 501 formed in a rectangular frame shape whose front view extends vertically, and a connection cable 503 for connection to the door frame 3 side. 502 and a game board lock member 505 for detachably holding the game board 5 are provided.

  The payout base unit 550 includes a payout base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and a ball tank attached to the payout base 551 and extending upward in the shape of a box extending left and right. 552, a tank rail 553 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and extending leftward in a groove shape opened upward, a first rail cover 554 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553, A second rail cover 555 that is attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 so as to be separated from the one rail cover 554 to the left in a front view, and between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555, A ball straightening member 556 attached to the upper end, and a ball stop member 557 attached to the downstream end of the tank rail 553; It is equipped with a.

  The payout unit 560 is based on instructions from the payout control board 633 for the ball guide unit 570 for guiding the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner and the game ball B guided by the ball guide unit 570. The payout device 580 for paying out one by one, the upper full ball path unit 600 for guiding the game ball B passing through the payout device 580 downward, and the game ball B passing through the upper full ball path unit 600 on the door frame 3 side Alternatively, a lower full sphere path unit 610 for guiding to the substrate unit 620 side is provided.

  The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, a base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b. 620c, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a.

  The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 attached to the main body frame base 501, a plurality of door frame flanges 652 that protrude forward from the unit base 651 and can be locked to the door frame 3, and protrude rearward from the unit base 651. A plurality of outer frame collars 653 that can be locked with the outer frame 2, a transmission cylinder 654 for moving the door frame collar 652 or the outer frame collar 653 in the vertical direction, and a door frame collar 652 attached downward. A lock spring 655 that is energized and urges the outer frame collar 653 upward, and an outer frame unlocking lever 656 that moves the outer frame collar 653 downward.

[4-1. Body frame base unit]
The main body frame base unit 500 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. FIG. 83A is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the main body frame, and FIG. 83B is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the main body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. FIG. 84 is an explanatory diagram showing the operation of the connection cable guide member of the main body frame when the door frame is opened and closed with respect to the main body frame. The main body frame base unit 500 has a rear portion inserted into the outer frame 2 from the front and holds the outer periphery of the game board 5 inserted from the front.

  The main body frame base unit 500 is attached to the lower left corner of the front surface of the main body frame base 501, and the main body frame base 501 is formed in a rectangular frame shape whose front view extends vertically, and guides the connection cable 503. A connecting cable guide member 502, and a game board lock member 505 that is rotatably attached to the lower part of the front surface of the main body frame base 501 about an axis extending in the front-rear direction and holds the game board 5 in a detachable manner. ing.

  The main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 has a base main body 501a formed in a rectangle whose front view extends vertically, and about 3/4 of the total height from a position slightly below the upper end of the base main body 501a. A game board insertion slot 501b through which the game board 5 is inserted from the front side and a lower side of the game board insertion slot 501b and the game board 5 is placed. A placement unit 501c and a game board restricting part 501d that protrudes upward from the center in the left-right direction of the game board placement part 501c and restricts the movement of the lower end of the game board 5 to the left, right, and rear are provided.

  Moreover, the main body frame base 501 is recessed rearward at the lower right side of the front view of the game board mounting portion 501c on the front surface of the base main body 501a, and a launching device mounting portion 501e for mounting the ball launching device 540, and a launching device mounting Cylinder insertion port 501f that penetrates forward and backward on the right side of the front view of the portion 501e and through which the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 is inserted, and penetrates back and forth on the lower left side of the game board mounting portion 501c in front view. A circular speaker opening 501g facing the front of the main body frame speaker 622 of the speaker unit 620a in 620, and a main body frame base 501 are recessed rearward and below the speaker opening 501g. The cable mounting recess 501h to which the connection cable guide member 502 is mounted and the cable mounting recess 501h And a, a cable insertion hole 501i extending through the front and rear at the right end upper viewing.

  Further, the main body frame base 501 extends in a plate shape rearward from the right side of the game board insertion slot 501b in the base main body 501a, and a locking unit 650 is attached to the right side, and a back cover 640 is provided at the rear end. It is formed in the vicinity of the upper and lower ends of the rear end of the base body 501a and the left end in front view on the rear surface of the base body 501a, and is used to attach the body frame upper hinge member 510 and the body frame lower hinge assembly 520. The upper hinge attaching part 501k and the lower hinge attaching part 501l are provided.

  A game board lock member 505 is attached to the main body frame base 501 at a position below the game board mounting part 501c on the front side and to the right of the speaker opening 501g so as to be rotatable around an axis extending in the front-rear direction. The game board lock member 505 allows the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion slot 501b to be detachable by enabling the forward movement of the game board 5 inserted through the game board insertion slot 501b to be restricted.

  The cable mounting recess 501h of the main body frame base 501 extends in the left-right direction from the right end side of the lower hinge mounting portion 501l to the right side of the speaker opening 501g to the position below the portion where the game board lock member 505 is mounted. . The cable attachment recess 501h is formed in a size that can accommodate the connection cable guide member 502, and can be attached to the right end side of the connection cable guide member 502 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending vertically.

  The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame base unit 500 has a flat plate-like guide main body 502a extending to the left and right, and protrudes forward on both the upper and lower sides of the guide main body 502a and extends to the right from the right end of the guide main body 502a. A pair of strip-shaped frame pieces 502b, a columnar mounting shaft 502c that connects the right ends of the pair of frame pieces 502b, and through the front and rear at both upper and lower ends of the guide body 502a and left and right A plurality of through holes 502d arranged in a direction.

  The connecting cable guide member 502 has a length in the left-right direction that is slightly shorter than the length in the left-right direction of the cable mounting recess 501h of the main body frame base 501, and has a size that can be accommodated in the cable mounting recess 501h. Is formed. The connection cable guide member 502 is attached so that the attachment shaft 502c can rotate around an axis extending vertically near the right end in the cable attachment recess 501h. Thereby, the connection cable guide member 502 can be rotated (hinged) so that the left end side protrudes forward.

  The connection cable guide member 502 is for guiding the connection cable 503. The connection cable 503 is composed of a plurality of wiring cords, one end of which is connected to the interface board 635 of the board unit 620, and the other end is the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-board of the door frame 3. Connected to the relay board 105.

  Then, the effect by the connection cable guide member 502 is demonstrated. As shown in FIG. 84 and the like, the connection cable guide member 502 has an end portion (right end portion) opposite to the side (left side) on which the door frame 3 is attached to the main body frame base 501 so as to be able to rotate the hinge. ) Is rotatably mounted around an axis extending in parallel with the hinge axis of the door frame 3.

  The connection cable 503 that connects the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4 to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 of the door frame 3 is connected to the interface board 635 on the side connected to the connection cable guide member. The left and right directions of the plurality of through-holes 502d formed on the upper and lower ends of the guide body 502a are in contact with the front surface of the guide body 502a so as to extend from the right to the left of the guide body 502a. It is attached to the guide body 502a by being tightened together with the guide body 502a by a binding band 504 inserted through a set of through holes 502d at the same position.

  The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame 4 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1 and the rear side of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 of the door frame 3 with the door frame 3 closed with respect to the main body frame 4. (See FIG. 84 (a)). In this state, after the connection cable 503 extends leftward from the connection cable guide member 502, the connection cable 503 is bent back in front of the lower hinge mounting portion 501 l and passes through the cable holder 103 a of the door frame 3 to open the door frame relay board cover. It extends into 107. The cable holder 103 a of the door frame 3 is disposed on the left side of the left end of the connection cable guide member 502.

  In this state, if the door frame 3 is hinge-rotated so as to open with respect to the main body frame 4, the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is pulled forward by the side attached to the door frame 3 in the connection cable 503, The connection cable guide member 502 rotates about the right end mounting shaft 502c. At this time, in this embodiment, the relationship between the opening angle α of the door frame 3 and the opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 satisfies α / 2 ≧ β (preferably α / 3 ≧ β). It is formed (see FIG. 84 (b)).

  The opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 is 0 degrees when the door frame 3 is closed (when the opening angle α of the door frame 3 is 0 degrees). The opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 increases as the door frame 3 is opened and the opening angle α increases. However, the increase stops when the opening angle α becomes larger than a certain degree (for example, about 90 degrees). It changes as follows. In this embodiment, the maximum angle of the open angle β is less than 45 degrees.

  Thus, when the door frame 3 is opened, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates so that the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 moves forward from the main body frame base 501. By guiding the connection cable 503, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 from hanging between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4.

  When the opened door frame 3 is closed, the portion of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3 moves relatively rearward, so that the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is pushed rearward by the connection cable 503. Then, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates so that the left end side moves rearward about the attachment shaft 502c. At this time, since the connection cable guide member 502 is opened at an open angle β of less than 45 degrees, the connection cable guide member 502 does not hinder the door frame 3 from moving in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 It can be closed smoothly. Further, since the connection cable 503 is guided by the connection cable guide member 502, the connection cable 503 is not sandwiched between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 when the door frame 3 is closed, and the connection cable 503. It is possible to prevent a malfunction from occurring.

  Further, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 guided by the connection cable guide member 502 is folded back by 180 degrees, so that the connection cable 503 is folded at the folded portion. You can attach a heel. As a result, when the door frame 3 is opened and the portion of the connection cable 503 that is folded back 180 degrees is changed to open, a force to close the connection cable 503 due to folding is applied. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) from moving in the opening direction due to its folding, and to connect the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502). The door frame 3 can be guided in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be smoothly closed.

  Further, on the door frame 3 side, the folded connection cable 503 is positioned closer to the center axis (axial center) of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 than the tip of the connection cable guide member 502. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable guide member 502 holds the distal end side of the connection cable guide member 502 with the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame 3. The door frame lower hinge pin 126 can be pulled toward the central axis (axial core) side.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the door frame passes through the rotation center of the connection cable guide member 502 and is centered on the central axis (axial center) of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 rather than the cable holder 103a in the speaker duct 103. The tangent line in contact with the circle passing through the portion (pressing portion) protruding rearward on the central axis (axial core) side of the upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 and the angle intersecting the front surface of the main body frame 4 is 45 degrees or less. It is comprised so that. Accordingly, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the pressing portion abuts on the connection cable 503, thereby closing the distal end side of the connection cable guide member 502 opened via the connection cable 503. Therefore, the connection cable guide member 502 can be smoothly closed with the movement of the door frame 3 in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be reliably closed. Further, since the maximum opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 that rotates (opens and closes) when the door frame 3 is opened and closed can be set to 45 degrees or less, the connection cable guide member 502 is closed when the door frame 3 is closed. Can be reliably rotated in the closing direction, and the same effect as described above can be obtained.

[4-2. Hinge member on main body frame]
The main body frame upper hinge member 510 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82. The main body frame upper hinge member 510 is attached to the upper hinge attachment portion 501k of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, is rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame 3 The door frame hinge assembly 120 is rotatably mounted.

  The main body frame upper hinge member 510 has an upper hinge main body 511 in which a rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate member is bent downward in an L shape, and protrudes in a cylindrical shape upward from the front end of the upper hinge main body 511. And a hinge pin 512 on the body frame that is pivotally supported by the hinge assembly 50 on the outer frame. The upper hinge main body 511 penetrates in the vertical direction on the left side when viewed from the front of the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 in a horizontally extending portion, and has a door frame upper hinge hole 511a for pivotally supporting the door frame upper hinge assembly 120. I have.

  The body frame upper hinge member 510 is attached to the upper hinge mounting portion 501k of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 at a portion that is bent downward and extends vertically in the upper hinge main body 511. The body frame upper hinge member 510 is pivotally supported by the body frame upper hinge pin 512 being inserted into the bearing groove 51 c of the outer frame hinge member 51 in the outer frame hinge assembly 50. The door frame upper hinge pin 122 in the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3 is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the upper hinge body 511 from below.

  The body frame upper hinge member 510 cooperates with the body frame lower hinge assembly 520 to attach the body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be capable of hinge rotation, and to the body frame 4 as a door frame. 3 can be hingedly mounted.

[4-3. Body frame lower hinge assembly]
The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is attached to the lower hinge attachment portion 501l of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, is rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame 3 The door frame lower hinge member 125 is rotatably attached.

  The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is disposed above the lower hinge first main body 521 and a lower hinge first main body 521 in which a rear portion of a flat plate member extending horizontally is bent upward in an L shape. And a lower hinge second main body 522 in which a rear portion of a flat plate member extending horizontally is bent upward in an L shape. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is provided with a portion of the lower hinge second main body 522 extending horizontally from a portion of the lower hinge first main body 521 extending horizontally and spaced downward. The vertically extending portion of the lower hinge second main body 522 is in contact with the front surface of the vertically extending portion of the first hinge main body 521.

  The lower hinge first main body 521 vertically penetrates in the vicinity of the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the outer frame lower hinge pin 60c in the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 is inserted from below. A hinge hole 521a is provided. The outer frame lower hinge hole 521a is formed coaxially with the body frame upper hinge pin 512 of the body frame upper hinge member 510.

  The lower hinge second main body 522 vertically penetrates near the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 of the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is inserted from above. A hinge hole 522a and a restriction piece 522b for extending upward from a position behind the lower hinge hole 522a for the door frame on the left side of the horizontally extending portion and for restricting the rotation range of the door frame 3. It is equipped with. The door frame lower hinge hole 522a is formed coaxially with the door frame upper hinge hole 511a in the upper hinge body 511 of the body frame upper hinge member 510.

  In the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520, the vertically extending portions of the lower hinge first main body 521 and the lower hinge second main body 522 are attached to the lower hinge mounting portion 501 l of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. It is done. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 cooperates with the main body frame upper hinge member 510 to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be capable of hinge rotation, and to the main body frame 4, the door frame 3. Can be hingedly mounted.

[4-4. Body frame reinforcement frame]
The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a U-shaped cross-sectional shape in plan view, with the right side open, and extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape. In this embodiment, the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is formed of a metal extrusion mold material.

  The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 restricts the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion slot 501b of the main body frame base 501 from moving forward and downward on the rear side of the portion extending rightward from the front end. Two left position restricting members 531 are attached so as to be spaced apart from each other in the vertical direction.

  The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 reinforces the left side (hinge side) of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and the inside of the main body frame 4 from the left side passing between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 ( The unauthorized insertion of tools into the game board 5) is prevented.

[4-5. Ball launcher]
The ball launcher 540 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. FIG. 85A is a perspective view of the ball launcher in the main body frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 85B is a perspective view of the ball launcher as seen from behind. The ball launcher 540 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the main body frame base unit 500, and the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 of the dish unit 200 in the door frame 3 is attached to the main body frame 4. This is for driving into the five game areas 5a. The ball launcher 540 can drive the game ball B with strength according to the rotation angle of the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 at the lower right front corner of the door frame 3.

  The ball launcher 540 is attached to the flat launch base 541 attached to the launcher attachment portion 501e of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500, and attached to the rear surface of the right portion of the launch base 541 when viewed from the front. A firing solenoid 542 composed of a rotary solenoid whose shaft extends forward through the firing base 541, a hitting ball 543 whose base end is attached to the rotation shaft of the firing solenoid 542, and from the vicinity of the tip of the hitting ball 543 A launch rail 544 that is attached to the front surface of the launch base 541 so as to extend obliquely upward to the left and on which the game ball B can roll.

  The ball launcher 540 is configured such that the game ball B is supplied from the ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame 3 to the launch position at the upper right end of the launch rail 544, and the game ball B is placed at the launch position of the launch rail 544. When the handle 182 is rotated in the supplied state, the firing solenoid 542 is driven with a strength corresponding to the rotation operation angle, and the game ball B is hit by the hitting ball 543. Then, the game ball B hit by the hitting ball 543 passes through the launch ball passage (see FIG. 37A) of the launch passage portion 1012 including the launch rail 544, the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5, and the game area 5a. Be driven into.

  If the launched game ball B does not reach the game area 5a due to the driving strength of the game ball B or the like, as shown in FIG. 37A, between the launch rail 544 and the outer rail 1001 From the foul ball drop opening 1013 opened in the foul ball drop unit 150c of the foul cover unit 150 constituting the return passage 1014, and falls through the foul cover unit 150 from the lower dish ball supply port 211c which is a ball opening. It is discharged to the lower plate 202.

[4-6. Dispensing base unit]
The payout base unit 550 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 86 (a) is a perspective view of the payout base unit of the main body frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 86 (b) is a perspective view of the payout base unit as seen from the back. The payout base unit 550 is formed in an inverted L shape and is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500.

  The payout base unit 550 includes a payout base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500. The payout base 551 has a top plate portion 551a extending in the left-right direction with a substantially constant width in the front-rear direction, and extends downward from the left side of the top plate portion 551a in the front-rear direction substantially the same width as the top plate portion. Left side plate portion 551b, right side plate portion 551c having a width in the front-rear direction that is substantially the same as top plate portion 551a and extending downward from the right side of top plate portion 551a, and the rear side of top plate portion 551a The back plate upper portion 551d extending downward from the right side plate portion 551c to the same position as the lower side of the right side plate portion 551c, and extending from the position closer to the front than the rear side of the left side plate portion 551b to the right and near the lower end with a substantially constant width. Back plate left portion 551e, inner plate portion 551f extending rearward from the right side of back plate left portion 551e to the same position as the rear side of left plate portion 551b, and from the front of the lower side of left plate portion 551b to the right Extends to approximately the same position as the right side of the back plate left part 551e It includes a bottom plate portion 551g and a connecting plate portion 551h, which connects the lower side of the right inner plate portion 551f of the bottom plate portion 551g, a. The payout base 551 is formed in an inverted L shape when viewed from the front, and is formed in a box shape opened forward and inward of the L shape.

  The payout base 551 has a top plate portion 551a extending to the left and right with a width substantially the same as the width of the game board insertion port 501b of the main body frame base 501, and a left side plate portion 551b above and below the game board insertion port 501b. It extends vertically with approximately the same length as the height in the direction. The payout base 551 is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 at the front ends of the top plate portion 551a, the left side plate portion 551b, and the right side plate portion 551c.

  The payout base 551 is provided with a shallow concave portion that is opened rearward by the left side plate portion 551b, the back plate left portion 551e, and the inner side plate portion 551f, and extends upward and downward. A unit 560 is attached. Further, the payout base 551 protrudes to the right at the upper part of the right side surface in front view of the inner plate portion 551f, and has a back cover attachment portion 551i to which the back cover 640 is attached.

  The payout base unit 550 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551, and has a ball tank 552 that is open upward in a box shape extending to the left and right, and a portion that extends to the left and right of the payout base 551. A tank rail 553 which is attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 on the upper side and extends leftward in a groove shape opened upward.

  Also, the payout base unit 550 has a first rail cover 554 attached in the middle of the left and right directions at the upper end of the tank rail 553, and is spaced apart from the first rail cover 554 to the left in the front view and on the upper end of the tank rail 553. A second rail cover 555 that is attached and extends to the left end of the tank rail 553, and a ball rectifying member 556 that is attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555. And a ball stopper member 557 attached near the left end in front view at the lower end of the tank rail 553.

  The ball tank 552 is formed so that the left-right direction is about half the width in the left-right direction of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551, and the front-rear direction is shorter than the depth in the front-rear direction of the top plate portion 551a. Is formed. The ball tank 552 is attached to the right side in the left-right direction on the top surface of the top plate portion 551a. The bottom surface of the sphere tank 552 is inclined so that the left end side is lowered. The ball tank 552 communicates with the tank rail 553 on the left end side.

  The tank rail 553 is attached to the vicinity of the rear end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction on the top surface of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551. The tank rail 553 has a shape in plan view that is slanted to the left and rear from the right end communicating with the ball tank 552, and the depth in the front-rear direction is approximately one depth from the depth several times the outer diameter of the game ball B. After extending to become the depth, the depth in the front-rear direction is formed in a shape extending straight to the left with a depth slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is inclined so that the left end side is lowered, and the left end of the bottom surface is opened downward with a size slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 communicates with the upper end opening of the guide passage 570 a in the ball guide unit 570 of the dispensing unit 560.

  In addition, the tank rail 553 has an upper end of a portion extending straight to the left so that the height on the left end side is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B so that it is more steep with respect to the horizontal than the bottom surface. It is inclined so that the left end side is lowered at a certain angle. The tank rail 553 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a so that the rear end of the portion extending straight to the left substantially coincides with the rear side of the top plate portion 551a. Further, the tank rail 553 has a first rail cover 554, a second rail cover 555, a ball rectifying member 556, and a ball stopper member 557 attached to the upper end of a portion extending straight to the left.

  The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are attached to the upper ends of the portions of the tank rail 553 that extend straight to the left. The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are for preventing the depth in the front-rear direction of the upper end of the tank rail 553 from expanding or narrowing due to the pressure of the game ball B in the tank rail 553. Is.

  The ball straightening member 556 is located at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 at the upper end of the tank rail 553 with respect to an axis around which the end on the first rail cover 554 side extends in the front-rear direction. It is mounted rotatably. The ball straightening member 556 includes a straightening piece 556a that protrudes into the tank rail 553 and extends in the left-right direction (see FIG. 92). By delaying the flow of the game ball B on the upper stage side of the game ball B that circulates in two upper and lower stages by this rectifying piece 556a, the flow is rectified so as to flow in a single stage on the downstream side, so that the inside of the tank rail 553 The ball is not clogged even if the height is lowered.

  The ball stop member 557 is attached to be slidable in the left-right direction in the vicinity of the left end in front view on the lower surface of the tank rail 553. By sliding leftward, the opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is closed, It is possible to prevent the game ball B from flowing from the tank rail 553 to the downstream payout unit side.

  Further, the payout base unit 550 further includes an external terminal plate 558 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 in front view on the upper surface of the portion extending to the left and right of the payout base 551. The external terminal board 558 is for making an electrical connection between the pachinko machine 1 and the island facilities of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Although not shown, the external terminal plate 558 includes a ground connection portion facing the game board insertion slot 501b side of the main body frame base 501. A ground wire extending from the game board 5 side is connected to the ground connection portion.

[4-7. Overall configuration of dispensing unit]
The overall configuration of the dispensing unit 560 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 87 and 88. 87A is a perspective view of the payout unit in the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 87B is a perspective view of the payout unit as viewed from the back. 88 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the front, and FIG. 88 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the back. is there. The payout unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550.

  The payout unit 560 includes a ball guiding unit 570 that guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, and a game ball B that is disposed below the ball guiding unit 570 and is guided by the ball guiding unit 570. In accordance with an instruction from the payout control board 633, a payout device 580 that pays out one by one, an upper full ball path unit 600 that guides the game balls B passing through the payout device 580 downward, and an upper full ball path unit And a lower full tank path unit 610 that guides the game ball B passing through 600 to the door frame 3 side or the board unit 620 side.

  The ball guiding unit 570 supplies the game balls B aligned in a line by the tank rail 553 to the payout device 580. The payout device 580 has a payout passage 580a through which the game ball B supplied from the ball guiding unit 570 can flow, and a ball extraction passage 580b branched from the middle of the payout passage 580a. Based on an instruction from the payout control board 633, the game ball B is released from the payout passage 580a to the upper full ball path unit 600, and the ball full path 580b is operated by the ball pull lever 593. The game ball B is released to the 600 side.

  The upper full ball path unit 600 guides the game ball B released from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the game ball B released from the ball removal passage 580b separately. The lower full tank path unit 610 guides the game ball B released from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 to the door frame 3 side via the upper full ball path unit 600, and is released from the ball extraction path 580b. The game ball B is guided to the board unit 620 side.

[4-7a. Ball guidance unit]
The ball guiding unit 570 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88. The ball guiding unit 570 is attached from the rear to the upper rear surface of the back base left portion 551e of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550, receives the game ball B from the tank rail 553, and guides the game ball B toward the payout device 580. Is to do.

  The ball guide unit 570 has a guide passage 570a extending in a serpentine shape through which the game ball B can flow and has a box-shaped guide unit base 571 that is open forward and a front side of the guide unit base 571 is closed. The front guide passage front cover 572, the movable piece member 573 movable by the game ball B flowing in the guide passage 570a, and the game ball B in the guide passage 570a by detecting the movement of the movable piece member 573. And a ball-cutting detection sensor 574 that detects the presence or absence of (see FIG. 92).

  The spherical guide unit 570 is formed such that the shape of the front view of the guide unit base 571 and the guide passage front cover 572 is a quadrangle extending vertically. The guide passage 570a opens upward near the left end of the upper surface of the guide unit base 571, extends vertically downward from the upper end to the vicinity of the center of the guide unit base 571 in the height direction, and then bends to the right to guide the guide unit base 571. The unit base 571 extends downward in a meandering manner while repeatedly turning back and forth between the widths in the left-right direction, and opens downward near the left end of the lower surface of the guidance unit base 571.

  The guide passage 570a is formed such that the depth in the front-rear right direction and the width in the left-right direction are slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B with respect to the distribution direction in which the game ball B flows. Can be guided in a single row.

  In the vicinity of the upper part of the ball guiding unit 570, a movable piece member 573 is attached so as to be able to advance and retreat into the guiding passage 570a. Specifically, the movable piece member 573 is rotatably attached to an axis whose upper portion extends forward and backward at a portion on the right outside of the front view of the guide passage 570a, and a part of the lower end projects into the guide passage 570a by its own weight. It is formed to do. The movable piece member 573 is in a state in which the projecting portion is pushed by the game ball B and is not retracted and protrudes from the inside of the guide passage 570a when the game ball B comes into contact with the portion protruding into the guide passage 570a. It becomes.

  When a part of the movable piece member 573 protrudes into the guide passage 570a, the ball-cut detection sensor 574 does not detect the movable piece member 573, and a part of the movable piece member 573 moves backward from the inside of the guide passage 570a. When not projecting, the movable piece member 573 is detected. Accordingly, the ball-cut detection sensor 574 is in a detection state when the game ball B is present in the guide passage 570a, and is in a non-detection state when the game ball B is not present in the guide passage 570a.

  In the state where the ball guide unit 570 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the upstream end of the guide passage 570 a communicates with the downstream end of the tank rail 553, and the downstream end of the guide passage 570 a is the discharge passage of the discharge device 580. It communicates with the upstream end of 580a. In the ball guiding unit 570, since the guiding passage 570a for guiding the game ball B extends in a meandering manner, the guiding passage 570a extends longer than the total height of the ball guiding unit 570, and many games are placed in the guiding passage 570a. The sphere B can be stored. In addition, since the ball guidance unit 570 can detect the presence or absence of the game ball B in the guidance passage 570a by the ball cut detection sensor 574, the presence or absence of the game ball B in the ball tank 552 is detected via the guidance passage 570a. can do.

[4-7b. Dispensing device]
The payout device 580 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 to 90 and the like. FIG. 89 is a rear cross-sectional view of the payout device of the payout unit cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the payout blade. 90A is a rear cross-sectional view of the payout device cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the payout blade when the ball-moving movable piece is in the open state, and FIG. 90B is a cross-sectional view cut along the line AA in FIG. It is. The payout device 580 is detachably attached to the lower side of the ball guiding unit 570 on the rear surface of the left side of the back plate 551e in the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550.

  The payout device 580 has a payout device main body 581 having a payout passage 580a through which the game ball B can flow and a ball extraction passage 580b branched from the middle of the payout passage 580a. A flat-type dispensing device rear lid 582 that closes the device main body 581 from the rear side, and a shallow box-shaped dispensing device front lid 583 that is attached to the front side of the dispensing device main body 581 and is opened rearward. ing.

  The payout device 580 is attached to the rear surface of the payout device main body 581, and has a payout motor 584 whose rotation shaft projects between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device front lid 583, and a rotation shaft of the payout motor 584. A spur gear-like drive gear 585 attached, and a spur gear-like first transmission gear 586 that meshes with the drive gear 585 and is rotatably attached by a payout device main body 581 and a payout device front lid 583. The spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 587 and the second transmission gear 587 are meshed with the first transmission gear 586 and rotatably mounted by the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front lid 583. A spur gear-like payout gear 588a and a plurality of detection pieces 588b extending outward from the payout gear 588a and between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device front lid 583. A payout gear member 588 that is rotatably attached, and a plurality of blade pieces 589a that integrally rotate with the payout gear member 588 between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear cover 582 and project into the payout passage 580a. And a blade rotation detection sensor 590 that is attached to the rear side of the payout device main body 581 and detects the detection piece 588b of the payout gear member 588.

  Further, the payout device 580 is attached by a payout device main body 581 and a payout device rear lid 582 at the downstream end of the payout passage 580a, and a payout detection sensor 591 for detecting the game ball B, the payout device main body 581 and the back of the payout device. The ball removal movable piece 592 attached to the lid 582 so as to open and close the ball removal passage 580b at a portion branched from the payout passage 580a, and the ball removal movable piece 592 can be held at a position where the ball removal passage 580b is closed. And a ball ejecting lever 593 that is slidable in the vertical direction by a dispensing device main body 581 and a dispensing device rear lid 582.

  The payout device 580 is formed in a quadrangular shape whose plan view extends vertically. The payout device 580 is formed such that the width in the left-right direction is larger to the right in the front view than the width in the left-right direction of the ball guiding unit 570.

  As shown in FIG. 89, the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 has an upstream end opened upward at a position leftward from the center in the left-right direction and a downstream end at a position near the right end in the left-right direction. It opens downward. The payout passage 580a extends obliquely downward from about 1/3 of the total height so as to move gradually to the left as it goes downward from the upstream end, and then bends slightly diagonally downward to the right. It bends at about ３ of the left and right width and extends downward substantially vertically so as to go to the center (rotary axis) of the delivery vane 589. Then, on the upper side of the center of the payout blade 589, after bending to the right in the rear view with a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B, a gap slightly larger than the game ball B between the outer periphery of the payout blade 589 Is extended downward in a concentric circular arc shape with the discharge vane 589, and vertically extends to the downstream end at a position on the right side of the rear view from the center of the discharge vane 589.

  In the payout passage 580a, a payout detection sensor 591 is disposed below the payout blade 589 and immediately above the downstream end.

  The ball extraction passage 580b branches from a portion that extends obliquely downward from the upstream end in the payout passage 580a and bends to the right, and extends vertically to the lower end along the left side when viewed from the back. It opens downward near the left end.

  The payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear cover 582 are opposed to each other on the side where the ball removal movable piece 592 is attached at the portion where the payout passage 580a and the ball removal passage 580b are branched. The main body side guide wall 581a is formed so as to protrude rearward and frontward from each other so as to form a narrower gap, and to be continuous with the left side wall in the rear view of the payout passage 580a and the ball extraction passage 580b. And a rear lid side guide wall 582a. The main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a branch from the ball extraction passage 580b in the payout passage 580a and extend to the right in the rear view at a position about 1/3 from above. It is formed at the left position. The main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a are curved so as to be recessed obliquely upward to the left in the rear view, and are mainly formed to constitute the side wall of the ball extraction passage 580b. The ball extraction movable piece 592 rotates between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a.

  The payout motor 584 is attached to the right in the rear view of the part where the payout passage 580a in the payout device main body 581 extends obliquely downward from the upstream end. The drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the payout gear member 588 are disposed in front of the payout device main body 581, and the front side is covered with the payout device front lid 583. The payout gear member 588 includes three plate-like detection pieces 588b extending outward at an angular interval of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction.

  The payout blade 589 is disposed between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear cover 582. The payout blade 589 is provided with a plurality of blade pieces 589a extending outward in a flat plate shape at intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction. The blade piece 589a extends in the payout passage 580a from the upper side toward the rotation axis and then extends to the right in the rear view so that the space between the blade piece 589a and the side wall of the payout passage B is narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B. And protrudes into the payout passage 580a. The payout vane 589 includes a ball accommodating portion 589b that is recessed with an arc having a radius slightly larger than the radius of the game ball B toward the center between the three blade pieces 589a. Only one game ball B can be accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b. Thereby, the payout blade 589 can restrict the movement of the game ball B in the payout passage 580a to the downstream side of the payout blade 589 by the blade piece 589a and rotate in the clockwise direction when viewed from the rear. Thereby, the game ball B accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b can be moved to the downstream side.

  The payout gear member 588 and the payout blade 589 are attached coaxially by a payout device rear lid 582 and a payout device front lid 583 so as to be integrally rotatable. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 is arranged on the left side of the rotation shaft of the payout gear member 588 in the rear view. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 detects the rotation of the dispensing blade 589 by detecting the detection piece 588b of the dispensing gear member 588 that rotates integrally with the dispensing blade 589.

  The upper end of the ball removal movable piece 592 is rotatably attached around an axis extending in the front-rear direction at the upper ends of the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. The ball-moving movable piece 592 is bent in a square shape, and is attached so that the recessed side faces the inside of the dispensing passage 580a. The ball removal movable piece 592 has a depth in the front-rear direction that is smaller than a gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. It is possible to project into the ball extraction passage 580b or retreat out of the ball extraction passage 580b through the gap between the two.

  The ball release lever 593 is attached to the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear cover 582 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction in the rear left view near the upper end of the ball removal movable piece 592. A part of the ball pulling lever 593 passes through the dispensing device rear lid 582 and protrudes backward, and can be slid by operating the protruding portion. By positioning the ball removal lever 593 at the lower end, the lower portion can come into contact with the ball removal movable piece 592, and the rotation of the ball removal movable piece 592 in the clockwise direction in the rear view can be restricted. The ball removal passage 580b can be closed by the ball removal movable piece 592. Further, by positioning the ball removal lever 593 at the rising end, the ball removal movable piece 592 can be rotated to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b, and the ball removal passage 580b can be opened (FIG. 90).

  When the ball removal lever 593 is raised to turn the ball removal movable piece 592 so that the ball removal movable piece 592 can be rotated, the game ball B that has been in a state of being connected in a daisy chain on the upstream side of the ball removal movable piece 592 becomes the ball removal movable piece 592. Will flow down to the ball passage 580b side. At this time, since the ball extraction passage 580b extends straight from the upstream side of the payout passage 580a, the game ball B flowing down from the upstream of the payout passage 580a flows down straight to the ball discharge passage 580b. At the same time, since the downstream side of the ball removal passage 580b communicates with the island facility side, there is no such thing as the payout blade 589 that suppresses the flow of the game ball B, so that the game ball B is from the payout passage 580a side. Will flow down as soon as possible.

  In this way, in a state where the ball removal movable piece 592 is rotatable, the game ball B flows down at a high speed in the ball removal passage 580b, so that the ball removal movable piece 592 protruding into the ball removal passage 580b. The game ball B comes into contact with the lower end side of the ball, but the ball removal movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a of the payout device main body 581 and the rear cover side guide wall 582a of the payout device rear cover 582. Since it can move outward from the inner surface of the ball extraction passage 580b, the ball extraction movable piece 592 is moved to the outside of the ball extraction passage 580b by the abutment force. The game ball B is not sandwiched between the wall surface of the extraction passage 580b and the game ball B, so that a strong force can be prevented from acting on the ball extraction movable piece 592. Piece 59 Deterioration and breakage of the durability can be suppressed.

  For this reason, it is possible to make it difficult to damage the ball removal movable piece 592. Therefore, more game balls B can be discharged earlier to the island facility side downstream of the ball removal passage 580b. An increase in time required for replacement or maintenance of the machine 1 can be suppressed, and the burden on the game hall side can be reduced.

  Further, when the ball removal movable piece 592 is in a rotatable state, the ball removal movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a which are closer than the game ball B, and the ball removal passage 580b. Since the game ball B comes into contact with the ball removal movable piece 592 protruding into the ball removal passage 580b, the ball removal movable piece 592 is moved between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. Even when the game ball B moves together with the ball removal movable piece 592 to the side between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a when moving outward through the gap, the distance from the game ball B is larger. Only the game ball B can be prevented from moving outwardly between the narrow main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a.

  Then, the movement of the game ball B to the outside is prevented by the space between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, so that the game ball B is separated from the ball removal movable piece 592, and the subsequent ball Since the movable movable piece 592 is moved by an inertial force, a strong force is not applied to the movable ball movable piece 592, and the movable ball movable piece 592 can be made difficult to be damaged, and the body side guide The game ball B does not jump out of the ball extraction passage 580b from between the wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, and the game ball B can be reliably circulated downstream of the ball extraction passage 580b.

[4-7c. Upper full ball path unit]
The upper full ball path unit 600 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88. The upper full ball path unit 600 is attached to the lower side of the rear surface of the back base left portion 551e of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550 below the payout device 580 from the rear. The upper full sphere path unit 600 is used to guide the game ball B released downward from the payout device 580 to the lower full sphere path unit 610. The upper full sphere path unit 600 is formed in a quadrilateral shape whose front view extends vertically.

  The upper full sphere path unit 600 is attached to the dispensing base 551 and has a box-shaped upper full base 601 that is open on the rear side, and a box-like shape that is attached to the rear side of the upper full tank base 601 and is open on the front side. The upper full tank cover 602 and a discharge device pressing member 603 that is rotatably mounted near the upper end of the upper full cover 602 and can press the discharge device 580 upward. The upper full base 601 protrudes rightward from the right side when viewed from the front, and includes a back cover mounting portion 601a for mounting the back cover.

  The upper full ball path unit 600 is opened upward near the left end of the front view on the upper surface, and extends upward along the left side from the bottom to a position of about 2/3 of the total height. The ball receiving passage 600a and the upper paying ball receiving passage 600a communicate with each other, extend about 3/4 of the full width to the right in front view, and extend downward from the bottom to a height of about 1/6 of the total height. An upper sphere storage passage 600b, an upper normal payout passage 600c that extends downward from the left side of the front view from the left-right center of the upper sphere storage passage 600b and opens downward on the lower surface, and an upper upper portion that is adjacent to the upper normal payout passage 600c. An upper full tank discharge passage 600d extending downward from the right side in front view from the center in the left-right direction of the ball storage passage 600b and opening downward on the lower surface, and in the vicinity of the right end in front view on the upper surface. And a, and upper ball 抜通 passage 600e that opens downward in the lower surface near the right end after extending substantially vertically downwards and opens upwardly (see Figure 92).

  The upper full tank path unit 600 has an upper normal payout passage 600c, an upper full tank payout path 600d, and an upper full ball discharge path 600e that are open in a line from the left side when viewed from the front. In the state where the upper full ball path unit 600 is assembled in the payout unit 560, the upstream end of the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a is opened directly below the downstream end of the payout passage 580a in the payout device 580, and The upstream end of the passage 600e opens just below the downstream end of the ball removal passage 580b in the dispensing device 580. Thereby, the game ball B released (paid out) from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 passes through the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a and the upper ball storage passage 600b, and then the upper normal payout passage 600c or the upper full tank discharge passage 600d. Is released downward from any of the above. The game ball B released downward from the ball extraction passage 580b of the payout device 580 is released downward through the upper ball extraction passage 600e.

[4-7d. Lower full ball path unit]
The lower full tank path unit 610 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88. The lower full tank path unit 610 is mounted on the bottom plate portion 551g of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550 and attached to the lower part of the upper full ball path unit 600. The lower full ball path unit 610 guides the game ball B released downward from the upper full ball path unit 600 to the door frame 3 side or to the board unit 620 side. The lower full sphere path unit 610 extends in the front-rear direction so that the front end side is lowered, and the rear end extends upward.

  The lower full tank path unit 610 has a lower normal full passage 610a, a lower full tank discharge path 610b, and a lower full ball discharge path 610c. The lower full tank base extends in the front-rear direction and is opened upward. 611, a lower full cover 612 that is attached to the upper side of the lower full base 611, a lower normal discharge passage 610a that is attached to the front end of the lower full base 611 so as to be rotatable around a front and rear axis. A discharge passage opening / closing door 613 capable of opening and closing the downstream end opening of the lower full tank discharge passage 610b, and a discharge passage opening / closing door 613 in a direction to close the downstream end openings of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full tank discharge passage 610b are attached. A closing spring 614.

  The lower full tank path unit 610 has a lower normal payout path 610a, a lower full tank payout path 610b, and a lower full ball discharge path 610c arranged in order from the left in the front view on the upper surface of the portion extending upward from the rear end. In the state, the respective upstream ends are open upward. The lower normal payout passage 610 a and the lower full tank payout passage 610 b extend forward in a state where they are aligned side by side, and are opened forward at the front end of the lower full ball path unit 610. The lower full tank discharge passage 610b extends forward in a slightly lower state than the lower normal discharge passage 610a. The lower ball extraction passage 610c extends forward along the right side surface of the lower full tank discharge passage 610b as viewed from the front, and opens rightward in the middle of the front-rear direction.

  The payout passage opening / closing door 613 is rotatably attached at a position between the front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b. The discharge passage opening / closing door 613 is urged clockwise by a closing spring 614, and in a normal state, the front end opening (downstream end) of each of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b. The opening is closed. The payout passage opening / closing door 613 includes an operation protrusion 613a protruding forward. The operating projection 613a is formed in a short arc shape centered on the turning center of the payout passage opening / closing door 613, and the front end surface approaches the end in the counterclockwise direction. It is inclined to protrude forward. The operating protrusion 613a is formed so as to come into contact with the door opening / closing contact portion 150f of the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3 when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4.

  The lower full tank path unit 610 is assembled in the payout unit 560, and a lower normal payout path 610a, a lower full tank payout path 610b, and a lower ball discharge path 610c, which are open upward at the upper end of the rear part, respectively, It is located directly below the downstream end of the upper normal discharge passage 600c, the upper full tank discharge passage 600d, and the upper ball discharge passage 600e of the sphere path unit 600. Thereby, the game ball B released downward from the upper normal payout passage 600c flows through the lower normal payout passage 610a, and the game ball B released downward from the upper full payout passage 600d is lower lower full payout passage 610b. And the game ball B released downward from the upper ball extraction passage 600e flows through the lower ball extraction passage 610c.

  In addition, the lower full tank path unit 610 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1, and the front ends (downstream ends) of the lower normal discharge passage 610 a and the lower full discharge passage 610 b pass through the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3. It opens immediately after the ball passage 150a and the full ball receiving port 150b. In addition, the downstream end of the lower ball extraction passage 610c is opened to face the ball extraction guide portion 627 that opens to the left in the base unit 620b of the substrate unit 620.

  In a normal state (the state in which the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4), the lower full tank path unit 610 has the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening / closing door 613 to be in contact with the door opening / closing of the foul cover unit 150. By abutting against the portion 150f, it rotates counterclockwise against the biasing force of the closing spring 614. As a result, the respective downstream end openings of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full tank discharge passage 610b are opened, and communicated with the through ball passage 150a and the full tank reception port 150b of the foul cover unit 150. It is in a state.

  On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the operating protrusion 613 a of the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is separated from the door opening / closing contact portion 150 f of the foul cover unit 150, and the payout passage opening / closing door 613. Is rotated clockwise by the biasing force of the closing spring 614, and the respective downstream end openings of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b are closed. In this state, the game balls B in the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b cannot move forward from the respective front end openings. Thereby, even if the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the game ball B does not spill from the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank discharge passage 610b.

[4-7e. Flow of game balls in payout unit]
Next, the flow of the game ball B in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The payout unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the payout base 551 when assembled in the main body frame 4. In a normal state, the ball pulling lever 593 of the payout device 580 is positioned at the lower end, and the ball pulling passage 580b branched from the payout passage 580a is closed at the branch portion. Further, in the lower full ball path unit 610, the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is open.

  In the ball tank 552 opened upward, from the game hall island facility where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, for example, a predetermined number of balls are detected based on the detection of the ball breakage by the ball breakage detection sensor 574 of the ball guidance unit 570. A game ball B is supplied. The game balls B supplied / stored in the ball tank 552 are sent into the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 through the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 while being aligned in a line by the tank rail 553. In a state in which the payout motor 584 is not rotating, the game ball B cannot move (flow down) downstream from the payout blade 589, and a plurality of game balls B stays upstream from the payout blade 589. It becomes.

  Then, the game ball B in the guide passage 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 presses the movable piece member 573, and the ball-cut detecting sensor 574 detects the movable piece member 573. Thereby, it can be seen that the game ball B is stored in at least the passage between the movable piece member 573 and the payout blade 589.

  In this state, when the payout vane 589 is rotated in the clockwise direction in the rear view by the payout motor 584, the game ball B accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b moves in the clockwise direction in the rear view, and the payout vane in the payout passage 580a. It is discharged downstream of 589. Then, the game ball B released from the payout vane 589 (the ball housing portion 589b) is detected by the payout detection sensor 591 and then sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full ball path unit 600.

  In a normal state, the game ball B sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full ball path unit 600 is disposed directly below the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a through the upper ball storage passage 600b. It flows down to the upper normal payout passage 600c. Then, the game ball B flowing down to the upper normal payout passage 600c passes through the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full ball path unit 610 and the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3, and the dish unit 200. Is discharged into the upper plate 201 from the upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211.

  When many game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 and the inside of the upper plate 201 is filled with the game balls B, the game ball B cannot be discharged forward from the upper plate ball supply port 211a. The game ball B paid out from 580 becomes accumulated in the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full ball path unit 610, and when the game ball B is further paid out, the lower side of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the upstream side. It also stays in the upper normal payout passage 600c of the upper full sphere path unit 600 in communication. Then, when the game ball B is paid out while the upper normal payout passage 600c is filled with the game balls B, the upper normal payout passage 600c enters the upper ball storage passage 600b communicating with the upstream side of the upper normal payout passage 600c. As the game ball B begins to stay, the game ball B starts to flow down to the upper full tank payout passage 600d adjacent to the upper normal payout passage 600c.

  Then, the game ball B that has flowed down to the upper full tank payout passage 600d side passes through the lower full tank payout passage 610b of the lower full ball pass unit 610, and fills up the full ball receiving port 150b in the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3. Can be received. Thereafter, the game ball B received by the full ball receiving port 150b is discharged into the lower plate 202 through the storage passage 150e, the ball discharge port 150d, and the lower plate ball supply port 211c of the plate unit base 211. Thereby, when the game ball B is further paid out in a state where the upper plate 201 is full of the game balls B, the game ball B can be automatically paid out to the lower plate 202.

  If the game ball B is further paid out in a state where the lower plate 202 is filled with the game balls B and the game ball B cannot be discharged forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211c, the lower plate The game ball B stays and is stored in the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 on the upstream side of the ball supply port 211c. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the movable piece 153 is moved and detected by the full tank detection sensor 154, and the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 are filled with the game balls B ( The player is informed that the tank is full, and the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 is temporarily stopped until the full tank detection sensor 154 enters a non-detection state.

  When the game ball B stored in the ball tank 552 is discharged from the pachinko machine 1 during maintenance or replacement of the pachinko machine 1, the ball pulling lever 593 of the payout device 580 is moved upward from the position of the descending end. Slide to the raised end position. After that, the lower end side of the ball removal movable piece 592 is pushed by the game ball B and rotates in the clockwise direction when viewed from the back, and the ball removal movable piece 592 is connected to the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. It will be in the state pushed out to the outside of ball extraction passage 580b. Thus, the game ball B can enter the ball extraction passage 580b branched from the payout passage 580a, and the upstream game ball B is released downward through the ball extraction passage 580b.

  At this time, since the game ball B flowing down comes into contact with the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a more strongly than the ball removal movable piece 592 at the part of the ball removal movable piece 592, the ball removal movable piece 592 Is hard to break.

  The game ball B released downward from the ball extraction passage 580b of the payout device 580 passes through the upper ball extraction passage 600e of the upper full ball passage unit 600 and the lower ball extraction passage 610c of the lower full ball passage unit 610. And then discharged from the downstream end opening of the lower ball extraction passage 610c to the ball extraction guide portion 627 of the substrate unit 620, and then through the discharge ball receiving portion 628 and the ball discharge port 629 to the rear outside (game hall). To the island facility side).

[4-8. Substrate unit]
The board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. FIG. 93A is a perspective view of the main body frame substrate unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 93B is a perspective view of the substrate unit viewed from the rear. FIG. 94 is a perspective view of the substrate unit as viewed from the lower back. FIG. 95 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit as seen from the front after being disassembled for each main structure, and FIG. FIG. 97 is an enlarged side sectional view showing the lower part of the pachinko machine cut at the center in the left-right direction. The substrate unit 620 is attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500.

  The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a attached below the game board mounting portion 501c on the rear surface of the body frame base 501 in the body frame base unit 500, and a body frame so as to cover a part of the speaker unit 620a from the rear. A base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the base 501, a power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control unit 620d And an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to partially cover from behind.

  The speaker unit 620a has a speaker cover 621 attached below the game board mounting portion 501c on the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500, and a front side in the vicinity of the left end in front view on the rear surface of the speaker cover 621. A main body frame speaker 622 and a container-like speaker box 623 which is attached to the rear side of the speaker cover 621 so as to cover the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 and is opened forward. .

  The speaker cover 621 extends in the left-right direction, penetrates forward and backward in the vicinity of the left end when viewed from the front, and includes a circular speaker mounting portion 621a configured by a plurality of slits extending vertically, and the front surface of the speaker mounting portion 621a. The front concave portion 621b that is recessed so as to bulge from the rear to the front on the right side of the view, and protrudes downward from the lower surface of the spatial front concave portion 621b and extends in the left-right direction toward obliquely downward and rearward A connecting portion 621c that is open.

  The main body frame speaker 622 is attached to the speaker attachment portion 621a of the speaker cover 621 from the rear side toward the front. Further, the connecting portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees so that the lower end thereof coincides with the upper end of the connecting tube portion 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43 in the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2. . The body frame speaker 622 is a cone-type speaker that mainly outputs bass sounds.

  The speaker box 623 is formed in a container shape that is open forward, and the rear part of the main body frame speaker 622 protrudes most backward, and as it goes to the right in the front view, it goes backward in a staircase shape. The protrusion is formed so as to be small. As a result, a sufficient space behind the right side of the front center of the speaker box 623 can be secured, and the base unit 620b, the power supply unit 620c, and the like can be arranged. The speaker box 623 is formed so as to cover (close) the entire rear surface of the speaker cover 621 excluding the connection portion 621c.

  The speaker unit 620 a forms a part of an enclosure 624 that encloses sound output from the main body speaker 622 with the speaker cover 621 and the speaker box 623. The enclosure 624 has a space front recess 621b that bulges forward to the right of the speaker mounting portion 621a in the speaker cover 621, so that the speaker box 623 protrudes rearward as it goes to the right. Even if it is formed in a staircase shape so as to reduce the amount, a space on the right side of the main body frame speaker 622 is sufficiently wide.

  When the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the speaker unit 620 a is connected to the connection cylinder portion 43 a so that the connection portion 621 c of the speaker cover 621 sandwiches the seal member 48, and the rear of the main body frame speaker 622. And the curtain plate interior space 40a of the outer frame 2 communicate with each other. Accordingly, a wide space enclosure 624 can be formed on the rear side of the body frame speaker 622 by the speaker cover 621, the speaker box 623, the curtain plate front member 42, and the curtain plate rear member 43. Can be output (radiated) forward from the opening 42a of the curtain front member 42.

  More specifically, as described above, in the speaker unit 620a, the space behind the main body frame speaker 622 (a part of the enclosure 624) is extended to the right in the front view with a relatively wide depth, and the connection portion 621c and Since the communication is made to the outer frame lower assembly 40 side through the connection cylinder portion 43a, the outer frame lower assembly 40 is not particularly attenuated in the sound output backward from the main body frame speaker 622 without attenuating the bass range. In addition to being transmitted to the side, the transmitted low sound range can be resonated and amplified by passing through the two port members 47 and radiated forward from the opening 42 a of the curtain plate front member 42.

  At this time, the sound radiated forward from the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42 is radiated in a state in which the phase is reversed. The sound radiated from the 200 speaker openings 211b resonates so as to be amplified, so that a large sound with a heavy bass sound can be output even if the diameter of the main body frame speaker 622 is small.

  That is, in this embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is a bass reflex type, and a player can hear a heavy bass. Thereby, the sound output from the front surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiated from the speaker opening 211b of the dish unit 200, and the sound output from the rear surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiated from the grill member 46 of the outer frame 2 By this, the player can listen to a sound having a rich bass.

  In the speaker unit 620a, a through hole 621d penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed in the speaker cover 621 at a position between the lower portion of the speaker mounting portion 621a and the space front recessed portion 621b, and the speaker box 623. In addition, a through cylinder 623a is formed which communicates with the through hole 621d and extends in a cylindrical shape and penetrates in the front-rear direction. In the state assembled to the speaker unit 620a, the through-hole 621d and the through-tube 623a communicate with each other and are independent of the enclosure 624. A connection cable 503 is inserted through the through hole 621d and the through cylinder 623a.

  The base unit 620b of the board unit 620 includes a front base 625 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 so as to cover a part of the speaker box 623 from the rear, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the front base 625. And a rear base 626 to which 620c is attached.

  The base unit 620b is formed by cooperation of the front base 625 and the rear base 626. The base unit 620b receives the game ball B released from the lower ball passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610 and receives a front view. A ball extraction guiding portion 627 that guides to the right, and a discharge ball receiving portion that opens upward on the right side of the front view on the downstream side of the ball extraction guiding portion 627 and receives the game ball B discharged downward from the game board 5. 628, and a ball discharge port 629 for discharging the game ball B that has passed through the ball removal guiding portion 627 and the discharge ball receiving portion 628 downward.

  The ball extraction guiding portion 627 has an upstream end opened leftward at an upper portion of the left side surface in a front view, and a downstream end opened to the left end side of the discharge ball receiving portion 628. The ball extraction guide portion 627 faces the downstream end opening of the lower full ball path unit 610 so that the upstream end opening coincides with the downstream end opening of the lower full ball path unit 610 in the assembled state of the main body frame 4. The game ball B released from the ball extraction passage 610c can be received and guided to the discharge ball receiving unit 628.

  The discharge ball receiving portion 628 is opened upward and extends long to the left and right. The bottom surface of the discharge ball receiving portion 628 is continuous so that the left end in front view is continuous with the bottom surface of the ball extraction guide portion 627 and is inclined so as to become lower toward the right.

  The base unit 620b guides the game ball B extracted from the ball tank 552 and the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 to the right in the front view by the ball extraction guide unit 627 and the discharge ball receiving unit 628, and then Since it discharges | emits below from the discharge port 629, it can make it easy to ensure the space of the left side rather than the center of the left-right direction in front view. Thereby, the space of the enclosure 624 of the speaker unit 620a can be widened, and the player can hear a sound having a richer sound than the conventional pachinko machine.

  The power supply unit 620c of the board unit 620 includes a power supply board 630 attached to the rear side of the rear base 626 of the base unit 620b and a power supply board cover attached to the rear base 626 so as to cover the rear side of the power supply board 630. 631.

  The payout control unit 620d includes a box-like payout control board box 632 that is detachably attached to the rear side of the power supply board cover 631 in the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control board 633 (see FIG. 97). The payout control board 633 controls the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 in response to a pressing operation of the ball lending button 224 of the ball lending operation unit 220 in the dish unit 200 or a payout command from the main control board of the game board 5 or the like. Thus, the instructed number of game balls B are to be paid out to the player side (upper plate 201 or lower plate 202). The payout control board box 632 is formed so as to leave a trace of opening and closing. As a result, an unauthorized modification to the payout control board 633 can be detected, and the deterrent against fraud is increased.

  The interface unit 620e covers the board base 634 attached to the rear side of the speaker box 623 in the speaker unit 620a, the interface board 635 attached to the rear surface of the board base 634, and the rear side of the interface board 635. And an interface board cover 636 attached to the board base 634.

  The substrate base 634 is attached to a portion of the rear surface of the speaker box 623 that protrudes most backward, which is behind the main body frame speaker 622. The interface board 635 is connected to one end (the main body frame 4 side) of the connection cable 503. The interface board 635 is connected to a power supply board 630, a payout control board 633, a main control board, a peripheral control board, and the like, and is connected to a CR unit installed outside the pachinko machine 1. The interface board cover 636 extends to the right from the board base 634 (interface board 635) so as to cover a part of the payout control unit 620d.

[4-9. Back cover]
The back cover 640 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 76 to 82. The back cover 640 covers the rear side of the game board 5 that is inserted from the front into the game board insertion port 501b of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 and attached. The back cover 640 is attached to the rear end of the main frame base 501 with the right side extending up and down of the rear extension 501j of the main body frame base 501 so as to be rotatable around a vertically extending axis. Are attached to the back cover attaching portion 551i and the back cover attaching portion 601a of the upper full ball path unit 600.

  The back cover 640 is formed in a shape such that the right side of a flat plate extending in the up, down, left, and right directions is bent forward. It is formed so as to be located on substantially the same plane as the rear surface. The back cover 640 is formed with a plurality of slits 641 penetrating back and forth and extending vertically. In this embodiment, the back cover 640 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and the inside of the main body frame 4 can be visually recognized from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1.

[4-10. Locking unit]
The locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 98 (a) is a perspective view of the locking unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 98 (b) is a perspective view of the locking unit as viewed from the back. The locking unit 650 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4 and locks between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2.

  The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 attached to the right side surface of the rear extension 501j of the main body frame base 501 and extending vertically, and a plurality of lockable units 650 protruding forward from the unit base 651 and capable of being locked to the door frame 3. A door frame flange 652, a plurality of outer frame flanges 653 projecting rearward from the unit base 651 and engageable with the outer frame 2, and projecting forward from a lower front end of the unit base 651, depending on the rotation direction. And a transmission cylinder 654 for moving the flange 652 or the outer frame flange 653 in the vertical direction.

  The locking unit 650 has a lock spring 655 that biases the door frame collar 652 downward and an outer frame collar 653 upward, and a transmission cylinder 654 at the front end of the unit base 651. An outer frame unlocking lever 656 that protrudes forward from the upper position and slides downward to move the outer frame collar 653 downward.

  When the locking unit 650 is assembled to the main body frame 4, a plurality of (three) door frame flanges 652, a transmission cylinder 654, and an outer frame unlocking lever 656 are forward of the front surface of the main body frame base 501. It protrudes. The transmission cylinder 654 protrudes forward through the cylinder insertion opening 501f of the main body frame base 501 and closes the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, so that the front end rotates the cylinder lock 130 of the door frame 3. The rotation of the key engaged with the transmission member 133 and inserted into the keyhole 132 is transmitted and rotated.

  In the locking unit 650, a plurality (three) of door frame cages 652 are engaged with the hook members 116 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3, and a plurality (two) of outer frames. The frame hook 653 is locked to the upper hook member 24 and the lower hook member 25 of the outer frame right assembly 20 in the outer frame 2.

  When the locking unit 650 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1 and a key corresponding to the key hole 132 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted and rotated in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, a plurality of the locking units 650 are connected via the transmission cylinder 654. The door frame collar 652 moves upward, and the door frame 3 is unlocked with respect to the main body frame 4. On the other hand, when the key is rotated in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front, the plurality of outer frame hooks 653 are moved downward via the transmission cylinder 654, and the main body frame 4 is unlocked with respect to the outer frame 2. In a state in which the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, when the outer frame unlocking lever 656 is slid downward, the plurality of outer frame hooks 653 move downward, and the main body frame with respect to the outer frame 2 is moved. 4 is unlocked. In this way, the locking between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 or between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 can be unlocked.

  When locking between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 or between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2, the door frame ridge 652 and the outer frame ridge 653 are inclined so that the distal end sides thereof become thinner. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4 or the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the door frame hook 652 and the outer frame hook 653 become the hook member 116 and the upper hook member. After moving downward and upward so as to get over 24 and the lower hook member 25, the locked state is brought about by the urging force of the lock spring 655.

[5. Overall configuration of game board]
The overall configuration of the game board 5 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 99A to 101. FIG. 99A is a front view of a game board in a pachinko machine, and FIGS. 99B to 99I are enlarged front views of main parts of the game board. FIG. 100 is an exploded perspective view of the game board as viewed from the front after being disassembled for each main structure, and FIG.

The game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 has a game area 5a into which the game ball B is hit when the player operates the handle 182 of the handle unit 180. The game area 5a includes a first game area 5a1 in which a game ball launched with a predetermined firing force (when the amount of operation of the handle 182 by the player is small) can flow down, and a specific strength stronger than the predetermined firing force. A second game area 5a2 in which a game ball that has been launched with a shooting power (a shooting power that is strong enough to jump over the first game area 5a1 / a large amount of operation of the handle 182 by the player) can flow down; It can be divided into a second game area 5a2 and a downstream third game area 5a3 where the first game area 5a1 merges.
In the left half of the first game area 5a1 of the game area 5a and the third game area 5a3 connected to the downstream side of the game area 5a, a predetermined privilege (for example, a predetermined number of game balls B is given to the player by receiving the game ball B). Are provided with a plurality of general prize winning ports 2001, and the right half of the second game area 5a2 and the third game area 5a3 connected to the downstream side of the second game area 5a2 are provided to the player by receiving the game ball B. And detecting the passage of the general winning port 2001, the second starting port 2004, the big winning port 2005, and the game ball B for giving a predetermined privilege (for example, paying out a predetermined number of game balls B) to the player. And a gate portion 2003 for giving a predetermined privilege (for example, opening and closing the opening / closing piece 850 of the second start port 2004 for a predetermined time so as to be able to win a prize). Center The specific privilege to the player by receiving the game ball B (e.g., payout, and the like. A predetermined number of game balls B) is first start hole 2002 to grant is provided.
Further, in the second game area 5a2, as a unique receiving port that can receive the game ball B, the game ball B can be received, but the disadvantage is not to collect the game ball B and give the player a profit. One receiving port 2006 is provided. In the second game area 5a2, the general winning port 2001 and the second start port 2004 that receive the game ball B and give the player a predetermined privilege are more advantageous than the first receiving port 2006. It is also called 2 reception. The second receiving port only needs to be relatively more advantageous than the first receiving port 2006, and therefore, the setting of the first receiving port 2006 does not give any game ball to the incoming ball. For example, one game ball may be given by entering the ball. Further, if the setting of the first receiving port 2006 is to give one game ball to the incoming ball, two or more game balls may be given by the incoming ball.
In addition, the game area 5a is connected to the first game area 5a1 and the second game area 5a2 at the top, so that the game ball B launched with a specific strong firing force enters the second game area 5a2. The communication passage portion 5a4 can be passed through.

The game board 5 defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and the outer shape of the front component member 1000 is substantially square when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000 and defines the rear end of the game area 5a. A plate-like game panel 1100.
A plurality of obstacle nails 2007 that come into contact with the game ball B are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement at a portion in the game area 5a on the front surface of the game panel 1100.
In addition, the game board 5 is a game that is performed by driving a board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear part of the game panel 1100 and a game ball B attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200 into the game area 5a. A main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 102) for controlling the contents.

  Further, the game board 5 displays a game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and has a function display unit 1400 attached to the lower left corner of the front component member 1000 so as to be visible to the player side, and a game panel A peripheral control unit 1500 disposed on the rear side of 1100, an effect display device 1600 disposed in the center of the game area 5a in a front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and attached to the front of the game panel 1100 A front unit 2000 and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 are provided. An effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and a peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the effect display device 1600.

  The game panel 1100 is formed so that the outer periphery is slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component member 1000 and holds the outer periphery of the transparent flat base panel 1110 and the base panel 1110. And a frame-like panel holder 1120 to which the rear unit 3000 is attached on the rear surface.

  The front unit 2000 is attached to the center in the left-right direction in the third game area 5a3 of the game area 5a, and has a first start port 2002 and a start port unit 2100 having one general winning port 2001, and the first game. A side unit 2200 which is attached along the inner rail 1002 near the middle area between the area 5a1 and the third game area 5a3 and has two general winning ports 2001, the second game area 5a2 and the third game area , An attacker unit 2400 having a large winning opening 2005, one general winning opening 2001 (second receiving opening), a second starting opening 2004 (second receiving opening), a gate portion 2003 and a first entrance 2006 having a center slightly upward from the front in the game area 5a (the first game area 5a1, the second game area 5a2, and the third game area 5a3). A frame-shaped center member 2500 attached to state) surrounded three sides of the both lateral and bottom, and a.

  The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 and the back box 3010 which is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a square opening 3010a on the rear wall. A lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the display device 1600, a panel relay board 3031 attached to the left end in rear view below the opening 3010a on the rear surface of the back box 3010, and a back box 3010. A plurality of back production units 3100.

[5-1. Previous component]
The front component member 1000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 99A to 101. The front component member 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and has an inner shape penetrating in a front-rear direction in a substantially circular shape. The outer periphery of the game area 5a is defined by the inner periphery of the inner shape. The front component member 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 that extends in an arc shape from the lower left side to the left side from the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and extends to the upper right side through the center upper end in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. An inner rail 1002 that is arranged substantially along the outer rail 1001 inside the front component member 1000 and extends in an arc shape from the center lower part in the left-right direction in front view to the upper left part in the front view, and a game on the right side in front view of the lower end of the inner rail 1002 An out guiding portion 1003 that is formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and is inclined so as to become lower toward the rear.

  Further, the front component member 1000 includes a lower right rail 1004 and a lower right rail 1004 that are linearly inclined so that the right end side is slightly higher from the right end of the out guide portion 1003 in front view to the right side of the front component member 1000. The right rail 1005 that extends from the right end of the front component member 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 along the right side of the front component member 1000, and the upper portion of the game ball B of the outer rail 1001 is curved. And an impacting portion 1006 made of rubber or the like provided at the intersection of the end in the hitting direction and the upper end of the right rail 1005.

  Further, the front component member 1000 is pivotally supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1002, and has a closed position and a front-view clock extending upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close the space between the front rail and the outer rail 1001. A backflow prevention member that is rotated by a spring (not shown) so as to be able to rotate only between the open position where the outer rail 1001 is opened by rotating in the rotating direction and to return to the closed position side. 1007.

  Further, the front component member 1000 includes an out ball opening 1008 penetrating in the front-rear direction at the rear end of the out guiding portion 1003 at the center lower portion in the left-right direction in front view in the frame. The game ball B guided backward by the out guide part 1003 is discharged to the rear of the front component member 1000 (game panel 1100) through the out ball port 1008.

  Further, the front component member 1000 includes an outer portion of the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 that are substantially perpendicular to the lower end, a lower portion of the outer guide portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and an outer portion of the right rail 1005. Each part includes a security recess 1009 that is recessed backward from the front end. When the gaming board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the security recess 1009 has a rear protrusion 172 that protrudes rearward of the security cover 170 in the door frame 3. It will be inserted. Accordingly, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (the front component member 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear protruding piece 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess portion 1009 of the front component member 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire enters the game area 5a through the space between the security cover 170 and the front structural member 1000 from below the front surface of the board 5, it will be blocked by the rear protrusion 172 and the security recess 1009. The unauthorized tool can be prevented from entering the game area 5a.

  Further, the front component member 1000 includes a notch 1010 that is notched upward from the lower end in the lower left corner when viewed from the front. The notch 1010 coincides with the notch 1122 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100, and penetrates the notch 1010 and the notch 1122 when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4. Front end openings of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b of the path unit 610 face forward.

[5-2. Game panel]
The game panel 1100 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 99A to 101. The game panel 1100 is attached to the rear surface of the front component member 1000, and the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 are attached thereto. The gaming panel 1100 has a flat base panel 1110 having an outer periphery slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component member 1000 and formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and holds the outer periphery of the base panel 1110. And a frame-like panel holder 1120 attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000 and attached to the rear unit 3000 on the rear surface.

  The base panel 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed of a synthetic resin plate such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, or methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. The plate thickness of the base panel 1110 is thinner than the panel holder 1120, and is the minimum necessary thickness (8 to 10 mm) that can be sufficiently retained even if the obstruction nail is installed on the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. It is said that. In this embodiment, the base panel 1110 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

  The base panel 1110 is the lowest position in the game area 5a, and an out recess 1111 that is recessed upward from the lower end is formed at a position corresponding to the out ball opening 1008 of the front component member 1000. The base panel 1110 has a plurality of through-holes 1112 penetrating in the front-rear direction for attaching the front unit 2000.

  The panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 includes a base panel 1110 and has a substantially rectangular outer shape, and is thicker than the base panel 1110 (about 20 mm in this example). Panel holder 1120 is formed of a synthetic resin (for example, a thermoplastic synthetic resin). The panel holder 1120 holds the base panel 1110 in a detachable manner and is recessed from the front side toward the rear side, and has a through-hole 1121 through which the inside penetrates in the front-rear direction with a size substantially equal to the game area 5a. It has.

  The panel holder 1120 includes a notch 1122 that is notched upward from the lower end in the lower left corner when viewed from the front. The notch 1122 is formed so as to coincide with the notch 1010 of the front component member 1000, and penetrates the notch 1010 and the notch 1122 when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4. The front end opening of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b of the lower full ball path unit 610 faces forward.

[5-3. Substrate holder]
The board holder 1200 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in a horizontally long box shape that is open at the top and front, and is inclined so that the bottom surface becomes lower toward the center in the left-right direction. The substrate holder 1200 has a discharge portion 1201 that is cut out from the front end toward the rear at the center in the left-right direction on the bottom surface. The board holder 1200 covers the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from the lower side and the rear side in the assembled state on the game board 5, and the main control unit 1300 on the rear side. A main control board box 1320 is attached.

  In the state in which the substrate holder 1200 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the discharge unit 1201 is located immediately above the discharge ball receiving unit 628 of the base unit 620 b in the substrate unit 620 of the main body frame 4. Thereby, all of the game balls B discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out ball opening 1008 and the game balls B discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 can be received. The discharge part 1201 formed on the bottom surface can be discharged to the discharge ball receiving part 628 below.

[5-4. Main control board unit]
The main control unit 1300 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 100 and FIG. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 includes a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 102) for controlling game contents, payout of the game ball B, and the like, and a main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200. And.

  The main control board box 1320 includes a plurality of sealing mechanisms. When the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism, the sealing mechanism is then destroyed to open the main control board box 1320. The main control board box 1320 can be opened and closed. Therefore, by observing the trace of opening and closing, it is possible to discover unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrent against unauthorized actions on the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

  The main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 is connected to the interface board 635 and the peripheral control board 1510. In addition, the main control board 1310 is connected to the function display unit 1400, the gate sensor 2401, the second start opening sensor 2402, the big prize opening sensor 2403, the first receiving opening sensor 2406, the start opening solenoid 2404, via the panel relay board 3031. An attacker solenoid 2405, a general winning port sensor 3001, a first start port sensor 3002, and a magnetic sensor 3003 are connected.

[5-5. Function display unit]
The function display unit 1400 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 99A. The function display unit 1400 is attached to the lower left corner of the front component member 1000 outside the game area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be viewed from the front (player side) through the door window 101a of the door frame 3 in a state assembled to the pachinko machine 1. The function display unit 1400 displays a gaming state (game situation), a normal lottery result, a special lottery result, and the like using a plurality of LEDs based on a control signal from the main control board 1310.

  The function display unit 1400 displays, as shown in an enlarged view in FIG. 99A, a status indicator 1401 composed of three LEDs for displaying the gaming state and a normal lottery result that is drawn by passing the game ball B with respect to the gate unit 2003. A normal symbol display 1402 composed of two LEDs, and a normal retention indicator 1403 composed of two LEDs for displaying the number of suspensions relating to the passage of the game ball B with respect to the gate unit 2003.

  In addition, the function display unit 1400 includes a first special symbol display 1404 including eight LEDs for displaying a first special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B in the first start port 2002, and a first start port. A first special hold number display 1405 composed of two LEDs for displaying the number of holds for receiving the game ball B in 2002, and a second special lottery drawn by receiving the game ball B in the second start port 2004 A second special symbol display 1406 composed of eight LEDs for displaying the result, and a second special reserve number display 1407 composed of two LEDs for displaying the number of suspensions related to the reception of the game ball B in the second starting port 2004. And.

  Furthermore, the function display unit 1400 is a round consisting of five LEDs that display the number of times the open / close pattern of the big prize opening 2005 is repeated (number of rounds) when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is “big hit” or the like. A display 1408 is provided.

  In this function display unit 1400, the number of symbols, symbols, etc. can be displayed by appropriately turning on, turning off, and blinking the LEDs provided.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
The peripheral control unit 1500 in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. Peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of back box 3010 of back unit 3000. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 (see FIG. 102) that controls the presentation presented to the player based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board that houses the peripheral control board 1510. Box 1520. Although not shown, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 for controlling a light emission effect, a sound effect, a movable effect, and the like, and an effect display control unit 1512 for controlling the effect image. ing.

  The peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is connected to the main control board 1310, the rendering operation unit 300, various decorative boards on the door frame 3 side, the rendering display device 1600, and the like.

[5-7. Production display device]
The effect display device 1600 in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 99A to 101. The effect display device 1600 is arranged in the center of the game area 5a in front view, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via a back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the substantially center of the rear wall of the back box. The effect display device 1600 can be viewed from the front side (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center member 2500 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled. The effect display device 1600 is a 12-inch full-color liquid crystal display device using a white LED as a backlight. The effect display device is connected to the peripheral control board 1510 and can display a predetermined still image or moving image.

  The effect display device 1600 includes two left fixed pieces 1601 projecting outward from the left side surface when viewed from the front, and a right fixed piece 1602 projecting outward from the right side surface when viewed from the front. This effect display device 1600 has two fixed grooves 3010c opened on the left inner peripheral surface in front view in a frame-like liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b of a back box 3010 to be described later with the liquid crystal screen facing forward. After inserting the two left fixing pieces 1601 obliquely from the back of the back box 3010, the right fixing piece 1602 side is moved forward, the right fixing piece 1602 is inserted into the opening of the lock mechanism 3020, and the lock mechanism 3020 is inserted. It is attached to the back box 3010 by sliding downward.

[5-8. Table unit]
The front unit 2000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 99A to 101. The front unit 2000 is attached to the base panel 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front, the front end protrudes forward from the front surface of the base panel 1110, and a part of the rear end passes through the through-hole 1112. It protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the panel 1110.

  As described above, the front unit 2000 is attached to the center in the left-right direction in the third game area 5a3 of the game area 5a, and has the first start opening 2002 and one general winning opening 2001. A side unit 2200 which is attached along the inner rail 1002 in the vicinity of an intermediate area between the first game area 5a1 and the third game area 5a3 and has two general winning ports 2001, and a second game area 5a2. And an attacker unit 2400 that is attached near the middle area of the third game area and has a large winning opening 2005, one general winning opening 2001 (second receiving opening), a gate portion 2003, and a second starting opening 2004. (Second entrance), having a disadvantageous first entrance 2006, slightly in the middle of the game area 5a when viewed from the front (slightly above the first game area 5a1 and the second game area 5a2) A frame-shaped center member 2500 that is attached to the three game areas 5a3 and is surrounded by the three sides of the game area 5a3, and a table effect unit 2600 that is attached to the center member 2500. ing.

[5-8-1. Center member]
The center member 2500 of the front unit 2000 includes a gate sensor 2401 that detects the game ball B that has passed through the gate portion 2003, a second start port sensor 2402 that detects the game ball B received in the second start port 2004, and a first A first receiving port sensor 2406 that detects the game ball B received in the first receiving port 2006, and the attacker unit 2400 detects the game ball B received in the big winning port 2005. 2403 (also referred to as a count sensor) (see FIG. 102). In addition, the center member 2500 includes a start port solenoid 2404 that opens and closes the second start port 2004 in accordance with a normal lottery result lottered by the passage of the game ball B of the gate unit 2003, and the attacker unit 2400 includes the first starter solenoid 2404. There is provided an attacker solenoid 2405 for opening and closing the grand prize winning opening 2005 according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result lottered by receiving the game ball B into the start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004.

  In the game area 5a, the center member 2500 is disposed above the start port unit 2100 and the side unit 2200 and slightly above the center of the front view, and is attached to the front surface of the base panel 1110 of the game panel 1100. 830 is attached. The center member 2500 is formed in a frame shape, and the effect display device 1600 disposed behind the game panel 1100 and the various effect units provided in the back unit 3000 can be viewed from the front through the frame. .

  The frame-shaped center member 2500 has an enclosure frame 832 that protrudes forward from the front surface of the base panel 1110 of the game panel 1100 around the lower side, and is driven into the game area 5 a by the enclosure frame 832. The rare game ball B cannot enter the frame.

  The center member 2500 includes a warp inlet 2501 that allows the game ball B in the first game area 5a1 to enter the outer peripheral surface on the left side of the enclosure frame 832 when viewed from the front, and a game ball B that has entered the warp inlet 2501. A warp outlet 2502 that can be released and opened in the frame, and a stage shelf 2503 that can be released to the third game area 5a3 after rolling the game ball B released from the warp outlet 2502 in the left-right direction, I have.

  The stage shelf 2503 of the center member 2500 has a curved shape in which the center side in the left-right direction is recessed, and corresponds to a position corresponding to the position immediately above the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100, that is, the center member 2500 is placed on the game panel 1100 (base panel 1110 ), The substantially central position in the left-right direction is formed in a wave shape that is slightly higher than the left and right sides. The stage shelf 2503 has a portion (top) that is slightly higher than the left and right sides of the center in the left-right direction, and a portion (valley) that is the lowest on both sides of the stage shelf 2503 that is lowered toward the front. The game balls B are inclined, and the game balls B can be discharged from these parts to the third game area 5a3.

  In the state where the center member 2500 is assembled to the game board 5, the portion (top) which is higher at the center in the left-right direction of the stage shelf 2503 is located immediately above the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100. Thus, when the game ball B is released from the center of the stage shelf 2503, it is accepted into the first start port 2002 with a very high probability.

  The center member 2500 has an extended region forming portion 2504 located on the front side of the second game region 5a2 that protrudes to the right in front view, and the region forming portion 2504 has an upper portion in FIG. 99A. In order, a gate portion 2003, a first receiving port 2006, a general winning port 2001 (second receiving port), and a second starting port 2004 (second receiving port) with an opening / closing piece 850 are provided, and these are provided in the second game area. It is mounted from the front in the mounting opening formed in 5a2. Further, in the area forming portion 2504, the obstacle nail 2007 is implanted in the base panel 1110 in the same manner as in the first game area 5a1. In the present embodiment, the center member 2500 and the region forming portion 2504 are integrally provided. However, as another embodiment, the center member 2500 and the region forming portion 2504 are provided separately. May be. In addition, when the area of the second game area 5a2 is small, a ball flow lower surface part and an obstacle projection part are formed in the area forming part 2504, and the area forming part 2504 is equivalent to the second game area 5a2 described above. You may make it have a function.

The center member 2500 is assembled with the game board 5 between the upper surface of the surrounding frame 832 (specifically, the upper surface on the right side from the substantially horizontal center) and the outer rail 1001 surrounding the upper side of the game area 5a. The game ball B is attached so as to form a gap slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B (11 mm in this embodiment). This gap is the communication passage portion 5a4 that connects the first game area 5a1 and the second game area 5a2 above.
The communication passage portion 5a4 of the embodiment shown in FIG. 99A has a stopper provided at the intersection of the outer rail 1001 and the right rail 1005 from the tapered corner portion 832b of the step portion 832a at the substantially upper center of the surrounding frame 832. It has a lateral passage portion extending in the left-right direction reaching 1006 and a longitudinal passage portion located downstream of the lateral passage portion and extending in the up-down direction. The lateral passage portion is a substantially straight gap, and extends substantially tangential to the apex of the arc along the outer rail 1001 drawn by the launched game ball B. Therefore, the game ball B launched with a specific strong firing force (a firing force that jumps over the first game area 5a1) rides on the upper surface of the tapered corner portion 832b of the step portion 832a of the enclosure frame 832 or It rolls while contacting the inner surface of the outer rail 1001 by centrifugal force and can move to the back of the lateral passage portion (near the entrance of the longitudinal passage portion).

  As shown in FIG. 99B in which the main part of FIG. 99A is enlarged, the vertical passage portion of the communication passage portion 5a4 is a vertical hook-shaped discharge that opens downward and communicates downwardly with the stop portion 1006. The vertical portion 848a and the vertical hook-shaped discharge portion 848b that opens downwardly and communicates downwardly with respect to the direction in which the game ball B is struck by one game ball from the discharge portion 848a have a predetermined width. It is provided in the form of being partitioned by a partitioning portion 848e. The partition portion 848e plays a role of partitioning the opening portion 848aH and the opening portion 848bH, and the top portion (uppermost surface) is inclined so that the game ball flows down to the right. In addition, the partition portion 848e includes a reinforcing member (reinforcing resin 848e1) formed with a predetermined width in the left-right direction in consideration of game ball collision, and an accommodating portion 848e2 that accommodates the reinforcing member. . In addition, a left and right partition wall 848e3 that divides the discharge portion 848a and the discharge portion 848b in the left-right direction is formed downward from the surrounding wall portion that forms the housing portion 848e2, and the game ball B that flows down the discharge portion 848a, and the discharge portion The game ball B flowing down 848b is prevented from being mixed in the middle of the flow. In the embodiment of FIG. 99B, the top portion (uppermost surface) of the partition portion 848e between the opening portion 848bH and the opening portion 848aH is virtually the bottom surface of the communication passage portion 5a4 (the upper surface of the surrounding frame 832 of the center member 2500). It is formed with the height which becomes substantially the same surface as the extension line at the time of extending. As a result, among the game balls B launched with a specific strong firing force (a firing force that jumps over the first game area 5a1), the bottom surface of the connecting passage portion 5a4 is moved at a speed that does not jump over the partition portion 848e. The rolling game ball B enters the opening 848bH in front of the partition 848e. In addition, among the game balls B launched with a specific strong launch force (a launch force that jumps over the first game area 5a1), the top of the partition portion 848e is exceeded while being in contact with the inner surface of the outer rail 1001 by centrifugal force. The game ball B (the game ball B that has floated from the bottom of the communication passage portion 5a4 and has passed the top of the partition portion 848e) collides with the stop portion 1006 and enters the opening portion 848aH. Further, the plurality of discharge portions 848a and 848b are arranged side by side at the top of the second game area 5a2, that is, the portions 5a2a and 5a2b (the exit portion of the communication passage portion 5a4 or the second portion) entering the second game area 5a2. The game area 5a2 is connected in a different state. As described above, in the present embodiment, while having the gaming property of launching the game ball B with a specific strong firing force (a launching force that jumps over the first game area 5a1), the specific strong firing force In consideration of the strength of the steering wheel adjustment within the range, the game ball after the first game area 5a1 is jumped over has a new game characteristic that makes the whereabouts of the game diversified.

  As described above, the second game area 5a2 accepts or passes the game ball B to give a predetermined privilege to the player, such as a general winning port 2001 (second receiving port), a second start port 2004 ( The second receiving port), the gate portion 2003, and the like, and the first receiving port 2006 (incoming embodiment = out in the embodiment) in which the handling (results by entering the ball) from the second receiving port is disadvantageous. The probability of entering the ball is appropriately set depending on the type of the outlet of the communication passage portion 5a4 and the arrangement of the obstacle nails 2007.

For example, in the example of FIG. 99B, the game ball B entering (falling) from the location 5a2a corresponding to the opening 848aH of the discharge portion 848a directly below the stop portion 1006 through the communication passage portion 5a4 is the second game area 5a2. The probability of entering the first entrance 2006 is set to be greater than the probability of entering the second entrance and the probability of passing through the gate portion 2003.
On the other hand, the game ball B that enters the second game area 5a2 from the location 5a2b corresponding to the opening 848bH of the adjacent discharge portion 848b has a low probability of entering the first receiving port 2006 and relatively becomes the second receiving port. The probability of entering the ball and the probability of passing through the gate unit 2003 are set to be large.
Therefore, when the player types in the second game area 5a2, the player collides with the stop portion 1006 in order to aim at the discharge portion 848b that leads to the left route that it is easy to enter the second receiving port and difficult to enter the first receiving port 2006. Therefore, the batting force of the handle 182 is carefully adjusted so that the game ball B can be launched at such a speed that the game ball B can roll on the bottom surface of the communication passage portion 5a4 at a speed that does not jump over the partition portion 848e.

The discharge portions 848a and 848b are provided with speed reduction means such as obstacle protrusions 849 and bent portions 849s in the middle of the flow path, and the game ball B passes through the discharge portions 848a and 848b by the speed reduction means. A time for allowing the player to recognize whether or not the game has been confirmed is secured. This is because which release portion 848a, 848b through which the game ball B passes greatly affects the player's profit. Note that the speed reduction means in the middle of the flow path is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and the obstacle protrusions 849 are provided on both of the discharge portions 848a and 848b, or the bent portions 849s are provided on both of the discharge portions 848a and 848b. It can also be realized by providing a transparent cover body having a width enough to cover the front of both of the discharge portions 848a and 848b, and providing an obstruction ridge on the back side of the transparent cover body. Good.
In addition, the effect display device 1600 is enlarged so that an image of the effect display device 1600 is displayed at a position corresponding to the back side of the discharge portions 848a and 848b, and the passage surfaces of the discharge portions 848a and 848b are formed transparently. The image of the effect display device 1600 may be visually recognized through the transparent passage surface, and the discharge portions 848a and 848b may be decorated with the image of the effect display device 1600. For example, in a gaming state that requires the use of the second gaming area 5a2 (eg, a short-time gaming state), a specific image (eg, a flame image) is displayed behind the emitting unit 848b, and the emitting unit 848a In comparison, the player may be informed that the discharge portion 848b is advantageous.
Further, prior to the start of a gaming state (for example, a short-time gaming state) that requires the use of the second gaming area 5a2, an announcement is made in advance to inform the player that the discharging unit 848b is advantageous over the discharging unit 848a. An image (for example, a message image such as “Please aim right at the left passage!”) Is displayed in a predetermined display area, or “Right-handed here” is displayed behind the discharge portion 848b. The message image of “Please!” May be displayed, and in order to prevent the player from being confused at the start of the short-time state, a more detailed explanation effect regarding “right-handed” may be executed.
Further, in these cases, it is preferable that an effect sensor (emission type detection means) for detecting the game ball B is provided in, for example, the openings 848aH and 848bH of the release units 848a and 848b, respectively, and the release unit through which the game ball B has passed. Depending on which of 848a and 848b is used, a predetermined notification using sound or image display, or light emission of a light emitting body provided in the emission units 848a and 848b may be performed. For example, the number of game balls that have passed through the release unit 848a and the number of game balls that have passed through the release unit 848b are counted by each effect sensor, and the notification type (notification pattern) is determined according to the status of these count values. Can be exemplified. Specifically, when the count value of the number of game balls that have passed through the release unit 848a in the short-time gaming state reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10), a voice notification “Good luck!” Or a specific image display a, Congratulations when all or part of the light emission in the specific light emission pattern a is performed, or when the count value of the number of game balls that have passed through the emission part 848b in the short-time game state reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10). The voice notification “!”, The specific image display b, and all or part of the light emission by the specific light emission pattern b can be exemplified. Further, when the count value of the number of game balls that have passed through only the discharge part 848a without passing through the discharge part 848b reaches a predetermined number (for example, three), "Careful!" A game in which all or a part of the light notification, the specific image display c, and the light emission with the specific light emission pattern c are performed, or only the discharge part 848b passes without the game ball passing through the discharge part 848a. When the count value of the number of spheres reaches a predetermined number (for example, three), all or part of light emission with a voice notification “delicious!”, A specific image display d, and a specific light emission pattern d is performed. It is possible to give a player a sense of satisfaction and achievement.

99C to 99I show other forms of the communication passage portion 5a4, the discharge portions 848a and 848b, or the second game area 5a2.
In FIG. 99C, the width of the communication passage portion 5a4 in the height direction is expanded to about two game balls, and the partition between the opening 848bH and the opening 848aH is made using this height. The top of the portion 848e is slightly higher than the bottom surface of the communication passage portion 5a4 (the upper surface of the enclosure frame 832 of the center member 2500). As a result, the game ball B rolling on the bottom surface of the communication passage portion 5a4 hits the left side of the top of the partition portion 848e and enters the opening 848bH, so that the game ball B can be further divided by adjusting the handle to the discharge portion 848a. Can be easily.
Further, since the communication passage portion 5a4 has a wide width in the height direction and the height of the game ball B that has been launched can be seen at a glance, it can be predicted at an early stage which discharge portion 848a, 848b will enter. Therefore, the firing force can be adjusted in a short time.
Further, even when a common “twist” is performed to launch a plurality of game balls B together, as shown in FIG. 99C, when a plurality of game balls move up and down, The game ball B hits the partition portion 848e and flows to the discharge portion 848b, and the upper game ball B jumps over the partition portion 848e and flows to the discharge portion 848a, so that damage due to “twisting” or the like hardly occurs.
By the way, in the form as shown in FIG. 99C, the game ball B that has been launched repeatedly collides with the partition portion 848e as described above, and the game ball B that bounces off the hitting portion 1006 also collides. For example, it is preferable to reinforce such as forming a rib or inserting a metal plate. Further, since the game balls B are repeatedly contacted, it is preferable to cover the surface of the partition portion 848e with a wear-resistant material such as a metal plate.

Also, what is shown in FIG. 99D is an embodiment in which a branch portion 848c is extended upstream of the reinforcing resin 848e1, unlike FIG. 99B and FIG. 99C. Specifically, in FIG. 99D, the communication passage portion 5a4 has a vertical extension extending in the left-right direction separating the passages so that a plurality of spherical passages are formed in the vertical direction upstream of the plurality of discharge portions 848a, 848b. A branch portion 848c having a partition wall 848c1 is provided, and the first spherical passage 5a4a of the plurality of spherical passages formed by the branch portion 848c is a discharge portion of the plurality of discharge portions 848a and 848b. The second sphere passage 5a4b of the plurality of sphere passages communicated with 848a (first release portion) and formed by the branch portion 848c is a discharge portion 848b (second of the plurality of discharge portions 848a, 848b). The discharge portion is configured to communicate with the discharge portion.
The branch portion 848c is provided with a metal buffer pin 848d at the tip thereof, and the buffer pin 848d receives the impact of the game ball B and prevents the branch portion 848c from being damaged. Of course, if the tip of the upper and lower partition walls 848c1 of the branch portion 848c is covered with a metal cover or the like to be reinforced, the buffer pin 848d may be omitted.
In this case as well, the player aims at either the first ball passage 5a4a or the second ball passage 5a4b by adjusting the firing force of the game ball B with the handle 182, but the first ball is in a stage where the momentum of the hit ball is strong. Since it is necessary to distinguish between the passage 5a4a and the second ball passage 5a4b, the degree of difficulty in adjusting the handle 182 is high, and the difference in technique by the player is easily reflected. Therefore, a sense of accomplishment and satisfaction when the intended result is obtained increases.
In FIG. 99D, a space portion is formed on the left side of the accommodating portion 848e2 of the reinforcing resin 848e1, but the reinforcing resin 848e1 is inserted into the space portion or the reinforcing resin 848e1 is inserted. It may be possible to further improve the strength by attaching another reinforcing member different from the above. Also, in consideration of the appearance when the space portion is enlarged, a predetermined decoration may be applied to the surface side of the reinforcing resin or the reinforcing member attached to the space portion, or the reinforcing resin or the reinforcing member Some effect devices (for example, a 4th symbol display device or a sub liquid crystal) may be provided instead of the members so as to have both effects of the reinforcing surface and the effect surface.

  99E (a) and (b) show that a drop port 5a4c that connects the first ball passage 5a4a and the second ball passage 5a4b is provided in a part of the branch portion 848c of the communication passage portion 5a4 in FIG. 99D. A part of the game ball flowing through the one ball passage 5a4a can fall into the second ball passage 5a4b and fall from the second discharge portion 848b to a specific location 5a2b in the second game area 5a2. In this case, a variation of the adjustment of the handle 182 that separates the discharge portions 848a and 848b (for example, as shown in FIG. 99E (b), the game ball B is hit against the buffer pin 848d of the branch portion 848c and the traveling direction is changed upward. The game ball B hits the outer rail 1001 so that it bounces back into the drop opening 5a4c.), And the interest of the game increases.

  In FIG. 99F, the tip of the branching portion 848c shown in FIG. 99D is set in the vicinity of the step portion 832a of the surrounding frame 832 of the center member 2500, so that it hits the tip of the branching portion 848c. Since the game ball B is easily rebounded to the first game area 5a1, the difficulty of striking the first ball passages 5a4a and 5a4b is further improved. Incidentally, in the examples of FIGS. 99D, 99E (a), and (b), a rebound space 832c is provided between the tip of the branching portion 848c and the stepped portion 832a of the surrounding frame 832 of the center member 2500. Most of the game balls B that bounce off the part 848c enter the second ball passage 5a4b while rolling on the upper surface of the enclosure frame 832.

99G and 99H are examples in which the discharge portions 848a and 848b of FIG. 99B are lengthened, and conversely, the second game area 5a2 is shortened in the vertical direction. In this case, the discharge portions 848a and 848b are passed. Since the residence time of the game ball B can be lengthened, there is an effect that the visibility of the game ball B passing through the discharge portions 848a and 848b can be improved.
99G and 99H are examples in which the risk of entering the first receiving port 2006 is increased by arranging the first receiving port 2006 above and below the gate unit 2003, and by doing so, the gate unit Since the thrill of aiming for 2003 can be increased, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be increased.

As described above, in the example of FIGS. 99A to 99H, the advantage 5 disadvantages are provided in the subsequent dropping route between the places 5a2a and 5a2b entering the second game area 5a2, and thus the always advantageous place 5a2b is provided. I tried to aim, but at the places 5a2a and 5a2b that I entered, I offered different kinds of profits on the subsequent fall route, so that either one of the places 5a2a and 5a2b was appropriately selected and aimed according to the gaming state May be.
That is, in the example of FIG. 99I, a game ball B that enters from the location 5a2a corresponding to the opening 848aH of the discharge portion 848a directly below the stop portion 1006 through the communication passage portion 5a4 enters the first receiving port 2006. Is greater than the probability of entering the second entrance, but is set to possibly pass through the gate portion 2003.
On the other hand, the game ball B entering from the location 5a2b corresponding to the opening 848bH of the adjacent discharge portion 848b has a very low probability of entering the first receiving port 2006, and has a high probability of entering the second receiving port. Is set to
Therefore, when the player types in the second game area 5a2, even if there is a risk of entering the first receiving port 2006 depending on the game state, the player aims at the gate part 2003 and collides with the stop part 1006, and thus the discharge part. Aiming at 848a, for example, when hitting the handle 182 as appropriate, such as aiming at the discharge portion 848b which is difficult to enter the first receiving port 2006 and easily enters the second receiving port, and easily reaches the winning port 2005 with low risk. Force adjustment will be performed.

In addition, although not shown in figure, the above-mentioned center member 2500 is divided into parts common to different models, such as a part corresponding to the second game area 5a2 of the center member 2500 and other parts, for each model. It is also possible to divide the parts to be changed into a plurality of blocks (at least two) and combine the blocks so that one center member 2500 is formed. By doing so, it becomes possible to mass-produce a portion common to each model, so that the cost of the center member 2500 can be suppressed.
Further, the member between the discharge portion 848a and the discharge portion 848b may be movable so that the interval between the openings 848aH or 848bH of one discharge portion 848a or 848b may be increased when a specific condition is satisfied.
Further, a speed reduction means such as an obstructed protrusion 849 provided on the discharge portions 848a and 848b may be provided on the inner surface of the communication passage portion 5a4 so as to make adjustments so as to facilitate technical entry into the discharge portion 848b.

  In the front unit 2000, the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 is sent to the back unit 3000 on the rear side of the gaming panel 1100 and detected by the general winning opening sensor 3001, and then to the lower substrate holder 1200. Discharged. Further, the game ball B received in the first start port 2002 is sent to the rear unit 3000 on the rear side of the game panel 1100 and detected by the first start port sensor 3002, and then discharged to the lower substrate holder 1200. Is done.

  Further, the game ball B received in the second start port 2004 is detected by the second start port sensor 2402, then sent to the rear side of the game panel 1100 and discharged to the lower substrate holder 1200. The game ball B received in the big prize opening 2005 is detected by the big prize opening sensor 2403, then sent to the rear side of the gaming panel 1100, and discharged to the lower substrate holder 1200. The game ball B received in the first receiving port 2006 is detected by the first receiving port sensor 2406 and then sent to the rear side of the game panel 1100 and discharged to the lower substrate holder 1200.

[5-8-2. Table production unit]
The table effect unit 2600 is not shown in detail, but according to the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result that are drawn by accepting the game balls B to the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004. A plurality of effect decoration bodies that move and emit light are provided, and a movable effect and a light emission effect can be performed. The front effect unit 2600 can perform a light emission effect, a movable effect, and the like by appropriately using a plurality of effect decoration bodies, and can present various pattern effects to the player by appropriately combining them. In addition, it is possible to make the player hard to get bored, to entertain the player with various effects, and to suppress the player's interest in the game from being reduced.

[5-9. Back unit]
The back unit 3000 in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 99A to 101. The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100, and the effect display device 1600 and the peripheral control unit 1500 are attached to the rear side. The back unit 3000 includes a general winning port sensor 3001 that detects the game ball B received in the general winning port 2001 of the front unit 2000 and a first start port sensor that detects the game ball B received in the first start port 2002. 3002 and a magnetic sensor 3003 that detects magnetism acting in the vicinity of the first start port 2002 (see FIG. 102).

  The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 and the back box 3010 which is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a square opening 3010a on the rear wall. A lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the display device 1600, a panel relay board 3031 attached to the left end in rear view below the opening 3010a on the rear surface of the back box 3010, and a back box 3010. And a rear production unit 3100.

  The back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 has a box-like shape in which the front is open and has an opening 3010a that penetrates the rear wall squarely, and a flat frame shape that protrudes backward from the periphery of the opening 3010a. A liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b, two fixing grooves 3010c into which the left fixing piece 1601 of the effect display device 1600 is inserted outwardly from the inside of the frame on the right side in the rear view of the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b, and the liquid crystal mounting A notch 3010d to which the lock mechanism 3020 is attached by being cut out from the rear end to the rear wall of the back box 3010 at the center in the up-down direction on the left side of the portion 3010b in the back view.

  Opening 3010a of back box 3010 is formed slightly smaller than the display screen of effect display device 1600. Further, the liquid crystal attachment portion 3010b is formed in a size that allows the effect display device 1600 to be fitted in the frame. The back box 3010 has a lock mechanism 3020 attached to the rear left side of the notch 3010d on the rear surface so as to be slidable up and down.

  The back box 3010 includes a flat plate-shaped fixed piece 3010e extending outward from the front end. The fixed piece 3010e is attached to the panel holder 1120 with the front surface in contact with the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the gaming panel 1100. The back box 3010 is formed with bosses, mounting holes, and the like at appropriate positions for mounting the back effect unit 3100 and the like.

  The panel relay board 3031 includes a main control board 1310, a function display unit 1400, a gate sensor 2401, a second start opening sensor 2402, a big winning opening sensor 2403, a starting opening solenoid 2404, an attacker solenoid 2405, a general winning opening sensor 3001, This relay is used to relay the connection with the start sensor 3002 and the magnetic sensor 3003.

  Although the back production unit 3100 is not shown in detail, according to the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result that are drawn by receiving the game balls B to the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004. A plurality of effect decoration bodies that move and emit light are provided, and a movable effect and a light emission effect can be performed. The back effect unit 3100 can perform a light emission effect, a movable effect, and the like by appropriately using a plurality of effect decoration bodies, and can present various pattern effects to the player by appropriately combining them. In addition, it is possible to make the player hard to get bored, to entertain the player with various effects, and to suppress the player's interest in the game from being reduced.

[6. Control configuration]
Next, a control configuration for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 102 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration of the pachinko machine. As shown in the figure, the main control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 includes a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5, and a payout control board 633 attached to the main body frame 4. Each control is shared. The main control board 1310 controls a game operation (game progress). The peripheral control board 1510 controls the various effects during the game based on commands from the main control board 1310, and displays the effect image on the effect display device 1600 based on the commands from the peripheral control section 1511. An effect display control unit 1512 for controlling the display. The payout control board 633 includes a payout control unit 633a for controlling the payout of the game ball B and the like, and a launch control unit 633b for controlling the launch of the game ball B by the rotation operation of the handle 182.

[6-1. Main control board]
The main control board 1310 for controlling the progress of the game is not shown in detail, but the main control board is a microprocessor with a built-in ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like. MPU, main control I / O port as input / output device (I / O device), main control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, and main control solenoid drive for driving various solenoids A circuit and a RAM clear switch for completely erasing information stored in a RAM built in the main control MPU are provided. In addition to the built-in ROM and RAM, the main control MPU incorporates a watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system), a function for preventing fraud, and the like.

  The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 has a first start port sensor 3002 for detecting the game ball B received in the first start port 2002, and a second start for detecting the game ball B received in the second start port 2004. A mouth sensor 2402, a general winning mouth sensor 3001 for detecting the gaming ball B received in the general winning opening 2001, a gate sensor 2401 for detecting the gaming ball B passing through the gate portion 2003, and a gaming ball received in the big winning opening 2005 Detection from a big prize opening sensor 2403 for detecting B, a first receiving sensor 2406 for detecting a game ball B entering the first receiving opening 2006, a magnetic sensor 3003 for detecting illegal magnetism in the gaming area 5a, etc. Each signal is input via the main control I / O port.

  Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU outputs a control signal from the main control I / O port to the main control solenoid drive circuit, thereby outputting a drive signal to the start port solenoid 2404 and the attacker solenoid 2405, From the main control I / O port, the status indicator 1401, the normal symbol indicator 1402, the normal hold indicator 1403, the first special symbol indicator 1404, the first special reserve number indicator 1405, the second special symbol of the function display unit 1400. A drive signal is output to the display 1406, the second special reserved number display 1407, the round display 1408, etc., or the game ball B that has entered the first receiving port 2006 is processed as an out ball.

  In this embodiment, the first start port sensor 3002, the second start port sensor 2402, the gate sensor 2401, and the big prize port sensor 2403 use non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switches. The general prize opening sensor 3001 uses a contact type ON / OFF operation type mechanical switch. This is because the game ball B frequently enters the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 and frequently passes through the gate part 2003, so the first start port sensor 3002 and the second start port sensor 2402 are used. The detection of the game ball B by the gate sensor 2401 also frequently occurs. For this reason, proximity switches with high durability and long life are used for the first start port sensor 3002, the second start port sensor 2402, and the gate sensor 2401.

  In addition, when an advantageous gaming state (“big hit” game, etc.) that is advantageous to the player occurs, the big prize opening 2005 is opened and the game ball B frequently enters, so that the game ball by the big prize opening sensor 2403 is played. Detection of B also occurs frequently. For this reason, the proximity winning opening sensor 2403 also uses a proximity switch with high durability and long life. On the other hand, detection by the general winning opening sensor 3001 and the first receiving port sensor 2406 does not frequently occur in the general winning opening 2001 and the first receiving opening 2006 where the game balls B do not enter frequently. For this reason, the general winning opening sensor 3001 and the first receiving port sensor 2406 are mechanical switches that have a shorter life than the proximity switch.

  Further, the main control MPU transmits various information related to the game (game information) and various commands related to payout to the payout control board 633, and receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633. Or Further, the main control MPU transmits various commands related to control of game effects and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control I / O port. The main control MPU, which will be described in detail later, when receiving various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633, shapes these various commands and transmits them to the peripheral control unit 1511.

  The main control board 1310 is supplied with various voltages from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620, which will be described in detail later. The power supply board 630 for supplying various voltages to the main control board 1310 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as “capacitor”) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is cut off. It is described.) With this capacitor, the main control MPU can store various types of information in the RAM in the power-off process even when the power is shut off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM when the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on. This RAM clear switch operation signal (detection signal) is also output to the payout control board 633.

  The main control board 1310 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. This power failure monitoring circuit monitors a decrease in various voltages supplied from the power supply board 630, and outputs a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning when those voltages are equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage. In addition to being input to the main control MPU via the main control I / O port, this power failure notice signal is also output to the payout control board 633 and the like.

[6-2. Dispensing control board]
The payout control board 633 that controls the payout of the game ball B and the like controls the payout control unit 633a that performs various controls relating to payout, and performs the launch control by the launch solenoid 542 and the launch that performs the ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 145. A control unit 633b, an error LED display for displaying the state of the pachinko machine 1, an error release switch for canceling an error displayed on the error LED display, a ball tank 552, a tank rail during maintenance 553, a ball guidance unit 570, and a ball removal switch for discharging the game ball B in the payout device 580 to the outside (upper plate 201) of the pachinko machine 1 and starting the ball removal operation.

[6-2a. Dispensing control unit]
The payout control unit 633a that performs various controls relating to payout on the payout control board 633 is not illustrated in detail, but a micro that incorporates a ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, and the like. A payout control MPU as a processor, a payout control I / O port as an I / O device, an external WDT (external watchdog timer) for monitoring whether or not the payout control MPU is operating normally, and payout A payout motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 584 of the device 580 and a payout control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches relating to payout are input. In addition to the built-in ROM and RAM, the payout control MPU has a function and the like for preventing fraud.

  The payout control MPU of the payout control unit 633a receives various information (game information) related to the game from the main control board 1310 and various commands related to the payout via the payout control I / O port in a serial manner, or the main control board 1310. In addition to the operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch from the input via the payout control I / O port, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is input, the ball cutting detection sensor 574, the payout Detection signals from the detection sensor 591 and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input.

  Detection signals from the ball cutting detection sensor 574 of the ball guiding unit 570, the payout detection sensor 591 of the payout device 580, and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input to the payout control input circuit, and the payout control is performed via the payout control I / O port. Input to MPU.

  Further, detection signals from the door frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and the main body frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are input to the payout control input circuit, It is input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I / O port.

  Further, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 of the foul cover unit 150 is input to the payout control input circuit and input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I / O port.

  The payout control MPU outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 584 to the payout motor 584 via the payout control I / O, and a signal for displaying the state of the pachinko machine 1 on the error LED display. A command for outputting to the error LED display via the payout control I / O port or a command for indicating the state of the pachinko machine 1 is transmitted to the main control board 1310 via the payout control I / O port in a serial manner. Or the number of game balls B actually paid out is output to the external terminal board 558 via the payout control I / O port. The external terminal board 558 is connected to a hall computer installed on the game hall side. This hall computer monitors the player's game by grasping the number of game balls B paid out by the pachinko machine 1, game information of the pachinko machine 1, and the like.

  An error LED display (not shown) is a segment display, and displays the state of the pachinko machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters and figures. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display are as follows. For example, when the figure “-” is displayed, it is informed that it is “normal”, and when the numeral “0” is displayed, it is indicated that “connection is abnormal” (specifically, with the main control board 1310). Notification that there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the payout control board 633 and the board, and when the numeral “1” is displayed, it indicates that the ball is out (specifically, Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 574, a notification is made that there is no game ball B in the payout device 580, and when the number “2” is displayed, it means that “the ball is a ball” (specifically, Based on the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, the game ball B is caught between the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the payout blade 589, and it is difficult to rotate the payout blade 589). When the number “3” is displayed, "Specifically, the payout detection sensor 591 is in trouble based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591", and when the number "5" is displayed, “Retry error” (specifically, the fact that the number of retries of the payout operation has reached a preset upper limit value) is notified, and when the number “6” is displayed, it is “full”. (Specifically, the game ball B stored in the foul cover unit 150 is full based on a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154), and the number “7” is displayed. Sometimes it is informed that “CR is not connected” (that the electrical connection has been cut off anywhere from the payout control board 633 to the CR unit), and when the number “9” is displayed, Tsu that is being click "(specifically, yet that the ball number of payout non game ball B has reached a predetermined number spheres) are informed.

  The ball lending request signal for the game ball B from the ball lending button 224 and the prepaid card return request signal from the return button 225 are input to the CR unit. The CR unit transmits a signal designating the number of game balls B to be lent according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 633 in a serial manner, and this signal is received at the payout control I / O port to the payout control MPU. Entered. In addition, the CR unit updates the remaining level of the prepaid card inserted according to the number of rented game balls B, and outputs a display signal of the remaining level to the ball lending operation unit 220. It is input and displayed on the ball lending display section of the operation unit 220.

[6-2b. Launch control unit]
The launch control unit 633b performs launch control by the launch solenoid 542 and ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 145. Although not shown in detail, the launch control unit 633b includes a launch control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches related to launch are input, an oscillation circuit that outputs a clock signal at regular time intervals, and a clock signal. A firing timing control circuit that outputs a firing reference pulse for launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a based on the firing reference pulse, a firing solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the firing solenoid 542 based on the firing reference pulse, and firing A ball feed solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the ball feed solenoid 145 based on the reference pulse. The firing timing control circuit generates a firing reference pulse based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit so that 100 gaming balls B are launched toward the game area 5a per minute, and outputs the firing reference pulse to the firing solenoid drive circuit. Then, a ball feed reference pulse obtained by multiplying the firing reference pulse by a predetermined number is generated and output to the ball feed solenoid drive circuit.

  In relation to the handle unit 180, a handle touch sensor 192 for detecting whether a palm or a finger is touching the handle 182 and whether or not the launch of the game ball B is forcibly stopped by the player's will are detected. A detection signal from the single button operation sensor 194 is input to the firing control input circuit and then to the firing timing control circuit. When the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal plate are electrically connected, the CR connection signal is input to the launch control input circuit and input to the launch timing control circuit. A signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189 that electrically adjusts the strength of launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a in accordance with the rotation position of the handle 182 is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit.

  Based on the signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189, the launch solenoid drive circuit generates a drive current for launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a with a launch strength corresponding to the rotational position of the handle 182. In response to the input, it is output to the firing solenoid 542. On the other hand, the ball feeding solenoid driving circuit outputs a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 145 triggered by the input of the ball feeding reference pulse, whereby the game balls stored in the upper plate 201 of the tray unit 200 are stored. When one ball is received in the ball feeding unit 140 and the input of the ball feeding reference pulse is completed, the game ball B received by stopping the output of the constant current is sent to the ball launcher 540 side. send. Thus, the drive current output from the launch solenoid drive circuit to the launch solenoid 542 is variably controlled, whereas the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit to the ball feed solenoid 145 is constant. It is controlled.

  The power supply board 630 for supplying various voltages to the payout control board 633 includes a capacitor as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. With this capacitor, the payout control MPU can store various types of information in the RAM of the payout control board 633 even when the power is turned off in the power-off process. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM of the payout control board 633 when the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on.

[6-3. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 102, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 that performs effect control based on a command from the main control board 1310, and an effect display device 1600 based on control data from the peripheral control unit 1511. An effect display control unit 1512 for performing the drawing control.

[6-3a. Peripheral control unit]
A peripheral control unit 1511 that performs effect control on the peripheral control board 1510 is not shown in detail, but includes a peripheral control MPU as a microprocessor, a peripheral control ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, and a high-quality sound performance. And a sound ROM that stores sound information such as music, sound, and sound effects referred to by the sound source IC.

  The peripheral control MPU has a plurality of built-in parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, and the like. When various commands are received from the main control board 1310, each peripheral board of the game board 5 is received based on these various commands. The game board side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to the provided color LED or the like is transmitted from the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board to each decoration board of the gaming board 5 The game board side drive data for outputting a drive signal to a drive motor for operating various effect units provided on the game board 5 is supplied from the serial I / O port for the game board decoration drive board or the drive motor of the game board 5 For transmitting to the drive solenoid, or for outputting a drive signal to the operation ring drive motor 342 provided on the door frame 3, the operation button lifting drive motor 367, etc. Door-side drive light emission composed of side drive data and door-side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a color LED or the like provided on each decorative board of the door frame 3 Control data (display command) indicating a screen to be transmitted from the serial I / O port for frame decoration drive board to the door frame 3 side or displayed on the effect display device 1600 is produced from the serial I / O port for display control unit. In addition to transmitting to the display control unit 1512, a control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM is output to the sound source IC.

  Detection signals from various detection sensors for detecting the positions of the front effect unit 2600 and the back effect unit 3100 provided on the game board 5 are input to the peripheral control MPU. In addition, detection signals from the press detection sensor 381, the first rotation detection sensor 347, and the second rotation detection sensor 348 of the effect operation unit 300 provided in the door frame 3 are input to the peripheral control MPU.

  In addition, the peripheral control MPU receives a signal (operation signal) indicating that the effect display control unit 1512 is operating normally from the effect display control unit 1512, and based on this operation signal, the effect display control unit 1512 The operation is monitored.

  The sound source IC extracts sound information from the sound ROM based on the control data (sound command) from the peripheral control MPU, and the vibration speaker 354, the top center speaker 462, the top side provided in the door frame 3, the main body frame 4 and the like. Control is performed so that sounds such as music and sound effects according to various effects flow from the speaker 464, the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4, and the like. The volume can be adjusted by rotating the volume protruding backward from the peripheral control board box 1520 in which the peripheral control board 1510 is accommodated. In this embodiment, acoustic signals (for example, a 2ch stereo signal, a 4ch stereo signal) as sound information are sent to the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side, and the bass frame speaker 622 for the bass frame 4. , 2.1ch surround signal, or 4.1ch surround signal, etc.) can be sent to present a more realistic sound effect (sound effect) than before.

  In addition to the built-in WDT (watchdog timer) built in the peripheral control MPU, the peripheral control unit 1511 also includes an external WDT (watchdog timer) (not shown). In combination with WDT, it is diagnosed whether its own system is running away.

  The display command output from the peripheral control MPU to the effect display control unit 1512 is performed by a serial input / output port. In this embodiment, the bit rate (size of data that can be transmitted per unit time) is 19.2 km (k). ) BPS (bits per second, hereinafter referred to as “bps”) is set. On the other hand, initial data, door frame side lighting / flashing command, game board side lighting / flashing command, movable body driving command, etc. output from the peripheral control MPU to the effect driving board of the gaming board 5 are a plurality of serial inputs different from the display command. This is performed by the output port, and in this embodiment, 250 kbps is set as the bit rate.

  The effect drive board outputs a lighting signal or a flashing signal based on the received door frame side lighting / flashing command to the LED of each decorative board provided in the door frame 3 or based on the received gaming board side lighting / flashing command. The lighting signal or the blinking signal is output to the LED of each decorative board provided in the game board 5.

  Further, the effect drive board sends a drive signal based on the received drive command to the operation ring drive motor 342 and the operation button lift drive motor 367 provided in the door frame 3, each drive motor provided in the game board 5, etc. Or output to

[6-3b. Production display control unit]
The effect display control unit 1512 performs drawing control of the effect display device 1600. Although not shown in detail, the effect display control unit 1512 displays a display control MPU as a microprocessor, a display control ROM that stores various processing programs, various commands, and various data, and a VDP that controls display of the effect display device 1600. (Abbreviation of Video Display Processor), an image ROM for storing various data of the screen displayed on the effect display device 1600, and an image RAM to which various data stored in the image ROM are transferred and copied. I have.

  The display control MPU has a parallel I / O port, a serial I / O port, and the like, and controls the VDP based on control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 to draw the effect display device 1600. Control is in progress. When the display control MPU is operating normally, the display control MPU outputs an operation signal to that effect to the peripheral control unit 1511. Further, the display control MPU receives an in-execution signal from the VDP, and performs interrupt processing when the output of the in-execution signal is stopped every 16 ms.

  The display control ROM, in addition to various programs for generating a screen to be drawn on the effect display device 1600, schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511, its control data (display command), and A plurality of corresponding non-resident area transfer schedule data are stored. The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data defining the screen configuration in time series, and the order of the screens drawn on the effect display device 1600 is defined. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is configured by arranging non-resident area transfer data that defines the order when transferring various data stored in the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM in time series. In the non-resident area transfer data, the order in which various data is transferred from the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM in advance for the screen data drawn on the effect display device 1600 according to the progress of the schedule data.

  The display control MPU extracts the first screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 from the display control ROM and outputs it to the VDP, and then displays the screen data following the first screen data. Extract from display control ROM and output to VDP. In this way, the display control MPU extracts screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data one by one from the top screen data from the display control ROM and outputs the extracted data to the VDP.

  When screen data output from the display control MPU is input, the VDP extracts sprite data from the image RAM based on the input screen data and generates drawing data to be displayed on the effect display device 1600. The generated drawing data is output to the effect display device 1600. Further, when the effect display device 1600 does not accept the screen data from the display control MPU, the VDP outputs an in-execution signal to that effect to the display control MPU. The VDP employs a line buffer method. In this “line buffer method”, drawing data for one line for drawing the left and right directions of the effect display device 1600 is held in the line buffer, and the drawing data for one line held in this line buffer is stored in the effect display device 1600. It is a method to output to.

  The image ROM stores an extremely large amount of sprite data and has a large capacity. When the capacity of the image ROM increases, that is, when the number of sprites drawn on the effect display device 1600 increases, the access speed of the image ROM cannot be ignored, and the speed at which the effect display device 1600 is drawn is affected. Therefore, in this embodiment, the sprite data stored in the image ROM is transferred and copied to the image RAM having a high access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from the image RAM. The sprite data is base data that is data before the sprite is expanded into the bitmap format, and is stored in the image ROM in a compressed state.

  Here, “sprite” will be described. The “sprite” is an image displayed on the effect display device 1600 as a unit. For example, when various characters (characters) are displayed on the effect display device 1600, data for drawing each character is referred to as “sprite”. As a result, when a plurality of persons are displayed on the effect display device 1600, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to a person, a house, a mountain, a road, and the like constituting the background are also sprites, and the entire background can be a single sprite. These sprites are drawn on the effect display device 1600 by setting the positions arranged on the screen and the vertical relationship when the sprites overlap (hereinafter, referred to as “sprite superposition sequence”).

  Note that the sprite is configured by bonding a plurality of rectangular regions of 64 pixels vertically and horizontally. Data for drawing this rectangular area is called a “sprite character”. In the case of a small sprite, it can be expressed by using one sprite character, and in the case of a relatively large sprite such as a person, for example, a total of 6 sprite characters arranged in horizontal 2 × vertical 3 etc. are used. Can be expressed. In the case of a larger sprite such as the background, it can be expressed using a larger number of sprite characters. Thus, the number and arrangement of sprite characters can be arbitrarily designated for each sprite.

  The effect display device 1600 sequentially repeats main scanning in the direction intersecting with the main scanning for setting the display state for each pixel in one direction along the pixels, sequentially from left to right as viewed from the front. Driven by the sub-scan to be performed. When the drawing data for one line output from the effect display control unit 1512 is input, the effect display device 1600 sequentially receives one line from left to right as viewed from the front of the effect display device 1600 as main scanning. Output to each of the pixels. When the output for one line is completed, the effect display device 1600 shifts to the line immediately below as the sub-scan. Similarly, when the drawing data for the next line is input, based on the drawing data for the next line. As main scanning, the pixels are sequentially output to pixels for one line from left to right as viewed from the front of the effect display device 1600.

[7. Game contents]
The game content by the above pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 99A and 99B. In the pachinko machine 1 described above, the player rotates the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 disposed in the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3 and inputs the batting force adjustment, so that the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 The stored game ball B is driven into the upper part of the game area 5a through the launch passage portion 1012 of the launch rail 544 and the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in the game board 5, and the game by the game ball B is played. Be started. The game ball B driven into the upper part in the game area 5a is either the first game area 5a1 on the left side of the center member 2500 or the right side of the center member 2500 through the communication passage portion 5a4 depending on the strength of the game. One of the second game areas 5a2 flows down. Note that the driving strength of the game ball B can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 182. The game ball B can be driven harder as it is rotated in the clockwise direction, and a maximum of 100 game balls B can be continuously per minute. That is, the game ball B can be shot at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

  In the first to third game areas 5a1, 5a2, and 5a3 of the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails 2007 are planted on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (base panel 1110) in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions. When the game ball B abuts against the obstacle nail 2007, the flow speed of the game ball B is suppressed and various movements are given to the game ball B. In addition to the obstacle nail 2007, a windmill 2008 that rotates when the game ball B abuts is provided at an appropriate position in the game area 5a.

[7-1. Driving into the first game area]
A game ball B that has been launched to the upper portion of the center member 2500 with a predetermined launch force (a launch force with a strength that the game ball B jumps over the upper end of the inner rail 1002 and does not reach the communication passage portion 5a4) The left side of the step 832a of the surrounding frame 832 rolls down and flows down from the first game area 5a1 to the third game area 5a3 while contacting the plurality of obstacle nails 2007. When the game ball B flowing down the first game area 5a1 enters the warp inlet 2501 opened on the outer peripheral surface of the enclosure frame 832 of the center member 2500, the game ball B is supplied to the stage shelf 2503 from the warp outlet 2502.

  The game ball B supplied to the stage shelf 2503 rolls on the stage shelf 2503 and moves back and forth from either the top of the center in the left-right direction or the troughs on the left and right sides of the top. Released forward. When the game ball B is released into the third game area 5a3 from the top at the center of the stage shelf 2503, since the top is located immediately above the first start port 2002, the first start port 2002 has a high probability. Accepted. When the game ball B is received in the first starting port 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Is done.

  When the game ball B rolling on the stage shelf 2503 is released into the third game area 5a3 from the valleys on both the left and right sides of the top, it flows down toward the start port unit 2100. The game ball B released from the stage shelf 2503 of the center member 2500 into the third game area 5a3 may be received in the first start port 2002, the general winning port 2001, or the like.

  Further, when the game ball B flowing down the first game area 5a1 does not enter the warp entrance 2501, the side unit 2200 draws the game ball B toward the center in the left-right direction. The unit 2100 may be accepted into the first start opening 2002, the general winning opening 2001, and the like. When the game ball B is received in the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Is done.

[7-2. Winning the first starting gate, lottery of special lottery results]
When the game ball B is received in the first start port 2002 (the same applies to the second start port 2004), the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has an advantageous game state (for example, “ A lottery of a special lottery result that generates “big hit”, “medium hit”, “small hit”, “per probability change (probability change)”, “per time reduction (shorter time)” is performed. The result is suggested to the player over a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also referred to as a special variation time) Note that a special lottery is drawn when the game ball B is received at the first start port 2002. The results are: “Lost”, “Small hit”, “2R big hit”, “5R big hit”, “15R big hit”, “per probability change (probability change)”, “shorter per hour (time reduction)”, “shorter per probable time” ”,“ Short-term per chance ”

  If the special lottery result (the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result) drawn by accepting the game ball B at the first starting port 2002 is a special lottery result that generates an advantageous gaming state, After the elapse, the special winning opening 2005 is in a state in which the game ball B can be received in a predetermined opening / closing pattern. In order to enter the game ball B into the big prize opening 2005, it is essential to drive the game ball B into the second game area 5a2. ) Are guided by voice announcements or images, etc. In this embodiment, which discharge part 848a, 848b should be aimed right-handed is, for example, "right-handed left route" or "right-handed right route" To be specifically guided. This is because the probability of entering the first receiving port 2006 and the second receiving port differs depending on from which discharge portion 848a, 848b the game ball B is discharged to the second game region 5a2. The driving into the second game area 5a2 will be described later.

  When the game ball B is received in the big prize opening 2005 when the big prize opening 2005 is open, a predetermined number (for example, ten or thirteen) from the payout device 580 by the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Of game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201. Therefore, when the winning ball opening 2005 is capable of receiving the game ball B, by allowing the winning ball opening 2005 to receive the game ball B, it is possible to pay out a lot of the game balls B, and to entertain the player. it can.

  When the special lottery result is “small hit”, the big prize opening 2005 is in an open state in which the game ball B can be received for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds). The opening / closing pattern to be closed is repeated a plurality of times (for example, twice). On the other hand, when the special lottery result is “big hit”, a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) elapses after the big winning opening 2005 is opened to accept the game ball B, or to the big winning opening 2005. An open / close pattern that closes the game ball B in an unacceptable state when one of the conditions for accepting a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the game balls B is satisfied (a single open / close pattern is referred to as one round) Is repeated a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds). For example, an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player is generated by repeating two rounds for “2R jackpot”, five rounds for “5R jackpot”, and 15 rounds for “15R jackpot”.

  In “Big Bonus”, after the big hit game ends, the probability that a special lottery result such as “Big Bonus” will be drawn is changed (“probable hit”), or the display time of the effect image that suggests the special lottery result is changed. ("Short-time hit") or "hit".

  In the present embodiment, the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 are received from the start of the special lottery by the acceptance of the game ball B to the first starting port 2002 and until the second lottery result is suggested. When the game ball B is received at the second starting port 2004, the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started, so the suggestion of the special lottery result is suspended until the suggestion of the special lottery result drawn earlier is completed Is done. The number of reserved special lottery results to be held is up to four for each of the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, and for more than that, the first start port 2002 and the second start port Even if the game ball B is accepted in 2004, the special lottery result is not put on hold and discarded. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the game hall side by accumulating the hold.

  The suggestion of the special lottery result is performed by the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600. The function display unit 1400 is directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to suggest a special lottery result. The suggestion of the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 suggests the special lottery result based on the combination of the LEDs that are lit, after a plurality of LEDs are repeatedly turned on / off and blinked for a predetermined time.

  On the other hand, the effect display device 1600 is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on a control signal from the main control board 1310 and suggests a special lottery result as an effect image. The effect image that suggests the special lottery result on the effect display device 1600 is a state where the image sequence is changed and displayed in a state where three image sequences composed of a plurality of designs are displayed side by side in the horizontal direction. Are stopped and displayed in order, and each of the pattern rows is stopped and displayed so that the patterns of the three pattern rows to be stopped and displayed have a combination corresponding to the special lottery result. When the special lottery result is other than “losing”, after the three pattern rows are stopped and each pattern is stopped and displayed, a finalized image indicating the special lottery result is displayed on the effect display device 1600 and the lottery is selected. An advantageous gaming state (for example, a small hit game, a big hit game, etc.) according to the special lottery result occurs.

  It should be noted that the time indicating the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 (LED blinking time (fluctuation time)) and the time suggesting the special lottery result in the effect display device 1600 (the pattern row fluctuates and the confirmed image is changed). The time until display is different, and the function display unit 1400 is set to a longer time.

  Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the display of the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the effect display device 1600, the effect operation in the effect operation unit 300 in the door frame 3 according to the lottery special lottery result. It is possible to perform a player participation type effect that operates the rotation operation unit 302 and the press operation unit 303 of the unit 301. In the player participation type effect, the operation ring drive motor 342 can rotate or vibrate the rotation operation unit 302, assist the rotation operation, or inhibit the rotation operation. The press operation unit 303 can be raised and made conspicuous by 367, and the player participation type effect can be enjoyed by the operation of the effect operation unit 301.

  In addition, the peripheral control board 1510 appropriately uses each decoration board provided in the door frame 3, each decoration board provided in the game board 5, the front effect unit 2600, the back effect unit 3100, and the like. It is possible to perform a moving effect or the like, it is possible to entertain the player by various effects, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

  Furthermore, in the peripheral control board 1510, in the player participation type effect that operates the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303, when the player should perform an operation that should be mistaken or not, the correct operation is performed. To that effect to the player. Specifically, for example, when the pressing operation of the center pressing operation unit 303a is requested, when the outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b is pressed, or when the rotation operating unit 302 is rotated, the vibration speaker 354 vibrates. That effect is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

[7-4. Driving into the second game area (right-handed)]
A game ball B that is launched to the upper part of the center member 2500 with a specific firing force stronger than a predetermined firing force (a launching force that jumps over the first game area 5a1) is a tapered corner of the step portion 832a of the enclosure frame 832. It rides on the upper surface behind the part 832b or rolls while contacting the inner surface of the outer rail 1001 by centrifugal force and moves to the back of the communication passage part 5a4. When the game ball B rides on the upper surface behind the tapered corner portion 832b of the step portion 832a of the enclosure frame 832, it rolls on the upper surface of the enclosure frame 832 of the center member 2500 and enters the opening portion 848bH of the discharge portion 848b. Alternatively, even when the game ball B rolling while being in contact with the inner surface of the outer rail 1001 stalls and falls before the opening 848bH of the discharge portion 848b, it rolls on the upper surface of the enclosure frame 832 of the center member 2500 as it is. Enter the opening 848bH of 848b.
As shown in FIG. 99B, the game ball B that has entered the opening 848bH of the discharge part 848b is released into the left part 5a2b of the second game area 5a2 through the discharge part 848b.
As described above, the game ball B released to the left portion 5a2b has a low probability of entering the first receiving port 2006, and has a higher probability of entering the second receiving port and passing through the gate portion 2003. Thus, it is relatively easy to win a prize-winning opening 2005.
On the other hand, most of the game balls B that roll while colliding with the inner surface of the outer rail 1001 by centrifugal force and collide with the stopper 1006 enter the opening 848aH of the discharge portion 848a.
As shown in FIG. 99B, the game ball B that has entered the opening 848aH of the release portion 848a is released to the right side 5a2a of the second game area 5a2 through the release portion 848a.
As described above, the game ball B released to the right portion 5a2a has a larger probability of entering the first receiving port 2006 than the probability of entering the second receiving port or the probability of passing through the gate portion 2003. It is set and can enter the first receiving port 2006 at an early stage and be processed in the same manner as an out ball.
Therefore, in the gauge configuration shown in FIGS. 99A and 99B, the handle 182 is adjusted to be slightly weaker than the strongest level so that the game ball B tries to enter the discharge portion 848b from the communication passage portion 5a4, and thus the second game region 5a2. The winning prize opening 2005 can be efficiently and safely reached through the left portion 5a2b.

  When the right-handed game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003, a normal lottery is performed on the main control board 1310. If the lottery normal lottery result is “normal hit”, the second start opening that is closed 2004 is in an open state for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 to 10 seconds), and the game ball B can be received in the second starting port 2004. Then, when the game ball B is received at the second start port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, four) of game balls B are transferred to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Paid out.

  In the present embodiment, in the normal lottery performed when the game ball B passes through the gate unit 2003, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the normal lottery to the suggestion of the normal lottery result (for example, 0. 01-60 seconds, also called normal variation time). The suggestion of the normal lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5. The second start port 2004 is opened after the normal fluctuation time has elapsed. The shorter the normal variation time, the more the game balls B that have been drawn “normal hit” in the gate unit 2003 are received in the second starting port 2004.

  In addition, since the game ball B passes the gate part 2003 after the game ball B passes the gate part 2003 until the normal lottery result is suggested, the suggestion of the normal lottery result cannot be started. The start of the suggestion of the normal lottery result is put on hold until the suggestion of the previous normal lottery result ends. In addition, the number of hold of the normal lottery result is up to 4 and the upper limit is discarded without being held even if the game ball B passes through the gate part 2003. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the game hall side by accumulating the hold.

  In addition, as described below, the above embodiment includes a number of technical means for solving the background art and the solution problem with JP 2012-29741 A as a prior patent document.

[Background technology]
A gaming machine such as a pachinko machine has a gaming board having a gaming area in which a game is performed, and a door frame having a door window that closes the front side of the gaming board and makes the gaming area visible from the front. And playing the game in the game area visible through the door window so that the player can be entertained.

  As this type of gaming machine, a storage tray for storing game media for playing games is provided, and a bulging portion that bulges forward from below the door window on the front surface of the door frame, The thing provided with the decoration body attached to the upper surface is proposed (for example, prior patent document). According to the technique of this prior patent document, the appearance of the upper surface of the bulging portion can be improved by the decorative body.

  However, in the technique of the prior patent document, since the decorative body is provided on the upper surface of the bulging portion, it is difficult to see the decorative body when the gaming machine is viewed from the front or the side. The decoration effect by the body was weak and the appealing power to the player was insufficient. In addition, when a player places his hand on the upper surface of the bulging part or places his hand on the storage tray, a part of the decorative body is hidden by the player's hand, for example, the decorative body is illuminated and decorated. At this time, it is difficult for the player to notice the light-emitting decoration, and there is a risk that some players may feel lost because they are not aware of the light-emitting decoration, thereby reducing the interest in the game.

[Solutions]
In view of the above circumstances, there is provided a gaming machine that has a high appealing power to the player and can suppress a decrease in the interest of the player with a light-emitting decoration.

[Technical means to solve the problem]
Mean 1: In the gaming machine,
“A game board having a game area where a game is played,
A body frame holding the game board detachably from the front;
The front side of the main body frame is closed so that it can be opened and closed, and the door frame base has a door window that allows the game area to be visually recognized from the front.
A bulging portion provided with a storage tray that bulges forward from a portion below the door window on the front surface of the door frame base and that can store a game medium for playing a game in the game area; ,
The front end is attached to the bulging portion, forward of the front end of the storage tray, and forward from the front surface of the door frame base to a distance of 1/3 to 2/3 of the full width of the door frame base. A protruding decorative body,
And a decorative body light emitting means for decorating the decorative body in accordance with a game state that changes as a game is played in the game area.

  Here, as “game”, “a game medium is driven into a specific entrance where a special lottery for generating an advantageous gaming state in which the player has an advantage is performed, and the game media to the specific entrance is placed. When a special lottery result in which an advantageous gaming state is generated by acceptance is drawn, a specific entrance for paying out a predetermined number of game media is opened by accepting the game media, so the game media is aimed at a specific entrance. `` Games to be struck '', `` Games to be struck by game media aiming at the entrance to which benefits including payout of game media are given '', `` Multiple games each with multiple designs provided with multiple games A game in which the rotation of each of the revolving bodies is stopped so that a combination of symbols to which a privilege including payout of game media is given after the revolving bodies are rotated, etc. can be cited. Examples of the “game medium” include “sphere-shaped (game ball)”, “disc-shaped (medal)”, and the like.

  In addition, the “game area” in which the game is performed includes “a plurality of entrances to which a game medium is thrown in by a player's operation and a privilege including a payout of the game medium is given according to the reception of the game medium. `` Areas that are in play '', `` Each is equipped with a plurality of symbols, each of which is rotated by the player's starting operation triggered by the insertion of the game medium, and the combination of symbols stopped by the player's stopping operation '' The area | region where the some rotating body to which the privilege including payout | payout of a game medium is provided according to this is arrange | positioned "etc. are mentioned.

  In addition, the “main body frame” includes “a frame that can be opened and closed (rotatably hinged) with respect to a frame-like outer frame that is attached to an island facility of a game hall where a game machine is installed”, “a game machine Examples include those that are directly attached to the island facilities of the installed game halls, and those that are equipped with a game medium payout device for playing games.

  Furthermore, as the “bulging part”, in addition to the storage dish, “a thing equipped with an operation part operated by a player for playing a game”, “a storage dish for storing a game medium for playing a game” Equipped with "," equipped with a production operation unit that can accept a player's operation when a player participation type production is executed "," lending operation unit that lends game media for playing games " And the like ".

  In addition, examples of the “reservoir” include “a plurality of items that are separately provided in the vertical direction”, “a item that is provided with only one”, and the like.

  In addition, “decorative bodies” include “simulating a predetermined item according to the gaming machine concept”, “simulating a predetermined character according to the gaming machine concept”, “in accordance with the gaming machine concept” And the like imitating a predetermined scene ”. The reason why the distance from the front surface of the door frame base to the front end of the decorative body is within the range of 1/3 to 2/3 of the total width of the door frame base is that the distance is shorter than 1/3 of the total width. This is because the amount of protrusion to the front is the same as that of conventional gaming machines, and the appeal to the player cannot be sufficiently increased. If the distance is longer than 2/3 of the full width, the decorative body will protrude too far forward. This is because it may interfere with the player and may be difficult to select as a gaming machine to play.

  In addition, as “depending on the game state”, “games to the entrances arranged in the game area (for example, a general prize opening, a start opening, a big prize opening, an accessory prize opening, a V prize opening, etc.) “According to the acceptance of the medium”, “According to the fact that the game medium circulating in the game area has passed a specific area (eg, gate, warp passage, stage shelf, etc.)”, “Arranged in the game area “According to the result of special lottery drawn by accepting game media at the entrance (for example, start port)”, “Lottery by accepting game media at the entrance (eg, start port) arranged in the game area” Depending on the type of production (for example, reach production, jackpot production, lost production, etc.) to suggest the special lottery results that were made "," multiple with multiple designs each triggered by the introduction of game media In response to the rotation of the rotating body of the game media Rotating a plurality of rotators each having a plurality of symbols each triggered by a turn, and then sequentially stopping them in accordance with the combination of the rotators that have been stopped. "According to the amount of driving", "according to the length of the driving blank of the game medium to be driven into the game area", and the like.

  In addition, as “decorative body light emitting means”, “full color LED”, “single color LED”, “high brightness LED”, “organic EL”, “incandescent bulb”, “neon bulb”, “cold cathode tube”, etc. Can be mentioned.

  According to the configuration of the means 1, the gaming machine has a gaming board having a gaming area where the game is performed, a main body frame that holds the gaming board detachably from the front, and a front side of the main body frame can be opened and closed. The door frame base has a door window that allows the game area to be visually recognized from the front, and bulges forward from a portion below the door window on the front surface of the door frame base. A bulging portion having a storage tray capable of storing game media for playing games in the area, and attached to the bulging portion, in front of the front end of the storage tray and forward from the front surface of the door frame base A decorative body whose front end protrudes to a distance of 1/3 to 2/3 with respect to the full width of the door frame base, and a light emitting decoration according to the gaming state that changes as the game is performed in the gaming area And a decorative body light emitting means.

  As a result, a bulging portion having a storage tray capable of storing game media bulges forward in a portion below the door window on the front surface of the door frame base that closes the main body frame so that it can be opened and closed. In addition, the bulging portion includes a decorative body having a length of 1/3 to 2/3 of the full width of the door frame base and a front end protruding forward from the front surface of the door frame base. As a result, when this gaming machine is attached to the island facility of the gaming hall, the decorative body projects greatly forward under the door window where the inside of the gaming area can be seen, so that the decorative body is more conspicuous than other gaming machines. It is possible to increase the appeal of the player and to make it easier to select this gaming machine as a gaming machine to play. In addition, since the front end of the decorative body protrudes greatly forward from below the door frame, the decorative body can be moved forward from the front end of the storage tray, and the length of the decorative body in the left-right direction is longer than before. Can be long. Therefore, even if the player places his / her hand on the upper surface of the bulging portion or places his / her hand on the storage tray, the portion hidden by the player's hand can be reduced with respect to the entire decorative body, When the decoration light emitting means is used to make the light emission decoration, it is possible to make the player easily notice the light emission decoration of the decoration body, and to prevent the player from feeling lost, and to suppress the decrease in the interest in the game Can be made.

  In addition, since the decorative body is greatly projected forward under the door window, when the player sits in front of the gaming machine, the front end of the decorative body is as close as possible to the player. Therefore, if the decorative body is lit and decorated by the decorative body light emitting means according to the gaming state, the light will irradiate the player from below, and the player's line of sight is directed to the decorative body by the luminescent decoration of the decorative body In addition, by directing the player's line of sight toward the lower decorative body, it is possible to keep the inside of the game area away from the player's view and make it difficult to visually recognize the inside of the game area. . Accordingly, in the game area, for example, when the scene of the production image changes, when the movable body moves, or when the variable winning opening (second start opening, big winning opening, winning prize winning opening, etc.) opens or closes. , Etc., by decorating the decorative body with the decorative body light emitting means, the player is focused on the decorative body below the game area, and then when the player returns his line of sight to the game area, By changing the production image, movable body, etc., it is possible to surprise the player and give a strong impact, to entertain the player, and to have something good for the player It can be thought that there is, and it can raise the expectation for a game and can suppress the fall of interest.

  Further, as described above, the decorative body can be surprised by changing the effect in the game area by making the decorative body light emitting decoration according to the gaming state and changing the effect in the game area. With the light-emitting decoration, the player can be informed of the arrival of an opportunity (for example, the occurrence of an advantageous gaming state (“big hit game”) in which the player is advantageous). As a result, a premium feeling can be imparted to the luminous decoration of the decorative body, so that the player can be thrilled and excited by whether or not the decorative body decorates the luminous body. The decrease can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the decorative body is greatly protruded forward, when the player tries to see the entire decorative body, the player sees away from the gaming machine, so that the entire gaming machine including the gaming area is easy to see. Thereby, it can be made to feel like having put one tempo with respect to a player, a player can be relaxed and the fall of an interest can be suppressed.

  Note that the decorative body may be smoothly curved and protrude forward. Thereby, since the decorative body that protrudes largely forward is smoothly curved, there is no possibility that the player will be damaged even if it comes into contact with the player. Therefore, since the player can recognize that the decorative body is not a dangerous thing causing injury, the player can select this gaming machine with peace of mind. It is possible to entertain the game with this gaming machine and suppress the decrease in interest.

  Moreover, it is desirable to attach a decorative body to the center of the bulging part in the left-right direction. Thereby, the presence of the decorative body can be emphasized and the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the present gaming machine can be easily selected as a gaming machine to play with increasing appeal to the player. In addition, when the decorative body protruding forward is attached to the center in the left-right direction, it is possible to easily extend both hands of the player forward. Operation and handling of game media stored in the storage tray can be facilitated, and it is difficult for the player to be stressed, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Moreover, you may make it equip a decoration body with the 1st decoration part extended in the semicircle shape so that it may bulge outward in the cross-sectional shape of a semicircular arc shape. As a result, the first decorative portion of the decorative body is shaped so that half of the cylindrical tube-shaped donut protrudes forward, so that it is possible to give a smooth and soft impression to the player. The player can play the game in a calm mood, and the player can concentrate on the game to suppress the decline of interest, and it is difficult to get injured even if the player touches at first glance. It can be recognized that the game is safe, and a reduction in interest in the game can be suppressed by reassuring the player. Further, in the case where the decorative body is provided with the semi-doughnut-shaped first decorative portion, if the entire first decorative portion is illuminated with the decorative body light emitting means according to the gaming state, it looks like an annular fluorescent lamp. It is possible to show the player a light-emitting decoration, which can attract the player's attention strongly, and when performing light-emitting decoration, for example, if light-emitting decoration is performed so that light flows from one side, the inside of the donut Since the player can show the player a light-emitting effect as if the light is moving and rotating, it can surprise the player and think that there is something good, and raise the expectation of the game. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, when the decorative body is provided with a semi-doughnut-shaped first decorative part, the semi-circular cross section is arranged below the first decorative part so that the front end is located behind the first decorative part. You may make it further provide the 2nd decoration part extended in the semicircle shape so that it may bulge outward in the shape. Thereby, in the first decoration part and the second decoration part, it is possible to show the player a decoration in which half donuts are lined up and down, and to improve the appearance of the bulging part provided with the storage tray. In addition, since the tip of the second decorative portion is located behind the tip of the first decorative portion, the second decorative portion can emphasize the perspective and make the decorative body appear larger. It can be a highly appealing gaming machine that attracts the interest of the Further, in this case, since the semi-doughnut-shaped first decorative portion and the second decorative portion are arranged above and below, the light emission is such that light is rotated by appropriately decorating each with the decorative body light emitting means. You can show the player a light-emitting effect that light moves up and down, entertain the player, and show the player a variety of light-emitting effects, and get bored of the player It can be made difficult to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Moreover, you may make it provide the production | presentation operation part which can accept operation of a player according to a game state behind the front end in the upper surface of a decoration body. Thereby, when the operation of the production operation unit can be accepted according to the game state (when the player participation type production is executed), the player operates the production operation unit, so that the player participation type The production can be enjoyed, and a decrease in the interest of the player in the game can be suppressed. At this time, the decorative body is illuminated and decorated by the decorative body light emitting means, so that the player's interest can be attracted to the decorative body to which the rendering operation section is attached. When a participatory presentation is executed, the decoration body is illuminated and decorated, so that the player's interest can be directed to the decoration body (production operation section) and the operation of the production operation section can be urged. By operating the part, it is possible to entertain the player-participation-type production and suppress the decrease in interest.

  Further, when the production operation unit is attached to the rear of the front end on the upper surface of the decorative body, it is possible to prevent a part of the player's body or clothing from coming into contact with the production operation unit by the decoration body. Therefore, it is possible to reduce erroneous operations of the production operation unit, and to surely entertain the player participation type production that operates the production operation unit, and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, when the production operation unit is attached to the upper surface of the decorative body that protrudes largely forward, the production operation unit looks large and can give a strong impact to the player. The progress of the game (for example, the game medium) so that the player participation type effect can be executed at an early stage by increasing the expectation for the player participation type effect that operates the effect operation unit. (Gaming operation of game balls), rotation start of the rotating body by inserting game media (medals), etc.) can be encouraged, and the player can be entertained and the decrease in interest in games can be suppressed.

  In addition, when the production operation unit is provided behind the front end on the upper surface of the decorative body, the production operation unit includes an annular rotation operation unit that can be rotated by the player, and an inside of the rotation operation unit. It is desirable to provide a pressing operation unit that can be pressed by the player. As a result, a rotation operation unit that can be rotated as a production operation unit and a press operation unit that can be pressed are provided. And pressing operations can be appropriately combined to allow the player to operate, and can respond to effects requiring more complex inputs (player operations), so a wider variety of player-participation effects Can be presented to the player, the player can be entertained, the player can be made less tired, and a decrease in interest in the game can be suppressed. Further, in this case, since the decorative body having the rotation operation unit and the pressing operation unit attached to the upper surface can be illuminated and decorated by the decorative body light emitting means, the decorative body is displayed when the player participation type effect is executed. By illuminating, the player's interest can be directed to the decorative body (the production operation unit such as the rotation operation unit and the press operation unit), and the operation of the production operation unit can be urged, and the player can operate the production operation unit. By doing so, it is possible to entertain the player-participation-type production and suppress the decrease in interest. At this time, it is possible to prompt the player to rotate the rotation operation unit or to press the pressing operation unit depending on the light emitting mode of the decorative body. The operation unit can be accurately operated, and a player participation type effect can be enjoyed to prevent a decrease in interest.

  Further, as described above, when an annular rotation operation unit and a pressing operation unit arranged in the ring of the rotation operation unit are provided on the upper surface of the decorative body as an effect operation unit, the pressing operation is performed. The portion may be movable between a retracted position that protrudes slightly above the upper surface of the rotation operation portion and a protruded position that protrudes above the retracted position according to the gaming state. good. Accordingly, when the pressing operation unit is moved to the protruding position according to the gaming state, the pressing operation unit protrudes upward from the rotation operation unit, so that the upper surface of the decorative body is enlarged together with the rotation operation unit. Since it appears to bulge upward, the surroundings of the decorative body can be shown large, giving a strong impact to the player, and the appealing power of the player is enhanced over other gaming machines by making the decorative body stand out. In addition to being able to attract the player's interest strongly to the pressing operation part by pushing the pressing operation part greatly upward, the expectation for the operation of the pressing operation part is enhanced and the decrease in interest is suppressed. Can be made.

  In addition, when the pressing operation unit in the ring of the rotation operating unit attached to the upper surface of the decorative body is movable between the retracted position and the protruding position, the player operates the pressing operation unit at the protruding position. Cylindrical outer periphery pressing operation part that enables pressing operation, and a columnar center that is arranged in the cylinder of the outer periphery pressing operation part and that can be pressed by the player at any of the retracted position and the protruding position You may make it comprise with a press operation part. Thereby, on the upper surface of the decorative body projecting greatly forward, the outer peripheral pressing operation part and the rotation operating part are arranged concentrically around the central pressing operation part, so that the apparent impact can be increased. It is possible to attract the player's interest strongly, and to increase the player's expectation for the player participation type operation that operates each operation unit, and to suppress the decrease in the player's interest Can do. Further, in this case, by decorating the decorative body with light emission, the player's interest is strongly attracted to the decorative body, and consequently, the rotation operation unit, the outer periphery pressing operation unit, and the central pressing operation unit, and the operation is urged. It is possible to entertain the player-participation-type production and suppress the decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, when an effect operation unit is provided on the upper surface of the decorative body, it is desirable to include an operation unit light emitting means for decorating the effect operation unit according to the gaming state. As a result, the effect operation unit can be illuminated and decorated by the operation unit light emitting means in accordance with the gaming state. The whole bulging part bulging forward under the door window can be decorated with light emission, making the bulging part stand out and attracting the player's attention strongly, and the whole illuminating decoration By doing so, it is possible to make the player think that there is something good, and it is possible to raise a sense of expectation for the game and suppress a decrease in interest. Further, in this case, the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the effect operation unit by decorating the effect operation unit with the operation unit light emitting means, so that the player participation type effect for operating the effect operation unit is provided. When executed, the production operation unit can be illuminated and decorated to direct the player's interest to the production operation unit, and the player can be operated by operating the production operation unit. Entertaining and can suppress the decline of interest.

  Moreover, you may make it further equip the front surface of a door frame base with the peripheral decoration body which continues with the decoration body attached to the bulging part, and is extended so that the outer periphery of a door frame may be enclosed. As a result, the entire outer periphery of the gaming area can be decorated, the appearance of the gaming machine can be improved, and the appeal to the player can be enhanced. Further, in this case, it is desirable to include a peripheral decoration body light emitting means for illuminating and decorating the peripheral decoration body. Therefore, the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the game area, and the player can enjoy the game in the game area and suppress the decrease in interest.

  Moreover, you may make it provide the effect display means which can display an effect image in the center in a game area | region in front view. Thereby, in addition to the game performed in a game area | region, a player can be enjoyed also by the effect image displayed on an effect display means, and the fall of a player's interest can be suppressed. In addition, during the display of the effect image by the effect display means, when switching the effect image, it is difficult to notice the change of the effect image by causing the decorative body to emit light and directing the player's line of sight toward the decorative body below the game area. can do. Then, when the player turns his gaze on the effect display means after the effect image is switched, the effect image can be surprised by the change of the effect image, and the effect image can be more enjoyed, and the effect can be produced in an instant. By switching the images, it is possible to make the player think that there is something good, and it is possible to increase a sense of expectation for the game and suppress a decrease in interest.

Means 2: In the constitution of means 1,
"The decorative body is
It is smoothly curved and protrudes forward ".

  According to the configuration of the means 2, the decorative body is smoothly curved and protrudes forward.

  Thereby, since the decorative body that protrudes largely forward is smoothly curved, there is no possibility that the player will be damaged even if it comes into contact with the player. Therefore, since the player can recognize that the decorative body is not a dangerous thing causing injury, the player can select this gaming machine with peace of mind. It is possible to entertain the game with this gaming machine and suppress the decrease in interest.

Means 3: In the constitution of means 1 or means 2,
"The decorative body is
It is attached to the center of the bulging portion in the left-right direction ”.

  According to the structure of the means 3, the decorative body is attached to the center of the bulging portion in the left-right direction.

  As a result, a decorative body that protrudes greatly forward is attached to the center of the bulging portion in the left-right direction. This gaming machine can be easily selected as a gaming machine that plays with increased power. In addition, since the decorative body protruding forward is attached to the center in the left-right direction, it is possible to easily extend the player's hands forward, so an operation unit (handle for driving game media into the game area) ), Handling of game media stored in the storage tray, etc. can be facilitated, and it is difficult to give stress to the player, and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

Means 4: In any one configuration from means 1 to means 3,
"The decorative body is
It has a first decorative portion extending in a semicircular shape so as to bulge outward in a semicircular arc-shaped cross-sectional shape ”.

  According to the configuration of the means 4, the decorative body is provided with the first decorative portion extending in a semicircular shape so as to bulge outward with a semicircular arc-shaped cross-sectional shape.

  As a result, since the first decorative portion of the decorative body extends in a semicircular shape so that the semicircular arc-shaped cross section bulges outward, half of the cylindrical tube-shaped donut protrudes forward. As a result, it is possible to give a smooth and soft impression to the player, allow the player to play in a calm mood, and concentrate the player on the game. It is possible to suppress the decline of interest, and to recognize that it is safe and hard to be injured even if the player touches it at first glance, and to make the player feel safe, Can be suppressed.

  In addition, as described above, since the first decorative portion has a semi-doughnut shape, if the entire first decorative portion is illuminated by the decorative body light emitting means according to the gaming state, light emission like an annular fluorescent lamp The decoration can be shown to the player, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted. When decorating the light, for example, if the light is decorated so that light flows from one side, the player can show the player a light-emitting effect in which the light moves and rotates inside the donut. You can be surprised and think that there is something good, and you can raise the expectation of the game and suppress the decline of interest.

Means 5: In the constitution of means 4,
"The decorative body is
The front end is disposed below the first decorative portion so as to be located behind the first decorative portion, and extends in a semicircular shape so as to bulge outward in a semicircular arc-shaped cross-sectional shape. It is further provided with a second decorative portion ”.

  According to the structure of the means 5, it arrange | positions under a 1st decoration part so that a front end may be located back rather than a 1st decoration part, and it may bulge outward in the cross-sectional shape of a semicircular arc shape on a decoration body. A second decorative portion extending in a semi-annular shape is further provided.

  Thereby, in the first decoration part and the second decoration part, it is possible to show the player a decoration in which half donuts are lined up and down, and to improve the appearance of the bulging part provided with the storage tray. In addition, since the tip of the second decorative portion is located behind the tip of the first decorative portion, the second decorative portion can emphasize the perspective and make the decorative body appear larger. It can be a highly appealing gaming machine that attracts the interest of the

  In addition, since the semi-doughnut-shaped first decorative portion and the second decorative portion are arranged above and below, by appropriately decorating each with the decorative body light emitting means, a light emission effect such that light rotates, You can show the player a light-emitting effect in which light moves up and down, entertain the player, and show the player a variety of light-emitting effects, making it difficult for the player to get bored. Can suppress a decrease in interest.

Means 6: In any one configuration from means 1 to means 5,
“It further includes an effect operation unit that is attached behind the front end of the upper surface of the decorative body and that can accept the player's operation according to the gaming state”. To do.

  Here, as the “production operation unit”, “a rotation operation unit capable of rotating operation”, “a press operation unit capable of pressing operation”, “touch operation unit capable of touch operation”, “slide operation unit capable of slide operation” , “Stick operation unit capable of stick operation”, “composite operation unit capable of rotation operation and pressing operation”, and the like. Further, the “production operation unit” may be in contact with the upper surface of the decorative body, or may protrude from the upper surface of the decorative body.

  According to the configuration of the means 6, the game machine is further provided with an effect operation unit that is attached to the rear of the front end of the upper surface of the decorative body and that can accept the player's operation according to the game state. is there.

  Thereby, since the production operation unit is provided on the upper surface of the decorative body, when the operation of the production operation unit can be accepted according to the game state (when the player participation type production is executed), the player However, by operating the production operation unit, it is possible to entertain the player participation type production, and to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player with respect to the game. At this time, the decorative body is illuminated and decorated by the decorative body light emitting means, so that the player's interest can be attracted to the decorative body to which the rendering operation section is attached. When a participatory presentation is executed, the decoration body is illuminated and decorated, so that the player's interest can be directed to the decoration body (production operation section) and the operation of the production operation section can be urged. By operating the part, it is possible to entertain the player-participation-type production and suppress the decrease in interest.

  In addition, since the production operation unit is attached to the rear of the front end of the decorative body, it is possible to prevent a part of the player's body or clothing from coming into contact with the production operation unit by the decorative body, It is possible to reduce the erroneous operation of the production operation unit, and to surely enjoy the player participation type production that operates the production operation unit, and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, since the production operation unit is attached to the upper surface of the decorative body that protrudes greatly forward, the production operation unit looks large and can give a strong impact to the player, and this gaming machine is selected as a gaming machine to play. The progress of the game (for example, a game medium (game ball) can be performed so that the player participation type effect is executed at an early stage by increasing the expectation for the player participation type effect that operates the effect operation unit. ), The start of rotation of the rotating body by insertion of a game medium (medal), etc.) can be encouraged, and the player can be entertained and the decrease in interest in the game can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the production operation unit is provided behind the front end on the upper surface of the decoration body, the decoration body decorates the outside of the production operation unit, and thus the appearance of the production operation unit can be improved. Therefore, the production operation unit can be made conspicuous and a gaming machine that can attract the player's attention can be obtained.

Means 7: In the configuration of means 6,
“The production operation section
An annular rotation control unit that the player can rotate;
And a pressing operation unit that can be pressed by the player in the ring of the rotation operation unit.

  Here, examples of the “rotation operation section” include “things that can be rotated not only by a player's rotation operation but also by driving a motor”, “rotations only by a player's rotation operation”, and the like.

  In addition, the “pressing operation unit” includes “a cylindrical outer periphery pressing operation unit along the inner periphery of the rotation operation unit, and a columnar central pressing operation unit provided in the outer periphery pressing operation unit. ”,“ One cylindrical object ”,“ one with a cross key or arrow key ”, and the like. Further, examples of the “pressing operation unit” include “things that can be moved forward and backward between the retracted position and the protruding position”, “things that cannot be moved vertically”, and the like.

  According to the configuration of the means 7, the effect operation unit includes an annular rotation operation unit that can be rotated by the player, and a pressing operation unit that can be pressed by the player within the ring of the rotation operation unit. It is a thing.

  As a result, a rotation operation unit that can be rotated as a production operation unit and a press operation unit that can be pressed are provided. And pressing operations can be appropriately combined to allow the player to operate, and can respond to effects requiring more complex inputs (player operations), so a wider variety of player-participation effects Can be presented to the player, the player can be entertained, the player can be made less tired, and a decrease in interest in the game can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the decorative body having the rotation operation unit and the pressing operation unit attached to the upper surface can be illuminated and decorated by the decorative body light emitting means, the decorative body is illuminated and decorated when the player participation type effect is executed. Thus, the player's interest can be directed to the decorative body (the production operation unit such as the rotation operation unit and the press operation unit) to prompt the operation of the production operation unit, and the player can operate the production operation unit. It is possible to entertain the player-participation type production and suppress the decrease in interest. At this time, it is possible to prompt the player to rotate the rotation operation unit or to press the pressing operation unit depending on the light emitting mode of the decorative body. The operation unit can be accurately operated, and a player participation type effect can be enjoyed to prevent a decrease in interest.

  In addition, it is desirable to make the diameter of a rotation operation part larger than the distance of the front-back direction of a storage tray. As a result, the front end side of the rotation operation part protrudes far forward from the storage tray, so that the rotation operation part can be made more conspicuous and the player's interest can be strongly attracted. It can be recognized that it is different from other gaming machines, and this gaming machine can be easily selected as a gaming machine to play. Further, when the diameter of the rotation operation unit is increased, the player can immediately recognize that the rotation operation unit is for the rotation operation, and the game is performed when the player participation type effect is executed. It is possible to make it easier for the player to participate in the effect, and to increase the expectation for the execution of the player participation type effect, and to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player. Further, when the diameter (outer diameter) of the annular rotation operation part is increased, the inner diameter of the rotation operation part can be increased to enlarge the pressing operation part in the ring, so that the pressing operation part is operated. It can be made easier, and the depressing of the excitement can be suppressed by depressing the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit.

Means 8: In the constitution of means 7,
"The pressing operation part
According to the gaming state, it is movable between a retracted position that protrudes slightly above the upper surface of the rotation operation portion and a protruded position that protrudes above the retracted position. '' It is characterized by being.

  Here, the “pressing operation part” that can be moved between the retracted position and the protruding position includes “things that can be moved to the retracted position when the player performs a pressing operation at the protruding position”, “players at the protruding position” Can be moved to the retracted position even if the button is pressed.

  According to the configuration of the means 8, the pressing operation unit is arranged between a retreat position that protrudes slightly above the upper surface of the rotation operation unit according to the gaming state and a protrusion position that protrudes above the retreat position. , So that it can be moved.

  Accordingly, when the pressing operation unit is moved to the protruding position according to the gaming state, the pressing operation unit protrudes upward from the rotation operation unit, so that the upper surface of the decorative body is enlarged together with the rotation operation unit. Since it appears to bulge upward, it can make a large impact around the player by making the surroundings of the decoration larger, and make the decoration more conspicuous to increase appeal to the player than other gaming machines In addition to being able to attract the player's interest strongly because the pressing operation part protrudes greatly upwards, the expectation for the operation of the pressing operation part is enhanced and the decrease in interest is suppressed. be able to.

  In addition, since the pressing operation part can be moved between the retracted position and the protruding position, the player's interest can be directed to the rotating operation part at the retracted position, and the player's interest at the protruding position. Since the operation can be directed to the pressing operation unit, the operation unit that the player wants to operate can be urged by moving the pressing operation unit according to the content of the player participation type effect to be executed. It is possible to entertain a player-participation-type production by accurately operating the rotation operation unit and the pressing operation unit.

Means 9: In the constitution of means 8,
"The pressing operation part
Cylindrical outer periphery pressing operation part that enables a player to perform pressing operation at the protruding position;
It is arranged in the cylinder of the outer periphery pressing operation part, and has a columnar central pressing operation part that can be pressed by the player at any of the retracted position and the protruding position. '' It is characterized by being.

  According to the configuration of the means 9, the pressing operation portion is arranged in a cylindrical outer periphery pressing operation portion that can be pressed by the player when in the protruding position, and in the cylinder of the outer periphery pressing operation portion. And a columnar central pressing operation unit that can be pressed by the player at any position.

  Thereby, on the upper surface of the decorative body projecting greatly forward, the outer peripheral pressing operation part and the rotation operating part are arranged concentrically around the central pressing operation part, so that the apparent impact can be increased. It is possible to attract the player's interest strongly, and to increase the player's expectation for the player participation type operation that operates each operation unit, and to suppress the decrease in the player's interest Can do. Further, by decorating the decorative body with light emission, the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the decorative body, and thus the rotation operation unit, the outer peripheral pressing operation unit, and the central pressing operation unit, and the operation can be promoted. It is possible to entertain the player-participation type production and suppress the decrease in interest.

  In addition, when the pressing operation unit inside the rotation operation unit is set to the retracted position, the center pressing operation unit, the outer periphery pressing operation unit, and the rotation operation unit have the same height as each other, and the rotation operation unit and the center pressing operation When the pressing operation unit is moved from the retracted position to the protruding position, the central pressing operation unit and the outer peripheral pressing operation unit protrude above the rotation operating unit, and the central pressing operation unit, The outer periphery pressing operation unit and the rotation operation unit can be operated. Therefore, according to the contents of the player participation type production, the operation unit that can be operated by the player can be properly used, and it can be used for various productions, and the player can enjoy various operations. It is possible to prevent the player from getting bored and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, in the state where the pressing operation unit is moved to the protruding position, the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical outer pressing unit can be seen, so that it is possible to make the player have the illusion that the outer pressing unit can be rotated. it can. As a result, when a player participation type effect that operates the rotation operation unit or the press operation unit is executed, even if an illusionary player tries to rotate the outer periphery press operation unit, the outer periphery press operation unit does not rotate. The player can be impatient, and the player can be entertained with a sense of tension in the flow of the production.

Means 10: In any one configuration from means 6 to means 9,
It is characterized by further comprising “operation unit light-emitting means for illuminating and decorating the effect operation unit according to the gaming state”.

  Here, as the “operation unit light emitting means”, “full color LED”, “single color LED”, “high brightness LED”, “organic EL”, “incandescent bulb”, “neon bulb”, “cold cathode tube”, etc. Is mentioned.

  According to the configuration of the means 10, the game machine is further provided with operation part light emitting means for causing the effect operation part to emit light according to the gaming state.

  As a result, the effect operation unit can be illuminated and decorated by the operation unit light emitting means in accordance with the gaming state. The whole bulging part bulging forward under the door window can be decorated with light emission, making the bulging part stand out and attracting the player's attention strongly, and the whole illuminating decoration By doing so, it is possible to make the player think that there is something good, and it is possible to raise a sense of expectation for the game and suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, since the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the production operation unit by decorating the production operation unit with the operation unit light emitting means, a player participation type production for operating the production operation unit was executed. Occasionally, the production operation unit can be illuminated and decorated to direct the player's interest to the production operation unit, and the player can enter the production operation by operating the production operation unit. Can suppress a decrease in interest.

Mean 11: In the gaming machine,
“A game board having a game area where a game is played,
A body frame holding the game board detachably from the front;
The front side of the main body frame is closed so that it can be opened and closed, and the door frame base has a door window that allows the game area to be visually recognized from the front.
A bulging portion provided with a storage tray that bulges forward from a portion below the door window on the front surface of the door frame base and that can store a game medium for playing a game in the game area; ,
The door frame is attached to the center of the bulging portion in the left-right direction, extends in a semicircular shape so as to bulge outward with a semicircular arc-shaped cross-sectional shape, and the front end is forward of the front end of the storage tray. A first decorative part projecting from the front of the base forward to a distance of 1/3 to 2/3 of the full width of the door frame base, and the front end positioned rearward of the first decorative part A decorative body including a second decorative portion disposed below the first decorative portion and extending in a semicircular shape so as to bulge outward in a semicircular arc-shaped cross-sectional shape;
Decorative body light emitting means for causing the decorative body to emit light in accordance with a gaming state that is changed by playing a game in the gaming area;
An annular rotation operation unit that is attached behind the front end of the upper surface of the decorative body and can be rotated by the player, and an upper surface of the rotation operation unit in the ring of the rotation operation unit according to the gaming state A cylinder that is movable between a retracted position that protrudes slightly higher than the retracted position and a protruded position that protrudes upward from the retracted position. And a cylindrical central pressing operation unit that is arranged in a cylinder of the outer pressing operation unit and can be pressed by the player at any of the retracted position and the protruding position. A press operation unit, and an effect operation unit that can accept a player's operation according to the gaming state;
It comprises an operation unit light emitting means for lighting the decoration operation unit according to the gaming state.

  According to the structure of the means 11, the game machine has a game board having a game area where the game is performed, a main body frame holding the game board detachably from the front, and a front side of the main body frame can be opened and closed. The door frame base has a door window that allows the game area to be visually recognized from the front, and bulges forward from a portion below the door window on the front surface of the door frame base. A bulging part equipped with a storage tray capable of storing game media for playing games in the area, and attached to the center of the bulging part in the left-right direction, bulging outward with a semicircular arc-shaped cross-sectional shape The front end of the storage pan extends forward from the front surface of the door frame base forward to a distance of 1/3 to 2/3 of the full width of the door frame base. The first decoration so that one decorative part and the front end are located behind the first decorative part And a decorative body having a second decorative portion that extends in a semicircular shape so as to bulge outward with a semicircular arc-shaped cross-sectional shape, and the decorative body is played in the game area. Decorative body light emitting means for illuminating and decorating according to the gaming state that is performed, an annular rotational operation unit that is attached behind the front end of the top surface of the decorative body and that can be rotated by the player, and rotational operation In the ring of the part, it is movable between a retracted position protruding slightly above the upper surface of the rotation operation part and a protruding position protruding upward from the retracted position according to the gaming state. , A cylindrical outer periphery pressing operation part that allows the player to perform a pressing operation at the protruding position, and a player can perform a pressing operation at any of the retracted position and the protruding position disposed in the cylinder of the outer periphery pressing operation part. A cylindrical center pressing operation part A production operation unit capable of accepting the player's operation according to the game state, and an operation unit light emitting means for causing the production operation unit to emit light according to the game state. It is a thing.

  As a result, a bulging portion having a storage tray capable of storing game media bulges forward in a portion below the door window on the front surface of the door frame base that closes the main body frame so that it can be opened and closed. In addition, the bulging portion includes a decorative body having a length of 1/3 to 2/3 of the full width of the door frame base and a front end protruding forward from the front surface of the door frame base. The central pressing operation part, the outer periphery pressing operation part, and the rotation operation part which are arrange | positioned concentrically at the upper surface are provided. As a result, when this gaming machine is attached to the island equipment of the gaming hall, the decoration body with the production operation unit attached to the upper surface projects greatly forward, below the door window where the inside of the gaming area can be visually confirmed. The decoration body can be made more conspicuous than other gaming machines, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the appeal to the player can be enhanced, and this gaming machine can be selected as a gaming machine to play. Can be made easier. In addition, since the front end of the decorative body protrudes greatly forward from below the door frame, the decorative body can be moved forward from the front end of the storage tray, and the length of the decorative body in the left-right direction is longer than before. Can be long. Therefore, even if the player places his / her hand on the upper surface of the bulging portion or places his / her hand on the storage tray, the portion hidden by the player's hand can be reduced with respect to the entire decorative body, When the decoration light emitting means is used to make the light emission decoration, it is possible to make the player easily notice the light emission decoration of the decoration body, and to prevent the player from feeling lost, and to suppress the decrease in the interest in the game Can be made.

  In addition, since the decorative body is greatly projected forward under the door window, when the player sits in front of the gaming machine, the front end of the decorative body is as close as possible to the player. Therefore, depending on the gaming state, if the decorative body is illuminated and decorated by the decorative body light emitting means, or if the effect operation part is illuminated and decorated by the operation unit light emitting means, the light will irradiate the player from below, The player's line of sight can be directed to the lower decorative body and the production operation unit by the light emitting decoration of the decoration body and the production operation unit, and the player's line of sight is directed downward, so that the game provided forward It is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize the inside of the game area by keeping the area away from the player's view. Accordingly, in the game area, for example, when the scene of the production image changes, when the movable body moves, or when the variable winning opening (second start opening, big winning opening, winning prize winning opening, etc.) opens or closes. When the player turns the decoration body or the production operation unit to light up and decorates the game area, and then turns the player down the game area, and then returns the line of sight to the game area, the production image and the movable body By changing etc., it can surprise the player and give a strong impact, can entertain the player, and make the player think that there is something good It is possible to increase a sense of expectation for the game and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, as described above, the decorative body can be surprised by changing the effect in the game area by making the decorative body light emitting decoration according to the gaming state and changing the effect in the game area. With the light-emitting decoration, the player can be informed of the arrival of an opportunity (for example, the occurrence of an advantageous gaming state (“big hit game”) in which the player is advantageous). As a result, a premium feeling can be imparted to the luminous decoration of the decorative body, so that the player can be thrilled and excited by whether or not the decorative body decorates the luminous body. The decrease can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the decorative body is greatly protruded forward, when the player tries to see the entire decorative body, the player sees away from the gaming machine, so that the entire gaming machine including the gaming area is easy to see. Thereby, it can be made to feel like having put one tempo with respect to a player, a player can be relaxed and the fall of an interest can be suppressed.

  In addition, a decorative body that protrudes greatly forward is attached to the center of the bulging part in the left-right direction. This gaming machine can be made easy to select as a gaming machine that increases the game. In addition, since the decorative body protruding forward is attached to the center in the left-right direction, it is possible to easily extend the player's hands forward, so an operation unit (handle for driving game media into the game area) ), Handling of game media stored in the storage tray, etc. can be facilitated, and it is difficult to give stress to the player, and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, the first decorative portion and the second decorative portion arranged above and below the decorative body are formed so that the semicircular arc-shaped cross section extends in a semicircular shape so as to bulge outward. Since the half of the tube-shaped donut protrudes forward, it is possible to give a smooth and soft impression to the player and make the player play in a calm mood It is possible to concentrate the player on the game and suppress the decrease in interest, and to recognize that it is safe and difficult to be injured even if the player touches at first glance, By reassuring the player, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  In addition, by decorating the decorative body and the effect operating unit attached to the upper surface of the decorative body at the same time, the entire bulging portion bulging forward under the door window can be illuminated and decorated. Therefore, it is possible to make the bulging part stand out and attract the player's interest strongly, and it is possible to make the player think that there is something good with the whole light emitting decoration, The player's interest can be directed to the production operation unit, and the operation can be promoted. By causing the player to operate the production operation unit, it is possible to entertain the player participation type production and suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, as described above, since the first decorative portion and the second decorative portion have a semi-doughnut shape, if the entire first decorative portion and the second decorative portion are illuminated and decorated by the decorative body light emitting means according to the gaming state. It is possible to show the player a light emitting decoration such as an annular fluorescent lamp, and to attract the player's attention strongly. When decorating the light, for example, if the light is decorated so that light flows from one side, the player can show the player a light-emitting effect in which the light moves and rotates inside the donut. You can be surprised and think that there is something good, and the direction of the rotation of the light of the first decorative part and the second decorative part on the rotation operation part attached to the upper surface of the decorative body The player can be prompted to rotate in the same direction. Alternatively, the first decoration part and the second decoration part arranged above and below are alternately decorated to emit light so that the player can show a light-emitting effect in which the light moves up and down and up and down. The moving light can prompt the player to perform a pressing operation on the outer peripheral pressing operation unit or the central pressing operation unit. Therefore, the player can be encouraged to rotate the rotary operation unit or to press the pressing operation unit by appropriately decorating the first decorative unit and the second decorative unit with light emission. On the other hand, the rotation operation unit or the press operation unit can be accurately operated, and the player participation type effect can be enjoyed and the decrease in the interest can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, on the upper surface of the decorative body that protrudes greatly forward, the outer peripheral pressing operation part and the rotation operating part are arranged concentrically around the central pressing operation part, so that the visual impact can be increased. In addition to attracting the player's interest strongly, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the player-participation-type production that operates each operation unit, and to suppress a decrease in the player's interest it can.

  In addition, when the pressing operation unit inside the rotation operation unit is set to the retracted position, the center pressing operation unit, the outer periphery pressing operation unit, and the rotation operation unit have the same height as each other, and the rotation operation unit and the center pressing operation When the pressing operation unit is moved from the retracted position to the protruding position, the central pressing operation unit and the outer peripheral pressing operation unit protrude above the rotation operating unit, and the central pressing operation unit, The outer periphery pressing operation unit and the rotation operation unit can be operated. Therefore, according to the contents of the player participation type production, the operation unit that can be operated by the player can be properly used, and it can be used for various productions, and the player can enjoy various operations. It is possible to prevent the player from getting bored and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  In addition, in the state where the pressing operation unit is moved to the protruding position, the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical outer peripheral pressing operation unit can be seen. it can. As a result, when a player participation type effect that operates the rotation operation unit or the press operation unit is executed, even if an illusionary player tries to rotate the outer periphery press operation unit, the outer periphery press operation unit does not rotate. The player can be impatient, and the player can be entertained with a sense of tension in the flow of the production.

Means 12: In any one configuration from means 1 to means 11,
The gaming machine is
A plurality of receiving ports that are arranged in the gaming area and are capable of receiving gaming media;
It is a pachinko machine provided with a payout device that pays out a predetermined number of game media in response to the reception of game media into the receiving port.

  Here, the “reception entrance” includes “a general prize opening that is always open in the game area”, “an open game opening that is always open in the game area, and an advantageous game state in which the player has an advantage by receiving game media "A start prize opening where a special lottery is performed to determine whether or not to generate" (start opening), "by receiving a game medium in a specific entrance (chucker) in the game area, in the game area, "Variable prize opening (variable start opening, bonus prize opening, etc.) that can be accepted" "," Normal lottery that is drawn by passing game media through specific areas (gate, through chucker, etc.) in the game area Depending on the result, the game medium can be assigned to a variable prize opening (variable start opening, bonus game prize prize opening, etc.) that allows the game medium to be accepted, or a specific area (eg, gate, chucker, etc.) within the game area. Through Depending on the result of the normal lottery, the game medium can be accepted, and a variable lottery in which a special lottery is performed to determine whether or not an advantageous gaming state that would be advantageous to the player by receiving the game medium is generated. Mouth (variable starting port) ”,“ V winning port that generates an advantageous gaming state where the player has an advantage when the game medium received in the prize winning port is distributed and received by the distributing means ”,“ Game As an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous, there are, for example, a large winning opening and an accessory winning opening that can be opened and closed in a predetermined pattern and can receive gaming media.

  In addition, the “pachinko machine” includes “a lottery means for performing a special lottery for generating an advantageous gaming state in which the player has an advantage by accepting a game medium at the start port, and a special lottery result drawn by the lottery means. The special symbol is variably displayed in accordance with the stop symbol, and the special lottery result display means for displaying the special lottery result by lottery by the combination of the special symbols that are stopped and displayed, and the special lottery result display means has an advantageous gaming state. And an advantageous game state generating means for generating an advantageous game state by opening and closing a special winning opening in a predetermined pattern when a special lottery result to be generated is displayed (so-called digipachi machine), Distribution means for distributing game media received in the mouth, and when the game media distributed by the distribution means are received in the V prize opening, the prize winning opening is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern. Advantageous gaming state generating means for generating an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player (so-called honey machine) "," a game medium having a big prize opening and an accessory prize opening, When the special winning lottery drawn by the acceptance of the game is opened or closed in a predetermined pattern according to the result of the special lottery, and the game medium received in the prize winning port is distributed to the V winning award, the prize winning port Or, a device having an advantageous game state generating means for generating an advantageous game state in which the player has an advantage by opening and closing the special winning opening in a predetermined pattern (so-called multi-function machine).

  According to the configuration of the means 12, the gaming machine is a gaming area into which a gaming medium is driven by a player's operation, a plurality of gaming machines that are arranged in the gaming area and capable of receiving the gaming medium, and a game to the receiving hall This is a pachinko machine provided with a payout device for paying out a predetermined number of game media in response to receiving of the media. Thereby, in the pachinko machine, the effect of any of the above-described means can be achieved.

  Note that it is desirable that the decoration light emission decoration of the decoration body by the decoration body light emitting means is executed when the game medium that has been driven into the game area is received in the reception port. As a result, when a game medium is received at the entrance, a predetermined number of game media are paid out, and the decorative body is illuminated and decorated. Can be continued easily, and a decrease in the interest of the player in the game can be suppressed.

  In addition, when a special lottery is generated to generate an advantageous gaming state in which the player has an advantage by accepting a game medium at the starting port, and the result of the lottery is indicated to the player, the result is presented to the player. As one of the effects, the decorative body may be illuminated and decorated by the decorative body light emitting means. As a result, the decorative body is illuminated and decorated, so that it is possible to entertain the player with a strong impact by the above-described effects, so that the special lottery result drawn for the player It can be considered that an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous (for example, “big hit”) is generated, and a sense of expectation for the occurrence of the advantageous gaming state can be increased to suppress a decrease in interest. In addition, as described above, since it is possible to show the player a movable effect with a higher effect by illuminating the decorative body, an effect to suggest the player the result of the lottery special lottery (for example, It can be used suitably for reach production), and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress the decrease in interest.

Means 13: In any one configuration from means 1 to means 11,
The gaming machine is
A plurality of swirl bodies each having a plurality of designs,
A start operation unit that rotates each of the plurality of revolving bodies by a player operating after inserting a game medium;
A plurality of stop operation portions for stopping rotation of the plurality of rotating bodies;
A slot machine comprising a payout device for paying out a predetermined number of game media in accordance with a combination of stop symbols by all the rotating bodies that have been rotated and stopped by a player operating each of the plurality of stop operation portions. It is characterized by being.

  Here, “slot machine” means “the number of effective lines for determining the combination of stop symbols depending on the number of game media (medals) used in one game”, An internal lottery is executed at the start of rotation, and a privilege that gives the player an advantage according to the combination of stop symbols and the lottery result of internal lottery is given. ”And the like. The “privileges” include “big bonus (BB)”, “regular bonus (RB)”, “cherry rush bonus (CRB)”, “replay”, “long replay time (LRT)”, “assist time ( AT) ", etc.

  According to the configuration of the means 13, the game machine is provided with a plurality of spinning bodies each having a plurality of symbols, and a start operation unit that rotates the plurality of spinning bodies by operating by the player after the game medium is inserted. And a plurality of stop operation parts for stopping rotation of each of the plurality of rotating bodies, and a combination of stop symbols by all of the rotating bodies stopped by the player operating each of the plurality of stop operating parts. A slot machine including a payout device for paying out a predetermined number of game media. Thereby, in the pachi-slot machine, any of the above-described means can be obtained.

  It should be noted that the decorative light emitting decoration by the decorative light emitting means is used when the combination of symbols that have stopped rotating on the effective line satisfies the winning combination (so-called reach). In addition, as one of the effects presented to the player, a plurality of decorative bodies by the driving means may be rotated. Thereby, the decoration body is illuminated and decorated, so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the operation of the stop operation unit can be enjoyed so as to be a winning combination. In addition, when the lottery result of the internal lottery is a winning combination, the decorative body may be decorated with light emission, and this allows the player to have a strong impact by illuminating decoration, When stopped with a specific symbol combination, it can be assumed that an advantageous gaming state (for example, “BB”) is advantageous for the player, and the expectation for the occurrence of the advantageous gaming state is increased. Can suppress a decrease in interest. In addition, as described above, since the player can be shown a movable effect with a higher effect by decorating the decorative body with light emission decoration, it is suitable for the effect for instructing the player of the lottery internal lottery. It can be used, and a player can be entertained and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

Means 14: In any one configuration from means 1 to means 11,
The gaming machine is
It is a fusion machine that combines a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine.

  Here, a “fusion machine” in which a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine are fused together is a symbol sequence composed of a plurality of symbols in accordance with the operation of a starting operation unit (for example, an operation lever) after a plurality of game media are inserted. Is displayed in a variable manner, and thereafter, the change in the symbol sequence is stopped in accordance with the operation of the stop operation unit (for example, the stop button), the game medium is paid out in accordance with the combination of the stop symbols, or a privilege advantageous to the player (for example, , An advantageous gaming state). If the stop operation unit is not operated even after a predetermined time has elapsed, the variable display of the symbol sequence may be stopped when the predetermined time has elapsed.

  According to the configuration of the means 14, the gaming machine is a fusion machine in which a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine are fused. Thereby, in the fusion machine which united the pachinko machine and the pachislot machine, the effect of either of the means mentioned above can be produced.

  It should be noted that the decorative light emitting decoration by the decorative light emitting means is used when the combination of symbols that have stopped rotating on the effective line satisfies the winning combination (so-called reach). In addition, as one of the effects presented to the player, the decorative body may be illuminated and decorated by the decorative body light emitting means, or the decorative body may be illuminated and decorated when the lottery result of the internal lottery is a winning combination. However, the same effects as described above can be achieved.

[effect]
Thus, according to the above technical means, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that has a high appealing power to the player and can suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game by using the light emitting decoration.

[Relationship between the above forms and the above technical means]
The tray unit 200 of the door frame 3 in the present embodiment is the bulging portion of the present invention, the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 in the present embodiment are the storage tray of the present invention, and the rendering operation unit cover unit in the rendering operation unit 300 of the present embodiment. The unit lower cover 311 and the unit front cover 312 of 310 are the decorative body of the present invention, the dish center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312 in the present embodiment is the first decorative portion of the present invention, and the unit front cover 312 of the present embodiment. The plate center lower decorative body 312b is used as the second decorative portion of the present invention, and the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 and the plate central lower decorative substrate 316 are used as the decorative body light emitting means of the present invention. The board 352, the central button decoration board 376, and the outer button decoration board 377 correspond to the operation unit light emitting means of the present invention.

[Characteristic effects of this embodiment]
Thus, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game ball B is placed on the lower side of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 in the door frame 3 that can be opened and closed. The tray unit 200 including the upper tray 201 and the lower tray 202 that can be stored bulges forward, and the front end of the tray unit 200 is approximately ½ the length of the entire width of the door frame base 101. A center pressing operation unit 303a and an outer periphery pressing operation unit which are provided with an effect operation unit cover unit 310 protruding forward from the front surface of the door frame base 101 and are concentrically arranged on the upper surface of the effect operation unit cover unit 310. 303b and a rotation operation unit 302 are provided. As a result, when the pachinko machine 1 is attached to the island facility of the game hall, the effect operation unit cover unit 310 having the effect operation unit 301 attached to the upper surface is provided below the door window 101a where the inside of the game area 5a is visible. Since it protrudes greatly forward, the dish unit 200 (production operation unit cover unit 310) can be made more conspicuous than the other pachinko machines 1, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted and appealed to the player Power can be raised and it can be made easy to select this pachinko machine 1 as a pachinko machine to play. In addition, since the front end of the production operation unit cover unit 310 (unit front cover 312) is greatly protruded forward under the door frame 3, the production operation unit cover unit 310 is moved forward from the front end of the upper plate 201. In addition, the length of the production operation unit cover unit 310 in the left-right direction can be made longer than before. Therefore, even if the player places his / her hand on the upper surface of the plate unit 200 or places his / her hand on the upper plate 201, the portion hidden by the player's hand is reduced with respect to the entire production operation unit cover unit 310. Therefore, when the production operation unit cover unit 310 (unit front cover 312) is light-decorated with the dish center upper decorative board 314 and the dish center lower decorative board 316, the player has the light emitting decoration of the unit front cover 312. It is possible to make it easier to notice, and to prevent the player from feeling lost, and to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  In addition, since the effect operation unit cover unit 310 protrudes greatly forward from below the door window 101a, when the player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1, the unit front cover 312 in the effect operation unit cover unit 310 is displayed. Since the front end of the unit is as close as possible to the player, the unit front cover 312 is light-decorated with the dish center upper decorative board 314 and the dish center lower decorative board 316 according to the gaming state, and the presentation operation When the effect operation unit 301 is illuminated and decorated by the ring decoration substrate 352, the central button decoration substrate 376, and the outer button decoration substrate 377, the light irradiates the player from below, so that the unit front cover 312 and the effect operation unit 301 are illuminated. The player's line of sight is directed toward the unit front cover 312 and the direction operation unit 301 below by the light emitting decoration. It is possible to, by directing the line of sight of the player downwards, can be difficult away within the game area 5a provided in the front from the player's field of vision, it is visible within the game area 5a. Accordingly, in the game area 5a, for example, when the scene of the effect image by the effect display device 1600 changes, when the movable body moves, when the second start opening 2004 or the big prize opening 2005 opens and closes, etc. In addition, the unit front cover 312 and the effect operation unit 301 are illuminated to decorate the player so that the player is directed below the game area 5a, and then when the player returns his line of sight to the game area 5a, By changing the body, etc., the player can be surprised and given a strong impact, the player can be entertained, and the player may think that there is something good. It is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game and suppress the decrease in interest.

  Further, as described above, the player can be surprised by making the unit front cover 312 illuminate and decorate according to the gaming state, and changing the effect in the gaming area 5a in the gap. Then, the light emission decoration of the unit front cover 312 can indicate to the player the arrival of an opportunity (for example, occurrence of an advantageous gaming state (“big hit game”) in which the player is advantageous). Thereby, since a premium feeling can be given to the light emitting decoration of the unit front cover 312, the player can be excited and excited by whether or not the unit front cover 312 is decorated with light emission. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, since the unit front cover 312 protrudes greatly forward, when the player tries to see the entire unit front cover 312, he / she will look away from the pachinko machine 1, so the entire gaming machine including the gaming area Becomes easier to see. Thereby, it can be made to feel like having put one tempo with respect to a player, a player can be relaxed and the fall of an interest can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the production operation unit cover unit 310 that protrudes greatly forward is attached to the center in the left-right direction of the dish unit 200, the presence of the production operation unit cover unit 310 is emphasized to strongly attract the player's interest. The pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as a pachinko machine to be played with an increased appeal to the player. In addition, since the effect operation unit cover unit 310 protruding forward is attached to the center in the left-right direction, both the player's hands can be easily extended forward, so the game ball B is driven into the game area 5a. Therefore, the operation of the handle 182 and the handling of the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 can be facilitated, and it is difficult for the player to be stressed and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, the semicircular arc shaped cross section of the dish center upper decorative body 312a and the dish center lower decorative body 312b disposed above and below the unit front cover 312 of the effect operation unit cover unit 310 is expanded outward. Since it is made to extend in a semi-annular shape, the half of the cylindrical tube-shaped donut protrudes forward, so that it is possible to give a smooth and soft impression to the player. The player can play the game in a calm mood, and the player can concentrate on the game to suppress the decline of interest, and it is difficult to get injured even if the player touches at first glance. It can be recognized that the game is safe, and a reduction in interest in the game can be suppressed by reassuring the player.

  In addition, by simultaneously decorating the effect operation unit cover unit 310 and the effect operation unit 301 protruding from the upper surface of the effect operation unit cover unit 310, the dish unit 200 bulging forward and below the door window 101a. Since the whole can be decorated with light emission, the dish unit 200 can be made to stand out and attract the player's attention strongly, and the whole light emission decoration does not have anything good for the player. The player's interest can be directed to the directing operation unit 301 and the operation can be urged, and the player can operate the directing operation unit 301 to entertain and entertain the player participation type effect. Can be suppressed.

  Further, as described above, the dish center upper decorative body 312a and the dish center lower decorative body 312b are formed in a semi-doughnut shape, so that the dish center upper decorative board 314 and the dish center lower decorative board 316 are arranged on the center of the dish according to the gaming state. If the decoration body 312a and the whole dish lower center decoration body 312b are light-decorated, the player can show a light-emitting decoration such as an annular fluorescent lamp, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted. When decorating the light, for example, if the light is decorated so that light flows from one side, the player can show the player a light-emitting effect in which the light moves and rotates inside the donut. Surprisingly, it can be thought that there is something good, and the rotation operation unit 302 attached to the upper surface of the production operation unit cover unit 310 is replaced with the dish center upper decoration body 312a and the dish center lower decoration body. The player can be prompted to rotate in the same direction as the direction in which the light of 312b is rotating. Alternatively, the player can be shown a light-emitting effect in which the light moves up and down by alternately decorating the upper and lower central dish 312a and the lower central dish 312b. At the same time, the player can be prompted to press the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b or the center pressing operation portion 303a by the light that moves up and down. Therefore, the player is prompted to rotate the rotation operation unit 302 or to press the pressing operation unit 303 by appropriately decorating the dish center upper decoration body 312a and the dish center lower decoration body 312b. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to accurately operate the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303, and it is possible to entertain the player participatory effect and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island facility of the game hall, the door frame 3 extends forward from the side (outside of the right side) of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101. Side window in which three side window decoration portions 410b extending in a columnar shape in the front-rear direction of the side window interior decoration member 412 are arranged in the flat door frame right side unit 410 at intervals in the vertical direction. 410a is formed, and in the normal state, the LEDs of the side window decoration part decoration board 413 for lighting decoration of the plurality of side window decoration parts 410b are turned off. The inside of the game area 5a can be viewed from the side of the pachinko machine 1 (the end of the island facility) through the decoration portion 410b. Therefore, even if a player who is looking for the pachinko machine 1 (the game board 5) as a pachinko machine to play a game does not move to the front of the pachinko machine 1 along the island facility, the pachinko machine 1 can be easily used. It can be found in the above, and a sense of expectation for a game in the pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed. Thereafter, when the player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1, the inside of the game area 5a of the game board 5, the function display unit 1400, and the effect display device 1600 can be satisfactorily viewed through the door window 101a of the door frame 3. A game can be performed in the game area 5a, the game can be enjoyed by the player, and the current game state can be known by the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600.

  At this time, in the door frame 3 in which the left side with respect to the main body frame 4 is hingedly rotated by the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126, out of the left and right outer sides of the door window 101a. Since the door frame right side unit 410 extends forward from the right outer side far from the hinge axis, even if the side window 410a penetrates the door frame right side unit 410, the side window interior decoration portion 410b is included. Since it is possible to block the line of sight of a player located in the vicinity, it is difficult for other players to see the entire game area 5a, as seen by other players. By making it difficult to receive the feeling, it is possible to play the game without hesitation of other players. Then, when the game progresses in the game area 5a and changes to a predetermined gaming state, the LEDs on the side window decoration part decoration substrate 413 cause the three side window decoration parts 410b to emit light, and the light causes the side window The visibility through the side window 410a is changed by dazzling the inside of 410a. At this time, since the three side window decoration portions 410b are formed in a columnar shape, light can be emitted in a band shape and a radial shape, and the side window decoration portions 410b are dazzled, making it difficult to visually recognize the opposite side from the middle. In addition, the player's line of sight can be directed to the side window decoration part 410b by the light emission of the side window decoration part 410b, and the interest in the opposite side through the side window 410a is diminished. The visibility through 410a can be reduced, and it is possible to make it difficult for another player or the like to look into the game area 5a, the function display unit 1400, and the effect display device 1600.

  More specifically, as a gaming state, for example, in a gaming state (scene) that suggests the arrival of an opportunity for the player to be advantageous, the three side window decorations 410b are caused to emit light, and the side due to the glare Visibility through the window 410a is reduced. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for other players such as neighbors to recognize that a chance has arrived in the pachinko machine 1 through the side window 410a, so that other players pay attention to the pachinko machine 1. Because it is possible to avoid the problem, other players will be worried about it and will not be able to devote themselves to the game, so it will cause discomfort, or a mistake will be induced to make you feel lost Can be prevented, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed by making the game enjoyable. Accordingly, since it is possible to prevent another player from peeping into the game area 5a through the side window 410a in a gaming state such as the arrival of a chance, the player can be devoted to the game. You can entertain more and suppress the decline of interest.

  Further, in the side window 410a, the three side window decoration portions 410b extending in the front-rear direction are arranged at intervals in the vertical direction, so that the angle of viewing the side window 410a from the side changes. However, since the three side window decorations 410b do not appear to overlap, when the side window decorations 410b are not emitting light, the side windows 410a pass through the space between the three side window decorations 410b. A player who can visually recognize (in the game area 5a) and is looking for the pachinko machine 1 (the game board 5) as a pachinko machine to play, moves to the front of the pachinko machine 1 along the island facility. Even without this, the pachinko machine 1 can be easily found.

  In addition, since the three side window decoration portions 410b are arranged at intervals in the vertical direction, when the side window decoration portion 410b having a certain height is caused to emit light, a portion of the same height in the game area 5a Can be made difficult to see from other players through the side window 410a, so that by lighting a specific side window decoration part 410b of the three side window decoration parts 410b according to the gaming state, It is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize a specific area (part) in the height direction in the game area 5a, and to make it difficult for other players to know the arrival of a chance. Accordingly, since it is possible to prevent another player from peeping into the game area 5a through the side window 410a in a gaming state such as the arrival of a chance, the player can be devoted to the game. You can entertain more and suppress the decline of interest.

  Further, since the door frame right side unit 410 extending forward is provided with side windows 410a penetrating left and right, the three side window interior decoration portions 410b are turned off, and the side windows 410a are In the state of ensuring visibility, the inside of the game area 5a can be visually recognized from the side of the pachinko machine 1 through the side window 410a. It is easy to find out that fraudulent acts are being carried out from the end of the game area 5a, and the burden on the game hall side can be reduced.

  Further, the door frame right side unit 410 is extended forward from the right outer side that is farther from the left side that is attached to the main body frame 4 so as to be capable of hinge rotation, out of the left and right outer sides of the door window 101a of the door frame 3. Therefore, the door frame 3 can be opened 90 degrees or more with respect to the main body frame 4. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is opened and maintenance or game board 5 is exchanged, the door frame 3 can be made difficult to get in the way by opening the door frame 3 wide, thereby preventing deterioration of workability. can do.

  Further, since the three side window decorations 410b are caused to emit light according to the gaming state, there is a possibility that an advantageous gaming state (for example, a “hit” game) that is advantageous to the player occurs (so-called Depending on the expected value, the side window interior decoration portion 410b may be caused to emit light or be extinguished. More specifically, for example, during the execution of reach production, reach development production, etc., when the expected value is low, the side window interior decoration portion 410b is made to emit light so that it is difficult for other players to look into it, thereby generating an advantageous gaming state When it is not done (when it is “losing”), it is possible to avoid an awkward atmosphere with other players, and to suppress a decrease in interest in the player's game. Alternatively, when the expected value is high, the side-window interior decoration portion 410b is not caused to emit light or is extinguished, so that an advantageous gaming state occurs even if it is easy for other players to look into (a “big hit”). ) So that it does not create an awkward atmosphere and can suppress the decline of interest, and it can also create an atmosphere that other players support, enhancing the player's interest in games. You can make the game more entertaining.

  Furthermore, since the three side window decorations 410b are arranged at intervals in the vertical direction, there is a possibility that an advantageous gaming state (for example, a “hit” game) that is advantageous to the player occurs (so-called Depending on the expected value), the three side window decorations 410b may emit light sequentially (for example, from bottom to top, from top to bottom, from the center to the top and bottom sides, etc.) The specific side window decoration part 410b may emit light. Specifically, for example, during execution of reach production, reach development production, etc., the higher the expected value, the more the three side window decorations 410b emit light sequentially from the bottom or from the top. It is possible to make it difficult for a player to look into the game and to suggest an expected value, thereby increasing the player's sense of expectation for the game and suppressing a decrease in interest.

  In addition to light emission (lighting) and light extinction, the three side window interior decoration portions 410b have a light emission mode such as a flashing pattern, a difference in light emission color, and a change in light emission color (for example, from a cold blue to hot Change of feeling to red, change of blue, yellow, red, etc. imitating traffic signals), or change of brightness (luminance), etc. Thus, the decorative property of the door frame 3 can be further enhanced by the three side window interior decoration portions 410b, and the pachinko machine 1 having high appeal that can attract the player's interest can be obtained.

  Therefore, conversely, during the execution of the reach effect, the reach development effect, etc., the advantageous game state for the player depending on the light emission mode such as the presence or absence of light emission and the light emission pattern of the three side window decorations 410b. The possibility (expected value) of the possibility of occurrence of the game can be suggested, so that the player is excited depending on how the three side window decorations 410b emit light during the performance. -It can be throbbing, and it can increase the player's expectation and suppress the decrease in interest.

  Further, by operating the effect operation unit 301 of the effect operation unit 300 provided in the door frame 3, the three side window decorations 410b may be arbitrarily made to emit light or be turned off. . As a result, for example, when the possibility of an advantageous gaming state (for example, a “hit” game) that is advantageous to the player during a reach production or a reach development production is low (so-called expected value), the production operation is performed. By operating the part 301 to cause the side window interior decoration part 410b to emit light, it is possible to prevent other players from peeping, so when an advantageous gaming state does not occur (when "losing") In addition, it is possible to avoid an awkward atmosphere due to being seen by other players, and to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game. Alternatively, when the possibility (expected value) of occurrence of an advantageous gaming state is high (or when a hot effect is being executed), the effect operation unit 301 is not operated to prevent the side window decoration unit 410b from emitting light. By doing so (or by turning off the decoration part 410b in the side window), even if it is peeped by other players, an advantageous gaming state will be generated, so that it does not become an awkward atmosphere and the interest is lowered. In addition to being able to be suppressed, it is possible to create an atmosphere that other players are cheering on, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the player in the game and make the game more enjoyable.

  In addition, the timing, light emission mode, and the like of the three side window decorations 410b may be set by operating the effect operation unit 301. As a result, in the default state set in advance, the timing specific to the player who does not want to be looked at by other players is not set. However, since it can be customized according to the player's preference by operating the production operation unit 301, the above-described effects can be reliably achieved, and the player's game can be enjoyed. The decrease can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, in the dispensing device 580 of the dispensing unit 560 in the main body frame 4, the ball removal lever 593 is lowered (locked) to make the ball removal movable piece 592 unrotatable and the ball removal passage. Assuming that 580b is in a closed state (first state), the game ball B that has flowed down the payout passage 580a from the upstream cannot be distributed to the ball extraction passage 580b by the ball extraction movable piece 592. It will continue to flow downstream of the payout passage 580a and can be sent to the payout vane 589 via the payout passage 580a. On the other hand, when the ball removal lever 593 is raised (unlocked) to turn the ball removal movable piece 592 into a rotatable state (second state), the game ball B that has flowed down the payout passage 580a from the upstream becomes the payout passage. Without flowing to the downstream side of 580a, it will flow over the ball removal movable piece 592 to the ball removal passage 580b, and may be discharged outside the pachinko machine 1 on the island facility side via the ball removal passage 580b. it can. Since the payout vane 589 is provided on the downstream side of the payout passage 580a, the ball pulling movable piece 592 is not rotatable (first state) by the ball pulling lever 593 in a normal state. On the upstream side of the payout vane 589, the game balls B are stopped in a continuous state like a daisy chain.

  When the payout blade 589 is rotationally driven in this normal state, the game ball B upstream from the payout blade 589 flows to the downstream side, and the game ball B is guided to the payout blade 589 side by the ball removal movable piece 592. Since the game balls B are paid out one by one at the payout blade 589, the flow speed of the game balls B upstream from the payout blade 589 is relatively slow. Since the force acting on the ball removal movable piece 592 due to the contact is relatively weak and the opposite side of the portion of the ball removal movable piece 592 that contacts the game ball B is near the center of the ball removal passage 580b, the ball removal movable piece 592 Is not sandwiched between the wall surface of the ball removal passage 580b and the game ball B, and the ball removal movable piece 592 is not damaged. This can reduce the damage to the ball pulling movable piece 592 during the game, so that it is possible to prevent the game from being interrupted by the breakage of the ball pulling movable piece 592 and causing discomfort to the player. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

  On the other hand, when the game ball B is discharged from the payout passage 580a when the pachinko machine 1 (or the game board 5) is replaced or maintained, the ball removal lever 593 is raised to turn the ball removal movable piece 592. If it is in the state (second state), the game ball B that is in a state of being connected in a daisy chain on the upstream side of the ball removal movable piece 592 flows over the ball removal movable piece 592 to the ball removal passage 580b side. Become. At this time, since the ball extraction passage 580b extends straight from the upstream side of the payout passage 580a, the game ball B flowing down from the upstream of the payout passage 580a flows down straight to the ball discharge passage 580b. At the same time, since the downstream side of the ball removal passage 580b communicates with the island facility side, there is no such thing as the payout blade 589 that suppresses the flow of the game ball B, so that the game ball B is from the payout passage 580a side. Will flow down as soon as possible. In this way, in a state where the ball removal movable piece 592 is rotatable, the game ball B flows down at a high speed in the ball removal passage 580b, so that the ball removal movable piece 592 protruding into the ball removal passage 580b. The game ball B comes into contact with the lower end side of the ball, but the ball removal movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a of the payout device main body 581 and the rear cover side guide wall 582a of the payout device rear cover 582. Since it can move outward from the inner surface of the ball extraction passage 580b, the ball extraction movable piece 592 is moved to the outside of the ball extraction passage 580b by the abutment force. The game ball B is not sandwiched between the wall surface of the extraction passage 580b and the game ball B, so that a strong force can be prevented from acting on the ball extraction movable piece 592. Piece 59 Deterioration and breakage of the durability can be suppressed. For this reason, it is possible to make it difficult to damage the ball removal movable piece 592. Therefore, more game balls B can be discharged earlier to the island facility side downstream of the ball removal passage 580b. An increase in time required for replacement or maintenance of the machine 1 can be suppressed, and the burden on the game hall side can be reduced.

  Further, when the ball removal movable piece 592 is in a rotatable state, the ball removal movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a which are closer than the game ball B, and the ball removal passage 580b. Since the game ball B comes into contact with the ball removal movable piece 592 protruding into the ball removal passage 580b, the ball removal movable piece 592 is moved between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. Even when the game ball B moves together with the ball removal movable piece 592 to the side between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a when moving outward through the gap, the distance from the game ball B is larger. Only the game ball B can be prevented from moving outwardly between the narrow main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. Then, the movement of the game ball B to the outside is prevented by the space between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, so that the game ball B is separated from the ball removal movable piece 592, and the subsequent ball Since the movable movable piece 592 is moved by an inertial force, a strong force is not applied to the movable ball movable piece 592, and the movable ball movable piece 592 can be made difficult to be damaged, and the body side guide The game ball B does not jump out of the ball extraction passage 580b from between the wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, and the game ball B can be reliably circulated downstream of the ball extraction passage 580b.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the frame-like outer frame 2 attached to the island facility of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed can be opened and closed around an axis extending vertically on the left side. The main body frame 4 attached to the outer frame 2 is closed so as to close the inside of the outer frame 2, and the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 (axial core) on the left side with respect to the main body frame 4. When the door frame 3 attached so as to be openable and closable (rotatable by hinges) is closed, the front surface of the main body frame 4 and the rear surface of the door frame 3 face each other and extend in parallel. Connection for connecting the payout control board 633, the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510, etc. on the frame 4 side and the ball feeding unit 140, the handle unit 180, the rendering operation unit 300, etc. on the door frame 3 side. cable 03 extends from the portion of the cable mounting recess 501h that is recessed rearward in the front surface of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame 4 to the shaft core side, and is mounted in the cable mounting recess 501h. After being held by the guide body 502a of the connection cable guide member 502 extending in parallel with the front surface and the rear surface of the door frame 3, the door frame extends further to the vicinity of the shaft core and then turns back and extends away from the shaft core. 3 is held by the cable holder 103a of the speaker duct 103 at a position closer to the axial center than the tip of the connection cable guide member 502 and connected to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 on the door frame 3 side. Has been.

  Then, when the door frame 3 that closes (closes) the front side of the main body frame 4 is hinged about the left side axial center so as to open from the main body frame 4, the rear surface of the door frame 3 becomes the main body. Since the part of the connection cable 503 that extends from the door frame 3 moves forward away from the main body frame 4 because it moves away from the front surface of the frame 4, the folded connection cable 503 is deformed to open, As the connection cable 503 is deformed, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates (rotates) around the attachment shaft 502c that is far from the axis so that the connection cable guide member 502 is inclined with respect to the front surface of the main body frame 4. As described above, when the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the distal end side close to the axial center of the connection cable guide member 502 projects into the space between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3. Since the connection cable 503 guided by the member 502 passes near the shaft core, the connection cable guide member 502 and the connection cable 503 are not easily disturbed.

  In other words, since the connection cable guide member 502 extends the distal end portion from the mounting shaft 502c that is rotatably attached to the shaft core side, the proximal end portion of the guide member is attached as in the conventional pachinko machine. Compared with the case of extending away from the shaft core, the folded portion of the connection cable 503 guided by the connection cable guide member 502 is the hinge pin 122 on the door frame for opening and closing the door frame 3 and the door frame. The position close to the lower hinge pin 126 and the part where the connection cable 503 is folded back can be set to a position that does not easily get in the way.

  On the other hand, when the door frame 3 that is open with respect to the main body frame 4 is closed, the rear surface of the door frame 3 moves closer to the front surface of the main body frame 4, so that the connection cable guide member 502 and the connection cable 503 Moves in the opposite direction, and the connection cable 503 is held (guided) by the connection cable guide member 502, so that the door frame 3 is not sandwiched between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3. Can be closed. Accordingly, during maintenance such as opening and closing the door frame 3, the connection cable guide member 502 and the connection cable 503 do not interfere with the maintenance, the maintenance can be performed smoothly, and the maintenance is interrupted. An increase in the interruption time of the game being played can be reduced, and a decrease in the interest of the player in the game can be suppressed.

  Further, the connection cable 503 that extends from the front end of the connection cable guide member 502 toward the shaft core side and is folded back and extends away from the shaft core is positioned closer to the shaft core than the front end of the connection cable guide member 502. Since the cable holder 103a holds it on the door frame 3 side, the rotation angle of the connection cable guide member 502 with respect to the front surface of the main body frame 4 (cable mounting recess 501h) is a circle passing through the cable holder 103a about the axis. Since the tangent passing through the center of the attachment shaft 502c of the connection cable guide member 502 is equal to or less than the angle intersecting the rear surface of the door frame 3, the longitudinal axis of the connection cable guide member 502 is extended to the door frame 3 An angle close to a right angle with respect to the rear surface can be prevented. In addition, since the folded connection cable 503 is held by the cable holder 103a at a position closer to the axial center than the tip of the connection cable guide member 502 on the door frame 3 side, When 3 is closed, the distal end side of the connection cable guide member 502 can be pulled toward the shaft core side by the connection cable 503 held by the cable holder 103a.

  Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable guide member 502 can be rotated so as to return to the original state, and the door frame 3 cannot be closed, or the connection cable guide It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a problem that the leading end of the member 502 comes into contact with the door frame 3 and the connection cable 503 is disconnected. Therefore, when a problem occurs that requires maintenance by opening and closing the door frame 3 during the game, the connection cable guide member 502 and the connection cable 503 do not hinder the maintenance work, and maintenance is performed. This can be performed smoothly, and an increase in the game interruption time can be reduced to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

  Further, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 guided by the connection cable guide member 502 is folded back by 180 degrees, so that the connection cable 503 is folded at the folded portion. You can attach a heel. As a result, when the door frame 3 is opened and the portion of the connection cable 503 that is folded back 180 degrees is changed to open, a force to close the connection cable 503 due to folding is applied. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) from moving in the opening direction due to its folding, and to connect the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502). The door frame 3 can be guided in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be smoothly closed.

  Further, in the door frame 3 on the side opposite to the main body frame 4 to which the connection cable guide member 502 is attached, when the door frame 3 is closed, the position is closer to the axis than the tip of the connection cable guide member 502 (the axis is more than the cable holder 103a). (A position near the cable holder 103a in the speaker duct 103) that can be pressed to the main body frame 4 side to which the connection cable guide member 502 is attached by contacting the connection cable 503. A portion protruding rearward on the side). Accordingly, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the pressing portion abuts on the connection cable 503, thereby pressing the front end side of the connection cable guide member 502 opened via the connection cable 503 in the closing direction. Therefore, the connection cable guide member 502 can be smoothly closed with the movement of the door frame 3 in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be reliably closed. Further, a tangent line passing through the center of rotation of the connection cable guide member 502 and passing through the pressing portion about the central axis (axial center) of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126, and the front surface of the main body frame 4 The intersecting angle is configured to be 45 degrees or less. Accordingly, the maximum opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 that rotates (opens and closes) with the opening and closing of the door frame 3 can be set to 45 degrees or less. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed, the connection cable guide member 502 can be reliably rotated in the closing direction, and the same effects as described above can be achieved.

  Further, since the frame piece 502b is provided on each of the two long sides of the guide body 502a in the connection cable guide member 502, the rigidity of the flat guide body 502a is increased and it is difficult to bend. The connection cable 503 can be guided in the longitudinal direction by the pair of frame pieces 502b, and the pachinko machine 1 having the above-described operational effects can be reliably realized.

  Further, as described above, since the rigidity of the connection cable guide member 502 is enhanced, even when the connection cable 503 is a heavy connection cable 503 made of many electric wires, the connection cable guide member 502 is bent and distorted. Therefore, the connection cable guide member 502 can be reliably rotated around the mounting shaft 502c, the connection cable 503 can be guided in a good state, and more wires can be guided. Since it becomes possible, the electrical connection between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 can be concentrated in one place, and the structure concerning the pachinko machine 1 can be simplified.

  Further, the connection cable 503 is connected to the connection cable 503 through the binding bands 504 in the through holes 502d on both sides of the connection cable 503 in a state where the connection cable 503 is attached between the pair of frame pieces 502b in the guide body 502a of the connection cable guide member 502. Since the connection cable 503 can be held by the connection cable guide member 502 by winding the cable guide member 502 together with the binding band 504, the operation of holding the connection cable 503 by the connection cable guide member 502 is easily performed. be able to. Further, by holding the connection cable 503 by the binding band 504 that has passed through the through hole 502d of the connection cable guide member 502, the binding band 504 can be prevented from being detached from the guide member 502. The connection cable 503 can be securely held, and the connection cable 503 is sandwiched between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 when the door frame 3 is closed by detaching the connection cable 503 from the connection cable guide member 502. Can be avoided, and the above-described operational effects can be reliably achieved.

  Furthermore, the space on the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 of the speaker unit 620a attached to the main body frame 4 is below the outer frame constituting the lower side of the outer frame 2 via the connection portion 621c and the connection cylinder portion 43a. Since the assembly 40 communicates with the space between the port member 47 and the connecting cylinder portion 43a (curtain plate internal space 40a), the space in the speaker unit 620a and the space on the outer frame 2 side define the main body frame speaker. Since the volume of the enclosure 622 of 622 can be sufficiently secured, a heavy bass can be output from the main body frame speaker 622, and the player can be entertained by the sound of the heavy bass to suppress a decrease in interest in the game. Can do. Therefore, by providing the cable attachment recess 501h for attaching the connection cable guide member 502 to the main body frame 4, even if the volume in the speaker unit 620a is reduced, a heavy bass sound can be output from the main body frame speaker 622. Therefore, the main body frame 4 can be provided with a cable mounting recess 501h recessed rearward below the main body frame speaker 622, and the connection cable guide member 502 having the above-described effects can be attached to the main body frame 4 side. Further, since the connection cable guide member 502 that holds a part of the connection cable 503 is attached to the inside of the cable attachment recess 501 h that is recessed rearward in the main body frame 4, the door frame 3 is attached to the main body frame 4. When closed, the connection cable guide member 502 is accommodated in the cable mounting recess 501h, so that protrusion from the front surface of the main body frame 4 can be suppressed as much as possible, and interference with the rear surface of the door frame 3 is prevented. The door frame 3 can be reliably closed by avoiding it.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, when the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 are closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the main body frame in the main body frame 4 is passed through the door window 101 a of the door frame base 101 in the door frame 3. The game area 5a of the game board 5 held in the game board insertion slot 501b of the base 501 can be viewed from the front (player side), and below the door window 101a, the lower side of the outer frame 2 is formed. The front end of the port member 47 is opened near the right end in the longitudinal direction (left-right direction) on the front surface of the curtain plate front member 42 of the outer frame lower assembly 40, and the port member is formed at the lower portion of the front surface of the door frame 3. A speaker port 211b of the dish base unit 210 is opened in the vicinity of the left end opposite to 47 in the left-right direction. The speaker port 211b communicates with the front side of the main body frame speaker 622 attached below the game board insertion port 501b of the main body frame 4 and covers the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622. The internal space of (the speaker cover 621 and the speaker box 623) communicates with the inside of the port member 47 through the connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 and the connection cylinder portion 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43. In this state, when the main body frame speaker 622 attached to the speaker unit 620a is driven, sounds such as voice, music, and sound effects output from the main body frame speaker 622 to the front are the speaker attachment portions of the speaker cover 621. It is radiated to the player side through the speaker port 211b of the door frame 3 and 621a. On the other hand, the sound output rearward from the main body frame speaker 622 passes through the connecting portion 621c and the connecting cylinder portion 43a to the inside of the curtain plate inner space 40a constituted by the curtain plate front member 42 and the curtain plate rear member 43. And is radiated from the port member 47 to the player side ahead. At this time, the space behind the main body frame speaker 622 (enclosure 624) is constituted by the internal space of the speaker unit 620a and the curtain plate internal space 40a of the outer frame lower assembly 40. The volume can be increased as much as possible, and a sound with extension in the low frequency range can be output from the main body frame speaker 622 to the front. Further, since the connecting tube portion 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43 in the outer frame 2 is opened toward the center side (upward) in the frame, the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 (speaker unit 620a) are provided in the enclosure 624. ) In the depth direction (front-rear direction) at the connecting portion to the connecting portion), the width in the front-rear direction of the connecting tube portion 43a and the connecting portion 621c is increased, and the interior of the speaker unit 620a is increased. It is possible to reduce the attenuation of sound from the space toward the curtain plate internal space 40a side of the outer frame 2 as much as possible. Further, since the port member 47 has a cylindrical shape on the outer frame 2 side, Helmholtz resonance occurs in the port member 47, so that the low frequency range can be amplified and the phase can be reversed, 47 can output a sound obtained by amplifying bass. Then, the sound output forward from the body frame speaker 622 and the sound output forward from the port member 47 are combined by interfering with each other in front of the pachinko machine 1, thereby increasing the volume. It is possible to make the player hear a richer bass sound, and to make the player enjoy sounds such as voice, music, and sound effects and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, as described above, since the phase of the sound output backward from the main body frame speaker 622 is inverted in the port member 47 and radiated forward (forms a so-called bass reflex type speaker), the main body When the sound output forward from the frame speaker 622 and the sound output forward from the port member 47 overlap, the phase of each other is the same, so the amplitude of the sound wave increases and the sound volume increases. Compared with the case of using a passive radiator, the sound output can be increased with a simple configuration.

  Further, since the speaker unit 620a and the outer frame lower assembly 40 are disposed below the game board insertion port 501b in which the game board 5 is held, their vertical dimensions can be increased, and the main body frame speaker 622 can be increased. The volume of the enclosure 624 can be increased. More specifically, generally, when a player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1, the position (height) of the player's eyes is positioned above the center in the vertical direction of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, the center of the game area 5a where the game is performed is positioned above the center of the pachinko machine 1. From this, it is relatively easy to secure a space in the lower part of the pachinko machine 1, so that it is lower than the outer frame lower assembly 40 constituting the lower side of the outer frame 2 and the game board insertion port 501 b in the main body frame 4. Since the vertical dimension on the side can be made relatively large, the volume of the enclosure 624 of the body frame speaker 622 can be increased by increasing the vertical dimension of the outer frame lower assembly 40 and the speaker unit 620a. In addition to being able to output a richer sound of bass, it is possible to entertain the sound to the player and to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  Moreover, since the connection cylinder part 43a and the connection part 621c are inclined with respect to the front-rear direction, the connection part 621c abuts against the connection cylinder part 43a only by closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. It can be connected, and the same operational effects as described above can be obtained. Also, since sliding resistance does not occur between the connecting tube portion 43a and the connecting portion 621c, the opening / closing operation of the main body frame 4 is heavy. In addition, a decrease in workability during maintenance or the like can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, since the space between the connecting cylinder portion 43a and the connecting portion 621c is sealed by the sealing member 48, sound leakage in the enclosure 624 can be prevented between the connecting cylinder portion 43a and the connecting portion 621c. It can be set as the pachinko machine 1 which shows the effect mentioned above reliably.

  Further, since a part of the volume of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 can be secured in the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2, the speaker unit 620a can be made smaller, so that the game board is relatively The insertion slot 501b can be enlarged to provide a game board 5 with a wider game area 5a. The wide game area 5a can make the player more entertaining, and the game area 5a can be widened through the door window 101a of the door frame 3. The pachinko machine 1 can be made conspicuous so that the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal to the player can be obtained.

  Further, in the lower part of the pachinko machine 1, the port member 47 is arranged near the right end in the left-right direction, and the speaker mounting part 621a of the speaker unit 620a, that is, the main body frame speaker 622 is arranged near the left end on the opposite side. Therefore, since the body frame speaker 622 and the port member 47 are separated from each other in the left-right direction, the sound output forward from the body frame speaker 622 and the sound output forward from the port member 47 are 2 (pachinko machine 1) will interfere with each other at a position some distance forward, so that the sound can be amplified near the player sitting in front of pachinko machine 1, and as described above, On the other hand, you can hear a rich bass sound.

  Further, as described above, the sound output forward from the main body frame speaker 622 and the port member 47 is amplified by causing interference in the vicinity of the player. The player will receive an unamplified sound. As a result, when a sound that suggests the arrival of a chance is output, the player who is playing with this pachinko machine 1 will be able to hear a sound with a large volume and a rich low tone, thereby increasing the expectation of the game. Can be made. On the other hand, it is difficult for a player who is playing with another pachinko machine to hear that the sound from the pachinko machine 1 is heard, so that it is suggested that an opportunity or the like is suggested in the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to reduce the number of other players looking into the pachinko machine 1, and the peeping makes the player playing with the pachinko machine 1 uncomfortable and lowers interest. Can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the position of the connecting cylinder portion 43a of the outer frame 2 is the center in the longitudinal direction (left and right direction) of the outer frame lower assembly 40, the speaker unit 620a on the main body frame 4 side connected to the connecting cylinder portion 43a. Since the position of the connecting portion 621c is the center in the left-right direction, the length of the speaker unit 620a in the left-right direction can be from the vicinity of the left end where the speaker mounting portion 621a is formed to the center, 4, a space can be secured on the opposite side of the speaker unit 620a with the center in between. Therefore, in the main body frame 4, another member is arranged in a space secured on the opposite side of the speaker unit 620a with the center in the left-right direction therebetween, or the other member is enlarged so as to spread in the space. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can be differentiated from other pachinko machines by other members, and the player's interest is strongly attracted.

  Further, as described above, since a space can be secured on the opposite side of the speaker unit 620a with the lower side of the lower side of the outer frame 2 in the middle, the game ball B is discharged to that space. And a ball launcher 540 for driving the game ball B into the game area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4. A power supply board 630 for controlling the power supply in the pachinko machine 1, a payout control board 633 for controlling the payout of game media balls, and the like can be arranged, and the pachinko machine 1 provided with them can be obtained. .

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the central pressing operation portion 303a that protrudes upward from the upper surface to the dish unit 200 that bulges forward in front and below the game area 5a of the game board 5 where the game is performed. And an annular outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b having a diameter larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201 and an annular rotation operation portion surrounding the outer periphery of the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b. 302 is arranged in such a manner that the front end side of the upper surface is inclined so that the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 is the head of the player who is seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. The (face) faces in a certain direction, and the central press operation unit 303a, the outer periphery press operation unit 303b, and the rotation operation unit 302 are made concentrically arranged so as to be easily visible. Large operation sections (press operation section 303 and rotation operation section 302) can be shown to the player, can have a strong impact on the player, and the operation section provided in the conventional pachinko machine, Can be recognized at a glance that there are clearly different types of operation units, and this pachinko machine 1 can be differentiated from other pachinko machines and attract the player's attention strongly. it can. In addition, since the center pressing operation unit 303a, the outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b, and the rotation operation unit 302 are conspicuous, a game for operating the center pressing operation unit 303a, the outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b, and the rotation operation unit 302 with respect to the player. The expectation for the player participation type effect can be increased, and the game is advanced so that the game state in which the player participation type effect is executed (in this case, a large number of game balls B are driven into the game area 5a). In addition, the player participation type effect can be made easier to participate when the player participation type effect is executed, and the player participation type effect can be enjoyed to prevent a decrease in interest.

  Further, the central pressing operation unit 303a and the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b are slightly protruded from the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302 by the lifting mechanism including the operation button lifting drive motor 367 according to the game state (lowering position). ) And a protruding position (upward position) protruding upward from the retracted position, and the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b is pressed by the engaging portion 371c of the elevating cam member 371 at the retracted position. Since the center pressing operation portion 303a and the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b are in the retracted position, the player can clearly recognize that the pressing operation of the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b is not accepted. Therefore, the central pressing operation portion 303a can be surely pressed, and the player participation type production can be enjoyed and the interest can be reduced. It is possible to control.

  Furthermore, in the state of the retreat position, the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b is in a state incapable of pressing, and therefore there is an outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b that does not move between the central pressing operation portion 303a and the rotation operation portion 302. For this reason, an erroneous operation such as pressing the central pressing operation unit 303a to the moment when the rotation operating unit 302 is rotated, or rotating the rotation operation unit 302 to the moment when the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed. Can be made less likely to occur, and the player participation type production can be surely enjoyed and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  And by moving to a protrusion position, since the center press operation part 303a and the outer periphery press operation part 303b will protrude largely upwards on the upper surface of the plate unit 200, the center press operation part 303a and the outer periphery press operation part 303b can be conspicuous, it can give a strong impact to the player, and it can give a premium feeling to the pressing operation of the central pressing operation part 303a and the outer periphery pressing operation part 303b. It can make you think that it is, and can raise the expectation for the game. Therefore, it is possible to easily participate in the player participation type effect in which the outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b and the center pressing operation unit 303a are pressed, and it is possible to entertain the player participation type effect and suppress a decrease in interest.

  In this projecting position, the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b can be newly pressed, and the central pressing operation portion 303a, the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b, and the rotation operation portion 302 are arranged concentrically. When the central pressing operation portion 303a has to be pressed, the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b is pressed, or both the central pressing operation portion 303a and the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b are pressed, or When the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b has to be pressed, the center pressing operation portion 303a is pressed, or both the center pressing operation portion 303a and the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b are pressed or rotated. When the operation unit 302 is rotated or the rotation operation unit 302 has to be rotated, the outer periphery pressing operation is performed. Or accidentally pushes the section 303b, and an outer peripheral pressing portion 303b and the central pressing portion 303a can be induced to or accidentally pressed. Accordingly, when the player performs a pressing operation or a rotation operation, the player can perform the pressing operation or the rotation operation while paying attention to the pressing operation unit 303 to be pressed or the rotation operation unit 302 to be rotated. It is possible to give a sense of tension to the pressing operation and the rotation operation, to make the player hard to get tired, and to entertain the player participation type effect that performs the pressing operation and the rotation operation. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game of a person.

  In addition, notification means such as a vibration speaker 354 and an effect display device 1600 are provided, and in the player participation type effect, the player can perform a center pressing operation in a protruding position where the pressing operation of the outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b is possible. If only the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b is pressed by mistake when the portion 303a is to be pressed, the notification means notifies that the central pressing operation portion 303a is pressed, and the pressing operation is performed again. The center pressing operation portion 303a should be surely pressed, and the player can be entertained with the player participation type effect, and the mistake of the pressing operation is corrected. It is possible to avoid feeling and to entertain a player participation type production and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, when the player thinks that the player correctly performs the pressing operation of the central pressing operation unit 303a, the response (change) of the player participation type effect despite the pressing operation of the central pressing operation unit 303a. However, if the center pressing operation portion 303a is out of order, the player may have an illusion that the interest may be reduced. On the other hand, as described above, since the notification means notifies the mistake of the pressing operation, it is possible to correct the player's belief and correctly press the central pressing operation portion 303a to join the player. You can entertain the type production.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 for storing the game balls B for bulging forward and in front of the game area 5a of the game board 5 where the game is performed are stored. An annular rotation operation unit 302 that is rotatable about an axis with the outer peripheral side surface, the upper surface, and the inner peripheral side surface exposed to the outside and extending vertically. A pressing operation unit 303 including a central pressing operation unit 303a and an outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b is arranged, and the rotation operation unit 302 is changed according to a gaming state that is changed by playing a game in the gaming area 5a. A player participation type effect of rotating operation or pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303 is executed by the peripheral control board 1510. When the player participation type effect is executed, the player rotates the rotation operation unit 302 in an appropriate direction or presses the pressing operation unit 303 according to the rotation operation or the pressing operation. Since the effect changes, the player can participate in the effect, and the player can be entertained and the decrease in interest can be suppressed. When the rotary operation unit 302 is rotated, the player touches any one of the outer peripheral side surface, the upper surface, and the inner peripheral side surface that are exposed to the outside. Since the rotation operation can be performed by touching a distant position, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated with a relatively small force, and the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be easily performed. Further, when rotating by touching the outer peripheral side surface of the rotation operation unit 302, the rotation operation unit 302 can be easily rotated at a high speed by operating the outer peripheral side surface in one direction by the player's hand. it can. Therefore, even when a player participation type effect that requires high-speed rotation to the rotation operation unit 302 is executed, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated at a high speed as described above. However, it is possible to entertain the production, and to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

  Further, since the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated with a relatively small (light) force, even if the rotation operation unit 302 is frequently rotated, it is possible to make the player difficult to get tired early and to rotate the rotation operation unit 302. The player participatory effect of rotating the operation unit 302 can be continuously enjoyed, and a decrease in the interest of the player with respect to the game can be suppressed. In addition, as described above, since the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated quickly or with a light force, in the player participation type effect, various rotation operations are requested from the player, It is possible to request different rotation operations in each, and it is possible to present more diverse and diverse player-participation-type effects to the player, making it difficult for the player to get bored and suppressing a decrease in interest Can do.

  Further, the outer peripheral side surface of an operation cover (configured by a ring outer upper cover 335, a ring outer lower cover 336, and a ring inner cover 337) that is touched and rotated by the player is rotatably attached to the dish unit 200. Since it protrudes in an arc shape outward (in the direction opposite to the center of rotation) from the rotating base 332, the dish unit 200 does not get in the way even if it is rotated so as to rub the outer peripheral side surface. Since the rotation operation unit 302 can be easily rotated and the outer peripheral side surface of the rotation operation unit 302 is rounded, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated from a direction other than the side of the rotation operation unit 302 (perpendicular to the rotation axis). Since it becomes easy to touch the outer peripheral side surface, the player can operate the rotary operation unit 302 without worrying about the position and orientation of the outer peripheral side surface of the rotary operation unit 302. It can be, it is possible to enhance the operability of the rotation operating part 302. Accordingly, since the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated while rubbing the outer peripheral side surface of the rotation operation unit 302 (operation cover), the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated at a higher speed in the player participation type effect. , It is possible to entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, since the diameter of the rotation operation unit 302 is increased, it is easier to perform the rotation operation at a minute rotation angle than the rotation operation unit with a small diameter like a conventional pachinko machine, Since the player's movement at the time of the game can be increased, the player can more feel that the rotary operation unit 302 is being rotated. In the player participation type effect, the rotation operation unit can be realized. It is possible to entertain the rotation operation 302 and suppress the decrease in interest.

  Further, since the rotation operation unit 302 is formed in an annular shape, and the outer peripheral side surface, the upper surface, and the inner peripheral side surface are exposed to the outside, when the player rotates the rotation operation unit 302, Can be rotated by touching a part according to the player's preference or situation such as the inner peripheral side, and the like, and thus the operability of the rotation operation unit 302 can be further improved, and the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated. It is possible to more entertain the participatory production and to suppress the decline of interest.

  Further, the outer peripheral side surface, the upper surface, and the inner peripheral side surface of the rotation operation unit 302 are exposed to the outside so that the player can perform the rotation operation. Therefore, even if the pressing operation unit 303 is provided in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302, The operation unit 303 does not hinder the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302, the rotation operation unit 302 can be comfortably rotated, and both the rotation operation and the pressing operation can be sufficiently enjoyed to suppress a decrease in interest. Can be made.

  Further, the outer peripheral side surface, the upper surface, and the inner peripheral side surface of the rotation operation unit 302 are exposed to the outside so that the player can perform the rotation operation, and the rotation operation unit 302 cannot be gripped by the player. The appearance of the section 302 can be made completely different from that of an automobile steering wheel, airplane control stick, or the like. Thereby, for example, when the rotation operation unit is configured like a steering wheel of an automobile, at the moment when the player sees the rotation operation unit, it is assumed that the player operates the rotation operation unit. The player can only perform operations such as handle handling, so when a player-participation-type production that requires a variety of rotation operations is performed, the player cannot perform a rotation operation different from the handle-type production. There is a risk that it will not be enjoyable and the interest in games will be reduced. However, in this embodiment, the external appearance of the rotation operation unit 302 is completely different from that of the steering wheel of an automobile, an airplane control stick, etc. It is possible to wipe off, the rotation operation unit 302 can be operated as the player desires, the player participation type effect can be enjoyed, and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Even when the pressing operation unit 303 is moved to the protruding position, the outer peripheral side surface and the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302 are exposed to the outside, so that the outer peripheral side surface and the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302 are rotated. Thus, the protruding pressing operation unit 303 does not get in the way, and the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated comfortably, and the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be enjoyed to suppress a decrease in interest. it can.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 that store the game balls B for bulging forward in the front and below the game area 5a where the game is played on the game board 5 are stored. The rotary unit 302 has an annular rotary operation unit whose vertical axis extends vertically, and a central pressing unit 303a and an outer peripheral pressing unit 303b in the ring of the rotary unit 302. When the player rotates the rotation operation unit 302, the rotation operation unit 302 is orthogonal to the rotation axis of the rotation operation unit 302 via the ring gear 332a of the rotation base 332 of the rotation operation unit 302. The transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotation drive unit 340 rotates around the axis, and the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 of the transmission detection gear member 345 are rotated. For detecting the rotation by detecting a known piece 345b, it is possible to detect a rotating operation of the rotary operation unit 302 via the transmission detection gear member 345. Therefore, unlike the conventional rotation operation unit, it is not necessary to provide a detection piece for detecting the rotation on the entire lower side. In addition, since the rotation of the rotation operation unit 302 is transmitted to the transmission detection gear member 345 via the ring gear 332a, a portion for transmitting the rotation from the ring gear 332a to the transmission detection gear member 345 (operation ring transmission gear 350). Part of the entire circumference of the rotary operation unit 302 is sufficient. Therefore, a space can be easily secured below the rotation operation unit 302, and a sufficient number of LEDs are arranged in a ring shape at a height between the rotation operation unit 302 and the transmission detection gear member 345. An operation ring decorative substrate 352 can be disposed. Then, in accordance with the gaming state that changes as a game is played in the gaming area 5a and the rotation detection of the rotation operation unit 302 by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, the effect operation ring decorative board By appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs 352, the entire ring outer upper cover 335, ring outer lower cover 336, and ring inner cover 337 constituting the rotation operation unit 302 are sufficiently (uniformly) illuminated. It is possible to make the rotation operation unit 302 stand out and attract the player's attention strongly.

  In addition, since the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 can detect the rotation direction and rotation speed of the rotation operation unit 302 via the transmission detection gear member 345, the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302 A plurality of LEDs arranged in a ring shape on the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 can be caused to emit light (turn on / off) sequentially at the same speed in the same direction. As a result, the rotation operation unit 302 rotates in a state in which specific portions of the ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 are illuminated and decorated, It is possible to make an illusion that the LED is provided inside the rotation operation unit 302, and the rotation (rotation operation) of the rotation operation unit 302 can be enjoyed to prevent a decrease in interest. Alternatively, when a player participation type effect requesting a rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 is executed according to the game state, a plurality of LEDs arranged in a ring shape on the effect operation ring decorative board 352 are rotated. By sequentially emitting light in the direction to be operated, it is possible to prompt the player to perform a rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302, and it is possible to entertain the player-participation type effect and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 detect the rotation direction and the rotation speed (rpm) of the rotation operation unit 302, and are arranged in a ring shape on the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352. The plurality of LEDs can be turned on in order so that the rotation speed is the same as that of the rotation operation unit 302. As a result, the player rotates with the rotation operation unit 302 in a state where a certain part of the rotation operation unit 302 emits light even though the player rotates the rotation operation unit 302. It is possible to give a strong impact to the player, to give a premium feeling by the rotation of the rotary operation unit 302 and the light emitting decoration, and there may be something good for the player. It is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game, and to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

  Further, since the plurality of LEDs arranged in a ring shape on the production operation ring decoration board 352 can be caused to emit light sequentially so that the player can show the light-emitting decoration in which the light rotates in the rotation operation unit 302. On the other hand, it is possible to immediately recognize that the circular rotation operation unit 302 is for the rotation operation, and to facilitate the player to participate in the effect when the player participation type effect is executed. It is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the execution of the player participation type effect, and to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player.

  Further, the transmission detection gear member 345 is attached so as to be rotatable around an axis orthogonal to the rotation axis of the rotation operation unit 302, and is rotated when viewed from the direction perpendicular to the rotation surface of the rotation operation unit 302. The transmission detection gear member 345 is disposed at a position as close as possible to the projection range of the unit 302, and the configuration relating to the rotation operation unit 302 (the effect operation unit 300 or the rotation drive unit 340) in the dish unit 200. Therefore, the diameter of the rotation operation unit 302 can be relatively increased, and the rotation operation unit 302 can be conspicuous to attract the player's attention.

  Furthermore, an operation ring drive motor 342 that rotates the rotation operation unit 302 via the transmission detection gear member 345 according to the gaming state is provided, and as described above, the rotation that can be decorated with the effect operation ring decoration board 352. Since the operation unit 302 can be rotated by the operation ring drive motor 342 in addition to the player's rotation operation, the rotation operation unit 302 on the upper surface of the dish unit 200 is rotated and light-emitting according to the gaming state. By decorating, the rotation operation unit 302 can be conspicuous below and in front of the game area 5a, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the rotation operation unit 302.

  Further, since the rotation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected by the transmission detection gear member 345, the first rotation detection sensor 347, and the second rotation detection sensor 348, the rotation is performed when the player rotates the rotation operation unit 302. By rotating the rotation operation unit 302 by the operation ring drive motor 342 in the same direction as the operation unit 302, the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be assisted, and the operational feeling of the rotation operation unit 302 can be reduced. . Alternatively, by rotating the rotation operation unit 302 by the operation ring drive motor 342 in the direction opposite to the rotation operation by the player, a load can be applied to the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302, and the operation feeling of the rotation operation unit 302 can be applied. Can be heavy. Furthermore, in response to the rotation operation by the player, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated by applying a rotational force to the rotation operation unit 302 in a direction in which the rotation is stopped by the operation ring drive motor 342 at every predetermined rotation angle. A feeling of clicking can be given. Further, the rotation operation unit 302 can be vibrated by rotating the rotation operation unit 302 back and forth within a predetermined angle range by the operation ring drive motor 342. As described above, since the operation ring drive motor 342 can give various operational feelings to the rotation operation unit 302, it is possible to deal with a wider variety of player participation type effects. It is possible to make it difficult for a player to get bored, and to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

  Furthermore, since the production operation ring decoration board 352 is provided, when giving the operational feeling of the rotation operation unit 302 by the operation ring drive motor 342, the plurality of LEDs of the production operation ring decoration board 352 are the same as the rotation operation. By sequentially emitting light in the direction or sequentially emitting light in the direction opposite to the rotation operation, the operational feeling can be supported by light, so that the player can enjoy the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in games.

  In addition, since the diameter of the rotation operation unit 302 is larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201, a space below the rotation operation unit 302 is easily secured, and a larger number of LEDs are mounted. Since the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 can be arranged, the rotation operation unit 302 can be illuminated more uniformly and brightly, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted.

  Further, the rotation operation unit 302, the outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b, and the center pressing operation unit 303a are each decorated with light emission in a favorable state by the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352, the outer periphery button decoration substrate 377, and the central button decoration substrate 376. Therefore, by making them emit light appropriately, only the rotation operation unit 302 is decorated with light emission, only the pressing operation unit 303 is decorated with light emission, only the central pressing operation unit 303a is decorated with light emission, and the outer periphery pressing operation is performed. Only the portion 303b can be illuminated and decorated, making it easy for the player to recognize the operation portion that the player wants to operate and entertaining the player participation type effect.

  In addition, since a plurality of LEDs are arranged in an annular shape on the outer peripheral button decoration board 377, it is possible to perform a light-emitting effect that turns light by sequentially emitting light. It is possible to perform an effect in which an effect by the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 and an effect by the outer periphery button decoration substrate 377 in the outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b are associated with each other. Specifically, for example, when the player is prompted to rotate the rotation operation unit 302, both the LED of the effect operation ring decoration board 352 and the LED of the outer peripheral button decoration board 377 are caused to emit light sequentially. , Decorative decoration in which light is rotated in two rows. Alternatively, when the player is rotating the rotation operation unit 302, the LED (outer periphery pressing operation unit 303 b) of the outer peripheral button decoration board 377 rotates the light in accordance with the rotation of the rotation operation unit 302. On the other hand, when it is desired to urge the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302 in the reverse direction, the LED of the outer peripheral button decoration board 377 performs light emission decoration that rotates light in the reverse direction. Thus, since the player can show various effects by light emission, the player can be entertained, and a decrease in interest in the game can be suppressed.

  Further, a production operation ring decoration board 352, a peripheral button decoration board 377, and a central button decoration board 376 for illuminating and decorating the rotation operation section 302, the outer periphery pressing operation section 303b, and the center pressing operation section 303a arranged concentrically are provided. Therefore, for example, the rotation operation unit 302 is made by causing each LED to emit light in the order of the production operation ring decoration board 352, the outer peripheral button decoration board 377, and the center button decoration board 376, or in the reverse order. Can produce an effect of light that concentrates on the central pressing operation unit 303a from the center, and an effect of light that diffuses from the central pressing operation unit 303a to the rotation operation unit 302. This makes it possible to show the player a variety of light-emitting decorations, entertain the player, and direct the player's interest to the central pressing operation unit 303a or to the rotation operation unit 302. It is possible to enter the player participation type effect by prompting the operation of the central pressing operation unit 303a and the rotation operation unit 302.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game board 5 having a game area 5a in which a game is performed is detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front, and the front surface of the main body frame 4 can be opened and closed. On the door frame base 101 of the door frame 3 that is closed, a door window 101a that allows the game area 5a to be viewed from the front is formed, and a glass unit 160 that is provided with a transparent flat glass plate 162 is connected to the door window 101a. Are attached to the door frame 3 (the door frame base 101) so as to close the upper frame 201 and the lower plate 202 for storing the game balls B for playing games below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101. The provided dish unit 200 is attached.

  Then, on the upper surface of the dish unit 200, an annular and donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 having a diameter larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201, and a cylindrical shape coaxially arranged in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302 A pressing operation unit 303 including an outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303 b and a columnar central pressing operation unit 303 a is attached, and a semicircular arc donut shape similar to the rotation operation unit 302 is provided below the rotation operation unit 302. The two upper central dish 312a and lower middle dish 312b are attached to be separated from each other vertically and are continuous with both ends of the upper middle dish 312a and the lower middle dish 312b. The door frame left side decorative body 404 of the door frame left side unit 400 having the same shape, the door frame right side decorative body 419 of the door frame right side unit 410, and the door frame door Door frame top decorative body 453 of Puyunitto 450 is attached to the outside of Tobiramado 101a of the door frame base 101 so as to surround the outer periphery of the gaming region 5a.

  Therefore, in the dish unit 200, the rotation operation unit 302, the two dish center upper decoration bodies 312a, and the dish center lower decoration body 312b have three donut-shaped members arranged in the vertical direction, and the rotation operation section 302, the outer peripheral press Since the operation unit 303b and the central pressing operation unit 303a are arranged concentrically, the impact of appearance can be increased, the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be made conspicuous, and the player can operate them. The rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be shown large, and the player's interest is strongly attracted to the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 in the effect operation unit 300 on the upper surface of the dish unit 200. The decrease can be suppressed.

  Further, the rotation operation unit 302, the dish center upper decoration body 312a, and the dish center lower decoration body 312b have a donut shape in which a similar columnar shape (tube) is formed in an annular shape, and are provided below the rotation operation unit 302. A semi-cylindrical door frame left side decorative body 404, a door frame right side decorative body 419, and a door frame top decorative body 453 surround the outer periphery of the game area 5a so as to be continuous with the upper central decorative body 312a. Therefore, it is possible to show the player a decoration that surrounds the outer periphery of the game area 5a with a cylindrical tube, and to give a sense of unity to the decoration on the front surface of the pachinko machine 1. The appearance can be improved and the player's interest is directed to the inside (the game area 5a and the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303) surrounded by the cylindrical tube. Determined force can be enhanced, it is possible to easily this pachinko machine 1 is selected let increase the expectation as a pachinko machine for a game on the game in the pachinko machine 1.

  Further, a donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 is attached to the upper surface of the dish unit 200 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending forward as it goes upward. Since it is inclined so as to be lowered, the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 faces the head (face) of the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, and the player rotates from the player. The entire operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be easily seen, and the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be shown larger. Further, as described above, since the entire contents of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 are easily understood, the player can easily recognize that the rotation operation unit 302 has a donut shape. Therefore, the player can immediately recognize that the donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 is rotating, so that when the player participation type effect is executed, the player rotates immediately. The operation unit 302 can be rotated, and the player's participation type effect can be enjoyed by the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Further, the diameter of the rotation operation unit 302 is made larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201, and the diameters of the plate center upper decoration body 312 a and the plate center lower decoration body 312 b are made larger than those of the rotation operation unit 302. In the dish unit 200 of the pachinko machine 1, the front end side of the rotation operation unit 302, the dish center upper decorative body 312a, and the dish center lower decorative body 312b protrudes more forward than the upper dish 201, and Since the decoration body 312a and the dish center lower decoration body 312b are in a state of decorating the outer periphery of the rotation operation section 302, the rotation operation section 302, the dish center upper decoration body 312a, and the dish center lower decoration body 312b are made conspicuous. At the same time, it is possible to improve the appearance around the rotary operation unit 302 by the dish center upper decorative body 312a and the dish center lower decorative body 312b. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the pachinko machine 1 is different from other pachinko machines at first glance, attract the player's interest strongly, and appeal to the player. The pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as a pachinko machine to be played.

  Furthermore, since the rotation operation unit 302 has a donut shape in which the columnar shape is an annular shape, the rotation operation unit 302 has an upper surface, an outer side surface, an inner side surface, and the like compared to a flat disk shape. Since it becomes easy to apply fingers, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated as the player likes. Further, since the dish center upper decorative body 312 a and the dish center lower decorative body 312 b are formed larger than the rotation operation unit 302, the dish center upper decoration body 312 a and the dish center lower decoration body 312 b are larger than the rotation operation unit 302. Since it protrudes outward, it is possible to place an arm or put a finger on the dish center upper decorative body 312a and the dish center lower decorative body 312b, and the player operates the rotary operation unit 302 in an easy posture. And the presence of the dish center upper decorative body 312a and the dish center lower decorative body 312b projecting forward from the rotation operation unit 302 can prevent the player from coming too close to the rotation operation unit 302. Thus, it is possible to easily secure a space for the player to operate the arm and fingers to move around the rotation operation unit 302, and to improve the operability of the rotation operation unit 302. Can. As described above, since the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 is easy to perform, the player can be made to think about the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 when the player participation type effect is executed. You can entertain the participatory production and suppress the decline of interest.

  In addition, the pressing operation unit 303 including the outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b and the central pressing operation unit 303a inside the rotation operation unit 302 can be moved between a retracted position (downward position) and a protruding position (upward position). Therefore, when the pressing operation unit 303 is moved to the raised position, the pressing operation unit 303 protrudes greatly upward from the rotation operation unit 302, so that the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be shown larger. It is possible to give a strong impact to the player, attract the player's interest strongly, and increase the expectation for the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 to suppress the decrease in interest. Can be made.

  Further, when the pressing operation unit 303 is in the lowered position, the donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 is relatively more conspicuous than the pressing operation unit 303, so that the player's interest is directed to the rotation operation unit 302. On the other hand, when the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position, the protruding pressing operation unit 303 is more conspicuous than the rotation operation unit 302, so that the player's interest can be directed to the pressing operation unit 303. Therefore, according to the content of the player participation type effect to be executed, the player is prompted to perform the effect operation unit 301 that the player wants to operate by moving the pressing operation unit 303 between the lowered position and the raised position. It is possible to entertain the player-participation type effect by accurately operating the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 with respect to the player.

  Further, when the pressing operation unit 303 inside the rotation operation unit 302 is set to the lowered position, the rotation operation unit 302, the outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b, and the center pressing operation unit 303a have the same height as each other. When the pressing operation unit 303 is moved from the lowered position to the raised position, the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b and the central pressing operation unit 303a protrude upward from the rotation operating unit 302. In addition, the rotation operation unit 302, the outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b, and the center pressing operation unit 303a can be operated. Therefore, according to the content of the player participation type production, the production operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player can be properly used, so that various productions can be handled, and the player can enjoy various operations. It is possible to prevent the player from getting bored and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, the production operation ring decoration board 352, the dish center upper decoration board 314, the dish center lower decoration board 316, the door frame left side decoration board 402 of the door frame left side unit 400, and the door frame right side decoration of the door frame right side unit 410. Since the substrate 418, the door frame top center decorative substrate 455 of the door frame top unit 450, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 are provided, the rotation operation unit 302 and the dish center upper decorative body 312a are provided. Further, the pachinko machine 1 as a whole is improved in appearance by lighting the lower center decorative body 312b, the door frame left side decorative body 404, the door frame right side decorative body 419, and the door frame top decorative body 453. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal can be obtained by attracting the player's interest strongly. Further, the rotation operation unit 302, the dish center upper decorative body 312a and the dish center lower decorative body 312b, the door frame left side decorative body 404, the door frame right side decorative body 419, and the door frame top decorative body 453 are appropriately light-emitting. By decorating, it is possible to guide the player's line of sight from within the game area 5a to the production operation unit 301 (rotation operation unit 302), or from the production operation unit 301 into the game area 5a. It is possible to cause the player to operate the production operation unit 301 or to play a game in the game area 5a according to the state, and to prevent the player from getting bored and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 1 has been described with a preferable form, but the pachinko machine 1 can be variously improved and changed in design.

  That is, in the above embodiment, the game machine applied to the pachinko machine 1 is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and is applied to a pachislot machine or a game machine that is a fusion of a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine. Even in this case, the same effects as described above can be obtained.

  Further, in the above embodiment, even when the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b (outer peripheral button cover 380) is pressed to the descending end with the pressing operation unit 303 moved to the raised position, the pressing of the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b is detected. Although what is not shown was shown, it is not limited to this, You may enable it to detect the press of the outer periphery press operation part 303b. Thereby, even if the same pressing operation is performed, the central pressing operation unit 303a and the outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b are changed to different effects, or when the outer pressing operation unit 303b is pressed, the central pressing operation unit 303a is prompted to perform the pressing operation. It is possible to perform a variety of player-participation-type effects, entertain the player, and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, in the above-described form, when the pressing operation unit 303 (the center pressing operation unit 303a and the outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b) is moved to the raised position, pressing the pressing operation unit 303 moves to the lowered position. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and if the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed in the state of the raised position, the downward movement may be restricted after moving slightly downward from the raised position.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the upper surface of the dish unit 200 bulging forward is shown with the rotation operation unit 302. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the rotation operation unit is arranged inside the dish unit. In addition, the outer peripheral side surface of the rotation operation unit may be exposed to the outside on the front surface of the dish unit. This also makes it possible for the player to enjoy the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit in the same manner as described above, and to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the speaker unit 620a communicated with the curtain plate internal space 40a (port member 47) via the connecting cylinder portion 43a is shown in the main body frame 4. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, the door frame 3 (dish unit 200) may be provided with a speaker unit whose inside communicates with the port member 47, and the same effects as described above can be achieved.

The pachinko machine described so far includes the following technical ideas.
“A game board in which a game area in which a launched game ball can flow down is formed, and the game area includes a first game area in which a game ball fired with a predetermined launch force can flow down; In a gaming machine having a second game area in which a game ball launched with a specific firing force stronger than the firing force can flow down,
A communication passage portion through which a game ball fired with the specific launch force can pass prior to entering the second game area;
The communication passage part is provided with a plurality of discharge parts for discharging the passed game balls to the second game area so that the places where the passed game balls enter the second game area are different. A branch part is provided to separate the passages so that a plurality of spherical passages are formed in the vertical direction upstream of the plurality of discharge parts,
A first sphere passage of the plurality of sphere passages formed by the branch portion communicates with a first discharge portion of the plurality of discharge portions, and the plurality of sphere passages formed by the branch portion. The second ball passage is a gaming machine configured to communicate with a second discharge portion among the plurality of discharge portions. "

  Such a gaming machine is provided with a plurality of ball passages of the communication passage portion and a plurality of discharge portions communicating with each of the ball passages, and the entry point to the second game area differs depending on which ball passage is passed. The drop mode in the two game areas is different. If the fall mode in the second game area is different, the probability of entering the ball will also differ, so the player will be careful to handle the ball, and as a result of capturing the target ball path, If a game ball can be acquired, a sufficient sense of accomplishment and satisfaction can be obtained. Therefore, since the consciousness concentrates on launching a game ball toward the second game area, the interest of the game increases.

In the above gaming machine, a part of the game ball flowing through the first ball passage is provided with a drop opening connecting the first ball passage and the second ball passage in a part of the branch portion of the communication passage portion. It may fall so that it can fall to the specific location of the 2nd game field from the 2nd discharge part.
In order to aim at the 1st discharge | release part connected to a 1st bulb | ball path by carrying out like this, since it is necessary to satisfy | fill both a launch direction and launch force, it comes to handle operation by concentrating consciousness more carefully.

[Other forms of pachinko machine 1]
Next, a pachinko machine 1 according to another embodiment 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. Since the pachinko machine 1 according to the other embodiment 1 is obtained by changing the game board 5 and the handle unit 180 mainly of the pachinko machine 1, description thereof will be omitted except for those related in principle. Therefore, in FIGS. 103 to 128 and FIGS. 1 to 102, the components given the same reference numerals are the same or the same function components in principle.

[Game board]
As shown in the exploded perspective view of FIG. 115, the gaming board 5 according to the other embodiment 1 includes a gaming panel 1100 having a gaming area 5a on the front surface, a center member 2500 attached to the gaming panel 1100, and the gaming panel 1100. And a production unit 814 attached to the rear side.

[Game panel]
As shown in the exploded perspective view of FIG. 115, the gaming panel 1100 includes a base panel 1110 made of an opaque plywood board, a back decoration member 817 for applying a decoration 816 for the background, a game area 5a, and a center member 2500. And a front structural member 1000 that surrounds.

[Base Panel]
The base panel 1110 is formed of a plywood as described above, and a synthetic resin cell serving as a first decorative surface 819 is attached to the entire front surface of the base panel 1110, and the first decorative surface 819 is used for background. The decoration 820a (the random arrangement of the boy's face in this other embodiment 1) is printed. In addition, a large through hole 1112 for attaching the center member 2500 is provided at a substantially central position on the upper side of the base panel 1110.

[Back decoration member]
As shown in the perspective view of FIG. 117, the exploded perspective view of FIG. 118, and the cross-sectional views of FIGS. 111 and 112, the back side decoration member 817 for applying the background decoration 816 is an effect of the effect unit 814 described later. It is disposed on the back surface of the base panel 1110 via the support frame 852 (specifically, since it is screwed to the front surface of the production support frame 852, it is integrated with the production support frame 852). A background decoration 816 (for example, a decoration 820a of the first decoration surface 819 and a decoration 820a of the first decoration surface 819) having the sameness as the decoration 820a of the first decoration surface 819 on the front surface (including not only the appearance uniformity but also the conceptional uniformity). And a second decorative surface 822 is formed. The second decorative surface 822 is provided with a perspective three-dimensional effect on the decoration 816 itself by disposing several blocks of plate pieces 822p at different positions.
The back side decoration member 817 has an upper decoration member 817a, a lower decoration member 817b, a right decoration member 817c, and a left decoration member so as to correspond to the four directions of the upper, lower, left and right sides of the through hole 1112 for attaching the center member 2500 of the base panel 1110. 817d, of which the second decorative surface 822 of the upper decorative member 817a, the lower decorative member 817b, and the right decorative member 817c is disposed so as to face the hole of the through hole 1112, while the left decorative member 817d The second decorative surface 822 is disposed so as to face the back surface of the base panel 1110 as shown in FIG. In addition, since the second decorative surface 822 of the left decorative member 817d is arranged to face the back surface of the opaque base panel 1110 in this way, it does not enter the player's view in the normal state, but is shown in FIG. In this way, a part can be recognized when viewed from an oblique direction. Therefore, since the player can be given a feeling that the background decoration 816 extends beyond the base panel 1110, the stereoscopic effect can be further enhanced.

In the game area 5a surrounded by the front component member 1000 of the base panel 1110, as described above, the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the gate portion 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the big winning opening 2005, not shown. Windmills, obstacle nails, and the like that change the fall of the game ball are appropriately provided according to the game contents, and an out ball opening 1008 for collecting the out ball is provided at the lowest position.
Note that most of these members are formed of a transparent synthetic resin, so that the background decoration 820a of the first decorative surface 819 is hardly hidden.

[Pre-component]
As shown in FIG. 116, the front component member 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 that defines an outer side above the gaming area 5a and the center member 2500, and an inner side that defines the side and lower sides of the gaming area 5a and the center member 2500. The game ball launched from the launch rail 544 passes through the launch passage portion 1012 between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002, and is placed on the upper portion of the game area 5a or the center member 2500. Guided.
The front component member 1000 is entirely formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and the surface thereof can be seen through when the front component member 1000 is installed on the base panel 1110. On the other hand, as described above, the base panel 1110 of the other embodiment 1 has the background decoration 820a over the entire front surface, and thus the front component 1000 is hardly noticeable in a state of being camouflaged with the background decoration 820a. It looks as if the entire front surface of the base panel 1110 is a large game area 5a. Therefore, as compared with a conventional pachinko machine surrounded by an opaque front component, a visual effect as if the entire game panel 1100 has been expanded to the game area 5a is obtained.
In the other embodiment 1, the background decoration 820a inside and outside the game area 5a is unified in design (including not only the appearance uniformity but also the conceptional uniformity) to visually expand the game area 5a. However, the background decoration 820a corresponding to the game area 5a and the front component member 1000 may have a different design with no unity. In such a case, since the decoration of the front component member 1000 can be covered by printing the first decorative surface 819, it is not necessary to decorate the front component member 1000 itself, and the cost can be reduced accordingly.

  The gaming panel 1100 according to the other embodiment 1 is configured as described above. Due to the difference in depth between the first decorative surface 819 on the surface of the gaming panel 1100 and the second decorative surface 822 on the back surface of the gaming panel 1100, Since a three-dimensional effect is produced in the decorations 816, 20, a novel gaming machine can be provided.

[Center member]
The center member 2500 protrudes from the mounting flange 830 having a slightly larger outline than the through hole 1112 of the base panel 1110 and the back side of the mounting flange 830 so as to be loosely fitted in the through hole 1112. An inner frame portion 831 and a surrounding frame 832 projecting from the front side of the mounting flange portion 830 so as to prevent the inflow of game balls from the game area 5a, and a synthetic resin that is entirely transparent It is formed with.
An inclined taper portion 833 that is thinner toward the base panel 1110 is formed on the peripheral edge of the mounting flange portion 830 of the center member 2500. In the other embodiment 1, as shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 109, at least the taper portion 833 of the portion (for example, the mounting flange portion 830 of the upper half of the center member 2500) that can enter the field of view of the player who is playing The hook of the mounting flange portion 830 and the base panel 1110 is set shallower than before so as to be hooked on the edge of the hole 1112. By doing so, the light that illuminates the inside of the through hole 1112 changes like a prism through the taper portion 833 of the mounting flange portion 830 and leaks to the outside. Can be easily and effectively decorated.

  Further, the center member 2500 is a plate having an effect area 834 facing a later-described drum 854 of the effect unit 814 and a decorative surface 835 having a height substantially flush with the game area 5a inside the enclosure frame 832. Shaped decorative member 836.

[Direction area-Light guide plate unit]
In the effect region 834 of the center member 2500, a light guide plate unit 837 for protecting and decorating the front surface of a drum unit 855, which will be described later, is provided. As shown in FIG. 113, the light guide plate unit 837 is obtained by fitting a light guide plate 842 into a frame-shaped display window 841 including a vertical frame 839 and a horizontal frame 840 incorporating a light emitting device 838. 839 and the light emitting device 838 of the horizontal frame 840 irradiate light to the light guide incident end face of the light guide plate 842 to display a predetermined image in an effect.
The light guide plate 842 is fitted in a state where the display window 841 has a backlash of about several mm (for example, 3 mm). By doing so, it is difficult to apply stress even if the light guide plate 842 is thermally expanded, so that the risk of deformation or breakage of the light guide plate 842 due to thermal stress can be reduced. Further, for the same purpose, the light guide plate 842 may be attached in a state in which a part of the four sides is fixed with screws (not shown) and the other sides are movable without restriction.

[Decorative material]
The decorative member 836 of the center member 2500 is a transparent synthetic resin plate projecting from the inside of the surrounding frame 832 of the center member 2500 toward the vertical frame 839 and the horizontal frame 840 of the display window 841, and has a game area on the surface. The decorative surface 835 has a height substantially flush with 5a. As shown in FIG. 114, the decorative surface 835 is unified with the background decoration 820b applied to the first decorative surface 819 of the base panel 1110 (including not only the appearance, but also the conceptual unification). .) Is drawn, and as shown in FIG. 113, the difference in position and size between the effect area 834 and the through-hole 1112 indicated by an imaginary line in FIG. Can be filled with natural shapes. That is, the background decoration 820 b applied to the first decorative surface 819 bites into the center member 2500 in a natural manner. Further, although the unity is achieved by decoration, the light emitting decoration body may be disposed so as to straddle the outer side and the inner side of the center member 2500.
Therefore, by adjusting the size of the decoration member 836 according to the size of the effect area 834, it is possible to deal with many models with a minimum design change while maintaining the outer shape of the center member 2500.
Note that the decoration 843 drawn on the decorative surface 835 according to the other embodiment 1 is drawn with ink having excellent light-shielding properties. Therefore, the second decorative surface 822 can be seen through from the non-decorative portion of the transparent decorative member 836. By contrast with the decoration 816, the stereoscopic effect is further increased. In addition, the light shielding property of the decoration 843 has an advantage that light illuminated from the inside of the through hole 1112 can be softened in an indirect lighting manner.
In the other embodiment 1, a decoration lamp 844H for decoration is provided on the front upper surface of the effect support frame 852, which will be described later, and above a drum 854, which will be described later, and overlaps with the decoration lamp 844H of the decoration member 836. A notch 845 for avoiding polymerization is formed at the position. Accordingly, there is no possibility that the light of the decoration lamp 844H is reflected by the decoration member 836 so that it is difficult to see, so that the definition of the decoration lamp 844H is improved.

[Functions attached to the center member]
As shown in FIGS. 106 and 107, the center member 2500 enters from the game area 5a and a stage shelf 2503 that allows the game ball to fall into the game area 5a while moving the game ball in the left-right direction below the enclosure frame 832. A so-called accessory comprising a warp passage 847 for guiding the game ball B to the stage shelf 2503 is integrally provided. As described above, the first start port 2002 is arranged immediately below the stage shelf 2503 in the game area 5a, and if a game ball falls from the center of the stage shelf 2503, it can be won with a high probability.

  In addition, a discharge part 848 that guides a game ball jumping over the upper part along the outer rail 1001 to the lower right side of the game area 5a is provided in the upper right outer half of the front side of the enclosure frame 832 of the center member 2500. It has been. The discharge portion 848 has a size corresponding to one game ball, and is provided with hook-shaped obstacle ridges 849 protruding from the right inner wall and the left inner wall in front of the passage alternately at substantially equal pitches. Therefore, the game ball that has entered the discharge portion 848 touches a number of the obstacle ridges 849 and meanders, and as if falling while colliding with the obstacle nail in the game area 5a. It is led to the lower right side of the game area 5a.

  In addition, the lower right half of the outer frame 832 of the center member 2500 is provided with a second starting port 2004 that opens and closes the winning opening by the rotation of the opening and closing piece 850, and the second starting port 2004 and the discharge unit. A pass-type gate portion 2003 is provided in the middle of 848 in the vertical direction. The gate portion 2003 is installed in an extending portion 830 a that extends in a horizontal peninsula shape from the mounting flange portion 830 of the center member 2500, and a rear portion thereof is aligned with the extending portion 830 a of the center member 2500 to form the base panel 1110. Are stored in a bay-shaped cut portion 1112a formed in the through hole 1112. In this way, the gate portion 2003 (the same is true for other winning holes) is installed in the extended portion 830a protruding from the mounting flange portion 830 in a peninsular shape, and the bay-shaped cut portion 1112a is cut into the through hole 1112. As a result, the installation space on the center member 2500 side becomes unnecessary as compared with the case where the gate portion 2003 having a unique mounting flange portion around it is installed separately. The area of the veneer plate of the base panel 1110 where the game ball flows can be increased accordingly. Note that the plywood plate has features such that the nail can be easily driven and adjusted, and the nail is difficult to remove even after long-term use. Therefore, it is preferable that the portion where the obstacle nail is provided be a plywood plate as much as possible. The game ball that has entered the discharge portion 848 is once guided to the area of the synthetic resin plate of the center member 2500, but when the game ball is discharged to the outside of the center member 2500, the game ball is discharged to the area of the plywood board where the obstacle nail is provided. That's what it means.

[Direction unit]
The effect unit 814 is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100, and includes a display device 851 that can display, as game information, a lottery result related to a big hit started by detection of a game ball by the first start port 2002, for example. A frame-shaped effect support frame 852 that supports the display device 851, and a rear cover 853 that is attached to the rear surface of the effect support frame 852 and covers the rear surface of the display device 851.

[Display device]
The display device 851 may be either an image display type by the liquid crystal display device or the like described above, or an actual type that can display the game information by a change such as mechanical rotation / stop of a movable object. In 1, the latter production type is used.
As shown in FIGS. 119 to 123, a specific actual movement type display device 851 includes a plurality of drum units 855 that can rotate and move the drum 854, which is a movable object, in a horizontal row (in the case of the other embodiment 1, 3). Set) and the upper and lower sides thereof are fixedly connected by a connecting plate 856.

[Drum unit]
As shown in the exploded perspective view of FIG. 121, each drum unit 855 includes a horizontal cylindrical drum 854, a rotation drive device 857 that rotates the drum 854 in the direction indicated by the arrow, and a drum 854 that is a rotation drive device 857. A moving drive device 858 that moves in the vertical direction and an illumination member 859 for illuminating the drum 854 from the inside to clarify game information.

The drum 854 is formed of a thin sheet made of synthetic resin, and a plurality of characters and symbols are displayed in a predetermined arrangement on the peripheral surface.
The rotation drive device 857 for rotating the drum 854 is a rim-shaped ring member 860 fixed to one opening edge of the drum 854, and is arranged at the center of the drum 854 and gradually increases in diameter toward the ring member 860. In addition, a frustum tube-shaped central member 861 that opens toward the outside on the ring member 860 side, a connecting member 862 that radially connects the ring member 860 and the central member 861, and an electric motor that is directly connected to the central member 861. The center member 861, the connecting member 862, the ring member 860, and the drum 854 are integrally rotated or stopped by rotating or stopping the drive shaft of the electric motor 863.

  Note that the rotary drive device 857 is provided with air cooling means for cooling the drum 854 through air. That is, the air cooling means includes a sirocco fan-like intake blade piece 864 formed on the peripheral wall of the central member 861 and a propeller fan-like exhaust blade piece 865 formed on the connecting member 862. By rotation in the indicated direction, air is sucked from the opening of the center member 861 in the manner of a sirocco fan, discharged to the space between the outside of the center member 861 and the inside of the drum 854, and further the air guided to this space is propeller fan In this manner, it is discharged out of the drum 854 from between the connecting member 862 and the connecting member 862. Accordingly, a U-turn airflow in which the intake air and the exhaust gas are reversed in the inside and outside of the central member 861 of the drum 854 is generated, so that the inside of the drum 854 is efficiently cooled.

The movement drive device 858 that moves the drum 854 in the vertical direction together with the rotation drive device 857 is a disc-shaped support substrate 866 that supports the electric motor 863 of the drum unit 855 and the illumination member 859, and the support substrate 866 can slide up and down. A guide shaft 867 that is supported by the guide shaft, a male screw-like drive shaft 868 erected in parallel with the guide shaft 867, an upper and lower bearing base 869 that supports the drive shaft 868 and the guide shaft 867, and an upper bearing base And an elevating motor 870 for the drive shaft 868 attached to an upper portion of the 869.
Therefore, when the drive shaft 868 is rotated by the lift motor 870, the support substrate 866 is raised or lowered along the spiral of the drive shaft 868, whereby the drum 854 is raised together with the rotary drive device 857 as shown by the solid line in FIG. Or it descends like the imaginary line in the figure. The drums 854 are normally stopped at substantially the middle position of the movable range (hereinafter referred to as “reference position”). From this state, all the drums 854 may be moved up and down all at once, or each drum 854 may be moved. May be moved up and down separately. Further, when the drum 854 is at the highest position or the lowest position, as shown in FIG. 123, a part of the drum 854 is removed from the display window 841 and cannot be seen. It exists in the frame of the display window 841.

  By the way, the movement drive device 858 of the other embodiment 1 can move the drum 854 only in the vertical direction. For example, another combination of the drive shaft 868, the guide shaft 867, the bearing base 869, and the support substrate 866 is used. A set is added to rotate the drive shaft 868 and the guide shaft 867 in a horizontal direction, and the two are added between the original support substrate 866 and the electric motor 863, that is, added to the original support substrate 866. The bearing base 869 is fixed side by side so that the drive shaft 868 and the guide shaft 867 are laterally passed, and the electric motor 863 is attached to a new support substrate 866 supported by the lateral drive shaft 868 and the guide shaft 867. Good. By doing so, each drum 854 can be freely moved up and down and back and forth, so that the variation of the production by the drum 854 is markedly improved, and members that obstruct the up and down movement are temporarily avoided by the back and forth movement. Will also be possible.

  Further, the display device 851 according to the other embodiment 1 is provided with linear illuminations 871a to 871d having a vertical bar shape between the respective drums 854 of the plurality of drum units 855. The linear lights 871a to 871d are light emitters such as cold cathode tubes, for example, and are formed to be curved in an arc shape (bow shape) toward the front surface (player), but at both ends of the three drums 854 The bending state of the linear illuminations 871a and 871d is set more gently than the bending state of the linear illuminations 871b and 871c provided between the drums 854, and further, the linear illuminations 871b and 871c between the drums 854 are located at the frontmost part. Are installed so as to protrude from the linear lights 871a and 871d located at both ends of the drum 854 to the player side. Thereby, a curved three-dimensional effect can be imparted to the front surface of the drum 854 in a state where the linear illuminations 871a to 871d are turned on.

  The display device 851 is attached to the game board 5 from the rear side by an effect support frame 852 described in detail below, and all the drums 854 at the reference position in the frame of the display window 841 of the center member 2500 in the front view. Has come to fit. That is, the vertical width of the display window 841 is larger than the vertical width (the diameter of the drum 854) of the drum 854, which is a movable object, so that the display information on the front of the stopped drum 854 is displayed from the display window 841. In addition, the winning / losing result of the lottery is displayed by a combination of numbers or symbols in this portion. In addition, at least one of the upper and lower contours of the drum 854 is visible to the player. Thus, by seeing at least one of the upper and lower contours of the drum 854 from the display window 841, it is possible to give the player a feeling as if the drum 854 exists in the air without any support.

Since the display device 851 is configured as described above, when the game ball B is received in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 as described above, a lottery that determines a hit / decision on the main control board 1310. The combination of the symbols of the drum 854 stopped within the frame of the display window 841 after the lottery result has undergone a certain time of production operation by a mechanical change in which the rotation and vertical movement of the drum 854 are appropriately combined. Is displayed. If the lottery result is a big hit, there is a benefit that it is easy to win a large number of prizes in the big prize opening 2005 within a predetermined range of conditions. Of course, any display operation of the display device 851 may be used.
In the other embodiment 1, at the timing when a large amount of winnings can be made to the winning a prize opening 2005 (preferably before the opening of the winning prize opening 2005), it should be right-handed, that is, how to play the game ball is strongly strengthened. The level is instructed that it should be driven to the right side of the game area 5a (for example, the display panel 2005p shown by the imaginary line in FIG. 103 is switched from OFF to ON, and a character such as “Please make a right stroke” is displayed. Display or give voice guidance such as “Please make a right-hand strike.”) There is a way to hit, so that the player's profit is maximized. Yes.

[Direction support frame]
The effect support frame 852 has a frame shape having an opening-shaped installation portion 872 for mounting the display device 851, and is fixedly attached to the back surface of the base panel 1110 with screws or the like. In addition to the display device 851, the effect side support member 817 having the second decorative surface 822 is attached to the effect support frame 852 so as to surround the four sides of the display device 851 as described above. In addition, the effect support frame 852 is provided with the decorative lamp 844H for decoration located above the drum 854 in the upper part of the front surface as described above, and further on the lower side of the drum 854 in the lower part of the front surface of the effect support frame 852. There is provided a decorative lamp 844L for decoration. By flashing the upper and lower decorative lamps 844H and 844L at the same time, for example, it is possible to easily notify a target to be noted among the plurality of drums 854.

[Rear cover]
The rear cover 853 is attached to the rear surface of the effect support frame 852 to cover the rear surface of the display device 851, and has a heat radiating fan 873 and ventilation holes 874 on both sides as shown in FIG. The rear surface is also provided with a vent hole 874 for heat dissipation. In addition, an effect illumination 875 for irradiating light toward the drum 854 of the display device 851 is provided above and below the rear cover 853, and the outline of the drum 854 is illuminated by illumination from the rear side. Yes. Note that at least the inner surface of the rear cover 853 has a dark color (specifically, black) in order to enhance the light effect of the effect lighting 875. Further, the effect lighting 875 is attached to the outside of the rear cover 853 so that a light emitter 876 such as an LED faces the rear cover 853 from there. Further, a half mirror 877 is provided in a portion corresponding to the effect illumination 875 in the rear cover 853 so that the rear surface side of the drum 854 can be seen on the mirror surface when the effect illumination 875 is OFF. As a result, the rear side of the drum 854 is also gorgeously produced.

In addition, the other embodiment 1 includes the following technical idea.
[Technical Thought 1]
A gaming panel having a gaming area in which gaming balls can flow down;
A gaming machine comprising: a center member that is attached to a through-hole established in the gaming panel and has at least a production area inside a surrounding frame that can prevent the inflow of gaming balls from the gaming area,
A gaming machine comprising a decorative member provided with a decorative surface that is substantially flush with the game area inside the enclosure of the center member.

[Technical Thought 2]
A display device for displaying game information by moving a movable object;
A display window capable of recognizing the presence of the display device,
A gaming machine that allows a player to recognize game information by the movable body that can be recognized through the display window,
The game machine according to claim 1, wherein the display window is formed in a state in which at least one of the upper and lower contours of the movable object can be seen by the player, in addition to the portion showing the game information of the movable object.

[Technical Thought 3]
A gaming machine having a gaming panel having a gaming area where gaming balls can flow down,
A first decorative surface for applying a background decoration formed on the front surface of the gaming panel;
A gaming machine comprising: a second decorative surface for applying a background decoration formed at a position deeper than the front surface of the gaming panel.

[Technical Thought 4]
In a gaming machine comprising an operation medium for game operation on the front surface of a door frame disposed at a position facing a player,
A gaming machine, characterized in that a hand cover portion is provided on the front surface of the door frame so as to enclose the vicinity of the outer periphery of the hand of a player who operates the operation medium.

[Handle unit]
The handle unit 180 in the door frame 3 according to the other embodiment 1 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 124 to 128. Note that the basic configuration for adjusting the firing force of the handle unit 180 is substantially the same as that described in paragraphs [0203] to [0218] and [FIG. 38], so FIGS. Refer to FIG. 38 for a description of parts not shown.

  The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle attachment member 102 of the door frame 3 (the door frame base unit 100). The game board 5 is driven into the game area 5a.

  The handle unit 180 includes a handle base 181 attached to the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle attachment member 102 in the door frame base unit 100, a handle 182 as an operation medium rotatably attached to the front end of the handle base 181, and a front end side of the handle 182 A disc-shaped cover base 183 that is attached to the handle base 181 so as to cover the handle base, a handle decoration board 184 that is attached to the front side of the cover base 183 and on which a plurality of LEDs 184L are mounted, and covers the front side of the handle decoration board 184 A handle cap 185 attached to the cover pedestal 183 and a hand cover portion 195 provided on the front surface of the door frame 3 so as to surround the vicinity of the outer periphery of the hand of the player who operates the handle 182 are provided.

  The handle unit 180 has an inner base 186 attached to the front surface of the handle base 181 on the rear side of the handle 182, a handle 182 attached to the front end, and rotatably attached by the inner base 186 and the handle base 181. A shaft member 187 having a drive gear portion 187a, a transmission gear 188 meshing with the drive gear portion 187a of the shaft member 187 (see FIG. 38), and a detection shaft 189a rotating integrally with the transmission gear 188 (FIG. 38). And a handle rotation detection sensor 189 (see FIG. 38) sandwiched between the handle base 181 and the inner base 186.

  Further, the handle unit 180 has one end attached to the handle base 181 and the other end attached to the handle 182 so that the handle 182 is returned to the initial rotation position (the rotation start end in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front). One end side is attached to the inner base 186 and the other end side is attached to the transmission gear 188, and the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is rotated clockwise in front view via the transmission gear 188. And an auxiliary spring 191 (see FIG. 38) biased in the direction.

  Further, the handle unit 180 includes a handle touch sensor 192 (see FIG. 38) attached to the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186, and a front end side outward from the left side in the front view of the outer peripheral surface of the front end of the handle base 181. A single button 193 (see FIG. 38) that protrudes and has a base end side that is mounted behind the inner base 186 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending back and forth on the handle base 181 and a pressing operation of the single button 193 is detected. And a single button operation sensor 194 (see FIG. 38) attached to the handle base 181.

[Handle base]
A handle base 181 of the handle unit 180 includes a cylindrical base 181a extending in the front-rear direction, a cup-shaped front end 181b provided at the front end of the base 181a, and an inward recess from the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical base 181a. And three grooves 181c (see FIG. 38) that extend in the axial direction and are formed at irregular intervals in the circumferential direction. The base portion 181 a of the handle base 181 is formed so that the outer diameter is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the cylindrical portion 102 a of the handle mounting member 102. Further, the three groove portions 181c are formed at positions corresponding to the three protrusions 102c of the cylindrical portion 102a in the handle mounting member 102. Accordingly, the base portion 181a can be inserted into the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 with the three groove portions 181c aligned with the three protrusions 102c, and the protrusions 102c are respectively inserted into the three groove portions 181c. By being inserted, the handle base 181 cannot be rotated relative to the handle mounting member 102.
Around the base portion 181 a of the handle base 181, a bowl-shaped screen member 196 colored in a white color is provided in a state of being fixed to the handle mounting portion 102. The light of the full color LED irradiated from the end of the frame right side unit 410 toward the screen member 196 can be reflected almost in its color.

[handle]
The handle 182 is based on a disk having a diameter and thickness suitable for a player to hold with one hand, projects from the outer peripheral surface to a height that is at least as high as a finger can be inserted in the circumferential direction, and the handle 182 Four finger hooks 182g to 182j protruding at substantially point-symmetrical positions with respect to the rotation center (shaft member 187), that is, equally spaced (90 degrees), and a circle around the rotation shaft (shaft member 187) Two slits 182e extending in an arc shape and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and a protrusion protruding rearward from an inner position with respect to the center of rotation than the slit 182e, and the other end side of the handle return spring 190 is locked. A stop projection 182f (see FIG. 38).

  In addition, the handle 182 is integrally provided with a decorative handle 1820 as a circular decorative member concentrically with the handle 182 on the outer side through the finger hook portions 182g to 182j. The decorative handle 1820 has a front surface covered with a translucent decorative cover 1821 and an outer peripheral surface covered with a conductive touch cover 1822 serving as a sensing portion of the handle touch sensor 192, and is disposed in a hollow interior. The appropriate number of light emitting LEDs 1823 and the light emitting LEDs 182L provided in the form of dots in front of the finger hooks 182g to 182j can perform appropriate full-color effects using light.

In addition, as an example of the light effect by the light emitting LED 182L of the decorative handle 1820, the decorative handle 1820 is visually turned to the right due to the change in the light emission mode of the plurality of light emitting LEDs 182L, and now should be right-handed The timing is instructed, that is, it is used as the above-described hitting instruction means. Further, it is more dynamic if the full-color LED of the door frame left side unit 400, the door frame top unit 450, and the door frame right side unit 410 of the door frame 3 is used to produce a clockwise light flow in the entire door frame 3. Can be instructed to turn right. For example, the full color LEDs of the door frame left side unit 400, the door frame top unit 450, and the door frame right side unit 410 of the door frame 3 are changed to “lower left → left → upper left → upper left → upper middle → upper right → upper right → right middle → The light is emitted in the order of “lower right” to produce the light flowing clockwise (clockwise), and the light emitting LED 1823 of the decorative handle 1820 emits light in the clockwise direction so as to inherit the light flow. In particular, when light is emitted from the light emitting LED 1823 closest to the full color LED located at the lowermost part of the door frame right side unit 410, it is possible to achieve a more interlocked (integrated) effect. In this case, since the lighting method is instructed in two lighting modes of the door frame 3 and the decorative handle 1820, even if any one of the LEDs is defective, the player is hit without any trouble. Can be directed.
As described above, as an example of the light effect, an instruction indicating that it is time to make a right turn is shown, but it is needless to say that the present invention is not limited to this and can be performed for effects other than the above. . For example, when a left-handed instruction is given from the right-handed state, a series of effects opposite to the light effects in the case of right-handed (for example, the decorative LED 1823 on the decorative handle 1820 side is decoratively counterclockwise. The full color LEDs of the door frame left side unit 400, door frame top unit 450, and door frame right side unit 410 are moved to the lower right → middle right → upper right → upper right → upper middle → upper left → upper left → middle left. → Inserts that produce light in the order of the lower left), for example, when a performance with a high degree of expectation for a hit is executed, instead of an instruction on how to hit, an effect linked to that is executed, or the degree of expectation for a hit For example, an effect in conjunction with an effect is executed before a high effect is executed. In addition, the interlock here refers to an effect in which light flows from the upper side to the lower side of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, full-color LED of the door frame top unit 450). The upper left and upper right are emitted, then the upper left side unit 400 and the right side door unit 410 of the door frame are caused to emit light from the upper side, the middle side, and the lower side. Finally, the light emitting LED 1823 of the decorative handle 1820 is emitted. ).
The light emission timing when the light emitting LED 182L of the decorative handle 1820 is used as the hitting instruction means is the same as that of the display panel 2005p, which is another hitting instruction means, for example, or the effect display device 1600 (liquid crystal display device). It may be the same as the right-handed instruction that is displayed, or before or after them, but at least before a large-award winning to the big prize opening 2005 becomes possible (before the big prize opening 2005 is opened). It is preferable in protecting the player's profit.

  Moreover, changing the lighting pattern according to the emission intensity of the ball emitting device 540 is an example of the light effect of the light emitting LED 182L provided in a dot shape in front of the finger hooks 182g to 182j. For example, if the firing intensity is “weak”, the color is blue, and if the firing intensity is “medium”, the color is green. The general pachinko machine 1 is an advantageous gaming state in which the right-handed state with the firing strength set to “strong” is a big hit or the probability is changed. It should be lit in red, which is said to have an effect.

When the handle 182 is in the initial rotation position, the four finger hooks 182g to 182j are both horizontally oriented with the two finger hooks 182g and 182i, and the other two finger hooks 182h and 182j are both vertically oriented. It is set in a cross shape so that when the player grips the handle 182 in a normal grip style, the right thumb is naturally engaged with the lower side of the finger hook portion 182g positioned on the left peripheral surface from the center of rotation. It has become. Therefore, in this other embodiment 1, the finger hook portion 182g is a finger hook portion for normal operation. In this normal grip style, fingers other than the thumb are put on the handle 182 with the upper finger hooking portion 182h sandwiched therebetween.
On the other hand, the finger hook portion 182j provided on the peripheral surface below the center of rotation of the handle 182 hardly touches any finger in the above-described normal grip style. If a finger such as an index finger is hooked on the finger hooking portion 182j away from the handle, the handle 182 can be rotated clockwise as viewed from the front by an irregular operation of moving the finger to the left. In this other embodiment 1, as described above, there is provided a hitting instruction means (display panel 2005p) for instructing that the player should hit the right, and such hitting instruction means should be driven to the right side of the game area. This can be dealt with by applying a force in the direction opposite to the direction (force in the left direction in the front view) to the finger hooking portion 182j of the handle 182.
Of course, the handle 182 may be rotated by a finger hooked on the finger hook portions 182h and 182i other than the finger hook portions 182g and 182j and pulled upward or downward.

[Cover base]
The cover pedestal 183 is formed in a disc shape and includes a plurality of mounting bosses 183a protruding rearward from the rear surface. The mounting boss 183a is attached to the front surface of the handle base 181 through the slit 182e of the handle 182 from the front. Since the mounting boss 183a of the handle cap 185 passes through the slit 182e of the handle 182, the mounting boss 183a comes into contact with the circumferential end of the slit 182e, and the rotation angle of the handle 182 is restricted. In this example, the handle 182 can be rotated within a range of a rotation angle of about 120 degrees from the initial stop position.

[Handle cap]
The handle cap 185 has a front surface that bulges forward and has a translucent center portion. Inside the handle cap 185, a lens member that is three-dimensionally formed of a transparent member is provided. The handle cap 185 can produce an effect by light by appropriately causing the LED 184L on the front surface of the handle decoration board 184 to emit light.

[Handle rotation detection sensor]
The handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180 is a variable resistor. When the handle 182 is rotated clockwise as viewed from the front, a detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is transmitted via the shaft member 187 and the transmission gear 188. Rotates. The internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft 189a, and the driving force of the firing solenoid 542 in the ball launcher 540 changes according to the internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189, The game ball B is driven into the game area 5a with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182. In the other embodiment 1, the launching force of the game ball is set to be stronger when the handle 182 is rotated clockwise when viewed from the front.

[Handle touch sensor]
The handle touch sensor 192 detects static electricity acting on the handle unit 180, and the player touches either the handle 182, the finger hooks 182 g to 182 j, or the touch cover 1822 of the decorative handle 1820, thereby playing the game The static electricity acting from the player is detected, and the player's contact with the handle 182 and the like is detected. When the handle 182 is rotated while the handle touch sensor 192 detects the player's contact, the detection of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is accepted and the rotation angle of the handle 182 adjusted (input) by the player is received. The driving of the firing solenoid 542 is controlled with the strength according to the game ball B, and the game ball B can be driven. That is, the handle touch sensor 192 does not detect the player's contact even if the player tries to drive the game ball B into the game area 5a by rotating the handle 182 by some method without touching the handle 182. Therefore, the firing solenoid 542 is not driven and the game ball B cannot be driven. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from playing the game by rotating the handle 182 in a different way from the original, and to reduce the load (burden) on the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. .

  In addition, when the player presses the single button 193 while the player rotates the handle 182, the single button operation sensor 194 detects the operation of the single button 193, and the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 detects the handle unit 180. The driving of the firing solenoid 542 is stopped. Thereby, even if it does not return rotation operation of the handle | steering-wheel 182, while launching of the game ball B can be stopped temporarily, by releasing the press operation of the single button 193, before operating the single button 193, The game ball B can be driven again into the game area 5a with the driving strength.

[Handle mounting member]
The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 101 b of the door frame base 101 via the handle attachment member 102. The handle mounting seating surface 101b of the door frame base 101 is inclined so that the right end side is located rearward of the left end side in plan view, and faces the outside (open side). The handle unit 180 that is attached to the pachinko machine 1 is also inclined to the outside in a plan view (in other words, the front end of the pachinko machine 1 is inclined to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line orthogonal to the front surface of the pachinko machine 1). Are attached and fixed to the door frame 3. As a result, the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 can be easily gripped, and the player can perform a rotation operation without feeling uncomfortable.

[Hand cover]
A substantially cylindrical hand cover portion 195 surrounding the vicinity of the outer periphery of the player's hand for operating the handle 182 is attached to the front surface of the door frame 3 so as to surround the outside of the handle attachment portion 102. FIG. As shown, the front opening 195h is substantially aligned with the rear surface of the decorative handle 1820. In addition, the joint portion of the hand cover portion 195 and the decorative handle 1820 has a joint portion by a slidable fitting between a joint ring 1824 protruding from the rear surface of the decorative handle 1820 and an annular slit 195a provided on the front surface of the hand cover portion 195. It is connected seamlessly.
The hand cover portion 195 can also be provided for the handle 182 that does not have the decorative handle 1820. The decorative means similar to the decorative handle 1820 may be applied to the front opening 195h.

In the hand cover portion 195 of the other embodiment 1, a window opening 195w leading to the outside is opened in a part of the trunk portion, and moisture or cigarette smoke in the hand cover portion 195 or intentional or It prevents stagnation of beverages or the like that have flowed in due to negligence, and also prevents illegal acts by improving internal visibility.
Note that the handle 182 may be detachable as shown in FIG. 128 in order to facilitate the cleaning of the inside of the hand cover portion 195 and the wiping off of the inflowed beverage. Specifically, each of the base portion 181a of the handle base 181 and the screen member 196 fixed to the handle mounting portion 102 side is provided with an engaging / disengaging means 197 comprising a combination of a claw piece 197a and an elastically deformable receiving piece 197b, for example. 128. By engaging and disengaging the engagement / disengagement means 197 (see the solid line in the enlarged view of FIG. 128) / disengagement (see the imaginary line in the enlarged view of FIG. 128), the handle 182 and the handle base 181 as shown in FIG. You may make it removable from 102 side. By doing so, the handle 182 can be removed from the handle mounting portion 102 and the front opening 195h of the hand cover portion 195 can be fully opened, so that internal cleaning, wiping off spilled beverages, and the like are facilitated. Preferably, if the release operation of the engagement / disengagement means 197 is performed by a dedicated release member (not shown) (for example, insertion of a thumbtack pin), the handle 182 is not likely to be extracted by mischief or the like.

As described above, by providing the hand cover portion 195 outside the handle 182, the player's hand (finger) operating the handle 182 seems to have entered the hand cover portion 195, that is, the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, it is possible to feel more strongly that the pachinko machine 1 is being operated.
Also, if the air blowing means (not shown) is connected to the hand cover portion 195 and the air is blown, most of the wind comes out from the front opening 195h of the hand cover portion 195, so that the wind is surely applied to the player's hand. Can do. Therefore, for example, when the expectation for a big hit is high, or when the expectation for an advantageous hit (a hit with a large probability or a lot of balls) is high, the wind may be sent in a predetermined direction (for example, a state like an air gun). When a game state is controlled (for example, during probability change, short-running, under-latency), the wind is sent at a regular timing such as every 5 seconds, or a predetermined lottery is performed. It is possible to effectively produce such as sending wind when winning. Of course, you may always send a wind.
Although not shown, a game speaker (preferably a vibration speaker) may be provided inside the hand cover portion 195. In such a case, since the sound of the speaker is removed from the front opening 195h of the hand cover 195, the vibration of the sound can be effectively felt by the player's hand.

Other form 1 described above includes the following technical idea.
[Technical Thought 5]
A ball launcher for driving game balls into the game area of the game board;
In a gaming machine comprising a handle for adjusting the firing force of the ball launcher by a manual rotation operation,
The handle is
A finger hook portion for normal operation which is provided on the peripheral surface on the left side from the rotation center of the self and which can be engaged with the thumb of a hand operated in a normal grip style;
Separately from the finger hook portion, the finger hook portion is provided on the peripheral surface below the center of rotation of the handle and can be engaged with at least one finger of the player's hand. A gaming machine characterized by that.
In such a gaming machine,
A hitting instruction means for instructing the player how to hit a game ball according to the game situation,
On the other hand, the handle is set so that the firing force becomes stronger by clockwise rotation in front view,
When the hitting instruction means indicates that it should be driven to the right side of the game area, it can be dealt with by an operation of applying a leftward force in front view to the anomaly operation finger hook portion of the handle. It may be.

  As mentioned above, although the other form of the pachinko machine was demonstrated, of course, the said other form can also be changed suitably. For example, in the above embodiment, a pachinko machine is exemplified as a gaming machine, but it can also be applied to other gaming machines such as a sparrow ball machine and an arrange ball machine, and further, a plurality of drums (rotating or The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine that rotates a reel.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the electric motor 863 of the rotation drive device 857 and the lifting motor 870 of the movement drive device 858 are in different directions, specifically, the output shaft of the electric motor 863 has the same horizontal axis as the rotation axis of the drum 854. On the other hand, the lift motor 870 is in another direction such that its output shaft is in the same vertical direction as the drive shaft 868 of the drum unit 855, but the direction of the electric motor 863 and the lift motor 870 Can be the same. However, when the electric motor 863 and the lifting / lowering motor 870 are set in different directions as in the above embodiment, the motor that causes the trouble when the trouble occurs in either the rotation operation or the lifting / lowering operation of the drum 854 is identified and dealt with. Is excellent in that it can be performed quickly.

In the above embodiment, the opaque base panel 1110 has been described as an example, but a transparent synthetic resin base panel 1110 may be used.
In the above embodiment, the background decorations 816, 820a, 820b, and 843 are printed or the like, but may be decorations using light emitters such as LEDs.

  In the above embodiment, the handle cap 185 is fixed to the handle base 181 and the handle 182 rotates between them. However, the handle cap 185 is fixed to the handle 182 and rotated integrally with the handle 182. You may make it obtain.

  In the above embodiment, the handle 182, the decorative handle 1820, and the hand cover 195 are combined. However, even if the decorative handle 1820 is provided outside the handle 182, the effect of making the handle 182 large and conspicuous is sufficient. Can enjoy.

[Other pachinko machines]
Next, another pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. Since the other pachinko machines 1 are mainly modified from the pachinko machine 1 shown in FIGS. 103 to 128 in terms of the number, arrangement and structure of the handle units 180, in principle, except for those related to them. Description is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 129, the pachinko machine 1 has a handle unit 180, which is an input medium for gaming, on both sides of a front bulging structure composed of an upper plate 201, a production operation unit 300, and the like. It has two. In FIG. 129, the right handle unit (hereinafter also referred to as “right handle unit”) 180 (R) adjusts the strength of the ball hitting device 540 as described above. On the other hand, the left handle unit (hereinafter also referred to as “left handle unit”) 180 (L) is used as an input means for the player of the player participation type effect described above.

  Each handle unit 180 (L), (R) is provided with the operation unit including the handle 182, the decorative handle 1820, and the finger hooking portions 182 g to 182 j as described above, and the finger unit between the handle 182 and the decorative handle 1820 is provided. And rotate (operate).

  Each handle unit 180 (L), (R) is formed such that the outer diameter of the decorative handle 1820 around the handle 182 is smaller than the inner diameter of the front opening 195 h of the hand cover 195, and the base 181 a of the handle base 181 is formed. The entire unit can be linearly moved in the front-rear direction within the hand cover portion 195. Further, each handle unit 180 (L), (R) is directed toward the player by a spring 4001 of a handle position control means 4000 (described later) loaded in a compressed state in the cylindrical portion 102 a of the handle mounting member 102. Always energized.

[Right handle unit]
The right handle unit 180 (R) adjusts the striking force of the ball launcher 540 by rotating the handle 182 as described above. Normally, the decorative handle 1820 is provided with the hand cover 195 as shown in FIG. The front opening 195h is substantially flush with the front opening 195h (hereinafter referred to as “front position”), and is locked (fixed) by the handle position control means 4000 at this front position.

[Handle position control means of right handle unit]
A handle position control means (hereinafter, also referred to as “right handle position control means”) 4000 of the right handle unit 180 (R) includes a swingable lock arm 4004 having a roller 4003 at the tip, and the lock arm 4004. And a solenoid 4005 that changes between a horizontal locking posture (see a solid line in FIG. 134) and a releasing posture (see an imaginary line in FIG. 134) in which the roller 4003 is flipped up.
When the lock arm 4004 is in a horizontal locking posture, it lies between the handle base 181 and the handle mounting member 102 of the right handle unit 180 (R) and lies in a bar shape to urge the right handle unit 180 (R). When locked in the forward position and the plunger 4006 of the solenoid 4005 is pulled up from this state to swing the lock arm 4004 to the release position, the roller 4003 is detached from the handle base 181 (the lock arm 4004 is disengaged). The right handle unit 180 (R) is unlocked, and can move linearly to the back of the hand cover portion 195 (hereinafter referred to as “rear position”) as shown in FIG.
Note that the lock arm 4004 is urged so as to move from the released position to the locked position by, for example, a torsion coil spring (not shown), and therefore the right handle unit 180 (R) is moved forward with the solenoid 4005 turned off. Returning to the position automatically returns to the locked position.

  The right handle unit 180 (R) may be used as an input means for appropriately detecting an operation for moving the entire unit from the locked state by a sensor and issuing an input signal to the player participation type effect (that is, one The handle unit 180 can input the striking force of the ball launcher 540 and the player participation type effect.) In the embodiment, the striking force of the ball launcher 540 is adjusted by moving the entire unit from the stopped state. It is used as the second input means.

  Specifically, when the right handle unit 180 (R) is pushed in with the right handle position control unit 4000 unlocked, the striking force of the ball launcher 540 is proportional to the linear movement displacement. When the ball is pushed to the rear position as it is, the strength of the game ball is increased by taking over the previous hitting force due to the rotation of 182 (intention to eliminate the problem that the hitting force temporarily decreases at the point where the operating subject switches). The level changes to the right (see paragraph [0720]), and the right handle unit 180 (R) is returned from the rear position to the front position (the pushing force to the right handle unit 180 (R) can be loosened). For example, the spring 4001 naturally returns by the urging of the spring 4001) and the batting force based on the rotation angle of the handle 182 (usually the batting force during the immediately preceding game). There.

  Alternatively, when the right handle unit 180 (R) is pushed in, a striking force control signal is sent so that the striking force of the ball launcher 540 becomes a strong level, and the rotation angle of the immediately preceding handle 182 is transmitted. When the right handle unit 180 (R) is returned to the forward position, the striking force due to the rotation of the handle 182 (usually the striking force just before) may be returned all at once. Good.

  In short, the right handle unit 180 (R) includes two movable elements that can be displaced in different plane directions, and the other is in a state where the striking force of the ball launcher 540 is adjusted by the displacement of one movable element. It is possible to adjust the striking force of the ball launcher 540 by the displacement of the movable element, and return to the striking force adjustment by the one movable element when the striking force adjustment by the other movable element is finished. For example, a handle 182 that is rotatably supported, and an entire handle unit 180 that is supported so as to be movable in a different plane direction. The ball launcher 540 is rotated by the rotational displacement of the handle 182. The ball striking force of the ball launcher 540 can be adjusted by the movement displacement of the entire handle unit 180 while the striking force is adjusted. When the batting force adjustment by the movement displacement of the entire knit 182 is finished, the batting force adjustment by the handle 182 is resumed. As a result, a normal game is performed by batting force adjustment by one movable element, A strong batting force required when changing to a different gaming state can be performed in a so-called interrupted state due to the displacement of other movable elements, while when a special gaming state ends, the batting by the other movable elements is performed. It is possible to return to the normal gaming state simply and accurately by simply ending the force adjustment.

  The right handle unit 180 (R) is configured as described above, and in a normal game, as shown in FIG. Locked. Therefore, similarly to the pachinko machine 1 of FIGS. 103 to 128, the handle 182 can be rotated together with the decorative handle 1820 to adjust the striking force of the ball launcher 540.

  On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 1 changes to, for example, a special game state due to the progress of the game, the solenoid 4005 of the right handle position control unit 4000 is turned ON and the lock arm 4004 changes to a release posture in which the roller 4003 is flipped up. The right handle unit 180 (R) is unlocked. Then, a character such as “Please push the right handle into the back” is displayed or voiced from the hitting instruction means of the pachinko machine 1 to the player, and the entire right handle unit 180 (R) An instruction for prompting input by moving is issued. In response to this, when the player pushes the entire unit to the rear position against the bias of the spring 4001 without changing the grip of the handle 182 being operated, the operation is detected and the hitting force so far is detected. The striking force is continuously changed to a strong level by adding a new striking force. As a result, the player becomes right-handed, and the benefits of the special game are more brought to the player.

  When the special game state is finished, the solenoid 4005 of the right handle position control means 4000 is turned off simultaneously with the control of the main control unit 1300, and the player is given a “right handle by the hitting instruction means. Please return to the forefront. ”The instruction is issued with a character display or voice. When the player releases the force pushing the right handle unit 180 (R) according to the instruction, the right handle unit 180 (R) returns to the forward position by the bias of the spring 4001. Then, the lock arm 4004 is changed to a horizontal locking posture by the biasing of a torsion coil spring (not shown), and lies between the handle base 181 of the right handle unit 180 (R) and the handle mounting member 102 so as to lie in a bar shape. Unit 180 (R) is locked in the forward position.

  As a result, the pachinko machine 1 returns to the normal gaming state. At this time, the grip (rotation angle) of the handle 182 of the right handle unit 180 (R) is maintained by the player himself in the state immediately before the start of the special game. Therefore, the normal game is resumed with the hitting force immediately before the change to the special game state. By the way, since the conventional handle unit adjusts the hitting force by operating one handle, it is necessary to search for the optimum hitting force again when returning from the right hitting state to the normal gaming state. May be wasted.

[Left handle unit]
As described above, the left handle unit 180 (L) is used as an input means for the player of the player participation type effect. The left handle unit 180 (L) has a substantially line-symmetric structure with respect to the vertical axis passing through the approximate center of the door frame 3 with respect to the right handle unit 180 (R). The control means 4000 is unique by a cam mechanism.

[Handle position control means (left)]
The handle position control means (hereinafter also referred to as “left handle position control means”) 4000 of the left handle unit 180 (L) is a cam mechanism as described above, and is provided on the base portion 181a of the handle base 181. A rotatable follower roller 4007, a long hole 4008 formed in the tubular portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 for passing the follower roller 4007, and a cylindrical cam rotatably fitted on the outer side of the tubular portion 102a 4009, a cam portion 4010 provided on the cylindrical cam 4009, and a motor (not shown) that transmits a rotational force to a gear 4011 provided on an end of the cylindrical cam 4009.

The cam portion 4010 includes a first cam surface 4012 formed in parallel with the end face (rear end face) on the opposite side of the gear 4011 of the cylindrical cam 4009 and an end face (front end face) on the gear 4011 side. The second cam surface 4013 formed parallel to the end surface at a position near the end surface, and an inclined third cam surface 4014 connecting the second cam surface 4013 and the first cam surface 4012.
As described above, the left handle unit 180 (L) is constantly urged toward the player side by the spring 4001 slidably supported by the cylinder portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 and loaded in the cylinder portion 102a. However, the position is controlled by the engagement state of the follower roller 4007 provided in the left handle unit 180 (L) and the cam portion 4010.

In other words, the left handle unit 180 (L) is in the rear position with the follower roller 4007 in contact with the first cam surface 4012 of the cam portion 4010 as shown in FIG. With the roller 4007 in contact with the second cam surface 4013 of the cam portion 4010, the left handle unit 180 (R) is in the forward position.
Accordingly, when the cylindrical cam 4009 is rotated clockwise in FIG. 129 with the left handle unit 180 (L) being in the rear position as shown in FIG. 137, the follower roller 4007 is moved from the first cam surface 4012 to the third position. The cam surface 4014 is inclined to reach the second cam surface 4013, and the left handle unit 180 (L) moves to the front position integrally with the follower roller 4007 as shown in FIG. Note that the cam portion 4010 is a space that is open at the rear, so that the follower roller 4007 can freely move rearward, so that the left handle unit 180 (L) at the front position is spring-loaded. When pushed against the bias of 4001, it sinks to the rear position in the hand cover 195, and when the force is released, it returns to the front position by the bias of the spring 4001. Therefore, the left handle unit 180 (L) in the front position can freely move linearly in the front-rear direction with the player's force.
Further, when the cylindrical cam 4009 is rotated counterclockwise in FIG. 129 and returned to the original state with the left handle unit 180 (L) in the front position, the follower roller 4007 is moved from the second cam surface 4013 to the third position. Returning to the first cam surface 4012 through the cam surface 4014, in this state, the left handle unit 180 (L) moves backward to the rear position as shown in FIG.

  The left handle unit 180 (L) is configured as described above, and is in a rear position within the hand cover 195 as shown in FIG. The left handle unit 180 (L) in the rear position is hidden from the front bulging structure constituted by the upper plate 201, the production operation unit 300, and the like of the plate unit 200 and is not easily noticeable from the player. Further, since the projection to the outside can be suppressed to the minimum by being surrounded by the hand cover portion 195, it is difficult to receive an external impact leading to breakage, and the risk of injury due to contact is reduced. By the way, a large lever is currently used as an input means for players with player-participation-type effects, but if it always protrudes close to the player's hand or knee, it will receive an impact leading to damage. It is easy, and there is a risk that the player may come into contact and get injured.

Then, in the scene where the player participation type effect is executed as the game progresses and the player needs to input, the main control unit 1300 first rotates the cylindrical cam 4009 of the left handle position control means 4000, The left handle unit 180 (L) moves linearly toward the player side together with the follower roller 4007 by the rotation of the cam portion 4010 and the bias of the spring 4001 and stops at the front position. In this state, since it appears to the player as if the left handle unit 180 (L) has appeared, the handle 182 of the left handle unit 180 (L) from the pachinko machine 1 side at the timing attracting the player's attention. The rotation operation of the left handle unit 180 (L) and the pushing operation of the left handle unit 180 (L) are obtained by display, voice, or the like. When the player rotates the handle 182 of the left handle unit 180 (L) or pushes the left handle unit 180 (L) in response to this, the operation is detected and the production shifts to the next scene. Then, the production further proceeds and ends as appropriate.
In addition, since the handle unit 180 of the embodiment is surrounded by the decorative handle 1820 around the gripped hand, there is no fear that the finger will come into contact with the hand cover portion 195 even if a rotation or push-in operation is performed. There is little risk of injury. Accordingly, the decorative handle 1820 that surrounds the grasped hand and can be rotated or moved together with the hand can be substantially referred to as an “outer ring” that can protect the operating finger.

  Next, when the above effect is finished, the cylindrical cam 4009 of the left handle position control unit 4000 rotates in the reverse direction, and the cam portion 4010 contacting the follower roller 4007 passes through the second cam surface 4013 and the third cam surface 4014. It changes to 1 cam surface 4012. In the meantime, the follower roller 4007 is pushed backward along the inclination of the third cam surface 4014, so that the left handle unit 180 (L) moves backward from the front position against the bias of the spring 4001, and the follower roller When 4007 comes into contact with the first cam surface 4012, the rear position is reached. The cylindrical cam 4009 of the left handle position control unit 4000 stops here, and the left handle unit 180 (L) stands by at the rear position until the next effect is executed.

As is clear from the above description, the left handle unit 180 (L) can perform an operation effect and input substantially equivalent to the effect operation unit 301.
Therefore, for example, if the left handle unit 180 (L) and the rendering operation unit 301 are moved under the same control and inputs from both sensors are received, both the left handle unit 180 (L) and the rendering operation unit 301 can be used. .
In that case, for example, a player who thinks that the operation of operating the production operation unit 301 is large and embarrassed can operate with the minimum movement that is difficult to be realized by touching the left handle unit 180 (L) in advance. Therefore, since it can participate in a player participation type production casually, interest increases.
Whether the operation unit used for the player participation type production is the left handle unit 180 (L) or the production operation unit 301 is set in advance by, for example, providing a selection switch on a part of the front bulging structure. The player may be allowed to select.

  As mentioned above, although the other pachinko machine was demonstrated, of course, a pachinko machine is not limited to the above. For example, a handle unit having the same structure as that of the right handle unit 180 (R) of the embodiment may be installed at the place where the left handle unit 180 (L) is installed, and this may be used as an input means for a player with a player participation type effect. In addition, conversely, a handle unit having the same structure as that of the left handle unit 180 (L) of the embodiment is installed at the installation position of the right handle unit 180 (R), and the hitting force of the ball launcher 540 is adjusted. The input means may be used.

In the above description, two handle units 180 are provided, but one handle unit 180 may be provided.
In the above description, the handle unit 180 is provided with the handle 182. However, without providing the handle 182, it may be possible to perform a game input only by the linear movement operation of the handle unit 180.

  In the above, a pachinko machine is exemplified as a gaming machine, but it can also be applied to other gaming machines such as a sparrow ball machine and an arrange ball machine. It can also be applied to a slot machine that rotates). When applied to a slot machine, one or two handle units 180 may be used as input means for player participation type effects.

[Other forms 2-1]
Next, the other form 2-1 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 141 to 145.
In addition, the pachinko machine 1 according to the other embodiment 2-1 can be provided with the door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3 instead of the door frame 3, for example, on the upper part of the game board 5 (for details). Therefore, the configuration of the front top unit 4500 is the same as that described above, and the description thereof is omitted.
In addition, the configuration of the front frame top unit 4500 is obtained by appropriately changing that of the door frame top unit 450 described above, and therefore the configuration of the door frame top unit 450 except for those described below as the front frame top unit 4500. Is applied as it is.

  The pachinko machine 1 according to the other embodiment 2-1 has a window portion that covers the game area 5a where the game is performed in a state where the game area 5a can be visually recognized from the front (the same as the door window 101a covered with the glass plate 162 in the pachinko machine 1 described above). ) 1010a, and a bowl-shaped front top unit 4500 corresponding to the door frame top unit 450 (see FIGS. 72 to 74) protrudes above the window 1010a.

The front top unit 4500 is, for example, a top having a shape in which a top upper cover 452 and a top lower cover 465 shown in FIG. 73 are integrally formed of a transparent and preferably opaque synthetic resin (for example, milky white synthetic resin). A main body cover 4520 is provided, and a central speaker box 461 and a door frame top bottom plate 454 of the door frame top unit 450 are eliminated, and a space 4520S is formed inside.
Further, the top body cover 4520 is formed with an upward opening 452a that communicates with the space 4520S on the upper surface thereof and is greatly cut forward from the rear end, and the opening 452a is aligned with this. It is closed by a front top top plate 4680 which is a shape opening / closing lid.

The front top plate 4680 is pivotally attached to the top main body cover 4520 with a rotation shaft 4680c provided on the rear end side, and is freely closed and closes the opening 452a (see the broken line in FIG. 144). It can be turned to an upright posture (see FIG. 141) that springs up the end side to open the opening 452a and is visible from the outside, and further controls a driving means such as a motor (not shown). By linking with the peripheral control board 1510, the closed posture and the standing posture can be appropriately switched according to the progress of the game or at a predetermined timing determined separately from the progress of the game.
Further, the front top plate 4680 is appropriately decorated (not shown) on the outer surface 4680a facing outward in the closed posture, while the inner surface 4680b facing the space 4520S in the closed posture has a light reflecting performance. It is processed into an excellent screen.

  The front top top plate 4680 has a single panel structure as shown in FIGS. 141 to 144, and the front top top plate 4680 is divided into two at the center on the left and right sides, and the divided pieces are separated from each other by the rotation axis. 4680c may be connected to form a hinge, or as shown in FIG. 145, a plurality of elements may be connected by a hinge 4680p to be bent. By adopting the latter folding structure, the front top plate 4680 can be unfolded in an upright position, and light decoration can be effectively performed at a higher location and for the player. In addition, if the first stage of the folding structure is made into a gate type or transparent so as not to block the rear view, the data display body of the island facility (game provided on the curtain above the pachinko machine 1) It is also possible to prevent the operation of a display device showing the progress of the game (such as the number of occurrences of big hit games).

Further, the front top unit 4500 is provided with an illumination base 8000 on the inner edge of the space 4520S on the player side, and a bar-like light emission means 8002 in which a plurality of light emitting LEDs 8001 are arranged in a horizontal row on the illumination base 8000 swings. It is attached freely.
The light emitting means 8002 is also connected to the peripheral control board 1510 in the same manner as the front top top plate 4680 so that the light irradiation direction and the light emission pattern can be switched appropriately according to the progress of the game. Specifically, when the front top plate 4680 is in a standing posture, the light emitting means 8002 is directed upward so that light can be emitted to the inner surface 4680b toward the player side, while the front top top plate 4680 is closed. In conjunction with the change, the lower side, that is, the bottom of the top main body cover 4520 is switched downward so that light can be irradiated.
In the other embodiment 2-1, since the bottom portion of the top main body cover 4520 is formed of a transparent and opaque synthetic resin, only a light effect by the light emitting means 8002 is visible to the player. Moreover, since the light emitting means 8002 for irradiating light to the front top top plate 4680 can be used for the production of the light, there is almost no extra cost.
Further, the light emitting means 8002 may be a video projection type in which a character or the like is projected onto the inner surface 4680b of the front top top plate 4680, in addition to an illumination type that irradiates colored light onto the inner surface 4680b of the front top top plate 4680.

[Other form 2-2]
As shown in FIG. 146, the pachinko machine 1 according to another embodiment 2-2 pivotally attaches the front end of the front top top plate 4680 to the top main body cover 4520 so that the light emitting means 8002 is attached to the top main body cover 4520. It is provided at the inner edge of the space 4520S on the anti-player side, and the other configuration is the same as in the other embodiment 2-1. In this case, the front top top plate 4680 needs to transmit the light of the light emitting means 8002 from the inner surface 4680b side (rear side) to the outer surface 4680a side (front side). Preferably, it is made of an opaque synthetic resin (for example, milky white synthetic resin).
According to such a structure, the front top plate 4680 stands up at a position close to the player, so that the player can feel the force and can stand out from the outside.

  Since the pachinko machine 1 of the other forms 2-1 and 2-2 is configured as described above, during the execution of the reach production or the reach development production, or during the lottery result or the big hit execution regarding the big hit, Light is emitted to the front top top plate 4680 by swinging the front top top plate 4680 or in a standing posture with the light emitting means 8002 or the top main body cover is covered with the light emitting means 8002 with the front top top plate 4680 closed. Various effects can be performed by irradiating light to the bottom of the 4520.

Note that, when the front top plate 4680 (opening / closing lid) of the front top unit 4500 is opened, heat is released upward from the opening 452a, so that heat does not easily accumulate in the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, for example, the front top plate 4680 is switched at an appropriate interval while the light emitting means 8002 is turned off to open and close the opening 452a, and the design is displayed on the effect display device 1600 suddenly in the standing state several times. If the effect pattern to be set is set, the opening / closing operation of the front top plate 4680 is incorporated into a part of the game to increase the interest of the player, and the heat can be radiated from the opening 452a without being noticed by the player. it can.
Further, the front top plate 4680 of the front top unit 4500 opens and closes the opening 452a by switching between a closed posture and a standing posture in a demonstration irrespective of the progress of the game, that is, regardless of the progress of the game. You may make it do.

  In addition, when the pachinko machine 1 is not performing an effect of raising the front top top plate 4680, the opening 452a is closed by the front top top plate 4680 in the closed posture, so that the top body cover 4520 Even when dust, dust, cigarette dust, etc. do not enter the space 4520S and the front top plate 4680 is in the standing posture, the heated air in the pachinko machine 1 rises and the front top unit 4500 Since an air flow that flows upward and outward from the opening 452a is generated, it is difficult for dust, dirt, dust, and the like to enter the space 4520S.

Although the pachinko machine 1 of other forms 2-1 and 2-2 has been described above, of course, the pachinko machine 1 is not limited to the other forms 2-1 and 2-2. For example, in the other embodiments 2-1 and 2-2, the flip-up type that can open the opening 452a by flipping the front top top plate 4680 (opening / closing lid) on the free end side around the rotation shaft 4680c is adopted. The front top top plate 4680 may have a sliding shutter structure.
Moreover, you may make it provide the front top top plate 4680 of the other forms 2-1 and 2-2 separately in the front and back in one pachinko machine 1.
Further, the front top top plate 4680 does not always need to be fully opened, and may be, for example, half open, and it is desirable that the opening / closing for the purpose of heat dissipation is less noticeable to the player.
In the other embodiments 2-1 and 2-2, the light emitting means 8002 is swingably formed. However, the light emitting means 8002 can be further moved up and down, and light can be emitted from the height of the pachinko machine 1. .

  Further, in the other embodiments 2-1, 2-2, the front top unit 4500 is provided in the door frame 3, but instead of the door frame 3, for example, the upper end of the game board 5 in FIG. The front unit 4500 is attached to the mounting unit of the top unit 4500, and the game board 5 having the front top unit 4500 is attached to the main body frame 4, or the game board 5 is shown in FIG. On the other hand, an attachment portion of the front top unit 4500 may be provided on the upper portion of the main body frame 4 and attached thereto. In this case, the door frame 3 is integrally provided with a transparent bulging portion that can cover other than the upper surface of the front top unit 4500 that protrudes forward from the window portion 1010a.

In the other embodiments 2-1, 2-2, the portion of the front top plate 4680 that is decorated with light is planar, but may be a three-dimensional shape that simulates a character or the like, for example. In that case, the light emitting means 8002 can be a video projection type, and a three-dimensional shape can be decorated more realistically by the projection mapping method. As a result, the visual difference between the front top plate 4680 in the closed position and the standing position becomes large, so that it is easy to attract the attention of the surroundings when changing to the standing position. The crime prevention effect for 452a is also increased.
Further, in the other embodiments 2-1, 2-2, the front top top plate 4680 and the light emitting means 8002 are formed separately at the front and rear positions, but the light emitting means 8002 is incorporated inside the front top top plate 4680. May be.
In addition, it is possible to irradiate the curtains of the island facility with light using the light emitting means 8002 of the other embodiment 2-1, so that the decoration and production of the light are performed in a state of jumping out of the pachinko machine 1.
Further, in the other forms 2-1 and 2-2, the pachinko machine is exemplified as the gaming machine, but it can be applied to other gaming machines such as a sparrow ball machine and an arrangement ball machine, and further, using a game medal The present invention is also applicable to a slot machine that rotates a plurality of drums (rotating drums or reels). In this case, a portion provided with a drum or the like that is visible from the window covering the state visible from the front of the gaming machine corresponds to a gaming area where the game is performed.

[Embodiment]
Next, the pachinko machine 1 according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 147 to 165. Note that the pachinko machine 1 of the embodiment is obtained by mainly changing the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1, and therefore description thereof will be omitted except for those related to the game board 5 in principle. Therefore, in FIGS. 147 to 165 and other drawings, components having the same reference numerals are components having the same or the same function in principle.

[Game board]
As shown in the exploded perspective view of FIG. 150, the game board 5 of the embodiment includes a game panel 1100 having a game area 5a into which a game ball is driven by the player operating the handle 182 of the handle unit 180, A back box 3010 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 and a board holder 1200 attached to the lower back side of the game panel 1100 so as to surround the lower part of the back box 3010.

[Game panel]
As shown in the exploded perspective view of FIG. 150, the gaming panel 1100 includes a base panel 1110 having a predetermined thickness, a front component member 1000 that surrounds the gaming area 5a, and a group of gaming elements that constitute a gaming entity (for details). Will be described later).

[Base Panel]
The base panel 1110 of the embodiment is formed of an opaque plywood board, and has large and small through holes 1112 corresponding to the gaming element group.
The base panel 1110 may be a transparent synthetic resin plate or an opaque synthetic resin plate in addition to an opaque plywood plate.
In FIG. 150, reference numeral 1110t denotes a game ball back cage member attached to the rear surface of the base panel 1110.

[Back box, substrate holder]
As shown in FIG. 150, the back box 3010 has a box shape with the front opened, and is attached to cover the rear side of the upper layer game zone 4823, the lower layer game zone 4825, and the right-handed game zone 4824 described later. In addition, the substrate holder 1200 is attached so as to cover the lower outside of the back box 3010. A main control unit having a main control board 1310 (see the block diagram of FIG. 165) for performing various game controls based on the detection state of the game balls in the game area 5a is attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200. Further, on the rear surface of the back box 3010, a peripheral control unit having a peripheral control board 1510 that performs control related to various effects based on control signals from the main control board 1310 is attached.
In addition, the top plate portion of the back box 3010 is provided with an interference avoiding portion 3010a penetrating into the box at a position where it intersects with the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553, whereby the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 There is an effect that it is possible to avoid the interference and set the top plate height of the back box 3010 to be high, that is, to easily cope with a large production device or the like.

[Game elements]
As shown in the front view of FIG. 147 and the block diagram of FIG.
A function display unit 1400 that displays a game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310 and is attached to the upper left corner of the front component member 1000 so as to be visible to the player side;
A plurality of obstacle nails 2007 that are implanted in the base panel 1110 and randomly change the falling direction of the game ball;
A windmill 2008 that rotates upon contact with a game ball;
A general winning port 4801 in which a privilege is set so that a predetermined number of gaming balls are released by entering a game ball (in terms of control configuration, <general winning port sensor 4872> in the block diagram of FIG. 165). (Refer to the block diagram in FIG. 165)
The first electric shutter plate 4802 <starting-port solenoid 4873> that slides in the front-rear direction can be switched between entering and non-entering (a game ball that receives a game ball falling in a forward state and falls in a reverse state) Is passed through as it is and does not enter the ball) an electric start winning port 4871 <electric start port sensor 4874>;
A plurality of start gates 4803 <gate sensors 4875> for starting a lottery for opening / closing the first shutter plate 4802 of the electric start winning port 4871;
An effect normal symbol display device 4804 for displaying the lottery result of the lottery per ordinary drawing described later by the start gate 4803 for the effect;
A normal symbol hold display device 4805 for effect display for displaying the number of holds corresponding to a normal hold indicator to be described later,
As in the case of the first shutter plate 4802, the electric second shutter plate 4806 <first big prize opening solenoid 4876> can be used to switch between entering and non-entering (opening the winning opening in the reverse state, entering and moving forward) Close the winning opening and not enter) The first big winning opening 4807,
A rotating ball receiving member 4808 <V rotating solenoid 4877> provided in the first grand prize winning port 4807;
A V winning opening 4810 <V winning opening sensor 4878> into which only a game ball placed in the ball receiving recess 4809 of the rotating ball receiving member 4808 can enter,
A general winning port 4801 <general winning port sensor 4872> into which a game ball placed on a tapered circumferential surface inclined downwardly of the rotating ball receiving member 4808 enters,
A second grand prize opening 4812 that can open and close the open / close plate 4811 <second big prize opening solenoid 4879> in an open-open sash window system to allow a lot of game balls to enter;
A fixed start winning port 4813 <fixed starting port sensor 4880> provided on the vertical center line of the game area 5a for starting the lottery related to opening and closing of the first big winning port 4807;
A first display device 4815 formed by a group of display lamps 4814 that produce and display various lottery games associated with entering the fixed start winning port 4813 and the electric start winning port 4871;
A group (three in the embodiment) of symbol display members 4816 showing the first stage in the case of displaying the results of various lottery games accompanying the entry to the fixed start winning opening 4813 and the electric start winning opening 4871 step by step. A formed second display device 4817;
The second (final) in the case where the results of various lottery games that are provided at the upper part of the vertical center line of the game area 5a and are entered into the fixed start winning port 4813 and the electric start winning port 4871 are displayed step by step. ) A third display 4818 indicating the stage;
A fourth symbol display lamp 4819 that complementarily displays the display of the results of various lottery games associated with entering the fixed start winning port 4813 and the electric start winning port 4871;
A special symbol hold display device 4820 for production that displays the number of balls on hold for production on a first special hold number display and a second special hold number display described later,
A decorative light emitting member 4821 provided as appropriate;
Announcement unit 4822 for displaying a message image such as “right-handed”,
A plurality of out guiding sections 1003 <out ball sensor 4881> for finally collecting game balls in the back of the machine;
Timer segment 4882 for production by segment display capable of displaying 5-digit number,
It is roughly composed. Details of the necessary game element group will be described later.

Here, an example of the game content by the said game element group is demonstrated.
The function display unit 1400 provided at the upper left of the game board 5 includes, for example, a first special symbol display composed of eight LEDs, a second special symbol display composed of another eight LEDs, and the like. In the first special symbol display and the second special symbol display, a lottery game (special symbol variation game) is performed in which each special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is displayed in a variable manner. The first and second special symbols are symbols for deriving a lottery result indicating the results of determination of big hit, small hit, and loss (win lottery). And in this embodiment, the said lottery game has the symbol fluctuation | variation which fluctuates and displays each special symbol (1st special symbol, 2nd special symbol) in a 1st special symbol display or a 2nd special symbol display. From the start to the stop, it is executed as one lottery game. Hereinafter, the lottery game related to the first special symbol performed on the first special symbol display may be referred to as “first lottery game”, and the lottery game related to the second special symbol performed on the second special symbol display It may be indicated as “second lottery game”.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a lottery game is started, which of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is used to perform the winning lottery? Is to be selected. Specifically, based on the game ball entering the fixed start winning opening 4813, the lottery game (first lottery game) relating to the first special symbol performed by the first special symbol display is selected, and A lottery game (second lottery game) related to the second special symbol performed on the second special symbol display is selected based on the game ball entering the start winning port 4871. Then, when the winning lottery using the special symbol on the selected side is performed, the eight LEDs are blinked on the symbol display corresponding to the special symbol on the selected side based on the result of the corresponding lottery. Control for starting the fluctuation is performed (main control board 1310). With the symbol variation started in this way, after maintaining the variation state for the variation time selected based on the result of the winning lottery, the big winning symbol (big hit display result), which is a special symbol stopping mode that can recognize the big hit, In the form of either a small symbol (small hit display result), which is a special symbol stop mode that can recognize a hit, or an out symbol (out-of-display result), which is a special symbol stop mode that can recognize a hit By lighting up the 8 LEDs on the symbol display in a predetermined combination (the symbol fluctuation stops), whether the player has won a big hit, won a small hit, or lost (out) Be able to recognize. When the game is stopped in the form of a jackpot symbol, the main control board 1310 executes a jackpot game that allows the player to acquire a game ball (prize ball) as a prize. The big hit game is a game that continues until the open / close plate 4811 of the second grand prize winning port 4812 is opened and closed 15 times, and a lot of prize balls can be awarded to the player. In addition, when the game stops when the small hit symbol appears, the main control board 1310 executes a small hit game in which a prize ball can be acquired by the player. The small hit game is a game that allows a big hit game to be executed when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and it is not possible to obtain a prize ball as much as a big hit game with only the small hit game.

  Here, the small hit game will be described. In this embodiment, there are a plurality of small winning symbols, and depending on the type of the small winning symbol determined in the symbol lottery performed at the same time as the winning lottery, a plurality of small hitting game execution modes to be executed subsequently are performed. It is supposed to be set to one of the modes. Specifically, the small hit game is a game in which the second shutter plate 4806 of the first big prize opening 4807 is operated to allow a game ball to enter the first big prize opening 4807, which is executed this time. Depending on whether the small hit symbol resulting from the small hit game is a plurality of small hit symbols, the opening / closing pattern of the ball opening by the second shutter plate 4806 and the execution mode such as the opening time when opening are set differently. Therefore, the possibility of entering a game ball into the first grand prize opening 4807 differs depending on this execution mode. That is, the execution mode of the small hit game for moving the second shutter plate 4806 backward for a relatively long time (for example, 1.5) is the second shutter plate 4806 for a relatively short time (for example, 0.5 second). It is easier to enter the game ball into the first big prize opening 4807 than the execution mode of the small hit game in which the player moves backward.

  Next, in a small hit game, all the game balls that have entered the first big prize opening 4807 reach the rotating ball receiving member 4808 inside the first big winning opening 4807, and the gaming balls become the rotary ball receiving member 4808. When the ball is received by the ball receiving recess 4809, the game ball that is guided to the V winning opening 4810 side by the rotating operation of the rotating ball receiving member 4808 and is not received by the ball receiving recess 4809 is stored in the rotating ball receiving member 4808. It rolls on the tapered peripheral surface inclined downward and enters the general winning port 4801. When the game ball guided to the V prize opening 4810 side by the rotation operation of the rotating ball receiving member 4808 enters the V prize opening 4810 as described above, the opening / closing plate 4811 of the second big prize opening 4812 is given as a privilege. A jackpot game that opens and closes until the maximum number of opening and closing times is reached.

  Although the details will be described later, the first to third display devices 4815, 4817, and 4818 are configured with a display area larger than both the first special symbol display and the second special symbol display, and the big hit, small The result is that the result of the winning lottery of winning or losing is displayed in a state that the player can recognize more easily than the special symbol described above, and the game is enhanced. As a result, the player can more easily recognize whether the player has won the big hit, won the small hit, or has lost (lost) by checking the first to third display devices 4815, 4817, 4818. Will be able to.

  Although not shown in the function display unit 1400, a first special hold number indicator composed of two LEDs for displaying the number of holds for receiving a game ball in the fixed start winning opening 4813, and an electric start winning prize A second special hold number indicator composed of two LEDs for displaying the number of holds relating to the reception of game balls in the mouth 4871 and four lottery results determined by the passing of the game balls to the start gate 4803 are displayed. There are provided a normal symbol display composed of two LEDs and a normal retention indicator composed of two LEDs for displaying the number of suspensions relating to the passage of the game ball with respect to the start gate 4803.

  Here, the first special reserve number display unit notifies the player of the number of winning lotteries on the first special symbol side that is held in an unexecuted state (hereinafter also referred to as the first reserved stored number). Is. The first reserved memory number is incremented by “1” when the game ball wins the fixed start winning opening 4813, and is subtracted by “1” when the first lottery game is started. Accordingly, when a game ball is received in the fixed start winning port 4813 during the period in which the first lottery game is being performed, the first reserved memory number is further added and a predetermined upper limit number (first upper limit number, book In the embodiment, "4") is accumulated.

  In addition, the second special reserve number display device notifies the player of the number of memories of the winning lottery on the second special symbol side that is held in an unexecuted state (hereinafter also referred to as the second reserved memory number). It is. The second reserved memory number is incremented by “1” when a game ball wins the electric start winning opening 4871, while it is decremented by “1” when the second lottery game is started. Accordingly, when a game ball is received in the electric start winning opening 4871 within the period in which the second lottery game is being performed, the second reserved memory number is further added and a predetermined upper limit number (second upper limit number, book In the embodiment, "2") is accumulated.

  In addition, in the normal symbol display, when it is determined whether or not it is a normal hit (lottery per common symbol), normal symbol variation is performed to vary a plurality of types of normal symbols based on the result of the lottery per common symbol. Is called. This normal symbol variation is a normal symbol pattern (normal result display result) that is a normal symbol stop mode that can recognize the normal symbol after maintaining the variation state for the variation time selected based on the result of lottery per standard symbol. When the player is stopped in the form of a normal symbol that is a normal symbol that can be recognized as being out of place (usage display result), the player loses whether or not he / she wins the normal (normal) You will be able to recognize if you have lost. If the normal winning symbol is stopped, the first shutter plate 4802 of the electric start winning prize port 4871 moves forward to enter a state where a ball can be entered.

  Further, the normal hold indicator notifies the player of the number of lotteries stored per drawing that are held in an unexecuted state (hereinafter also referred to as the number of reserved drawings). The number of stored general symbols is incremented by “1” when the game ball is received at the start gate 4803 disposed on the game board 5, and is subtracted by “1” when the normal symbol variation is started. Therefore, when a game ball is accepted by the start gate 4803 within the period during which the normal symbol variation is performed, the number of the common figure holding memory is further added and a predetermined upper limit number (the common figure upper limit number, in the present embodiment). "4") is accumulated.

  In the present embodiment, the first lottery game and the second lottery game are configured not to be executed at the same time, and the symbol variation using the special symbol (the first lottery game or the second lottery game) is completed. When the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number are both “1” or more, the second lottery game based on the second reserved memory number is preferentially executed. In the present embodiment, the symbol variation using the special symbol (the first lottery game or the second lottery game) and the normal symbol variation can be executed simultaneously.

  As mentioned above, although the example of the game content by the game element group of embodiment was demonstrated, of course, you may add various variations, such as big hit, medium hit, and small hit.

[Details of game area and game element group]
In the game area 5a of the embodiment, the above-described game element groups are arranged in three game zones so that the fun of the game is maximized.
That is, the game area 5a includes the upper game zone 4823 corresponding to the first game area 5a1 in FIG. 99A, the right game zone 4824 corresponding to the second game area 5a2 in FIG. 99A, and the third game in FIG. 99A. It is divided into a lower game zone 4825 corresponding to the area 5a3.

[Upper game zone]
The upper-layer game zone 4823 includes the above-described obstacle nail 2007 of the game element group, the windmill 2008, the general winning port 4801, the second display device 4817, and the third display device 4818.
At the lower edge of the upper game zone 4823, a shelf-like boundary rail 4826 is provided between the lower game zone 4825 and the lower game zone 4825 so that a game ball does not fall into the lower game zone 4825. A diving portion 4827 provided in the middle of 4826 (on the vertical center line of the game area 5a) communicates with the lower game zone 4825 in the size of one game ball. The details of the diving portion 4827 will be described in the section of the lower game zone 4825.
In addition, the boundary rail 4826 is provided with a gradient of inclination that goes down in the left-right direction with the diving portion 4827 as an apex, and is provided with out guiding portions 1003 at both ends that have been lowered.

  In addition, at the lower corner portion of the upper layer gaming zone 4823 on the inner rail 1002 side (left side in FIGS. 147 and 148), the out guiding portion 1003 of the lower layer gaming zone 4825 passes between the inner rail 1002 and the lower layer gaming zone 4825. Even if game balls that exceed the discharge capacity temporarily concentrate on the out guide part 1003 on the inner rail 1002 side of the boundary rail 4826, the overflowed game balls will remain in the out bypass 4828. It flows through the lower guidance zone 4825 to the out guidance part 1003. The so-called out-ball with no possibility of entering the ball can cause the player to have negative emotions, and the game can be played comfortably by quickly collecting it and shortening the time it touches the player's eyes. Can be made.

[Second display device]
The second display device 4817 is formed of three circular symbol display members 4816 arranged side by side on the rear side of the boundary rail 4826. In the case where the result is displayed step by step, the display proceeds to the display by the third display device 4818. In the case of proceeding to the display by the third display device 4818, the symbol “GO” is displayed on all three symbol display members 4816 When the process is completed in the first stage, a symbol “x” is displayed on at least one of the three symbol display members 4816.

  The second display device 4817 is a transparent cover plate 4883 that is attached to the front surface of the base panel 1110 with the front surface of the symbol display member 4816 covering a part of the through-hole 1112 and is integral with the boundary rail 4826. Therefore, even if game balls frequently pass through the front surface of the symbol display member 4816, there is no possibility that the display surface is damaged. In the embodiment, although not shown, an appropriate pattern is printed on the front surface of the cover plate 4883 by printing or sealing, and a pattern related to the pattern on the front surface of the cover plate 4883 is provided behind the cover plate 4883. The decorative plate on which is formed is erected at an appropriate interval (preferably within the thickness of the through hole 1112 of the base panel 1110). By doing so, for example, a three-dimensional effect can be given to the game area 5a such that a plant pattern is drawn on the front face and the back decorative board of the cover board 4883 to give a visual depth to the background.

[Third display device]
The third display device 4818 is provided on the upper part of the vertical center line of the game area 5a, and displays the lottery results associated with entering the fixed start winning port 4813 in a stepwise manner as described above. Shows the second (final) stage.
This third display device 4818 is generally configured by a seven-segment display member 4884 corresponding to a one-digit number and a display frame 4885 as a mounting base of the display member 4884, and the whole is penetrated by the base panel 1110. It is attached to the production back cover 4886 that covers the rear surface of the hole 1112 so as to be movable up and down, and can be viewed from the front side (player side) through a frame-shaped center member 2500 that borders the front side of the through hole 1112.

[Display material]
As shown in FIG. 153, the display member 4884 of the third display device 4818 has a cylindrical segment partition frame 4884a penetrating in the front-rear direction that represents the outline of each segment of the 7-segment display. A plurality of light emitting elements 4884c are installed in each frame of the segment partition frame 4884a (including two upper and lower frames surrounded by seven segments), and the front opening of the segment partition frame 4884a is further provided. A lens 4884d is attached to the portion. This makes it possible to produce an effective performance using the entire part surrounded by 7 segments as well as a single digit. The display member 4884 may be an image display device such as liquid crystal or organic EL.

[Display frame]
The display frame 4885 of the third display device 4818 has a substantially hemispherical frame main body 4887 that swells forward, and arms that protrude from the left and right sides of the center of the frame main body 4887 and hold the fist downward. A first movable portion (hereinafter also referred to as an arm-shaped movable portion) 4888 having a shape and projecting in a shape (opening) in the direction (angle) at about 7:25 on the left and right sides of the lower side of the frame main body 4887. And a second transparent movable portion 4889 (hereinafter also referred to as a “foot-shaped movable portion”) and a colored transparent sunglasses-shaped display cover portion 4890 attached to the display frame 4885 so as to cover a part of the display of the display member 4884. It has a spherical bomb character shape that is anthropomorphized as a whole.

[First movable part (arm-shaped movable part)]
The arm-shaped movable portion 4888 is formed by connecting left and right arm members 4888a, which are resin molded products, with an arm shaft 4888c to which a driven gear 4888b is fixed at the center, and the arm shaft 4888c is attached to the inside of the display frame 4485. The arm member 4888a can be rotated in both directions of the captive direction and the return direction by being pivotally attached to the arm support plate 4891.

[Second movable part (foot shape movable part)]
The entire foot-shaped movable portion 4889 is a resin molded product, and the left and right foot members 4889a are pivotally attached to the joint shaft holes 4889b through the foot joint shafts 4892 projecting from the display frame 4885. Furthermore, when the sector gears 4889c provided at the ends of each other are engaged with each other, the left and right foot members 4889a swing symmetrically with respect to the vertical center line.

[Arm-shaped moving part + Foot-shaped moving part]
The arm-shaped movable portion 4888 and the foot-shaped movable portion 4889 are connected so that the respective operations can proceed simultaneously through a lifting slider 4893 that is supported so as to be vertically movable up and down inside the display frame 4885.
That is, the arm-shaped movable portion 4888 meshes with the rack gear 4894 formed on the lift slider 4893 with the driven gear 4888b of the arm shaft 4888c, while the foot-shaped movable portion 4889 is provided at the upper end of the right foot member 4889a. A connecting pin 4895 projecting from the lifting slider 4893 is loosely fitted into the elongated hole 4889d.
In the state of FIG. 156 in which the arm-shaped movable portion 4888 holds the fist downward and the foot-shaped movable portion 4889 is opened in the direction of about 7:25, the lift slider 4893 is at the highest position, and the lift slider 4893 The raised position is maintained by the own weight (balance) of the arm-shaped movable portion 4888 and the foot-shaped movable portion 4889. Therefore, when the external slider 4893 is forcibly pushed down by applying an external force that resists its own weight, the arm-shaped movable portion 4888 is rotated by the meshing of the driven gear 4888b and the rack gear 4894, and the arm member 4888a is changed in the direction of life. At the same time, the foot-shaped movable part 4889 is rotated about the joint shaft hole 4889b by the downward movement of the connecting pin 4895 of the lift slider 4893 and the one leg member 4889a is rotated around the joint shaft hole 4889b and meshed with the fan-shaped gear 4889c. The other leg member 4889a is also rotated around the joint shaft hole 4889b, and as a whole, a spherical bomb type character raises his fist up and jumps up both feet in the direction of about 8:20 as shown in FIG. To change. Thereafter, when the external force applied to the lift slider 4893 is removed, all of them move in the reverse direction due to their own weights of the arm-shaped movable portion 4888 and the foot-shaped movable portion 4889, and return to the original position (posture) in FIG.

[Display cover]
The sunglasses-shaped display cover portion 4890 is fixedly attached to the frame body 4887 so as to cover a part of the display of the display member 4884 as described above. The color of the display cover portion 4890 is very thin, and therefore there is no possibility of hindering the display of the display member 4884. Note that a part of the display of the display member 4884 is made difficult to see by making the color of the display cover part 4890 darker or opaque, and the display cover part 4890 is directed upward, for example, with sunglasses after the display change stops. The display member 4884 may be completely displayed by rotating the display member or switching to an electrically transparent state. By doing so, a part of the display member 4884 is hidden, for example, first, the player's expectation is increased by not knowing whether the display is “0” or “8”. The fun of the game can be further enhanced by increasing the head of the result display, such as exploding joy at the moment when the whole picture is visible.

[Production back cover]
The production back cover 4886 covers the rear surface of the through hole 1112 of the base panel 1110. As shown in the exploded perspective views of FIGS. 158 and 159, the back cover main body 4896 positioned in front and the back cover And a lifting device 4897 attached to the rear surface of the main body 4896.

[Back cover body]
The back cover main body 4896 is a front open box shape surrounding the rear surface of the through hole 1112 corresponding to the center member 2500, and forms an effect space 4898 communicating with the opening of the center member 2500. The back cover body 4896 has a curved shape in which the bottom portion is lowered from the front toward the back as shown in the central longitudinal sectional view of FIG. 153 in order to ensure a sufficient vertical width (height) in the depth of the production space 4898. It has become. In addition, a plurality of flanges 4899 extending in the front-rear direction are formed side by side at the bottom of the back cover body 4896. This kite 4899 is for expressing the waves of the sea. For example, when an employee opens the door frame 3 to deal with a trouble, even if a game ball is accidentally dropped in the production space 4898, The game ball can be rolled out along the 畝 4899 and easily removed. By the way, if the back cover body 4896 has no front-rear hook 4899 (a streak guiding portion for scraping the game ball), the game ball rolls freely in the lateral direction, and it takes time to capture it. Note that arranging the ridges 4899 in the horizontal direction and arranging the grooves in the horizontal direction are merely synonymous differences and are substantially synonymous.

[lift device]
The elevating device 4897 moves the third display device 4818 up and down within the production back cover 4886. As shown in the exploded perspective views of FIGS. 158 and 159, the rear surface of the back wall 4896r of the back cover body 4896 is provided. A fixed elevating base 4900 attached to the elevating base 4900, an elevating panel 4901 attached to the elevating guide shaft 4918 erected between the elevating base 4900 and the back cover main body 4896, and a rear surface of the elevating panel 4901. A lifting / lowering motor 4904 that lifts and lowers the lifting / lowering panel 4901 by engaging a pinion gear 4903 with the lifting / lowering rack gear 4902 formed is schematically configured.

[Third display device and lifting device]
The display frame 4885 of the third display device 4818 is integrally joined to the lifting panel 4901 of the lifting device 4897. Specifically, the connecting rod 4905 protruding from the rear surface of the display frame 4485 of the third display device 4818 is screwed to the lift panel 4901 through the communication port 4896w provided in the rear wall 4896r of the back cover body 4896. Has been. Therefore, the third display device 4818 is lifted together with the lift panel 4901 as shown in FIG. 156 when the lift motor 4904 is driven, and conversely when the lift panel 4901 is lowered as shown in FIG. Descend with. Note that the lifting device 4897 is provided with a tension spring 4906 that pulls the lifting panel 4901 upward. The weight of the lifting panel 4901 and the third display device 4818 is supported by tension elasticity to reduce the load on the lifting motor 4904. It is like that.

The lifting device 4897 also functions as means for applying an external force necessary to move the arm-shaped movable portion 4888 and the foot-shaped movable portion 4889 of the third display device 4818.
That is, as shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 158, a key-type pressing member 4907 whose front surface is a squib wire shape protrudes forward from the upper end of the center on the lifting base 4900 that is a fixed element of the lifting device 4897. As shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 153, the lower end of the pressing member 4907 has an appropriate gap at the top of the liftable lift slider 4893 connected to the arm-shaped movable portion 4888 and the foot-shaped movable portion 4889. Opposite in the state provided.
Therefore, when the third display device 4818 is lifted by the lifting device 4897, the arm-shaped movable portion 4888 and the foot-shaped movable portion 4889 are initially set until the top portion of the lifting slider 4893 comes into contact with the lower end of the pressing member 4907, that is, until it rises by the gap. When the third display device 4818 continues to rise, the top of the lift slider 4893 abuts against the lower end of the pressing member 4907 to prevent the lift of the lift slider 4893. Since the lift slider 4893 is forced to be pushed down, the spherical bomb type character lifts his fist to the state of hunting as shown in FIG. 157 and jumps up by jumping both feet in the direction of about 8:20. To change. In this way, the third display device 4818 is linked to the ascent by the elevating device 4897, and operates as if the fist is lifted up and jumped up while both feet are opened.
On the other hand, when the third display device 4818 shifts from the raised position in FIG. 157 to the lowered position, the external force applied to the lifting slider 4893 is removed by the lowering, so the arm-shaped movable portion 4888 and the foot-shaped movable portion. The lift slider 4893 relatively rises due to its own weight, and finally the position and posture of the third display device 4818 returns to the state shown in FIG.

  When the arm-shaped movable unit 4888 and the foot-shaped movable unit 4889 in the stationary state in FIG. 156 are changed to the jumped state in FIG. 157, the lifting slider 4893 in the stationary state, the arm-shaped movable unit 4888 and the foot-shaped movable unit are movable. Since a large force is required to start the swinging of the portion 4889 at the same time, in the embodiment, as described above, there is a slight gap between the heating wire type pressing member 4907 on the lifting device 4897 side and the top of the lifting slider 4893. First, only the lift slider 4893 is raised, and the arm-shaped movable portion 4888 and the foot-shaped movable portion 4889 are swung with a time difference corresponding to the gap. As a result, the load applied to the lifting motor 4904 of the lifting device 4897 can be distributed and reduced.

  The center member 2500 surrounding the third display device 4818 has a warp inlet 2501 that is open on the outer peripheral surface on the left side in front view so that a game ball in the upper game zone 4823 can enter, The warp outlet 2502 opened in the frame so that the game ball B that has entered the warp inlet 2501 can be released, and the game ball released from the warp outlet 2502 rolls in the left-right direction and then moves to the upper game zone 4823. A stage shelf 2503 that can be discharged is provided, and a game ball falling from the center of the stage shelf 2503 can enter the diving portion 4827 with a high probability.

[Lower level game zone]
As shown in FIGS. 148, 153, 154, 160 to 163, the lower game zone 4825 includes the first display device 4815, the start gate 4803, and the normal symbol display device 4804. , A fixed start winning port 4813, and a game ball that has entered the lower game zone 4825 from the diving portion 4827 of the upper game zone 4823 has a plurality of (three in the embodiment) distribution units 4829a to 4829c to be described later. After that, it is sorted whether the ball enters the fixed start winning port 4813, passes through the start gate 4803 and is collected by the out guidance unit 1003, or is collected by the out guidance unit 1003 without obtaining any benefits. It is done.

[Dive part]
As shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 153, the diving portion 4827 includes a diving pocket 4830 that opens upward at the lower part of the upper game zone 4823, a passing type diving sensor 4831 provided in the diving pocket 4830, and a diving pocket. The side that moves the game ball in the front-rear direction from the front to the back, from the back to the front, such as rolling the game ball that has entered 4830 to the rear of the game panel 1100 and then rolling forward to the front position of the game panel 1100. And a front-rear bending passage 4832 having a V-shape.

[First sorter]
Of the distribution portions 4829a to 4829c, the first distribution portion 4829a includes a spherical passage 4834 that intersects with the end of the front-rear bending passage 4832 in the left-right direction via a step portion 4833 that is substantially one sphere, and the step portion The first electric distribution piece 4835 <first distribution motor 4908>, which is provided in 4833 and always swings in a wiper shape, and the game ball that has fallen to the stepped portion 4833 through the front / rear bending path 4832 is the first electric distribution Depending on the swing timing of the piece 4835, the ball path 4834 is divided into a rightward traveling path on the right side and a leftward traveling path on the left side. The right path of the ball path 4834 is directly connected to a third distribution unit 4829c, which will be described later, via a screw path 4836 descending in a spiral shape, while the left path is indirectly connected via the second distribution unit 4829b. It is connected to the third distribution unit 4829c.

  As will be described later, the third distribution unit 4829c is the final stage in which a ball can be expected to enter the target fixed start winning opening 4813. Therefore, the distribution to the right course directly connected to the third distribution unit 4829c is performed. Is what the player wants. Therefore, the player tries to enter the diving portion 4827 aiming at the timing to be distributed to the right course, but the diving portion 4827 has a game ball that has entered the diving pocket 4830 with respect to the first distribution portion 4829a. Since it is bent in the front-rear direction by the front-rear bending passage 4832 and reaches the first electric distribution piece 4835, the change in the front-rear direction is difficult for the player in front to understand, and the timing is accordingly It is difficult to catch. Therefore, it becomes difficult to match the entry timing of the jumping portion 4827 with the movement of the first electric distribution piece 4835, so that the elements of the game's original luck / bad luck are improved and the interest of the game can be increased.

[Second sorting section]
The second distribution portion 4829b connected to the left path of the ball passage 4834 of the first distribution portion 4829a includes a shallow swirl-shaped circular turning portion 4837 connected to the left end of the ball passage 4834, and the circular turning portion 4837. A plurality of (three in the embodiment) ball drop openings 4838 penetrating in the central area of the game, and a forward tilting face 4839 that receives the game balls falling from the ball drop openings 4838 and guides them to a substantially front position of the game panel 1100. The second electric distribution piece 4840 <second distribution motor 4909>, which is provided below the front end portion of the front tilting part 4839 and swings like a wiper at all times, and the second electric distribution piece 4840 tilted to the left in FIG. A right rear passage 4841 that sometimes communicates with a left front passage 4842 that communicates when the second electric distribution piece 4840 stands up, and includes a first distribution portion 4829a. Game balls distributed to the left path is further adapted to be distributed to the right rear channel 4841 and the front left channel 4842 by the swinging timing of the second electric distribution piece 4840. The right back passage 4841 is connected to the third distribution portion 4829c, while the left front passage 4842 is connected to the start gate 4803.

  Here, both the first electric distribution piece 4835 of the first distribution unit 4829a and the second electric distribution piece 4840 of the second distribution unit 4829b are always oscillated, but both are oscillated at different periods. It is set to be. Specifically, the second electric distribution piece 4840 is set so as to swing slowly with a period of slightly less than two times with respect to the first electric distribution piece 4835, so that the swing timing of both is shifted. Is set. By doing so, when the first distribution unit 4829a and the second distribution unit 4829b are synchronously headed from the first distribution unit 4829a to the second distribution unit 4829b, the distribution direction is generally known. The adverse effect that the existence value of the distribution unit 4829b is significantly reduced can be prevented.

[Third distribution section]
The third distribution unit 4829c is a ball swivel type generally called “Kroon”, which is located at the center of the lower center of the lower game zone 4825 and on the vertical center line of the game area 5a in the same manner as the diving unit 4827. It consists of a distribution device 4843 and a distribution base 4844 provided immediately below the distribution device 4843.

[Distributor]
The sorting device 4843 includes a ball rolling member 4845 that vigorously rolls the game ball and turns it by inertia, a rotating member 4846 that can rotate around a vertical axis passing through the center of the ball rolling member 4845, and the rotating member 4846. And a driving device 4847 that supports the motor and rotates it in a fixed direction at a low speed.

[Ball rolling member]
The ball rolling member 4845 has a bottom wall portion 4849 that gently slopes down toward the center of a circle like a shallow ridge and has a circular hole 4848 at the center, and a short cylindrical shape that surrounds the outer periphery of the bottom wall portion 4849. And a spherical channel curved in an annular shape composed of the peripheral wall portion 4850, and, as shown in FIG. Throwing rods 4851a and 4851b to be obtained are provided at two front and rear positions.
Then, a screw passage 4836 connected to the right path of the ball passage 4834 of the first distribution portion 4829a is connected to the throwing rod 4851a in front of the ball rolling member 4845, while the screw rod 4851b in the rear is connected to the throwing rod 4851b. The right rear passage 4841 of the second distribution portion 4829b is connected, so that the first distribution portion 4829a passes through the rightward path and the screw passage 4836 and is introduced into the ball rolling member 4845 from the front introduction rod 4851a. The game ball and the game ball thrown into the ball rolling member 4845 from the rear throwing rod 4851b through the left course from the first sorting portion 4829a and the right back passage 4841 of the second sorting portion 4829b are the peripheral wall portion 4850. It turns around the bottom wall 4849 in a clockwise direction in FIG. 154 by inertia while acting a centrifugal force toward the side. Since the turning game ball gradually loses centrifugal force as the speed decreases, the game ball descends gradually toward the circular hole 4848 due to the downward inclination of the bottom wall portion 4849.

  The ball rolling member 4845 receives game balls from the two input rods 4851a and 4851b as described above. In the embodiment, the game balls are input from the input rod 4851a connected to the screw passage 4836 having a large drop. The speed of the ball is higher than that of the game ball thrown from the throwing basket 4851b. Therefore, depending on the throwing timing, one game ball may collide with the other game ball and develop into an unexpected development. Thus, by providing a plurality of throwing rods on one ball rolling member 4845 and throwing the game balls at different design speeds (inclination distance and angle), the game contingency is increased and the interest is effectively increased. be able to.

  As shown in FIG. 162, the ball rolling member 4845 of the embodiment contacts the lower side of the center of the game ball placed on the bottom wall portion 4849 and guides the game ball to a position slightly away from the peripheral wall portion 4850. An obtained ball guiding portion 4852 is provided. The ball guiding portion 4852 has a wedge-shaped protrusion with a cross section that is inclined downward (about 20 ° with respect to the horizontal line) toward the contact point with the bottom wall portion 4849 of the game ball, as shown in FIG. You may make it the form which inclined the inclination of the bottom wall part 4849 from the middle.

[Rotating member]
The rotating member 4846 has a distribution disk 4853 which is slightly smaller in diameter than the circular hole 4848 of the ball rolling member 4845 and provided at a height substantially equal to or slightly lower than the circular hole 4848, and an edge of the distribution disk 4853. And a plurality of (four in the embodiment) are provided at positions that are point-symmetric with respect to the center of the sorting disk 4853 (= the center of the bottom wall portion 4849). A game ball receiving port 4855 and a game ball that falls under the receiving port 4855 so as to make one of the receiving ports 4855 a specific receiving port 4855v are placed outside the drooping cylinder 4854. A lateral feed rod 4856 that feeds horizontally, a cross-shaped partition wall 4857 that partitions adjacent ones of all the receiving ports 4855 including the specific receiving port 4855v, and a drive device 4847 described later. A bushing 4859 for inserting the shaft 4858, schematically composed.

[Driver]
As shown in FIGS. 160 and 161, the drive device 4847 includes a drive motor 4860 provided on the lower surface of the distribution base 4844, a drive shaft 4858 protruding upward from the upper surface of the distribution base 4844, and a distribution base. And a gear group 4861 that is located inside the base 4844 and transmits the rotation of the drive motor 4860 to the drive shaft 4858. The drive shaft 4858 is inserted into the bearing cylinder 4859 of the rotation member 4846 from below, and the rotation member 4846 The rotating member 4846 is rotated at a low speed in a certain direction (in the embodiment, counterclockwise opposite to the turning direction of the game ball in the ball rolling member 4845).

[Distribution base]
The distribution base 4844 is fixedly attached to the lower part of the lower game zone 4825, and has a pocket-shaped fixed start winning opening 4813 on the front surface thereof as shown in the enlarged view of FIG. A winning passage 4862 that leads to the fixed start winning opening 4813 is provided, and a disengagement passage 4863 that leads to the out guiding portion 1003 of the lower game zone 4825 is formed on both sides of the winning passage 4862 on the front surface.
Further, an upper part of the distribution base 4844 is provided with a separation sorting path 4864 for receiving a game ball that has entered the receiving port 4855 other than the special receiving port 4855v of the rotating member 4846 in the sorting device 4843 and guiding it to the detaching passage 4863, and a rotation. A prize sorting passage 4865 that receives a game ball that has entered the special receiving port 4855v of the member 4846 and guides it to the prize passage 4862, and a game ball that has jumped out of the ball rolling member 4845 in the sorting device 4843 and dropped to the game hall side. A drop recovery passage 4866 for recovery is formed.

[Outgoing sorting passage]
As shown in FIGS. 160 to 162, the disengagement sorting passage 4864 protrudes from the upper surface of the sorting base 4844 so as to project at a height close to the drooping cylinder portion 4854 of the rotating member 4846 of the sorting device 4843. It is formed of a substantially U-shaped enclosure frame 4867 having a curved portion having substantially the same diameter as the member 4846, and enters the receiving port 4855 other than the special receiving port 4855v of the rotating member 4846 so as to straighten the inside of the drooping cylinder portion 4854. The falling game ball is received and guided to the detaching passage 4863.

[Winning sorting passage]
As shown in FIGS. 160 to 162, the winning sorting passage 4865 is formed by a corridor 4868 attached to the upper surface of the sorting base 4844 so as to surround the periphery of the rotating member 4846. The game balls that have entered the special receiving port 4855v of the member 4846 and are laterally fed out of the drooping cylinder portion 4854 by the lateral feed rod 4856 are received and guided to the front winning path 4862. If a game ball enters the special receiving port 4855v at a timing when the special receiving port 4855v of the rotating member 4846 is positioned above the winning path 4862 as shown in FIG. Falls directly into the winning path 4862.

[Fall collection passage]
The fall recovery passage 4866 includes an upper surface of a sorting base 4844 inclined downward and a hook-shaped step 4869 provided at the rear of the sorting base 4844. The game balls that have jumped out and dropped are collected in the bowl-shaped step 4869 and collected together with the out balls to the game hall side.

[Countermeasure against sorting device]
Dotsukigoto for the ball-swivel type sorter strikes the front of the pachinko machine with the timing when the game ball turning on the bottom wall approaches the specific entrance and vibrates the pachinko machine with the impact. The trajectory of the game ball is changed from the turning direction to the radial direction by vibration to enter the target specific entrance.
On the other hand, the ball rolling member 4845 of the sorting device 4843 of the embodiment is slightly separated from the peripheral wall portion 4850 by the ball guiding portion 4852 when the game ball rolls on the bottom wall portion 4849 by inertia while receiving the action of centrifugal force. Since it is guided to the position, there is a slight gap as shown in FIG. 162 (a) even when the game ball is closest to the peripheral wall portion 4850.
Therefore, a player who makes a throbbing strike impacts the pachinko machine 1 as shown by arrow F in FIG. 162 (b), vibrates the ball rolling member 4845 in the front-rear direction, and hits the game ball with the peripheral wall 4850. Even if the trajectory is changed in the radial direction, there is a gap between the peripheral wall portion 4850 and the game ball, so that the movement of the peripheral wall portion 4850 is not immediately transmitted to the game ball. In addition, the ball guiding portion 4852 that is in contact with the game ball is obliquely below the center of the game ball and sinks to the lower side of the game ball due to vibration, and the game ball is moved as shown by an arrow M in FIG. 162 (b). It tries to move in a direction different from the direction intended by the unauthorized person. Therefore, it is possible to make it substantially difficult.

[Others]
In addition, in the lower game zone 4825c, a passing-type first ball sensor 4870a that detects a game ball passing through the right path in the ball passage 4834 of the first distribution unit 4829a and a right back passage 4841 of the second distribution unit 4829b. A passing-type second ball sensor 4870b that detects a game ball passing through the first ball sensor 4870b is provided, and the first and second ball sensors 4870a and 4870b detect the game ball to thereby distribute the third sorting unit 4829c. The number of balls entering 4843 can be managed. Then, the number of balls entered into the sorting device 4843 and the number of balls detected by the start gate 4803 through the left front passage 4842 of the second sorting unit 4829b are summed up and detected by the jump sensor 4831 of the jump unit 4827. By comparing with the number of balls that have entered the lower game zone 4825, it is possible to know the existence of game balls that have not entered the lower game zone 4825, and thereby warn that some sort of fraud is suspected. Can be issued to the administrator.

  In the embodiment, since the flow path from the diving portion 4827 to the fixed start winning port 4813 is long and the residence time of the game ball is long, for example, the game ball according to the number of winning lotteries held in an unexecuted state It will be difficult to make a so-called stop to temporarily stop the launch of the fire. Therefore, there is an effect that can effectively prevent the stop hitting which is disadvantageous for the game hall.

[Right-handed gaming zone]
The right-handed game zone 4824 includes the above-described obstacle nail 2007, start gate 4803, electric start winning port 4871, first big winning port 4807, and rotating ball receiving member 4808 in the order of game balls. , A general winning port 4801 into which a game ball placed on a tapered circumferential surface inclined downward toward the rear of the rotating ball receiving member 4808 enters, a V winning port 4810, a general winning port 4801, a second large winning port 4812, The out guidance unit 1003 is shared with the lower game zone 4825.

  The right-handed game zone 4824 is connected to the upper game zone 4823 through a communication passage portion 5a4 through which a game ball launched with a specific strong firing force can pass, as in FIGS. 99A to 99I and FIG. The details of the communication passage 5a4 are the same as those described with reference to FIGS. 99A to 99I and FIG.

Further, the right-handed game zone 4824 is provided with a right-handed ball flow path that goes around the above-mentioned game element group.
This right-handed ball flow path
An upper free fall region 4910 formed immediately below the outlet portion of the communication passage portion 5a4 and having a plurality of obstacle nails 2007 and a start gate 4803;
In addition, a first ball 4911 that opens upward at the lower end of the free fall region 4910 and receives a game ball that has passed through the start gate 4803 and a game ball that has simply passed through the side without passing through the start gate 4803,
A branch region 4912 having a first shutter plate 4802 of an electric start winning prize port 4871 in a direction in which four obstacle nails 2007 are planted in the shape of a corner post and continue straight to the end of the first rod 4911.
A second rod 4913 that opens to the left in FIG. 147 of the branch region 4912 and bypasses the outside of the electric start winning port 4871 in a horizontal U shape and joins the flow path of the branch region 4912 in the straight drop direction;
A third collar 4914 that is continuous from the second collar 4913 and includes the upper surface of the first shutter plate 4802 of the first grand prize winning port 4807 in a part of the flow path;
A lower free fall region 4915 having a plurality of obstacle nails 2007 and a general winning port 4801 located between the second large winning port 4812 and immediately below the outlet portion of the third rod 4914 is formed.

In the right-handed game zone 4824, as shown in FIGS. 147 and 164, the right-handed ball channel is placed on the inner surface side of the boundary wall 4916 separating the upper game zone 4823 and the lower game zone 4825. An illumination board 4917 for effecting illumination from the direction is provided. The lighting board 4917 has a front end face or a rear face that is exclusively opaque when viewed from the player side depending on the position and orientation of the lighting board 4917, and the light emitted from the light-emitting LED does not easily enter the field of view. It is possible to suppress glare while shining brightly.
The right-handed game zone 4824 is provided with a timer segment 4882 using a segment indicator capable of displaying a 5-digit number in the vicinity of the terminal end of the third base 4914. It is designed to enhance the interest of the game by giving a notice.

The pachinko machine 1 of the embodiment has the above-described configuration, and the outline of the game is as described above. However, to further supplement the explanation, the player first throws a game ball into the upper game zone 4823 and jumps in. Aiming to enter part 4827. Of course, only a part of the ball enters the diving section 4827 as intended, and there are those that enter the general winning opening 4801 and others that enter the out guidance section 1003 and finish the game.
In this upper-layer game zone 4823, the ball enters the diving section 4827 and enters the lower-layer game zone 4825. When a game ball enters the fixed start winning port 4801 through the above-described multiple assignments, the first special symbol display A lottery game (first lottery game) related to the first special symbol is performed, and in this first lottery game, the first display device 4815, the second display device 4817, and the third display device 4818 step by step. With the effect display, the player is expected to have hit the above-mentioned big hit game or small hit game. That is, based on the progress of the lottery game described above, first, the display lamp 4814 of the first display device 4815 is turned on in order from the bottom to the top, so that the start of the lottery is displayed as if the fire of the lead wire is burning. Subsequently, the lottery result of the first stage is displayed with the contents of the three symbols displayed on the second display device 4817 (for example, three “GO” displays are arranged), and finally the final stage is displayed on the third display device 4818. Is displayed (specifically, a one-digit number is displayed on a large segment display, or a spherical bomb-type character jumping operation is performed by the display frame 4885, the arm-shaped movable unit 4888, and the foot-shaped movable unit 4889). Make the player recognize the hit and hit.

Of the game balls launched into the upper game zone 4823, a part of the game balls that entered the diving portion 4827 but did not enter the fixed start winning port 4801 pass through the second distribution portion 4829b. When the game ball passes through the start gate 4803, the signal is detected by the gate sensor 4875, and the above-described normal symbol lottery regarding the operation of the first shutter plate 4802 is performed.
When the winning symbol (1/10) is obtained in the normal symbol lottery, the first shutter plate 4802 of the right-handed gaming zone 4824 moves forward by an amount corresponding to the lottery result and can enter the electric start winning opening 4871. When the time elapses, the first shutter plate 4802 moves backward to make it impossible to enter the electric start winning port 4871.
The lottery result is displayed on the effect normal symbol display device 4804 (specifically, a one-digit number is displayed on the segment display).

  In addition, after the big hit game is over, the short game state where the variation time of the normal symbol in the normal symbol lottery is a shortened time (for example, 1 second) shorter than the variation time in the normal game state (for example, 120 seconds) The lottery game related to the second special symbol (second lottery game) performed by the second special symbol display device by directly aiming at the start gate 4803 of the right-handed gaming zone 4824, not the diving portion 4827. It becomes possible to advance the game. The short-time gaming state is terminated under a predetermined termination condition (for example, a 10-time variation display of a special symbol) and returns to the normal gaming state.

  The embodiments of the present invention have been described above, but the present invention is of course not limited to the above-described embodiments. For example, in the embodiment, a pachinko machine is illustrated as a gaming machine, but it can also be applied to other gaming machines such as a sparrow ball machine and an arrangement ball machine, and further, a plurality of drums (rotating drum or The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine that rotates a reel.

In the embodiment, the game area 5a is formed by three game zones. However, the game area 5a may be constituted by two game zones or a single game area 5a.
In the embodiment, the ball rolling member 4845 has been described as a part of the sorting device 4843. However, the ball rolling member 4845 rolls the game ball in a state that is visible to the player in the game area 5a. If it is a thing, it will not be limited to the distribution apparatus 4843.

1 ... Pachinko machine (game machine)
5a ... Game area 4845 ... Ball rolling member 4849 ... Bottom wall part 4850 ... Peripheral wall part 4852 ... Ball guiding part

Claims (1)

A gaming machine comprising a ball rolling member that rolls a game ball in a game area that is visible to the player,
The ball rolling member is
A spherical flow path having an annular shape or an arc shape so that a centrifugal force directed to the peripheral wall portion side is applied to a game ball rolling on the bottom wall portion and having at least a bottom wall portion and a peripheral wall portion;
A ball guiding portion that is provided in the ball flow path and contacts the lower side of the center of the game ball that rolls on the bottom wall portion and can guide the game ball to a position slightly away from the peripheral wall portion; A gaming machine characterized by

Images